The URL can be used to link to this page

17D-012 Renovation 2004 ,r, ''fie. Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 401k 7. Hardware: 3 spring hinges, satin chrome push plate on inside of door with accessible pull on outside. 8. Sill: Flush aluminum checker plate landing sills, width of frame, drilled for recessed screw head fastening. 9. Emergency Equipment: Provide manufacturer's standard battery operation and emergency lowering device to lower platform to ground floor landing in event of power failure. 10. Glazed port hoistway doors sufficient for observation that car is at landing. 2.3 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for hoistway installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. I. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Alignment: Coordinate hoistway doors with lift travel and car positioning for accurate alignment and minimum clearance between car, hoistway doors, sills, and door frame at each landing. C. Adjust car stops for accurate leveling of car at each landing, within specified tolerances. D. Lubricate operating parts of lift, including guide rails, door tracks,and hardware. 3.3 DEMONSTRATION A. Test-operate platform lift continuously between lowest and highest landings served, hoisting full-rated capacity load for a minimum of 10 minutes. Readjust car stops and other devices and signal equipment as needed for accurate landings and operation of system after completing test. B. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to operate,adjust, and maintain lift. Refer to Division I Section "Demonstration and Training." END OF SECTION 14240 PLATFORM LIFT 14240 - 5 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 4. Machine Mounts: Provide vibration-isolation units for mounting lift machines. C. Control System: Provide manufacturer's standard, fully automatic, call-and-send control system that responds to momentary push-button signals at each landing and as follows: I. Car shall not respond to station calls for service while in transit, for a predetermined time after arrival at a landing, and when doors are open. 2. Provide on-off key switch, constant pressure directional push buttons, emergency stop switch and audible emergency signaling device, located in car. 3. Manufacturer's standard signal equipment at each landing push-button station; include call button, send button for each landing served, and illuminated "car-in-use" pilot light. Landing stations wall mount recessed, or set flush in face of door jamb, with surface-mounted, stainless-steel face plate. 4. When key switch in car is on, landing signal controls shall be inoperative. D. Leveling Tolerance: Provide 2-way automatic leveling with 1/4-inch leveling tolerance, regardless of load or direction of travel. E. Provide the following materials and finishes where indicated for exposed parts of lift car enclosures, car doors, hoistway doors and frames,and signal equipment: I. Stainless-Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No. 6, nondirectional,dull satin finish. 2. Enameled Steel Sheet: Tower enclosure panels: Cold-rolled steel sheet, ASTM A 366/A 366M, or hot-rolled steel sheet, ASTM A 569/A 569M, with factory-applied enamel finish; colors as selected by Architect. 3. Plastic-Laminate Panels: NEMA LD 3, and Type HGS for flat applications on particleboard 1/2 inch thick. a. Provide particleboard that does not contain urea formaldehyde. b. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of available colors. F. Car Construction, General: Provide manufacturer's standard car construction of formed, reinforced, and sound-deadened steel sheet with welded joints. I. Exposed Car Finish: Stainless steel and plastic laminate panels. 2. Provide grab rails on sides of platform guard to meet ADA requirements. G. Hoistway Doors and Frames: Provide manufacturer's flush hollow-metal door and frame units complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing at atmospheric pressure according to NFPA 252. I. Flush inside shaft: Provide frames of depth and profile required to coordinate with hoistway wall construction, providing finished door and frame flush with the hoistway sill and flush with the wall above and below the door. 2. Hoistway Doors: Side-hinged doors, 36 inch width by 6'-8 min height, aligned with car platform. 3. Door Operation: Self closing,with electro-mechanical door interlocks. a. Door interlocks: Provide electro-mechanical door interlocks, approved by the Massachu- setts Board of Elevator Regulations or a recognized testing laboratory, in accordance with procedures in UL 104. 4. Door and frame finish: Enameled steel. S. Rating: One and one-half hours (in two hour rated shaft enclosure). 6. Vision panel: 3 by 33 inch with wired glass. PLATFORM LIFT 14240 -4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. look A. General Warranty: The elevator lift warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by manufacturer agreeing to repair, restore, or replace defective elevator work within specified warranty period. I• Warranty Period: 12 months from date of Substantial Completion of project. 2. Note that Substantial Completion of project, and the start of the warranty period, may be a date after the completion of the elevator work. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion of project, provide one years' full maintenance service by skilled employees of lift Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper lift operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for the vertical platform lift system is based on the products of Garaventa. B. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or an approved comparable product. Manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following I. Access Industries, Porch Lift. 2. Garaventa, Genesis Model. 3. Inclinator Elevator, Model VL. 2.2 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard preengineered lifts. All equipment and material provided shall be open market, non-proprietary products, serviceable and maintainable in the project area by any qualified elevator maintenance provider capable of maintaining apparatus of similar design and complexity. Where not otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's products as indicated in published product literature and as required for complete lift systems. B. Systems and Machinery: I. Self-Supporting Structure: Units with structural-steel, self-supporting hoistway framing that requires vertical-load support only at base and lateral support only at landing levels. 2. Furnish anchorage devices required for installing structural members, guide rails, machines, and #01k other components of lift work. 3. Brackets: Attachments required for fastening guide-rail brackets and other lift components to building frame. PLATFORM LIFT 14240- 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, controls, and finishes for lifts. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. I. Size: 3-inch-square Samples of sheet materials and 4-inch lengths of running trim members. E. VOC Submittals: I. Manufacturer's product data for adhesives, particleboard or other finishes used indicating VOC and urea-formaldehyde content. F. Product Certificates: For each type of lift, signed by product manufacturer. G. Qualification Data: For Installer. H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lifts to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. I. In addition to items specified in Division I Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include diagnostic and repair information available to manufacturer's and Installer's maintenance personnel. I. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by authorities having jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted elevator lift use. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Lift manufacturer or a qualified installer approved by lift manufacturer. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1, latest edition with amendments, and Massachusetts State Elevator Code. C. Accessibility Requirements: In addition to local governing regulations, comply with Section 4.10 in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA),Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG)." D. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Door and frame assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire- protection ratings indicated. E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA use. 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended 1.7 WARRANTY PLATFORM LIFT 14240- 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 14240- PLATFORM LIFT PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes power-operated vertical platform lift and self-supporting lift structures. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 3 Section "Miscellaneous Concrete"for pit slab and anchorage. 2. Division 9 Section Resilient Flooring for flooring installed on platform lift. 3. Division 9 Section Painting for field painting of hoistway entrances and interior and exterior of hoistway. 4. Division 15 Section HVAC for shaft ventilation. 5. Division 16 Section Electrical for electrical service to lift, including disconnect switches, and smoke detectors. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Manufacturer: Garaventa B. Model: Genesis Shaftway Vertical Lift. C. Capacity: 750 pounds. D. Speed: approx. 18 feet per minute. E. Car Platform Size: 38 inches wide by 54 inches deep, clear inside platform dimensions. F. Vertical Travel Distance: approximately 10 feet. G. Pit: recessed below ground level for platform access flush with finished floor at both landings. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Defective Elevator Work: Operation or control system failures; performances below specified ratings; excessive wear; unusual deterioration or aging of materials or finishes; unsafe conditions; the need for excessive maintenance; abnormal noise or vibration; and similar unusual, unexpected, and unsatisfactory conditions. PLATFORM LIFT 14240- 1 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. opk I. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not less than 24 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for I-inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips. E. Countertop Installation: Provide mitered seams at interior corners. Spline and glue joints in countertops and provide concealed mechanical clamping of joint. Fasten plastic laminate countertops by screwing through corner blocks in base units into underside of countertop. I. Install sidesplashes first. 2. Provide a full bead of sealant over all concealed surfaces that will contact the adjacent wall surfaces. Slide the sidesplash into place so that the sealant directly contacts and fully wets joint substrates. 3. Provide a full bead of sealant over the backsplash and the countertop end that will contact the adjacent sidesplash. Slide the countertop into place so that the sealant directly contacts the sidesplash. 4. After countertop and sidesplash is set in place, provide a full bead of caulk at the interior corner between the back-and-side splash and the wall surface. F. Install plastic-laminate/ particleboard unit so that fasteners are hidden by cabinets and countertops. Exposed fasteners will not be accepted. G. Fasten solid-surfacing-material countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Align adjacent surfaces, and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. Provide bead of caulk at backside of top of back and sidesplashes prior to setting countertop. 3.2 PEST CONTROL A. Prior to cabinet installation: I. Sprinkle I tablespoon of boric acid per 2 square foot area under base cabinets. a. Sprinkle I tablespoon of boric acid per 2 square foot area on top of wall cabinets, if top is against dropped soffit framing. 2. Apply a gel type roach control, "MaxForce" by Clorox, to concealed rear surface of base and wall cabinets. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust casework and hardware so doors and drawers are centered in openings and operate smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer. B. Clean casework on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION KITCHEN AND BATHROOM CASEWORK 12350- 8 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. D. Medium-Density Fiberboard: Comply with ANSI A208.2, not less than 3/4 inch thick. E. Plastic Laminate Substrate for Countertop with Sink: Exterior grade plywood or phenolic resin particleboard complying with ASTM D 1037. I. Build up countertop thickness to 1-1/2 inches at front, back, and ends with additional layers of particleboard laminated to top. F. Backer Sheet: Provide BK 20 backer sheet wherever the unsupported countertop area exceeds 4 sq.ft.and substrate is 3/4 inch thick; 6 sq. ft. and substrate is I inch thick; 8 sq. ft. and substrate is 1-1/8 inch or thicker. G. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front style,cove,and backsplash style: I. Front Style: Radiused 180 degree. 2. Backsplash Style: Continuous one piece radiused sanitary base design,with back scribe extension. 3. Cove: One-piece postformed laminate supported at junction of top and backsplash by wood cove molding 4. Sidesplash Style: Square edge loose, scribed to counter. S. Provide loose sidesplashes in all locations. Sidesplashes to be configured to fit neatly with and align to top of integral backsplash. H. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet on underside of countertop substrate. 2.9 PLASTIC-LAMINATE AT WALLS A. Provide,where indicated on the drawings back and side wall splashes in kitchens between countertop and wall cabinets. Material shall be plastic laminate glued to particle board substrate. At fire rated partitions, apply particleboard over gypsum wallboard or plaster wall surface. B. Materials: I. Plastic-Laminate: NEMA LID 3. Matte Finish. 2. Plastic-Laminate Substrate: Particleboard not less than 1/2 thick. C. Fabrication: Fabricate in shop. Adhere plastic laminate to particleboard with adhesive recommended by manufacturer. Use veneer press or clamps to provide pressure until adhesive has set. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install casework with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces; use concealed shims. Where casework abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Provide filler strips, scribe strips,and moldings in finish to match casework face. B. Install casework without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings and are aligned. Complete installation of hardware and accessories as indicated. C. Install casework and countertop level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet. D. Fasten cabinets to adjacent units and to backing. KITCHEN AND BATHROOM CASEWORK 12350- 7 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 2. Support: Site applied wood cleats (non-adjustable). Spacing of cleats as directed in field by Architect. 3. Quantity: Five 12" deep removable shelves. N. 'Lazy Susan' shelves: 1/2-inch-thick exterior hardwood plywood with wood banded exposed (front) edges. Let into dadoes of end and side panels as fixed shelves. O. Corner Blocks: Solid wood, glued and fastened in each top corner to maintain casework squareness and rigidity. P. Joinery: Rabbet backs flush into end panels and secure with concealed mechanical fasteners. Connect tops and bottoms of wall cabinets and bottoms and stretchers of base cabinets to ends and dividers with mechanical fasteners. Rabbet tops, bottoms,and backs into end panels. Glue all joints. Q. Factory Finishing: To greatest extent possible, finish casework at factory. Defer only final touchup until after installation. I. Finish with stain, sealer and minimum two top coats finish. 2. Sand between coats so that final finish is smooth to the touch. 3. Provide color selection made by Architect from full range of manufacturer's finishes available. 2.7 BF UNIT ADDITIONAL CABINETWORK A. BF Unit Pull-out Trays: I. Materials: a. Subfronts, Sides, and Backs: 1 1/16" Grade C solid lumber. b. Bottoms: 1/4"thick hardwood exterior plywood set into rabbets in back,sides and front. C. Tray Slides: Heavy duty drawer slides with a minimum capacity of 100 lb, epoxy coated cold rolled steel, side-mounted, drawer-glide suspension with solid stud acetal roller, captive in one channel member. Provide lift-out disconnect, self-closing feature, positive stop and positive lock-out feature. 2. Location:At all base cabinets in barrier free units. B. BF Unit Cutting Board: I. Materials: 7/8"thick hardwood with integral finger pull. 2. Fabrication: Screw wood or plywood cleats on inside of drawer sides so that cutting board sits flush with top of drawer sides. 3. Location: At drawer in base cabinet adjacent to wall oven in barrier free units. 2.8 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS A. General: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LID 3. I. Grade: HGP, postforming type, 1.0 mm nominal thickness. 2. Finish: Increased abrasion resistant finish. 3. Basis of Design: Wilsonart's `Crystal'finish. B. Plastic Laminate Substrate: Comply with ASTM D 1037. C. Particleboard: Comply with ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue, 45-lb density, not less than 3/4 inch thick. KITCHEN AND BATHROOM CASEWORK 12350- 6 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 2. Breakaway Construction: Under excessive load, rollers will snap out of track without causing permanent damage. Guides function after removal and replacement of drawers. 2.6 CABINET CONSTRUCTION A. Face Style: Reverse bevel reveal overlay; door and drawer faces partially cover cabinet body members or face frames with only enough space between faces for operating clearance. Reverse bevel forms a continuous fingerpull on all sides. Edges filled and sanded prior to finishing. B. Face Frames: 3/4-by-I-3/4-inch solid wood rails and 3/4-by-I-1/2-inch min. solid wood stiles with glued mortise and tenon or doweled joints. Stiles and top and bottom rails shall be dadoed to receive ends, bottoms and tops. C. Door Fronts: 3/4"thick, solid wood slab with routed panel face. D. Exposed Cabinet Ends and Sides: Veneer-faced plywood to match face frame. E. Cabinet Ends: 1/2-inch- thick 5-ply hardwood plywood. Ends rabbeted to receive tops, bottoms and shelves. F. Cabinet Tops and Bottoms: 1/2-inch- thick plywood, fully supported by and secured in rabbets in end panels,front frame,and back rail. G. Base Unit and Wall-Hung Unit Back Panels: 1/4-inch-thick 2-2 Grade exterior hardwood plywood fastened to rear edge of end panels and to top and bottom rails. H. Installation Cleats: 1. Wall cabinets: 3/,-inch by 3-1/2 inch cleats running full length of cabinet at top and bottom. 2. Base cabinets: 3/,-inch by 7-1/2 inch cleat running full length of cabinet at top and 3/a-inch by 3-1/2 inch cleat at bottom. I. Toe Kick: 3/4-inch by 4-1/2 inch pressure treated solid wood inset 3-inches with concealed angle block cleats securing wood from being kicked in. J. Front Frame Drawer Rails: 3/4-by-I-1/4-inch solid wood mortised and fastened into face frame. K. Drawers: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body. I. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical fasteners or with glued dovetail joints. 2. Subfronts, Backs, and Sides: 3/4-inch-thick solid wood. 3. Bottoms: 1/4-inch-thick plywood let into sides,front and back components. 4. Additional fastening for drawers: Screw sides into subfronts with 2 screws, minimum, each side. S. Additional fastening at false sink drawers: Screw into face frame from inside of sink base; 4 screws minimum. Contractor shall provide and site install. L. Shelves: 1/2-inch- thick plywood with wood banded exposed (front) edge. Let into dadoes of end panels and brace behind mulls. M. Utility cabinets shelves: I. Materials: 3/4-inch-thick exterior hardwood plywood with wood banded exposed (front) edge. KITCHEN AND BATHROOM CASEWORK 12350- 5 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 4. Particleboard: Straw-based particleboard complying with requirements of ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, except for density. B. Exposed Materials: Comply with the following: I. Exposed Wood Species: As follows. Do not use two adjacent exposed faces that are noticeably dissimilar in color,grain,figure, or natural character markings. a. Birch. 2. Solid Wood: Clear hardwood lumber of species indicated, free of defects, selected for compatible grain and color, and kiln dried to 7 percent moisture content. 3. Plywood: Hardwood plywood complying with HPVA HP-I with face veneer of species indicated, selected for compatible color and grain with Grade A faces and Grade C backs of same species as faces. a. Edge band exposed edges with minimum 1/8-inch- thick, solid-wood edging of same species as face veneer. C. Concealed Materials: Comply with the following: I. Solid Wood or Plywood: Any hardwood or softwood species, with no defects affecting strength or utility. Hardwood and softwood lumber kiln dried to 7 and 10 percent moisture content, respectively. 2.4 COUNTERTOP MATERIALS A. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3. I. Grade: HGP. 2. Grade for Backer Sheet: BKL. B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. C. Plywood: Exterior phenolic resin softwood plywood complying with PS I, Grade C-C Plugged, touch sanded. 2.5 CASEWORK HARDWARE A. General: Manufacturer's standard units complying with BHMA A156.9, of type, material, size, and finish as selected from manufacturer's standard choices. B. Hinges: Semi concealed (wraparound) heavy duty barrel hinges for overlay doors which allow doors to open 180 degrees without damaging hinges. C. Door and Drawer Silencers: Provide 1/8" foam cushion stops at all doors and drawers. Provide 2 per door and 4 per drawer. D. Drawer& Door Pulls: 4-inch long x I-'/,-inch deep wire pull. Provide at Barrier Free units only. E. Drawer Guides: Twin track, side mounted, galvanized, heavy duty three-quarter extension self-closing drawer guides; designed to prevent rebound when drawers are closed; with nylon-tired, ball-bearing rollers; and complying with BHMA A 156.9, Type B05091. I. Load Capacity: 100 lbs. minimum tested dynamic. KITCHEN AND BATHROOM CASEWORK 12350-4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A. Coordinate layout and installation of blocking and reinforcement in partitions for support of kitchen casework. B. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes. 1.8 EXTRA STOCK A. At the end of the project, provide the following extra stock to the Owner: I. Drawer Slides: 10. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design is based on the products of Crotone Kitchens, HUD Severe Use specification, with additional upcharge features. B. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or an approved comparable product. Manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following I. Cabinets: a. Armstrong, Extreme Series Opk b. Crotone Kitchens, Metro HUD Severe Use C. Southeast Millwork and Casework 2. Plastic Laminate for Countertops: a. Formica Corp. b. Laminart. C. Nevamar Corp. d. Pioneer Plastics Corp. e. Westinghouse Electric Corp.; Specialty Products Div. f. Wilson: Ralph Wilson Plastics Co. 2.2 COLORS, TEXTURES,AND PATTERNS A. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for these characteristics. 2.3 CABINET MATERIALS A. General: I. Certified Wood Materials: Provide cabinets made from wood and wood-based materials that are produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC 1.2, "Principles and Criteria." 2. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. 3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. a. Recycled Content: Not less than 10 percent pre-consumer recycled content. KITCHEN AND BATHROOM CASEWORK 12350- 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A"k I• Wood-veneered panels with transparent finish, 8 by 10 inches, for each species. 2. Solid wood with transparent finish, 50 sq. in.(300 sq.cm), for each species. 3. One unit of each type of exposed and concealed hardware. E. Samples for Verification: As follows: I. One full-size, finished base cabinet complete with hardware, doors, and drawers, but without countertop. 2. One full-size,finished wall cabinet complete with hardware, doors, and shelves. 3. One full-size plastic-laminate countertop,with backsplash, 8 by 10 inches, in configuration specified. F. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturer of casework certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Cabinets: Obtain cabinets through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Product Designations: Drawings indicate size, configurations, and finish material of casework by referencing designated manufacturer's catalog numbers. Other manufacturers' casework of similar sizes, similar door and drawer configurations, same finish material, and complying with the Specifications may be considered. Refer to Division I Section "Substitutions." C. Quality Standards: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the following standards: I. Cabinets: KCMA A 161.1. a. KCMA Certification: Provide cabinets with KCMA's "Certified Cabinet" seal affixed in a semiexposed location of each unit and showing compliance with the above standard. 2. Plastic-Laminate Countertops: KCMA A 161.2. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install kitchen casework until building is enclosed, wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Established Dimensions: Where kitchen casework is indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where casework is to fit. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. Provide fillers and scribes to allow for trimming and fitting. C. Field Measurements for Countertops: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements after base cabinets are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. I. Where kitchen casework is indicated to fit to existing construction, verify dimensions of existing construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. D. Provide sufficient fillers and scribes to allow for proper clearance and trimming and fitting, whether or not A"" specifically indicated on drawings. 1.7 COORDINATION KITCHEN AND BATHROOM CASEWORK 12350- 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 12356 - KITCHEN AND BATHROOM CASEWORK PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I. Wood-faced kitchen cabinets. 2. Wood-faced vanity cabinets. 3. Plastic-laminate countertops. 4. Plastic laminate wall backsplash. 5. Concealed pest control treatment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants"for sealants. 2. Division I I Section "Residential Appliances"for appliances mounted in kitchen casework. 3. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures"for separate sink units mounted in countertops. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Exposed Surfaces of Casework: Surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed, including visible surfaces in open cabinets or behind glass doors. B. Semiexposed Surfaces of Casework: Surfaces behind opaque doors or drawer fronts, including interior faces of doors and interiors and sides of drawers. Bottoms of wall cabinets are defined as "semiexposed." C. Concealed Surfaces of Casework: Surfaces not usually visible after installation, including sleepers, web frames, dust panels, bottoms of drawers, and ends of cabinets installed directly against and completely concealed by walls or other cabinets. Tops of wall cabinets and utility cabinets are defined as "concealed." 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: I. Cabinets. 2. Cabinet hardware. 3. Plastic-laminate countertops. B. Shop Drawings: For cabinets and countertops. Include plans, elevations, details, and attachments to other work. Show materials, finishes, filler panels, hardware, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining countertops, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors,textures, and patterns available for each type of material exposed to view. D. Samples for Verification: For the following materials; in sets showing the full range of color, texture,and pattern variations expected: KITCHEN AND BATHROOM CASEWORK 12350- 1 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. a. Controls: Solid-state, electronic,touch type. b. Clock Type: Electronic Digital . 5. Standard features include the following: a. Interior oven light. b. Two removable, tilt-proof, chrome-plated,self-locking oven racks. C. Two-piece, porcelain-enamel broiler pan. E. Range Hood: Where indicated, provide exhaust hoods complying with the following: I. Products: a. Broan Vented Range Hood 2. Type: 30 inch or 36-inch as indicated above, wall-mounted undercabinet, ventilating (convertible) range hood. 3. Exhaust Fan: Variable-speed 200 cfm rated fan exhausts vertically or horizontally 4. Sones: 5.5 maximum at vertical discharge. 5. Fan Control: Variable-speed rotary-dial switch . 6. Duct Type: 3-1/4-by-I 0-inch rectangular. 7. Finish: Baked enamel. a. Color: White, 8. Standard features include the following: a. Permanent washable filter. b. Built-in lighting. F. Garbage Disposals: Where indicated, provide disposals complying with the following: I. Products: Available products include the following:: a. Insinkerator`Badger"#1 2. Type: Continuous feed, with on/off wall switch control. 3. Motor: 1/3 hp, 120v, 1725 rpm. 4. Warranty: I year on site parts and labor. 5. Standard features include the following: a. Galvanized steel grinding elements with stainless steel swivel lugs. b. Permanently lubricated upper and lower bearings. C. Manual reset overload. END OF SECTION 11451 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11451 5 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. C. Remove packing material from residential appliances and leave units in clean condition, ready for operation. 3.4 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCE SCHEDULE A. Barrier Free Apartment Units: I. (1) 30 inch vented Range Hood—Broan 76000 2. (1) GE JP326WV 30 inch electric Cook Top 3. (1) GE JRP 15WW 24 inch self cleaning Electric Wall Oven B. Standard Apartment Units: I. (1) 30 inch vented Range Hood—Broan 76000 2. (1) In-Sink-Erator- Badger#1 - Garbage Disposal. C. Electric Cooktop: Where this designation is indicated, provide electric cooktops complying with the following: I. Products: Available products include the following: a. General Electric Built In Electric Cooktop 2. Type: 30-inch or 36-inch as indicated above, hinged, tilt-up built-in, porcelain-enamel, a countertop-mounted, electric cooking surface with four surface-burner elements, infinitely adjustable controls, and burner"ON" indicator lights. a. Burner Types: Two 8-inch (2100-W maximum) and two 6-inch (1500-W maximum), plug-in, coil-burner elements. I) Burner Trim: Provide each burner with a removable chrome-plated or porcelain- enamel drip pan and chrome-plated trim ring. b. Burner Controls: Rotary-dial type with removable knobs. 3. Color: White . D. Electric Wall Oven: Where this designation is indicated, provide electric wall ovens complying with the following: I. Products: Available products include the following: a. General Electric self cleaning single oven electric built in wall ovens 2. Type: Built-in, single, self-cleaning, electric, wall oven/broiler unit with porcelain-enamel interior, for installation in a 24-inch- or 27-inch-wide cabinet as indicated above. 3. Oven Door: Counterbalanced, removable, white-glass oven door, with observation window . Provide towel-bar-type handle. a. Color: White. 00W 4. Control Panel: Porcelain-enamel oven control panel located above oven door, containing automatic oven controls , oven timer,and clock. RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11451 -4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 2.2 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES A. Electric Range: Freestanding electric range with four-burner cooktop and oven with broiler, listed by UL,and complying with requirements specified in the Residential Appliance Schedule. B. Electric Cooktop: Built-in, countertop-mounted, electric cooktop with four burner elements, listed by UL and complying with requirements specified in the Residential Appliance Schedule. C. Electric Wall Oven: Built-in, electric wall oven with broiler unit, listed by UL, and complying with requirements specified in the Residential Appliance Schedule. D. Exhaust Hood: Wall-mounted, undercabinet exhaust hood, listed by UL, and complying with requirements specified in the Residential Appliance Schedule. E. Garbage Disposal: 1/3 hp continuous feed, listed by UL, and complying with requirements specified in the Residential Appliance Schedule. 2.3 FINISHES A. Porcelain-Enamel Finish: Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied porcelain-enamel finish over cleaned and pretreated steel sheet. If no color is indicated, provide white. PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in for plumbing, mechanical, and electrical services, with Installer present, to verify actual locations of services before residential appliance installation. I. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and rough openings are completely concealed. C. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment. D. Utilities: Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 for plumbing and electrical requirements. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Test each item of residential appliances to verify proper operation. Make necessary adjustments. B. Verify that accessories required have been furnished and installed. RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11451 - 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. F. Energy Ratings: Provide residential appliances that carry labels indicating energy-cost analysis (estimated annual operating costs) and efficiency information as required by the Federal Trade Commission. I. Provide appliances that qualify for the EPA/DOE ENERGY STAR product labeling program. If model listed is not Energy Star rated or is no longer available, provide ENERGY STAR compliant model most closely matching model listed. G. Regulatory Requirements, Accessibility: Where residential appliances are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG).", ANSI A 1 17.1., FED-STD-795, "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards", and Massachusetts Architectural Access Board Regulations. I. Operable Parts: Provide controls with forward reach no higher than 48 inches above the floor, horizontal front reach no more than 25 inches, horizontal side reach no more than 24 inches, and that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 Ibf. 2. Cooktop: Provide knee clearance for forward approach of 27 inches high, 30 inches wide, and I I inches horizontally; toe space clearance of 9 inches high and 17 inches horizontally; with insulated underside of cooktop to prevent burns, shocks, or abrasions. Provide top surface 34 inches above the floor,with controls that do not require reaching across burners. 3. Disposals: Provide operating switch within reach on front of sink counter apron. 1.5 DELIVERY A. Deliver appliances only after utility rough-in is complete and construction in the spaces to receive appliances is substantially complete and ready for installation. 1.6 WARRANTIES A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranties: Written warranties, executed by manufacturer of each appliance specified agreeing to repair or replace residential appliances or components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. I. Electric Ranges and cooktops: Five-year limited warranty for in-home service on surface-burner elements. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, appliances that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those indicated in the Residential Appliance Schedule at the end of Part 3. RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11451 - 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. ,00'' SECTION 11451 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Cooking equipment, including cooktops and wall ovens. 2. Range hoods. 3. Garbage disposals. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures"for kitchen sinks,and connections. 2. Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables" for services and connections to residential appliances. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each appliance type required indicating compliance with requirements. Include complete operating and maintenance instructions for each appliance. B. Appliance Schedule: Submit schedule of appliances, using the same room designations shown on Drawings. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized representative of the residential appliance manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of appliances required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain residential appliances through one source from a single manufacturer. I. To the greatest extent possible, provide appliances by a single manufacturer for entire Project. C. Product Options: Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of residential appliances and are based on the specific types and models indicated. Other manufacturers' appliances with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division I Section "Substitutions." D. Electrical Appliances: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electrical components required as part of residential appliances that are listed and labeled by UL and that comply with applicable NEMA standards. RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11451 - I Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. (1) Soap dish 2. (1) Toothbrush holder 3. (1)Toilet tissue dispenser 4. (2) Robe hooks S. (1) 30"towel bar 6. (1) 18"towel bar 7. (1) Shower curtain rod 8. (1) 42"grab bar 9. (1) 36"grab bar 10. (1) 24"/42"'L' shaped grab bar (at shower). 11. (2) Medicine cabinets. 12. (1) Shower Curtain w/shower hooks D. Public Barrier Free Unisex Bathrooms I. (1) Soap dispenser 2. (1)Toilet tissue dispenser 3. (2) Coat hooks 4. (1) Mirror 5. (1)42"grab bar 6. (1) 36"grab bar 7. (1) Folded paper towel dispenser 8. (1)Waste receptacle END OF SECTION 10800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800-7 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 2. Construction: Fabricate frame from minimum nominal 0.0375-inch- thick stainless steel, with all joints mitered, welded, and ground smooth and constructed so frame tapers not less than 3 inches from top to bottom. K. Soap Dispenser: I. Liquid Soap Dispenser, Horizontal-Tank Type: Surface-mounted type, minimum 40-oz. capacity tank with stainless-steel piston, springs, and internal parts designed to dispense soap in measured quantity by pump action; and stainless-steel cover with unbreakable window-type refill indicator. a. Soap Valve: Designed for dispensing soap in liquid form L. Towel Dispenser: I. Material: Stainless steel. 2. Surface-Mounted Type: Sized for minimum of 300 C-fold or 400 multifold paper towels without using special adapters; with hinged front equipped with tumbler lockset; and with refill indicators that are pierced slots at sides or front. M. Waste Receptacle: I. Material: Stainless steel. 2. Surface-Mounted Type: With seamless exposed walls; continuously welded bottom pan; and minimum 20-gal. capacity, reusable,vinyl liner secured at not less than four points with grommets and hooks. 3.4 TOILET ACCESSORY SCHEDULE A. Proprietary Products: Provide following Bradley model numbers: I. Toilet tissue dispenser-#5084 2. Shower curtain rod-#953 (1-114" o.d. x length) 3. Towel bar-#908 x length 4. Robe hook-#9118 5. Toothbrush holder-#SA 26 6. Soap dish -#SA 22 7. Grab bar-#812-2 x length required 8. Medicine Cabinet at Typical Units: #966-11 9. Medicine Cabinet at Barrier Free Units: Basco #377P-W 10. Shower Curtain: Comfort Designs' 'Hydrodam'. B. Typical Units: 1. (1) Soap dish 2. (1)Toothbrush holder 3. (1)Toilet tissue dispenser 4. (2) Robe hook 5. (3) 24"towel bars (one at tub end). 6. (1) Shower curtain rod 7. (1) Medicine Cabinet. " C. Barrier Free Units TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800-6 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 2. Spindle: Chrome plated brass (note: no plastic spindles shall be allowed); mounting bracket fabricated of type 304 (18-8), 18 gauge stainless steel. 3. Capacity: One standard core toilet tissue roll. 4. Operation: Concealed spring permits spindle to telescope for servicing. Spindle turns freely for non-controlled delivery. 5. Mounting: Surface mounted, into blocking. C. Shower Curtain Rod, Heavy Duty: I. Construction: 18-gage (.040-inch) stainless steel, satin finish tubing; furnish with 3 inch O.D., minimum 20-gage stainless steel flanges with satin finish, 2. Diameter: 1-1/4" inch O.D., 3. Mounting: Exposed fasteners (#10x2-1/2" Phillips oval head stainless steel sheet metal screw). D. Towel Bar: Satin-finished Type 304 stainless steel, I" diameter, 18 gauge tube and end brackets for exposed mounting. Stainless steel set screw to keep bar from turning. E. Robe Hook: Heavy-duty forged brass with bright chrome finish; wall bracket with 3 mounting holes for exposed mounting. F. Toothbrush Holder: Type 304 (18-8), 7 gauge stainless steel with exposed surfaces in architectural satin finish. Formed from single piece of stainless steel. Holds 4 toothbrushes. Installed with 1/4"-20 x I- 1/2" L torx head stainless steel screws. G. Soap Dish: Type 304 (18-8), 7 gauge, satin finish stainless steel with three holes for drainage. Installed with 1/4"-20 x 1-1/2" L torx head stainless steel screws. H. Medicine Cabinets: 1. Construction: 20 gauge steel cabinet and door; steel shelves (non-adjustable). 2. Door: Reversible. Full length piano hinge; built-in door stop; protective door bumpers; magnetic catch. 3. Shelf Brackets: Fixed (Typical Units) 4. Mirror:Tempered float glass with full surround stainless steel frame with positive screw closure. S. Finish: Rust-resistant baked-on-enamel. 6. Mounting: Recessed. 7. Mirror Sizes: a. Typical Units: 14"wide x 20" high b. Barrier Free Units: 16"wide x 36" high 1. Shower Curtain: I. Material: Reinforced vinyl, 8 oz. per sq.yd., bacteria and mold resistant; stain resistant. 2. Corners: Formed to deflect water toward shower interior; dielectrically sealed. 3. Hold-downs: Rust-proof weights dietrically sealed into pocket at bottom; 3 velcro tabs at each side. 4. Hooks: Steel. S. Size: 15%wider than shower opening. a. Height: Must touch floor. J. Mirror Unit: I. Fixed-Tilt, Stainless-Steel-Framed Mirror Unit: TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800-5 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. B. Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units with tight seams and I oints, and exposed edges rolled.. C. Recessed Toilet Accessories: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units of all-welded construction, without mitered corners. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, stainless-steel hinge. Provide anchorage that is fully concealed when unit is closed. D. Framed Glass-Mirror Units: Fabricate frames for glass-mirror units to accommodate glass edge protection material. Provide mirror backing and support system that permits rigid, tamper-resistant glass installation and prevents moisture accumulation. I. Provide galvanized steel backing sheet, not less than 0.034 inch (0.85 mm) and full mirror size, with nonabsorptive filler material. Corrugated cardboard is not an acceptable filler material. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 Ibf, when tested according to method in ASTM F 446. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function properly. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.3 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES A. Grab Bars: I. Stainless Steel Type: Type 304 (18-8), 18 gauge stainless steel; flanges of Type 304 (18-8), 11 gauge stainless steel; escutcheons of Type 304 (18-8), 22 gauge stainless steel. 2. Mounting: Concealed, manufacturer's standard flanges and anchorages. 3. Clearance: I-1/2-inch clearance between wall surface and inside face of bar. 4. Gripping Surfaces: Manufacturer's safety, nonslip texture. S. Heavy-Duty Size: Outside diameter of I-1 12-inches. B. Toilet Tissue Dispensers I. Construction: Posts fabricated of type 304 (I8-8), 22 gauge stainless steel with exposed surfaces in architectural satin finish; escutcheons fabricated on type 304 (18-8), 18 gauge stainless steel with exposed surfaces in architectural satin finish; TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800-4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide accessories by one of the following: I. Toilet and Bath Accessories: a. A&J Washroom Accessories, Inc. b. American Specialties, Inc. C. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. d. Bradley Corporation. e. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO). f. McKinney/Parker Washroom Accessories Corp. g. Bradley Corporation. 2. Basis of Design: Product numbers from Bradley Corporation. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No.4 finish (satin), in 22 gauge (0.034-inch)minimum nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. B. Brass: ASTM B 19, leaded and unleaded flat products; ASTM B 16 (ASTM B 16M), rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges;ASTM B 30, castings. C. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold rolled, commercial quality, 20 gauge, 0.040-inch (0.9-mm) minimum nominal thickness; surface preparation and metal pretreatment as required for applied finish. D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z 180). E. Chromium Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service), nickel plus chromium electrodeposited on base metal. F. Baked-Enamel Finish: Factory-applied, baked-acrylic-enamel coating. G. Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class I, Quality q2, nominal 6.0 mm thick, with silvering, electroplated copper coating, and protective organic coating complying with FS DD-M-41 I. Provide tempered glass. H. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. I. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, tamper and theft resistant when exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed. I. Tamper-Resistant Screws: Provide stainless steel tamper resistant screws. Provide "Pin Torx Tamper Resistant Screws" by CamCar Company, Folger Adams, or equivalent as approved by Architect. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Names or labels are not permitted on exposed faces of accessories. On interior surface not exposed to view or on back surface of each accessory, provide printed, waterproof label or stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer's name and product model number. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800-3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 0'' A. Source Limitations: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units exposed to view in same areas, unless otherwise approved by Architect. B. Product Options: Accessory requirements, including those for materials, finishes, dimensions, capacities, and performance, are established by specific products indicated in the Toilet and Bath Accessory Schedule. I. Products of other manufacturers with equal characteristics, as judged solely by Architect, may be provided. Where modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. See Division I Section "Contract Modification Procedures." 2. Do not modify aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. . 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by disabled persons, proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work. 1.6 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Manufacturer's Mirror Warranty: Written warranty, executed by mirror manufacturer agreeing to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects within minimum warranty period indicated. I. Minimum Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly identifying contents. I. (2) Toilet tissue dispensers 2. (2) Towel bars 3. (2) Robe hooks 4. (2) Toothbrush holders S. (2) Soap dishes 6. (6) Shelves for medicine cabinets. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800-2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 10800-TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Toilet tissue dispensers. 2. Shower curtain rods. 3. Towel bars. 4. Robe hooks. 5. Toothbrush holders. 6. Soap dishes. 7. Grab bars. 8. Medicine Cabinets. 9. Shower curtains. 10. Underlavatory ADA guards. I. Towel dispensers 12. Soap dispensers 13. Waste receptacles 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions and thicknesses, dimensions, profiles, fastening and mounting methods, specified options, and finishes for each type of accessory specified. B. Samples: For each accessory item to verify design, operation,and finish requirements. I. Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work. C. Setting Drawings: For cutouts required in other work; include templates, substrate preparation instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and installing anchoring devices. D. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. Use designations indicated in the Toilet and Bath Accessory Schedule and room designations indicated on Drawings in product schedule. E. Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division I. Provide lists of replacement parts and service recommendations. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800-1 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. OW I. Metal Protection: Where aluminum and copper alloys will contact grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturers of dissimilar metals. 2. Final acceptance depends on compliance with USPS requirements. B. Horizontal Apartment Mailboxes: Install horizontal apartment mailboxes with center of tenant-door lock cylinder not more than 67 inches above finished floor and bottom of lowest compartment not less than 28 inches above finished floor. I. Arrange compartments in groups, with not more than 35 and not less than 4 compartments operated by I master lock. 2. Install keyed-in door lock cylinders. 3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING,AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as postal specialties are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Adjust doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. C. On completion of postal specialty installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace postal specialties that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by postal specialty manufacturer. E. Replace postal specialties that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain postal specialties. Refer to Division I Section "Closeout Procedures" and "Demonstration and Training." END OF SECTION 10550 POSTAL SPECIALTIES 10550 - 7 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish postal specialties after assembly. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Powder-Coated Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, electrostatically apply manufacturer's standard baked-polymer finish consisting of a thermosetting polyester or acrylic urethane powder topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness. 2.9 STEEL FINISHES A. Unless otherwise indicated,finish steel surfaces exposed to view with powder-coated finish. B. Surface Preparation: Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC- SP 5/NACE No. I, "White Metal Blast Cleaning,"or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling." C. Powder-Coated Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, electrostatically apply manufacturer's standard baked-polymer finish consisting of a thermosetting polyester or acrylic urethane powder topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions,with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, roughing-in openings, clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of work. I. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work. B. Examine walls for suitable conditions where recessed units will be installed. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install postal specialties level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions and roughing-in drawings. POSTAL SPECIALTIES 10550- 6 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Key Keepers: Consisting of single compartment with door size not less than 4-3/4 inches wide by 2-1/4 inches high by 1-1/2 inches deep. Exposed surfaces fabricated from same material and finish as adjacent apartment mailboxes. I. Mounting: Surface mounted. 2. Style: Compartment door set within face frame extending full width and height of unit, with no exposed frame. 3. Mail Delivery: USPS . 4. Door Lock: Door prepared to receive lock furnished by local postmaster. 5. Door Lock: 5-pin tumbler, cylinder cam lock capable of at least 1000 key changes;with 2 keys. 6. Key Retractor: Provide retractable reel and 20-inch- long chain. C. Key Cabinets: Wall-mounted, metallic-coated steel cabinet with pivoting, key-holding panels and side- hinged door equipped with five-pin tumbler, cylinder door lock and concealed, full-length flush hinge. Finish cabinet, panels, and door with baked-enamel finish. Provide key control system consisting of key- holding hooks, labels, two sets of key tags with self-locking key holders, key-gathering envelopes, and temporary and permanent markers. I. Capacity: Keys for 150 percent of the number of apartment mailbox locks. 2. Cross-Index System: Consisting of index cards for recording key information. Include three receipt forms for each key-holding hook. D. Letter Drops: Consisting of I I-inch-wide by 3-1/2-inch- high, top-hinged, spring-loaded flap that pivots inward, held in place by I-inch-wide face frame. Fabricated from 1/4-inch-thick aluminum or steel,with exposed surfaces finished same as adjacent apartment mailboxes. I. Sleeve: Provide metallic-coated steel wall sleeve for full depth of wall. 2. Finished Frame: Provide finished face frame on back side of wall opening. 3. Identification: Engrave face of swinging flap with I-inch- high letters as follows: " OUTGOING MAIL ." 2.6 FABRICATION A. Preassemble postal specialties in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. Form postal specialties to required shapes and sizes, with true lines and angles, square, rigid, and without warp, with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges and corners free of sharp edges and burrs, and safe to touch. B. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water penetration. C. Drill or punch holes required for fasteners and remove burrs. Use security fasteners where fasteners are exposed. If used, seal external rivets before finishing. D. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in shop welding. Provide welds behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded joints of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces. E. Fabricate doors of postal specialties to preclude binding,warping, or misalignment. F. Where dissimilar metals will contact each other, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturers of dissimilar metals. POSTAL SPECIALTIES 10550- 5 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 6. Snap-on Trim: Fabricated from same material and finish as compartment doors. 7. Concealed Components and Mounting Frames: Aluminum or steel sheet. 8. Aluminum Finish: Finish surfaces exposed to view as follows: a. Anodic Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Directory: Surface-mounted, front-opening unit, with clear glass or plastic window. Fabricate frame from same material and finish as compartment doors and frames of horizontal apartment mailboxes, unless otherwise indicated. Provide name strips made of 1/4-inch- high label tape. 2.4 PARCEL LOCKERS A. Rear-Loading, Lobby Parcel Lockers : Consisting of multiple compartments enclosed within recessed wall box. Provide access to compartments for distributing incoming parcels from rear of unit with accessibility to entire group of compartments. Provide access to each compartment for removing parcels by swinging compartment door. I. Available Products: a. American Locker Security Systems, Subsidiary of American Locker Group, Inc.; 72-Inch Lobby Parcel Locker. b. Bommer Industries, Inc.; Model 563. C. Cutler Manufacturing Corporation; Eagle Series. 2. Mail Delivery: USPS . 3. Compartment Enclosure: Fabricated from aluminum sheet with number and size of compartments as indicated on Drawings. 4. Compartment Doors and Frames: Fabricated from extruded aluminum or aluminum sheet. Equip each compartment door with lock, identification, and concealed, full-length, spring-loaded, flush hinge on one side. a. Compartment Identification: Engraved into face of compartment door. b. Compartment Door Locks: Two-key security system in which control key provides access to parcel-locker key, and parcel-locker key opens compartment and is retained once compartment is opened. S. Rear-Loading Door: Side hinged, fabricated from same material and finish as front of unit; with full-length, stainless-steel piano hinge on one side and positive-latching mechanism on the other. Fabricate rear-loading door to remain open while parcel is deposited. a. Rear-Door Lock: Door prepared to receive lock furnished by local postmaster. 6. Aluminum Finish: Finish surfaces exposed to view as follows: a. Anodic Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide accessories fabricated by same manufacturer as apartment mailboxes. POSTAL SPECIALTIES 10550-4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, and as follows: I. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. 2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221. B. Steel Sheet: Cold rolled,ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation; or electrolytic zinc-coated steel sheet,ASTM A 591/A 591 M, Class C coating. D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, except containing no asbestos fibers. 2.3 HORIZONTAL APARTMENT MAILBOXES A. USPS-Approved, Rear-Loading, Horizontal Apartment Mailboxes Consisting of multiple compartments enclosed within recessed wall box. Provide access to compartments for distributing incoming mail from rear of unit with accessibility to entire group of compartments. Provide access to each compartment for removing mail by swinging compartment door. Comply with USPS STD-46. I. Available Products: 01W b. Auth-Florence Manufacturing Co.,A Florence Company; 1500 2600 Centurian Series. b. Bommer Industries, Inc.; 6300 Series. C. Cutler Manufacturing Corporation; Supreme Series. d. Jensen Industries; 90 Series. e. Meta-Lite, Inc.; Spad System. f. Salsbury Industries; 3600 Series. g. Security Manufacturing Corporation; 900 Series. 2. Mail Delivery: USPS . 3. Compartments: As indicated on Drawings, of the following sizes: a. Type A: Inside dimensions not less than 5 inches high by 6 inches wide by 15 inches deep. 4. Rear-Loading Door: Side hinged, fabricated from extruded aluminum, finished to match front of unit; with full-length, stainless-steel piano hinge on one side and positive-latching mechanism on the other. Fabricate rear-loading door to open not less than 90 degrees and to remain open while mail is deposited. a. Rear-Door Lock: Door prepared to receive lock furnished by local postmaster. S. Compartment Doors: Fabricated from aluminum sheet reinforced with vertical stiffeners. Equip each compartment door with lock,tenant identification, and concealed, full-length,flush hinge on one side. Provide one compartment with outgoing mail slot. a. Tenant Identification: Identification apartment number engraved into face of compartment door. b. Compartment Door Locks: 5-pin tumbler, cylinder spring-latch-type locks capable of at least 1000 key changes; with 2 keys for each compartment door. Key each compartment differently. POSTAL SPECIALTIES 10550- 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative of postal specialty manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain postal specialties through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of postal specialties and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division I Section "Product Requirements." I. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver lock keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service with a record of each corresponding lock and key number. B. Deliver combination-lock combinations to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service with a record of each corresponding lock and combination. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of recessed postal specialties with wall construction. B. Templates: Obtain and distribute to parties involved templates for installing postal specialties. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of postal specialties that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. I. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures. b. Faulty operation of hardware, except door locks. C. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes,and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: I. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. POSTAL SPECIALTIES 10550- 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 10550- POSTAL SPECIALTIES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I. Horizontal apartment mailboxes. 2. Parcel lockers. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 8 Section 'Door Hardware" for lock cylinders, keyed to building keying system, for postal specialties. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of postal specialty. B. Shop Drawings: For each type of postal specialty. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. I. Include identification sequence for compartments. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on 6-by-6-inch square Samples. E. Product Certificates: For each type of postal specialty required to comply with USPS regulations, signed by product manufacturer. I. Include written approval by Postmaster General. F. Qualification Data: For Installer. G. Maintenance Data: For postal specialties and finishes to include in maintenance manuals. H. Other Informational Submittals: Final USPS local postmaster approval for installed postal specialties to be served by USPS. POSTAL SPECIALTIES 10550- 1 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. END OF SECTION AWNINGS 10530- 4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2.2 FABRICS A. General: Provide fabrics inherently and permanently flame resistant or chemically flame resistant by immersion treatment to comply with requirements indicated. Provide fabrics from the same dye lot. B. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for these characteristics. C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: I. Fabric:vinyl resin coated polyester a. Finished fabric weight: minimum. 13 oz.per square yard b. Water repellent, mildew and ultraviolet resistant. C. Underside: same as top surface, both sides alike in appearance. d. Light transmission: opaque e. Painted numbers at each canopy. 2.3 AWNING FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate to tightly fit frame, following standards of Professional Awning Manufacturer's Association of the Industrial Fabrics Association International. B. Provide machine seams and hems,as required, maintaining full strength of material. C. Provide grommets, roping and fasteners as necessary for neat and concealed attachments to awning framework. 1. Provide miscellaneous fasteners, clips, hardware and replacement fittings as required to provide fully secure awning. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for structural supports, hardware, installation tolerances, clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of awnings. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Verify that fasteners penetrate into building structure at approved locations. 3.2 AWNING INSTALLATION A. Install awning system according to written instructions of Professional Awning Manufacturer's Association,where applicable. B. Fasten supporting framework securely in place, level and plumb with building structure. 00'` C. Fasten awning securely in place,without creases, sags or wrinkles. AWNINGS 10530- 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed installation of awnings similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide awnings with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Permanently attach label to each fabric of curtain assembly indicating whether fabric is inherently and permanently flame resistant, or treated with flame-retardant chemicals,and whether it will require retreatment after designated time period or cleaning. I. Flame-Resistance Ratings: Passes NFPA 701 and ASTM E-84, flame spread and smoke density is Class A or listed on CSFM certification. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify openings, attachments and dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace awnings that are defective in materials or workmanship, or that become unserviceable because of loss of color or strength from normal exposure conditions, including sunlight, mildew, rot and atmospheric chemicals. I. Warranty shall also include fabrication and installation that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective awnings. 2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial Completion: a. Five years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 AWNING FRAME A. General: Provide rigid support frame consisting of aluminum tubing with welded or slip fit mechanical joints. B. Aluminum tubing: ASTM B 210-02: Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes C. Fasteners: ASTM F 593-02: Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs and ASTM F 594-02: Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts. '* D. Welding: AWS D 1.2-97: Structural Welding Code -Aluminum. AWNINGS 10530- 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 10530-AWNINGS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I. Fixed awnings on rigid metal framework 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include types, styles, patterns, colors, materials, fasteners, rigging and maintenance recommendations. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, and detail sections of typical fastening and edge construction. Show rigging, fasteners, anchors, hardware, and other components not included in manufacturer's Product Data. I. Include schedule of lettering to be placed on each awning. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available, together with 12-inch- square sample (any color) of each type fabric. D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of awnings certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. Give name of flame-retardant chemical used, identification of applicator, treatment method, application date, allowable life span for treatment, and details of any restrictions and limitations. E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide awnings capable of withstanding the following wind loads at basic wind speed indicated: I. Deflection: Design framing system to limit lateral deflections to less than 1/175 of length or 3/4 inch,whichever is less, at design pressure based on structural computations. 2. Design Pressure: Calculated according to requirements of Mass State Building Code or the American Society of Civil Engineers' ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures,"6.4.2, "Analytical Procedure,"whichever are more stringent. AWNINGS 10530- 1 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Use liquid silicone adhesive recommended by the sign manufacturer to attach sign units to irregular, porous, or vinyl-covered surfaces. Use double-sided vinyl tape where recommended by the sign manufacturer to hold the sign in place until the adhesive has fully cured. 2. Shim Plate Mounting: Provide 1/8-inch-thick concealed aluminum shim plates with predrilled and countersunk holes, at locations where other mounting methods are not practicable. Attach the plate with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to the substrate. Attach panel sign units to the plate using the method specified above. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to the manufacturer's instructions. Protect units from damage until acceptance by the Owner. 3.3 SIGNAGE SCHEDULE To be developed. END OF SECTION 10425 SIGNS 10425 - 4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. C. Anchors and Inserts: Use nonferrous metal or hot-dipped galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work. 2.3 PANEL SIGNS A. Panel Signs: Comply with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs, shapes, sizes, and details of construction. I. Produce smooth, even, level sign panel surfaces, constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/I6 inch measured diagonally. B. Unframed Panel Signs: Fabricate signs with edges mechanically and smoothly finished to conform with the following requirements: I. Edge Condition: Square cut 2. Corner Condition: Rounded corners. Radius of 1/2" C. Laminated Sign Panels: Permanently laminate face panels to backing sheets of material and thickness indicated using the manufacturer's standard process. D. Graphic Content and Style: Provide sign copy that complies with the requirements indicated for size, style, spacing, content, position, material, finishes, and colors of letters, numbers, and other graphic devices. Raised Copy: Machine-cut copy characters from matte-finished opaque acrylic sheet and chemically weld onto the acrylic sheet forming sign panel face. Produce precisely formed characters with square cut edges free from burrs and cut marks. I. Panel Material: Matte-finished opaque acrylic sheet. 2. Raised Copy Thickness: 1/16 inch. 2.4 FINISHES A. Colors and Surface Textures: For exposed sign material that requires selection of materials with integral or applied colors, surface textures or other characteristics related to appearance, provide color matches indicated,or if not indicated, as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standards. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate sign units and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of the type described and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. I. Install signs level, plumb, and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion or other defects in appearance. B. Wall-Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using the methods indicated below: SIGNS 10425 - 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 2. Samples for verification of color, pattern, and texture selected and compliance with requirements indicated: 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sign Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing signs similar to those indicated for this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance, and sufficient production capacity to produce sign units required without causing delay in the Work. B. Single-Source Responsibility: For each separate sign type required, obtain signs from one source of a single manufacturer. C. Design Concept: The Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of signs and are based on the specific types and models indicated. Sign units by other manufacturers may be considered provided deviations in dimensions and profiles do not change the design concept as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication to ensure proper fitting. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: I. Manufacturers of Panel Signs: a. ABC Architectural Signing System. b. Allenite. C. APCO Graphics, Inc. d. Best Manufacturing Company. e. Charleston Industries, Inc. f. Environmental Graphic Systems, Inc. g. Mohawk Sign Systems. h. Vomar Products, Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Plastic Laminate: Provide high-pressure plastic laminate engraving stock with face and core plies in contrasting colors, in finishes and color combinations indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from the manufacturer's standards. B. Fasteners: Use concealed fasteners fabricated from metals that are not corrosive to the sign material and mounting surface. SIGNS 10425 - 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. "`" SECTION 10425 - SIGNS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of signs: I. Panel signs. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: I. Division I Section "Temporary Facilities"for temporary project identification signs. 2. Division 2 Section "Site Improvements"for roadway signs and traffic signals. 3. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for labels, tags, and nameplates for mechanical equipment. 4. Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification" for labels, tags, and nameplates for electrical equipment. 5. Division 16 Section "Interior Lighting"for illuminated exit signs. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division I Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of sign specified, including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles,and finishes. C. Shop drawings showing fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans, elevations, and large-scale sections of typical members and other components. Show anchors, grounds, layout, reinforcement, accessories,and installation details. I. Provide message list for each sign required, including large-scale details of wording and lettering layout. 2. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchors to be installed as a unit of Work in other Sections. D. Samples: Provide the following samples of each sign component for initial selection of color, pattern and surface texture as required and for verification of compliance with requirements indicated. I. Samples for initial selection of color, pattern,and texture: a. Cast Acrylic Sheet and Plastic Laminate: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual sections of material including the full range of colors available for each material required. SIGNS 10425 - 1 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 1) William Zinsser& Co., Inc; Perma-White Bathroom Wall and Ceiling Paint. 2) Sherwin-Williams; Everclean 3.7 SURFACE FINISH SCHEDULE Walls Trim Ceiling N IA N N h - 0 a+ N N 0 a 0 ,� N a� td ao c s c ao c ao c t c a a .E .E v w C) v w V) Ln V) LL Kitchens X X X Living room, Dining room, Entry hall X X X Bathrooms X X X Halls and Stairs X X X Bedrooms X X X END OF SECTION 09912 INTERIOR PAINTING 09912- 9 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials,the two paints are incompatible. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Steel Substrates: I. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 5.1 R. a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive or Quick-drying alkyd metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: High-performance architectural latex matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: High-performance architectural latex semigloss. B. Dressed Lumber Substrates: Including architectural woodwork, doors,trim . I. Latex System: MPI INT 63T. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Interior latex semigloss. C. Gypsum Board Substrates: I. Latex System: MPI INT 9.2A. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer . b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Interior latex low sheen. D. Plaster or Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior plaster or gypsum board surfaces at all bathrooms: I. Satin Latex-Acrylic Finish with Mildicide: 3 finish coats, self priming. a. Factory-formulated satin latex-acrylic for interior application. 5 year warranty against mildew growth. INTERIOR PAINTING 09912- 8 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. I. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces including, but not limited to,the following: I. Mechanical Work: a. Uninsulated metal piping. b. Uninsulated plastic piping. C. Pipe hangers and supports. d. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. e. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets. f. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. g. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. 2. Electrical Work: a. Switchgear. b. Panelboards. C. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied: I. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying-paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. INTERIOR PAINTING 09912- 7 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. tow B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. I. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. 2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. I. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. E. Clay Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content of surfaces or alkalinity of mortar joints to be painted exceed that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. F. Concrete Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. G. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. H. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. I. Aluminum Substrates: Remove surface oxidation. J. Wood Substrates: I. Scrape and clean knots,and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view,and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends,faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. K. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth. L. Plaster Substrates: Do not begin paint application until plaster is fully cured and dry. M. Spray-Textured Ceiling Substrates: Do not begin paint application until surfaces are dry. N. Cotton or Canvas Insulation Covering Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates. INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 - 6 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. I. VOC Content: E Range of E2 . F. Interior Latex (Gloss): MPI #114 (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65 units at 60 deg). 1. VOC Content: E Range of E2. G. High-Performance Architectural Latex (Low Sheen): MPI #138 (Gloss Level 2). 1. VOC Content: E Range of E23. H. High-Performance Architectural Latex (Eggshell): MPI#139 (Gloss Level 3). I. VOC Content: E Range of E3. I. High-Performance Architectural Latex (Satin): MPI #140 (Gloss Level 4). 1. VOC Content: E Range of E3. J. High-Performance Architectural Latex (Semigloss): MPI #141 (Gloss Level 5). I. VOC Content: E Range of E2 . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: I. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry(Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3. Wood: 15 percent. 4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. S. Plaster: 12 percent. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. I. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. INTERIOR PAINTING 09912- 5 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. X. 1,1,1-trichloroethane. Y. Vinyl chloride. C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range . 2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50. 1. VOC Content: E Range of E2 . B. Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint systems indicated. 2.4 METAL PRIMERS A. Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI #79. I. VOC Content: E Range of E2. B. Quick-Drying Alkyd Metal Primer: MPI #76. I. VOC Content: E Range of E2 . 2.5 WOOD PRIMERS A. Interior Latex-Based Wood Primer: MPI #39. I. VOC Content: E Range of E2 . 2.6 LATEX PAINTS A. Interior Latex (Flat): MPI #53 (Gloss Level 1). I. VOC Content: E Range of E2 . B. Interior Latex (Low Sheen): MPI #44 (Gloss Level 2). 1. VOC Content: E Range of E2 . C. Interior Latex (Eggshell): MPI#52 (Gloss Level 3). I. VOC Content: E Range of E2 . D. Interior Latex (Satin): MPI #43 (Gloss Level 4). I. VOC Content: E Range of E2. E. Interior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #54 (Gloss Level 5). INTERIOR PAINTING 09912-4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products !ow that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: I. Benjamin Moore&Co. 2. California Paints. 3. ICI Paints. 4. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 5. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). 6. William Zinsser&Co., Inc. 2.2 PAINT,GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: I. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. B. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24) and the following chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to primers or finishes that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop: I. Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. 3. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings). 4. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following: a. Acrolein. b. Acrylonitrile. C. Antimony. d. Benzene. e. Butyl benzyl phthalate. f. Cadmium. g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate. h. Di-n-butyl phthalate. i. Di-n-octyl phthalate. j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene. k. Diethyl phthalate. I. Dimethyl phthalate. M. Ethylbenzene. n. Formaldehyde. o. Hexavalent chromium. p. Isophorone. q. Lead. r. Mercury. S. Methyl ethyl ketone. t. Methyl isobutyl ketone. U. Methylene chloride. V. Naphthalene. W. Toluene (m ethyl benzene). INTERIOR PAINTING 09912- 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. MPI Standards: I. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List." 2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual'for products and paint systems indicated. B. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. I. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3. a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq.ft.. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. 3. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING a� A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. I. Maintain containers in clean condition,free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents. I. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than I gal. of each material and color applied. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS INTERIOR PAINTING 09912- 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 09912- INTERIOR PAINTING PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. Steel. 2. Wood. 3. Gypsum board. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section. 2. Division 6 Sections for shop priming carpentry with primers specified in this Section. 3. Division 9 Section "Exterior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat indicated. I. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted. E. VOC Submittals: Manufacturers' product data for paints, including printed statement of VOC content and chemical components. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE INTERIOR PAINTING 09912- 1 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. C. Topcoat: Exterior latex () (semigloss) (). E. Fiber Cement Substrates: I. Latex System: MPI EXT 9.IA. a. Prime Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Exterior latex (flat) END OF SECTION 09911 EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911 - 7 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying-paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping,or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: I. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.3B. a. Prime Coat: Cementitious galvanized-metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel) (semigloss) (). B. Dressed Lumber Substrates: Including wood trim. I. Latex System: MPI EXT 6.3L. a. Prime Coat: Exterior latex wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Exterior latex () (semigloss)). C. Wood Panel Substrates: Including plywood siding, fascias, soffits . I. Latex System: MPI EXT 6.4K. a. Prime Coat: Exterior latex wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Exterior latex (flat) D. Plastic Trim Fabrication Substrates: 1. Latex System: MPI EXT 6.8A. ' a. Prime Coat: Bonding primer (water based) (). b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911 - 6 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. I. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items ' that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. 2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. I. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. E. Wood Substrates: I. Scrape and clean knots,and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends,faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. F. Plastic Trim Fabrication Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. I. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied: I. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance of paint materials with product requirements. EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911 - 5 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Exterior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #11 (Gloss Level 5). I. VOC Content: E Range of E2 . C. Exterior Latex (Gloss): MPI #119 (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65 units at 60 deg). I. VOC Content: E Range of E2 . 2.7 EXTERIOR ALKYD PAINTS A. Exterior Alkyd Enamel (Flat): MPI #8 (Gloss Level 1). I. VOC Content: E Range of E 1. B. Exterior Alkyd Enamel (Semigloss): MPI##94 (Gloss Level 5). I. VOC Content: E Range of E2. C. Exterior Alkyd Enamel (Gloss): MPI ##9 (Gloss Level 6). 1. VOC Content: E Range of E2. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: I. Wood: 15 percent. 2. Plaster: 12 percent. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. I. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911 -4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products '''` that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: I. Benjamin Moore& Co. 2. California Paints. 3. ICI Paints. 4. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 5. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: I. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range . 2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS A. Bonding Primer(Water Based): MPI #17. 1. VOC Content: E Range of E2 . B. Bonding Primer(Solvent Based): MPI#69. I. VOC Content: E Range of E2 . C. Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint system indicated. 2.4 METAL PRIMERS A. Cementitious Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #26. 1. VOC Content: E Range of E 1. 2.5 WOOD PRIMERS A. Exterior Latex Wood Primer: MPI #6. I. VOC Content: E Range of E2 . 2.6 EXTERIOR LATEX PAINTS A. Exterior Latex (Flat): MPI #10 (Gloss Level 1). I. VOC Content: E Range of E2 . EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911 - 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. MPI Standards: I. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List." 2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual"for products and paint systems indicated. B. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3. a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq.ft.. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. look I. Maintain containers in clean condition,free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents. I. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than I gal. of each material and color applied. PART 2 - PRODUCTS AIW 2.1 MANUFACTURERS EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911 - 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 09911 - EXTERIOR PAINTING PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following exterior substrates: I. Galvanized metal. 2. Wood. 3. Plastic trim fabrications. 4. Exterior fiber cement siding. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 5 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section. ,ow 2. Division 6 Sections for shop priming carpentry with primers specified in this Section. 3. Division 8 Sections for factory priming windows and doors with primers specified in this Section. 4. Division 9 Section 'Interior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat indicated. I. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: I. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted. 10-01* 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911 - I Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION AWK A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet: I. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface. 3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element. B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, "Protection of Indoor Installations." C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer. END OF SECTION 09680 a OOW CARPET 09680-4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation A provided by or recommended by the following: I. Carpet manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and that is recommended by the following: I. Carpet manufacturer. C. Seaming Cement: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams. D. Metal Edge Strips will not be permitted. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content,alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and comply with requirements specified. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. �Opw 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet installation. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. C. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 8, "Direct Glue-Down Installation." B. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position. C. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. D. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. E. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. CARPET 09680- 3 Country Lane Estates December I6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling." 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions;Temperature and Humidity." B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Carpet Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet manufacturer agreeing to replace carpet that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination. I. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS S : A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. I. Carpet: Full-width rolls equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type and color indicated, but not less than 10 sq.yd.. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOVEN CARPET A. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: I. Philadelphia (Shaw Industries) "Quest" a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 WALKOFF MAT A. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: I. Mats Inc. "Seascape" solution dyed polypropylene fiber, 50 ounce,with synthetic rubber backing. a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES CARPET 09680- 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 09680 - CARPET PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I. Woven carpet. 2. Walkoff mats. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 9 Section "Resilient Flooring" for resilient wall base, transition strips and accessories installed with carpet. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation recommendations for each type of low substrate required. B. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet and walkoff mat: 12-inch- square Sample. C. Product Schedule: Use same room and product designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. D. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division I. Include the following: I. Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification indicated in Part 2, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Product Options: Products and manufacturers named in Part 2 establish requirements for product quality in terms of appearance, construction, and performance. Other manufacturers' products comparable in r quality to named products and complying with requirements may be considered. Refer to Division I Section "Substitutions." CARPET 09680 - 1 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1) Use commercially available, metal, cross-linked acrylic product acceptable to flooring manufacturer. 2) Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service. 5. If required, cover flooring with undyed, untreated building paper until inspection for Substantial Completion. D. Existing Vinyl Composition Tile: I. All existing vinyl composition tile in entire units or other individual areas under construction shall be cleaned and polished. 2. Clean flooring not more than 4 days prior to dates scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. Clean flooring using method recommended by manufacturer. 3. Scrub flooring with a neutral-detergent solution, using a single disc floor machine. 4. Do not flood floor with rinse water or with scrubbing solutions. S. Apply a total of two (2) coats of protective floor polish to resilient flooring surfaces that are free from soil,visible adhesive, and surface blemishes. a. Use commercially available, metal, cross-linked acrylic product acceptable to flooring manufacturer. b. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service. 6. If required, cover flooring with undyed, untreated building paper until inspection for Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING 09650- 7 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor coverings that would otherwise be exposed. B. Fasten aluminum retainer with adhesive and mechanical fasteners. Snap in vinyl molding cut to exact length required. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: I. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. a. Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer. 4. After one week minimum, provide two coats of high quality commercial floor polish for temporary protection. B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer. C. New Resilient Flooring and Wall Base I. Apply protective floor polish to horizontal surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes if recommended in writing by manufacturer. a. Use commercially available product acceptable to manufacturer. b. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service. 2. Cover products installed on horizontal surfaces with undyed, untreated building paper until Substantial Completion. 3. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over surfaces. Place hardboard or plywood panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels. 4. End of Construction Period: a. Resilient wall base, unless badly marked or soiled, will not require additional cleaning or polishing beyond the requirements above. b. Clean flooring not more than 4 days prior to dates scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. Clean flooring using method recommended by manufacturer. C. Scrub flooring with a neutral-detergent solution, using a single disc floor machine. d. If flooring is badly soiled or scratched, strip protective floor polish that was applied after completing installation. Decision to strip flooring shall be made at Architect's and Owner's discretion. Do not use brown or black pads in stripping machine. e. Do not flood floor with rinse water or with scrubbing or stripping solutions. f. Apply a total of five (5) coats of protective floor polish to resilient flooring surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes. If initial two coats of polish are not stripped, they shall be counted as the first two of the required five coats. RESILIENT FLOORING 09650- 6 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. I. Lay tiles square with room axis B. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped,or deformed tiles. I. Lay tiles with grain running in one direction. C. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames, thresholds,and nosings. D. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets,and similar openings. E. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. F. Install tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of tile installed on covers. Tightly adhere the edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters. G. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks,and other surface imperfections. 3.4 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. B. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned, C. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. D. Do not stretch wall base during installation. E. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. F. Premolded Corners: Install premolded corners before installing straight pieces. G. job-Formed Corners: I. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. Shave back of base at points where bends occur and remove strips perpendicular to length of base that are only deep enough to produce a snug fit without removing more than half the wall base thickness. 2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form by cutting an inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate. 3.5 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION RESILIENT FLOORING 09650- 5 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content,and other conditions affecting performance. I. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. I. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 3. Moisture Testing: a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. Insert emission in 24 hours. b. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes,and depressions in substrates. E. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. I. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 TILE INSTALLATION A. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. RESILIENT FLOORING 09650-4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2.2 RESILIENT WALL BASE. 'OPW A. Wall Base: ASTM F 1861. B. Type (Material Requirement): TV (vinyl) . C. Group (Manufacturing Method): I (solid, homogeneous). D. Style: Cove (with top-set toe) or Straight(toeless) . E. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch . F. Height: 4 inches . G. Lengths: Cut lengths,48 inches long. H. Outside Corners: Job formed or premolded. I. Inside Corners: Job formed or premolded. J. Surface: Smooth. 2.3 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY A. Description: Reducer strip for resilient floor covering. B. Material: Vinyl with snap in aluminum retainer base. C. Profile and Dimensions: As required for transition. 2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland cement based or blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. I. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): a. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: 50 g/L. b. Cove Base Adhesives: 50 g/L. C. Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60 g/L. C. Vinyl Edge Transition Strips: Extruded vinyl, color as selected by Architect, of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edges of tiles,and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints. D. Metal Edge Strips: Not permitted. RESILIENT FLOORING 09650- 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F Insert temperature or more than 95 deg F Insert temperature, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F Insert temperature or more than 95 deg F Insert temperature. C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation. D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation. E. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. I. Floor Tile: Furnish 10 extra boxes of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed. If only one type, provide a total of 20 boxes. `' 2. Resilient Wall Base and Accessories: Furnish not less than 50 linear feet of each type, color, pattern,and size of resilient product installed. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 COLORS AND PATTERNS A. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range . 4.1 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE PRODUCT DATA SHEET A. Class: Class 2 (through pattern tile). B. Wearing Surface: Smooth. C. Thickness: 0.125 inch. D. Size: 12-by-12 inches. E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: I. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm per ASTM E 648. F. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors and patterns produced for tile of class,wearing surface,thickness,size, and pattern specified. RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 - 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I. Vinyl composition tile (VCT). 2. Resilient wall base and accessories. 3. Cleaning and waxing. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of resilient floor tile required. I. Resilient Wall Base and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 12 inches long,of each resilient product color and pattern required. D. Product data for each type of product specified, including floor cleaner, polish,and stripper. I. Certification by resilient floor products manufacturer that products supplied for installation comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOC's). E. Maintenance Data: For resilient products to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products identical to those tested for fire-exposure behavior per test method indicated by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store tiles on flat surfaces. RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 - 1 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with the following joint widths: 00%, I. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch or match existing. C. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at locations indicated; set in same type of setting bed as abutting field tile, unless otherwise indicated. D. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints according to grout-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer that has gotten on tile faces by wiping with soft cloth. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic the surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. I. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from the as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from the according to the and grout manufacturer's written instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning. 3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it from clogging drains. B. When recommended by the manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage,and wear. C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed. D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces. END OF SECTION 09310 AVW CERAMIC TILE 09310- 5 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials. B. Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives that comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards. I. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound according to tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions. Use product specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer. 2. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding. C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules. B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules. C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim,finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern to match existing. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base,walls, and trim are same size. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated. F. Grout tile to comply with requirements of the following tile installation standards: I. For ceramic tile grouts (sand-portland cement; dry-set, commercial portland cement; and latex- Portland cement grouts), comply with ANSI Al08.10. 3.4 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A. General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Floor Tile Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI A 108 Series of tile installation standards. CERAMIC TILE 09310 -4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2.5 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer and characteristics indicated that comply with applicable requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." B. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in the adjoining sealed joints, unless otherwise indicated. C. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated. B. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers. C. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints that does not change color or appearance of grout. 2.7 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions. B. Add materials,water, and additives in accurate proportions. C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where the will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. I. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of oil, waxy films, and curing compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards for installations indicated. 2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile. 3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not ew coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect. CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for Ceramic Tile,"for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI standards referenced in "Setting and Grouting Materials"Article. C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with the following requirements: I. Match existing tile from manufacturer's full range of available colors. D. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 TILE PRODUCTS A. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile to match existing tile and trim. 2.3 THRESHOLDS A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes. to I. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, aligning lower edge of bevel with adjacent floor finish. Limit height of bevel to 1/2 inch or less, and finish bevel to match face of threshold. B. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503 with a minimum abrasion resistance of 10 per ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241 and with honed finish. I. Description: Uniform,fine-to medium-grained white stone with gray veining. 2.4 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI AI 18.4, consisting of the following: I. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive to which only water must be added at Project site. 2. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene-rubber liquid- latex additive. B. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1,Type 1. C. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI AI 18.7, color as indicated. I. Polymer Type: Either ethylene vinyl acetate, in dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients, or acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene rubber in liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix. CERAMIC TILE 09310- 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. OW SECTION 09310- CERAMIC TILE PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I. Ceramic mosaic tile repairs. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division I Section "Selective Demolition"for removing existing finishes. 2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in the surfaces. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the products specified in this Section through one source from a single manufacturer for each product: 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement in ANSI A 137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages. B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. D. Store liquid latexes and emulsion adhesives in unopened containers and protected from freezing. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install the until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. PART 2- PRODUCTS CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 1 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener ?0004 heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges,and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 840, for locations indicated: I. Level 1: Embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum areas and concealed areas. 2. Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fas- teners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indi- cated. END OF SECTION 09260 Owl' Awk- GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 6 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. J. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. K. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations. I. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches o.c.for vertical applications. 3.3 PANEL APPLICATION METHODS A. Single-Layer Application: I. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) , unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. B. Multilayer Application on Ceilings: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints I framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base- layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. C. Multilayer Application on Partition s/Wal Is: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face- layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. D. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. E. Multilayer Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws . F. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set. 3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 5 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to '"' 0.1 12 inch thick. D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. I. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216. B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. C. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. D. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. E. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. F. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. G. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. H. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. 1. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. I. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq.ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes,and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and other structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 -4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. D. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch bare steel thickness,with minimum 1/2-inch-wide flange. I. Depth: As indicated, minimum 3/4 inch. 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare steel thickness of 0.0312 inch. 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class I zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- diameter wire. E. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. 2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. I. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized steel sheet. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound; use at exposed panel edges . C. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long leg receives joint compound; use where indicated . 2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475. B. Joint Tape: I. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. I. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound or drying-type, all-purpose compound. a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories. 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations,whichever are more stringent. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 INTERIOR GYPSUM WALLBOARD A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated. B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36. I. Regular Type: a. Thickness: 1/2 inch, unless otherwise indicated . b. Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling. 2. Type X: a. Thickness: 5/8 inch . b. Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling. C. Location: As indicated or where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly . C. Water-Resistant Gypsum Board (Moisture Resistant): ASTM C 630/C 630M. a. Thickness: 5/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated. b. Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling. C. Location: At basement locations,and other locations as indicated. 2.2 STEEL FRAMING AND TRIM A. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. I. Minimum Base Metal Thickness:0.027 inch B. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. I. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: As indicated, minimum 0.0312 inch. 2. Depth: 7/8 inch or as indicated. C. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. I. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped, with face attached to single flange by a slotted leg (web) or attached to two flanges by slotted or expanded metal legs. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260- 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A' SECTION 09260- GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior gypsum wallboard. 2. Miscellaneous steel framing and trim. 3. Acoustic insulation. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gypsum Board Terminology: Refer to ASTM C I I for definitions of terms for gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations, fabrication, and installation of control and expansion joints including plans,elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of Work. C. Samples: For the following products: I. Trim Accessories: Full-size sample in 12-inch- long length for each trim accessory indicated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. I. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from GA-600, "Fire Resistance Design Manual." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 1 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way, including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. 3.5 INSULATING-GLASS SCHEDULE A. Insulating Glass: Where indicated, provide low-emissivity insulating-glass units complying with the following: I. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: a. Windows: 16 mm minimum and 3 mm minimum b. Sliding doors: 16 mm minimum and 5 mm minimum 2. Spacer Type: Warm edge 3. Interspace Content:Argon. 4. Indoor Lite: Type I (transparent glass,flat), Class I (clear) float glass. ew a. Kind HS (heat strengthened) if required. 5. Outdoor Lite: Type I (transparent glass,flat) float glass a. Class I (clear). b. Kind HS (heat strengthened) if required. 6. Low-Emissivity Coating: Sputtered on third surface. 7. Visible Light Transmittance Center of Glass Value: 50% minimum 8. Winter Nighttime Center of Glass U-Value: 0.32 maximum 9. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient Center of Glass Value: 0.55 maximum B. Frosted Glass: Where indicated, provide insulating glass as specified above with inner lite vision obscured by mechanical or chemical etching. I. Visible Light Transmittance Center of Glass Value: 40% minimum END OF SECTION GLAZING 08800- 7 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses,with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that,when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing. E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G. Provide spacers for glass lites where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches as follows: I. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. 3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. GLAZING 08800 - 6 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 2.3 INSULATING GLASS Awk A. Insulating-Glass Units: Preassembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units and with requirements specified in this Article and in the Insulating-Glass Schedule at the end of Part 3. 1. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in "Performance Requirements"Article. B. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated in the Insulating-Glass Schedule at the end of Part 3 are nominal and the overall thicknesses of units are measured perpendicularly from outer surfaces of glass lites at unit's edge. C. Sealing System: Dual seal,with primary and secondary sealants as follows: I. Manufacturer's standard sealants. D. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard warm edge spacer construction: 1. AdvantEdge Intercept spacer system. 2. Aluminum Swiggle Strip. 3. Other warm edge spacer as required to achieve overall U values. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Sealant, Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. 2.5 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard, to comply with system performance requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing glazing,with Installer present,for compliance with the following: I. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. GLAZING 08800 - 5 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain,frost, condensation, or other causes. I. Do not install liquid glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F. 1.9 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Coated-Glass Products: Written warranty, made out to Owner and signed by coated-glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for those coated-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. I. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Written warranty, made out to Owner and signed by insulating-glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for insulating-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. I. Warranty Period: a. 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS (CLEAR GLASS) A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select); class as indicated in schedules at the end of Part 3. 2.2 COATED FLOAT GLASS A. General: Provide coated glass complying with requirements indicated in this Article and in schedules at the end of Part 3. I. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) coated float glass in place of coated annealed glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in "Performance Requirements"Article. B. Sputter-Coated Float Glass: Float glass with metallic-oxide or metallic-nitride coating deposited by vacuum deposition process after manufacture and heat treatment (if any), complying with requirements specified in schedules at the end of Part 3. GLAZING 08800 -4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. B. Source Limitations for Clear Glass: Obtain clear float glass from one primary-glass manufacturer. C. Source Limitations for Coated Glass: Obtain coated glass from one manufacturer for each type of coating and each type and class of float glass indicated. D. Source Limitations for Insulating Glass: Obtain insulating-glass units from one manufacturer using the same type of glass and other components for each type of unit indicated. E. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories from one source for each product and installation method indicated. F. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Submit to elastomeric glazing sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of each glass type, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member that will contact or affect elastomeric glazing sealants. I. Use manufacturer's standard test methods to determine whether priming and other specific preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass,tape sealants,gaskets,and glazing channel substrates. a. Perform tests under normal environmental conditions replicating those that will exist during installation. 2. Submit not fewer than nine pieces of each type and finish of glass-framing members and each type, class, kind, condition, and form of glass (monolithic, laminated, and insulating units) as well as one sample of each glazing accessory (gaskets,tape sealants, setting blocks, and spacers). 3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 4. For materials failing tests, obtain sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective " measures, including the use of specially formulated primers. 5. Testing will not be required if elastomeric glazing sealant manufacturers submit data based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, glazing materials matching those submitted. G. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. I. GANA Publications: GANA'S "Glazing Manual" 2. SIGMA Publications: SIGMA TM-3000, "Vertical Glazing Guidelines." H. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the following inspecting and testing agency: I. Insulating Glass Certification Council. 2. Associated Laboratories, Inc. 3. National Accreditation and Management Institute. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS GLAZING 08800- 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. I. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with Massachusetts State 00W* Building Code and ASTM E 1300,according to the following requirements: a. Specified Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from basic wind speed of 70 miles per hour, according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 6.4.2, "Analytic Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings. b. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action. I) Load Duration: 60 seconds or less. C. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For the following types of glass supported on all four edges, provide thickness required that limits center deflection at design wind pressure to 1/50 times the short side length or 3/4 inch,whichever is less. I) For insulating glass. d. Minimum Glass Thickness: Not less than 3 mm. C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. I. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. Aow D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified based on manufacturer's published test data,as determined according to procedures indicated below: I. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units with lites 3 mm thick and a nominal 7/16- inch-wide interspace. 2. Center-of-Glass U-Values: NFRC 100 methodology using LBL-35298 WINDOW 4.1 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq.ft.x h x deg F. 3. Center-of-Glass Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200 methodology using LBL-35298 WINDOW 4.1 computer program. 4. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Test Report: From glazing sealant manufacturer indicating glazing sealants were tested for adhesion to glass and glazing channel substrates and for compatibility with glass and other glazing materials. B. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project;whose work has resulted in glass installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association Glazier Certification Program as Level 2 (Senior Glaziers) or Level 3 (Master Glaziers). GLAZING 08800 - 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 08800- GLAZING PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: I. Windows. 2. Sliding glass doors. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 8 Section "Vinyl Windows"for factory installation of glazing. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Manufacturer: A firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a specified gas. C. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating. D. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites for various size openings in nominal thicknesses indicated, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria: GLAZING 08800 - 1 \ y } \ } \ / } ( \ \ \ \ ) \ \ \ \ \ Lel Ln � ± « I � � � § -J L ; \ ) co � �LLI J w w \ I O \ 0 z } z } w < w O _ z § \ 0 / \ I ■ _ < ■ } w � R U « L \ � \ � \ 7 \ 2 � $ (A @ § 4 \ \ � 4 \ \ N � � v Oq v V 3 c M v 0 N v 0 .a 0 0 c v 4 O 0 0 ( c Z Y Q ¢ o Q = o W ~ � � o w v c J � J � c J W o H V M h t 0 J f ~ Q W J Q H W W c,1 M = Li a) C) O Z o z c z l� a LL 0 LL z = o 0 o j o 0 o io 0 0 0 0 0 o- v 4 a N io Fh io Fh ih io in Q > x x x x x x x x x x x x x 0 (9 o o co 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 E oG Fo ih eo icy r v io io io bo io LU w NUNN oC H U LL Q t z z V ;, o � ' b 3 W W M J y J r V~f a m m U o m U m m m a 0 m U y Z ' Q •WAR _ Y 3 � � Q ° r Cl) .� V a E N c� v LO cfl r co (3) [„ Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. C. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's written OOW recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove labels and clean surfaces. D. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. END OF SECTION 0"k VINYL WINDOWS 08560- 9 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components;with Drawings; and with Shop Drawings. B. Provide aluminum caulk stop as back up for sealants at areas required. Fasten securely in position to edge of opening or edge of window frame as required. C. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction. D. Set members, as indicated,for weathertight construction. E. Metal Protection: Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials by complying with requirements specified in "Dissimilar Materials" Paragraph in Appendix B in AAMA/NWWDA 101 1I.S.2. F. Window Trim Installation: Provide concealed fasteners as required to secure trim in opening at jamb, head and sill. I. Smooth rough cut edges and install neatly,without gaps. G. Sealant: Ensure that window frames have been sealed weathertight with continuous exterior perimeter ' sealant application and sealed airtight with continuous interior perimeter sealant application as indicated. Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts as required. 3.4 OWNER TRAINING A. Review parts lists and glazing replacement procedures and complete maintenance and window operation with Owner's representative. Provide minimum of one half day training. 3.5 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below exterior concrete and surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, stains, or other contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants,glazing materials, dirt,and other substances. VINYL WINDOWS 08560 - 8 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3. Provide frames of configuration that allow removal of screen from inside building. C. Aluminum Wire Fabric: 18-by-16 mesh of 0.0 1 1-inch- diameter,coated aluminum wire. I. Wire-Fabric Finish: Charcoal gray. 2.6 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate vinyl windows, in sizes indicated, that comply with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 for performance class and performance grade indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows. B. Sliding windows: Fabricate sash of removeable type: both sash can be completely removed from frame. C. Fabricate vinyl windows that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing. I. Frame corners: Fusion welded. 2. Sash corners: Fusion welded. D. Weather Stripping: Provide two continuous courses full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash and ventilator, at jambs, heads, sills and meeting rail. E. Factory machine windows for openings and hardware that is not surface applied. F. Mullions: Provide mullions and reinforcement for structural loading, as indicated or equivalent, matching window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections, as indicated. Provide mullions, reinforcement and fasteners capable of withstanding design loads of window units. I. Provide sealant as required between factory mulled units or at other trim locations so that joined units are watertight. G. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Glaze vinyl windows in the factory. Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2. H. Glazing Trim: Provide manufacturer's standard snap-in rigid vinyl glazing trim coordinated with Division 8 Section "Glazing" and glazing system indicated. Provide glazing trim to match sash and frame color. 1. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, joining windows in mulled pairs, and other work in the factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Allow for scribing, trimming, and fitting at Project site. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances; rough opening dimensions; levelness of sill plate; coordination with wall flashings, vapor retarders, and other built-in components; and other conditions affecting performance of work. VINYL WINDOWS 08560 - 7 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. J. Sill Cap/Track: Rigid PVC or other weather-resistant plastic with manufacturer's standard integral track, color to match adjoining frame, of thickness, dimensions, and profile required; designed to comply with performance requirements indicated and to drain to the exterior. 2.3 GLAZING A. Glass and Glazing Materials: Refer to Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass units and glazing requirements applicable to glazed vinyl window units. 2.4 HARDWARE A. General: Provide hardware fabricated from PVC, aluminum, stainless steel, carbon steel complying with AAMA 907, or other corrosion-resistant material compatible with vinyl; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock vinyl windows and sized to accommodate sash or ventilator weight and dimensions. Cadmium-plated hardware is not permitted. Do not use aluminum in frictional contact with other metals. Where exposed, provide vinyl matching sash, solid bronze extruded, cast, or wrought aluminum die-cast zinc with special coating finish or nonmagnetic stainless steel. B. Provide fasteners for hardware that allow removal and replacement of all hardware. C. Locks and Latches: Designed to allow unobstructed movement of the sash across adjacent sash in direction indicated and operated from the inside only. I. Meeting rail locks: a. Sliding windows: Provide two metal cam locks and keepers per window. 2. Screen retainers: Provide spring loaded latches at each end of bottom rail, engaging in slots in jamb screen track. 3. At ground floor sliders: Provide additional security lock consisting of vertical bolt mounted on vertical window sash which engages hole in window frame,when window is closed. D. Roller Assemblies: Low-friction design, brass rollers, replaceable. Comply with AAMA 902. a. Maximum operating force (opening or closing): 30 pounds. 2.5 INSECT SCREENS A. General: Design windows and hardware to accommodate half screens in a tight-fitting, removable arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches. Locate screens on outside of window and provide for each operable exterior sash or ventilator. Screens shall be removable from inside without removing window sash. I. Sliding windows: Half screen for operable sash only. B. Aluminum Insect Screen Frames: Manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy complying with SMA 1004. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped joints, concealed fasteners, and removable PVC spline/anchor concealing edge of frame. I. Aluminum Tubular Framing Sections and Cross Braces: Roll-formed from aluminum sheet or extruded with minimum wall thickness as required for class indicated. 2. Finish: Baked-on organic coating to match manufacturer's frame color. VINYL WINDOWS 08560- 6 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. a. Atrium Companies, Inc. b. Harvey Industries Inc. C. National Vinyl Products, Inc. d. Silver Line Windows, Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Vinyl: Consisting of rigid multi-chambered, PVC extrusions, made from 100%virgin PVC complying with ASTM D 4726, not less than 0.065 inch nominal wall thickness, in permanent, integral color. I. Color: White or Beige, as selected by the Architect. B. Internal Reinforcing Members: Concealed aluminum structural extrusions complying with ASTM B 221 to provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. C. Aluminum Brake Metal Trim: Window installation trim with color and finish to match adjoining interior frame members. I. Continuous formed brake metal shapes, to cover existing jamb, head and sill conditions, and in- terlock weather tight with replacement windows. a. Finish: Baked-on organic coating to match manufacturer's frame color. D. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other materials warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with vinyl window members and reinforcing, cladding, trim, hardware,anchors, and other components. Cadmium-plated steel is not permitted. I. Exposed Fasteners: Unless unavoidable for applying hardware, do not use exposed fasteners. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish of member or hardware being fastened,as appropriate. E. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. Cadmium-plated steel reinforcing members are not permitted. F. Compression-Type Weather Stripping: Provide compressible weather stripping designed for permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action, and completely concealed when vinyl window is closed. I. Weather-Stripping Material: Manufacturer's standard system and materials complying with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2. G. Sliding-Type Weather Stripping: Provide woven-pile weather stripping of wool, polypropylene, or nylon pile and resin-impregnated backing fabric. Comply with AAMA 701/702. I. Weather Seals: Provide weather stripping with integral barrier fin or fins of semirigid, polypropylene sheet or polypropylene-coated material. H. Replaceable Weather Seals: Comply with AAMA 701/702. 1. H Mullion: Provide manufacturer's standard vinyl H mullion extrusion for joining together mulled window jambs, color to match adjacent frame color. Provide continuous vertical concealed aluminum structural reinforcing as indicated. VINYL WINDOWS 08560 - 5 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. F. Fenestration Standard: Comply with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2, "Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and Vinyl Windows and Glass Doors," for minimum standards of performance, materials, components,accessories,and fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. Provide NFRC-certified vinyl windows with an attached label. 2. Provide letter from manufacturer certifying that vinyl windows as manufactured for project comply with specification requirements. G. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify vinyl window openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard non-pro rated form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace vinyl windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to,the following: I. Failure to meet performance requirements. 2. Structural failures including excessive deflection. 3. Water leakage, air infiltration, or condensation. AWW 4. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. 5. Deterioration of vinyl, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 6. Insulating glass failure. B. Warranty Period: Twenty years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Warranty Period for Glass: Twenty years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish the following extra replacement materials identical to items delivered, in the quantities indicated below. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Provide part numbers are current procurement information for replacement parts. I. Sliding glazed replacement sash: Four total. 2. Sliding meeting rail locks: Twenty locks. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: I. Vinyl Windows with internal aluminum reinforcement: VINYL WINDOWS 08560 - 4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. C. Samples for Verification: For vinyl window components required, prepared on Samples of size indicated A"k below. I. Hardware: Full-size units with factory-applied finish. 2. Mullion and Stiffener: 12-inch- long sections. 3. Weather Stripping: 12-inch- long sections. 4. Welded frame corner with aluminum reinforcing: 12 inch long section each direction. 5. Sliding operable window unit: Full size sample, approx.4'-0 wide by 4'-0 high. 6. Architect reserves the right to require additional samples that show fabrication techniques, workmanship, and design of hardware and accessories. D. Qualification Data: For Installer. E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed within the last four years by a qualified testing agency, for each type,grade, and size of vinyl window. Test results based on use of down-sized test units will not be accepted. F. Maintenance Data: For operable window sash, complete parts list and sources for replacement hardware: operating hardware,weather stripping,and finishes to include in maintenance manuals. G. Engineering Calculations: Provide calculations from manufacturer's engineering department indicating required expansion provisions and fastener strength for frame attachment at snap trim clip angles. I. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data from manufacturer's standard test reports and additional data as necessary, signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer of vinyl windows for at least 5 years, with successful experience providing replacement windows for high rise residential projects of similar character (7 story minimum height buildings). B. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to vinyl window manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. D. Source Limitations: Obtain vinyl windows through one source from a single manufacturer. E. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for vinyl windows' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. I. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. VINYL WINDOWS 08560 - 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. General: Provide vinyl windows capable of complying with performance requirements indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those specified and that are of test size indicated below: I. Minimum size required by gateway performance requirements for determining compliance with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 for both gateway performance requirements and optional perform- ance grades. B. AAMA/NWWDA Structural Performance Requirements: Provide vinyl windows of the performance class and grade indicated that comply with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2. I. Performance Class: R. 2. Performance Grade: 35 minimum. 3. Exception to AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2: In addition to requirements for performance class and performance grade, design glass framing system with reinforcement to limit lateral deflections of glass edges to less than 1/175 of glass-edge length or 3/4 inch, whichever is less, at design pressure based on the following: a. Testing performed according to AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2, Uniform Load Deflection Test or structural computations. C. Thermal Transmittance: Provide vinyl windows with a whole-window U-value maximum indicated at 15-mph exterior wind velocity and winter condition temperatures when tested according to NFRC 100,with sash internally reinforced. I. U-Value: 0.34 Btu/sq.ft.x h x deg F or better. D. Air Infiltration: Provide vinyl windows with air infiltration indicated at 25-mph wind velocity (1.57 psf) when tested according to AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 or ASTM D 4099. I. Air Infiltration: maximum of 0.08 cfm/sq.ft. E. Water Resistance: Provide vinyl windows with water resistance indicated, tested with and without screens,when tested according to ASTM E 547. 1. Water Resistance: no entry at 5.00 gph/sq.ft. minimum (WTP = 5.0 psf min). 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and operating instructions for each type of vinyl window indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other Work, operational clearances, and the following: I. Frame sections including internal aluminum reinforcement. 2. Mullion details, including reinforcement and stiffeners. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Flashing and drainage details. 5. Weather-stripping details. 6. Glazing details. 7. Brake metal jamb, head and sill trim. VINYL WINDOWS 08560 - 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 08560-VINYL WINDOWS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes replacement vinyl-framed windows, with welded frame and welded sash, qualifying for the Energy Star program, of the following product types: 1. Sliding windows. 2. Fixed windows. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division I Section "Selective Demolition"for removal of existing windows and frames. 2. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood framing, blocking and building insulation surrounding windows. 3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants"for sealant and caulking surrounding windows. 4. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing requirements for vinyl windows, including those specified to be factory glazed. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Window unit: Standard factory fabricated unit, manufactured to custom size as required. B. Opening: Clear opening or framed rough opening, with lintel, header or other structural framing, so that wall loads are transferred to sides of opening. Two or more window units may be required, mulled together as indicated,to fill an opening. C. R: Residential. D. Performance grade number, included as part of the AAMA/NWWDA product designation code, is actual design pressure in pounds force per square foot used to determine structural test pressure and water test pressure. E. Structural test pressure,for uniform load structural test, is equivalent to 150 percent of design pressure. F. Minimum test size is smallest size of window unit permitted for performance class (gateway test size). Products must be tested at minimum test size or at a size larger than minimum test size to comply with requirements for performance class. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS VINYL WINDOWS 08560- 1 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. i0w A. Adjust inserts, screen, and hardware to provide smooth operation, positive latching, and continuous contact of perimeter weather stripping with frames. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean metal and glass surfaces of storm doors promptly after installation, exercising care to avoid damage to finishes of new and existing surfaces. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, or other substances. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Initiate and maintain protection and other precautions required through the remainder of the construction period to ensure that, except for normal weathering, the storm door will be free of damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION AMW OOW ALUMINUM SCREEN AND STORM DOORS 08390- 5 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Corners: Factory assemble storm doors using corner joinery methods indicated to produce rigidly connected, mitered joints that are rackproof during normal handling, installation, and operation. Corner gussets shall be extruded aluminum with thickness of.80 inch. I. Corner Joinery: Weld or braze corners of main frame at head, jamb, and screen insert joints. Weld or braze stiles, rails, and crossbars of doors. Mechanically join glazed insert frames. C. Combination Storm Doors: Fabricate combination storm doors in sizes and design indicated; coordinate with prime doors to provide sizes and frame configuration required for close-fitting assemblies. 2.4 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. General: Comply with Aluminum Association "Designation System for Aluminum Finishes" for finish designations and application recommendations. For components assembled or welded in the factory, apply the finish after fabrication is complete. B. Baked-Enamel Finish: AA-C12C42RIx Apply baked enamel complying with paint manufacturer's specifications for cleaning, conversion coating,and painting. I. Organic Coating: Thermosetting, polyester enamel primer/topcoat system complying with AAMA 603.8, except with minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.0381 mm),medium gloss. 2. Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Inspect openings before beginning installation. Verify that the opening sizes for storm doors are correct and conform to the following: I. Wood Frame Walls: Dry, clean, sound, well-nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with all surfaces in the opening and within 3 inches (75 mm) of the opening. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations, and ASTM E 737 for installation of storm doors. B. Hang storm doors, including jamb and head frames, plumb, level, and without distortion, securely fastened to and aligned with main doors. Fasten storm doors in a manner that allows for expansion and contraction without damage to the door frame, pullout of fasteners,or effect on storm door operation. C. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials by complying with requirements specified under paragraph "Dissimilar Materials" in the Appendix to ANSI/AAMA I0I. D. Provide watertight and air-tight joints between existing construction and the jamb and head frames of storm doors with sealants or gaskets as standard with the manufacturer. Apply sealant to comply with the sealant manufacturer's recommendations, including preparation of joint faces and priming, where required. 3.3 ADJUSTING ALUMINUM SCREEN AND STORM DOORS 08390- 4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. Tempered Glass: Complying with ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A, Type I, Class I, Quality q3. 2. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard channel-type gaskets compatible with aluminum and resistant to weathering. 3. Glazing Compounds: Manufacturer's standard back-bedding compounds or tapes, or both, used either singly or in a combination conforming to AAMA 800 and selected according to AAMA 850. E. Insect Screen: Screen inserts with screen fabric secured to the aluminum frame with a removable spline requiring at least 40 Ibf-inches (4.52 Nm) of force to unseat screening when tested according to SMA/SMT 3 I. I. Aluminum Screening: Aluminum wire fabric, 18-by-16 or 18-by-18 mesh, with a 0.0 11-inch- (0.28-mm-) diameter wire that complies with FS RR-W-365,Type VII. 2. Screen Frames: Manufacturer's standard formed or extruded aluminum frames and removable vinyl fabric-retainer spline. Comply with requirements of ANSI/SMA 1004. a. Finish: Baked-on organic coating as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. b. Fasteners: Provide removable vinyl inserts or heavy-duty steel knurled thumbscrews. Aluminum thumbscrews are not allowed. F. Hardware: Equip doors with the following hardware items standard with the manufacturer. I. Latch: Equip each door with a spring-operated latch with the bolt operated by a turn knob,thumb piece, or lever handle,and lockable from the inside only. 2. Closers: Equip each door with two adjustable tubular pneumatic or hydraulic closer, top and bottom, complying with the requirements of ANSI/BHMA A 156.4 for Type C09363 or C09343 respectively. 3. Stop: Equip each door with a chain-type door stop, complying with the requirements of ANSI/BHMA A 156.16 for Type L02222. 4. Hinges: Equip each door with not less than 4 concealed hinges using oil-impregnated bearing surfaces. G. Narrow Joint Seam Sealers: Acrylic terpolymer, solvent-based, one-part, thermo-plastic sealant compound, with plus or minus 7-1/2 percent movement, complying with FS TT-S-00230, Class B, Type 11, and AAMA 803.3, recommended by the manufacturer for general use as an exposed building construction sealant. H. Exterior Perimeter Sealing Compound: Silicone, rubber-based, one-part low-modulus, elastomeric sealant complying with ASTM C 920,Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use M, G,A, and as applicable to joint substrate, O; and AAMA 808.3, recommended by the sealant manufacturer for porous and nonporous joint faces; in color matching frame finish or as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standard colors. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Factory fabricate door members, including jamb and head frame, sills, door stiles, and rails, and Insert frames from solid or hollow extrusions of sizes, shapes, and wall thicknesses indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as standard with the manufacturer. I. Wall Thickness: Not less than 0.050 inch thick for the face and .78 inch on the edge of door stiles, rails, and mullions. Not less than 0.040 inch (1.02 mm) thick for glass insert frames. Not less than 0.045 inch (1.14 mm) thick for screen insert frames. ALUMINUM SCREEN AND STORM DOORS 08390 - 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 'Po' F. Test Reports: Submit certified laboratory test reports showing that storm doors of the type application and class indicated comply with requirements specified in ANSI/AAMA 1102.7. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide storm doors that are listed by product name and manufacturer in the AAMA Certified Products Directory under the applicable specification heading for combination storm doors. I. Provide storm doors complying with AAMA 1 102.7, "Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum Storm Doors," except where more stringent requirements are indicated. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparing shop drawings and fabricating screen and storm doors. 1.7 EXTRA STOCK A. Deliver to the Owner the following extra stock: I. Five screens complete with fasteners. 2. Five storm panels complete with fasteners. 3. Five locksets. 4. Five closers. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products based on the following: I. Harvey Liftetime Classic 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Members: Alloy and temper recommended by the manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish; comply with ASTM B 209 for aluminum sheet or plate and ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5, or equivalent,for aluminum extrusions. B. Reinforcing, Fasteners, and Hardware: Where metals other than aluminum are standard with the manufacturer for concealed reinforcing, fasteners, and hardware, use stainless steel or other noncorrosive materials that are compatible with aluminum. If steel is used for reinforcing members, provide steel electroplated with a zinc coating that complies with ASTM B 633, or another comparable coating. For exposed fasteners, match color and finish of the metal or hardware being fastened. C. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard weather stripping material that is compatible with aluminum, resistant to weathering, and effectively reduces air leakage. 1. Pile Weather Stripping: Complying with AAMA 701. D. Glazing: Complying with ANSI Z97.1 and with the Consumer Products Safety Commission's requirements in CPSC 16 CFR, Part 1201. ALUMINUM SCREEN AND STORM DOORS 08390 - 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 08390 -ALUMINUM SCREEN AND STORM DOORS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of aluminum screen and storm doors: I. Combination storm doors (AAMA Specification CSD). B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: I. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants"for glazing and sealing sealants. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design Requirements: Provide storm doors that comply with ANSI/AAMA 1102.7 "Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum Storm Doors," except where more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Testing Requirements: Test each application type of storm door by a recognized testing agency, according to ASTM E 330 for uniform load structural performance, ASTM E 283 for air infiltration, and ASTM E 331 for water drainage test for performance class required. I. Performance class equals the design pressure in psf. 2. Air Infiltration Test: Not more than 3.0 cfm/sq. ft. (.00465 cu. m/s x sq. m) of rough opening at 1.57 psf(75 Pa). 3. Uniform Load Test: Test pressure equals 1.5 times the design pressure for 10 seconds. 4. Water Drainage Test: Pressure drop of 0 for 3 minutes with no water on the interior. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division I Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of screen and storm door specified, including details of construction relative to materials, glazing, screens, weather stripping, dimensions of individual components, hardware, operations,test performance, profiles, and finishes. C. Schedules indicating location of each type and size of screen and storm door. D. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of screen and storm doors. Include plans, elevations, sections, details of components, glass and frame thickness, screens, hardware, operating details, and attachments to other units of Work. Aw" E. Samples: A corner sample including 12-inch- (300-mm-) long sections of a typical frame members, in specified finish and with specified screen. Where finish involves normal color and texture variations, include sample sets composed of 2 or more units showing the full range of variations expected. ALUMINUM SCREEN AND STORM DOORS 08390 - 1 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A. Clean vinyl surfaces immediately after installing sliding vinyl-framed patio doors. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess glazing and sealants, dirt, and other substances. B. Clean glass of factory-glazed doors immediately after installing sliding vinyl-framed patio doors. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels from glass surfaces. C. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during the Construction Period. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect sliding vinyl-framed patio doors from damage or deterioration until time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION SLIDING VINYL-FRAMED PATIO DOORS 08260- 6 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. D. Fabricate sliding vinyl-framed patio doors that are reglazable without dismantling panel framing. E. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior. F. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Glaze sliding vinyl-framed patio doors in the factory where practical and possible for applications indicated. Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2. G. Glazing Stops: Provide snap-on glazing stops coordinated with Division 8 Section "Glazing" and with glazing system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match panel frames. H. Insect Screens: Provide heavy duty extruded framed insect screen for each operable sliding door panel. Design doors and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight-fitting removable arrangement, on either inside or outside of door,with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches. I. Aluminum Sills: Thermal barrier with threshold insert. J. Rollers: Dual ball bearing stainless steel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine openings for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions l"` affecting performance of work. I. Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar,sand,and other construction debris. 2. Wood Frame Walls: Dry, clean, sound and well nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in the opening and within 3 inches of the opening. 3. Metal Surfaces: Dry; clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust, corrosion, and welding slag; without sharp edges or offsets at joints. 4. Coordinate door installation with wall flashings and other built-in components. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing doors, hardware, accessories, and other components. B. Set doors level, plumb, and true to line, without warp or rack of frames and panels. Provide proper support and anchor securely in place. C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, to provide weathertight construction. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating panels, screens, and hardware to provide a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. 3.4 CLEANING SLIDING VINYL-FRAMED PATIO DOORS 08260- 5 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: I. Exterior Sliding Vinyl-Framed patio Doors: a. Silver Line Windows, Inc, Series 5500 Multi-Purpose Patio Door 2.2 GLAZING A. Glass: Provide insulating-glass units that comply with safety glazing requirements and with Division 8 Section "Glazing." B. Glazing System: Provide manufacturer's standard glazing system that produces weathertight seal. 2.3 INSECT SCREENS A. Insect Screens: Comply with SMA 2006. 1. Wire Fabric: 18-by-16 mesh of 0.0 1 1-inch- diameter, coated vinyl wire. a. Wire-Fabric Finish: Charcoal gray. 2. Insect Screen Frames: Provide manufacturer's standard extruded-vinyl or formed-tubular-vinyl members, with concealed fasteners, adjustable rollers, and removable PVC spline/anchor 001*1 concealing edge of frame. a. Finish: Match sliding vinyl-framed patio door. 3. Insect Screen Lock: Install manufacturer's standard pull and keyless locking device on each movable panel, lockable from the inside only. Adjust locking device to allow unobstructed movement of the panel across adjacent panel in the direction indicated. 2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. joint Sealants: For installation in exterior perimeter joints around sliding vinyl-framed patio doors, as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate sliding vinyl-framed patio doors in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring doors. I. Comply with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 for performance class and grade indicated. B. Vinyl: Consisting of rigid multi-chambered, PVC extrusions, made from 100%virgin PVC complying with ASTM D 4726, not less than 0.065 inch nominal wall thickness, in permanent, integral color. I. Color: White or Beige, as selected by the Architect. took C. Internal Reinforcing Members: Concealed aluminum structural extrusions complying with ASTM B 221 to provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. SLIDING VINYL-FRAMED PATIO DOORS 08260 -4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. D. Sliding Vinyl-Framed Patio Door Standard: Comply with provisions in AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 for standards of performance, materials, components, and fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated. I. Provide AAMA-certified, sliding vinyl-framed patio doors with an attached label. E. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201. I. Subject to compliance with requirements, permanently mark safety glass with certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. F. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. I. Build mockup of typical sliding vinyl-framed patio door as shown on Drawings. 2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify sliding vinyl-framed patio door openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of sliding vinyl-framed patio doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. I. Failures include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, air infiltration, or condensation. b. Faulty operation of movable panels and hardware. C. Deterioration of insulated glazing, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2. Warranty Period: a. Door: Lifetime. b. Glazing: Twenty years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS SLIDING VINYL-FRAMED PATIO DOORS 08260 - 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. U-Value: 0.34 Btu/sq.ft.x h x deg F or better. D. Air Infiltration: Provide doors with air infiltration indicated at 25-mph wind velocity (1.57 psf) when tested according to AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 or ASTM D 4099. I. Air Infiltration: maximum of 0.08 cfm/sq.ft. E. Water Resistance: Provide vinyl windows with water resistance indicated, tested with and without screens,when tested according to ASTM E 547. I. Water Resistance: no entry at 5.00 gph/sq.ft. minimum (WTP = 5.0 psf min). 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles,and finishes for sliding vinyl-framed patio doors. B. Shop Drawings: For sliding vinyl-framed patio doors. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sliding vinyl-framed patio door indicated. I. Include similar Samples of hardware and accessories involving color selection. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of sliding vinyl-framed patio door indicated. 'W I. Include hardware and accessories Samples to verify color selected. 2. Size: 12 inches. E. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that sliding vinyl-framed patio doors comply with requirements. F. Qualification Data: For fabricator. G. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating that each type,grade, and size of sliding patio door complies with requirements.Test results based on use of downsized test doors will not be accepted. H. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain sliding vinyl-framed patio doors through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of sliding vinyl-framed patio doors and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division I Section "Product Requirements." SLIDING VINYL-FRAMED PATIO DOORS 08260 - 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 00k SECTION 08260 - SLIDING VINYL-FRAMED PATIO DOORS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes replacement sliding vinyl-framed patio doors for exterior locations, with welded panel construction, qualifying for the Energy Star program. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants installed in exterior perimeter joints around sliding vinyl-framed patio doors. 2. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing requirements for sliding vinyl-framed patio doors, including those specified to be factory glazed. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Performance class designations according to AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2: I. R: Residential. B. Performance grade designations according to AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2: I. Design pressure number in pounds force per square foot used to determine the structural test pressure and water test pressure. C. Maximum Size Tested: Width times height in inches of largest single panel tested. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. AAMA Performance Requirements: Provide doors of the performance class and grade indicated below that comply with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2. I. Performance Class and Grade: R 35 min. B. Minimum test size required by AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 for gateway performance. I. 72 by 80 inches minimum . C. Thermal Transmittance: Provide doors with a whole-unit U-value maximum indicated at 15-mph A"* exterior wind velocity and winter condition temperatures when tested according to NFRC 100, with sash internally reinforced. SLIDING VINYL-FRAMED PATIO DOORS 08260 - 1 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. END OF SECTION 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 -4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. B. Construction: Plasticize long edges of panels. Hinge panels with continuous piano hinges inserted into routed grooves and secured with tempered pins. C. Operating Hardware: Apply in factory. Door brackets shall be wrap around. Pivot and mounting hardware 14-gauge cold rolled steel, carbonized. Track floor mounted 6063T6 extruded aluminum with Delrin track guides. Top pivot and guide pins 3-inch compensating pins. D. Pulls: 3 %2" brass wire pulls,factory mounted. E. Finish: Primed with panels filled one side on face and primed two sides with manufacturer's standard off- white primer. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate doors in sizes indicated for Project-site fitting. B. Provide swinging interior doors pre-hung complete with hinges and split-frame jambs and casings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors. I. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated. C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. I. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold. 2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock and hinge edges. D. Field-Finished Doors: Refer to the following for finishing requirements: I. Division 9 Section "Painting." 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 17 and 50 percent during the remainder of the construction period. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials or workmanship, have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42-by-84-inch (1067-by-2134-mm) section, or show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch (0.25 mm in a 75-mm) span. I. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial Completion: a. Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. b. Hollow-Core Interior Doors: One year. C. Solid-core ParticleBoard Bifold Doors: Five years. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: I. Hardboard Faced Hollow Core Doors a. CraftMaster, Masonite Corporation. b. Premdor, Carrara, smooth finish 2. Solid-Core Particle Board Bifolds and Pivot Doors a. Landquist&Son, Inc. 2.2 HOLLOW-CORE DOORS A. Interior Hardboard-Faced Doors: I. Core: Standard hollow core. 2. Construction: Hardboard faces glued directly to core. 3. Blocking: Provide wood blocking with minimum dimensions as follows: a. 5-by-18-inch (125-by-460-mm) lock blocks at both stiles. b. 5-inch (I 25-mm) top- and bottom-rail blocking. C. 10-inch (250-mm) top- and bottom-rail blocking. d. 2-1/2-inch (64-mm) midrail blocking. 0001' 2.3 SOLID CORE PARTICLE BOARD BIFOLD DOORS A. Materials: 45 lb density industrial grade particleboard, %"thick. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I. Hollow-core doors with hardboard faces. 2. Solid-core particle board bifolds. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry"for wood door frames. 2. Division 8 Section "Hardware"for hardware products and installation requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for +. openings. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data. . Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. C. Samples for Verification: I. Veneer samples for solid-core wood veneer face doors (for Alternate). 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons. C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 'ow 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 1 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. low N. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to ANSI A250.8. O. Glazing Stops: Manufacturer's standard,formed from 0.032-inch-thick steel sheet. I. Provide nonremovable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior doors for glass, louvers,and other panels in doors. 2. Provide screw-applied, removable, glazing stops on inside of glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. 2.6 FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied coat of rust-inhibiting primer complying with ANSI A250.10 for acceptance criteria. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's data, and as specified. B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions in SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. I. In existing concrete or masonry construction, provide at least three completed opening anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Set frames and secure to adjacent construction with bolts and masonry anchorage devices. 2. In stud partitions, provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Attach wall anchors to studs with screws. 3. Install fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. 4. For openings 90 inches or more in height, install an additional anchor at hinge and strike jambs. C. Door Installation: Comply with ANSI A250.8. Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSI A250.8. Shim as necessary to comply with SDI 122 and ANSI/DHI A 115.I G. I. Fire-Rated Doors: Install within clearances specified in NFPA 80. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after installation, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch up of compatible air-drying primer. B. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames. '" END OF SECTION 081 10 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 081 10 - 5 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate steel door and frame units to comply with ANSI A250.8 and to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects including warp and buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment,to assure proper assembly at Project site. B. Door Construction: Fabricate doors, panels, and frames from metallic-coated steel sheet. Close top and bottom edges of doors flush as an integral part of door construction or by addition of 0.053-inch- thick, metallic-coated steel channels with channel webs placed even with top and bottom edges. C. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard core construction that produces a door complying with SDI standards. D. Clearances for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Not more than 1/8 inch at jambs and heads, except not more than 1/4 inch between pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch at bottom. E. Clearances for Fire-Rated Doors: As required by NFPA 80. F. Single-Acting, Door-Edge Profile: Beveled edge, unless square edge is indicated. G. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." H. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. I. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts. J. Thermal-Rated (Insulating) Assemblies: At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown or scheduled, provide doors fabricated as thermal-insulating door and frame assemblies and tested according to ASTM C 236 or ASTM C 976 on fully operable door assemblies. I. Unless otherwise indicated, provide thermal-rated assemblies with U-value of 0.41 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F or better. K. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 and ANSI Al 15 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. 1. For concealed overhead door closers, provide space, cutouts, reinforcement, and provisions for fastening in top rail of doors or head of frames, as applicable. L. Frame Construction: Fabricate frames to shape shown. I. For exterior applications, fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded corners and seamless face joints. 2. For interior applications, fabricate knock-down frames with mitered or coped corners, for field assembly. 3. Provide welded frames with temporary spreader bars. M. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface- applied hardware may be done at Project site. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, Commercial Steel (CS), or ASTM A 620/A 620M, Drawing Steel (DS),Type B; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness. C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheets: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with an A40 zinc- iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness. D. Electrolytic Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591/A 591 M, Commercial Steel (CS), Class B coating; mill phosphatized; suitable for unexposed applications; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness where used for face sheets. 2.3 DOORS A. General: Provide doors of sizes,thicknesses, and designs indicated. B. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level: I. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model I (Full Flush) C. Vision Lite Systems: Manufacturer's standard kits consisting of glass lite moldings to accommodate glass thickness and size of vision lite indicated. 2.4 FRAMES A. General: Provide steel frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings that comply with ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. B. Frames of 0.053-inch-thick minimum steel sheet for: I. Level 3 steel doors. C. Frames of 0.043-inch-thick minimum steel sheet for: I. Wood doors. D. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, fabricate stops to receive three silencers on strike jambs of single-door frames and two silencers on heads of double-door frames. E. Plaster Guards: Provide 0.016-inch- thick, steel sheet plaster guards or mortar boxes to close off interior of openings; place at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation. F. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 0.042-inch- thick, electrolytic zinc-coated or metallic-coated steel sheet. I. Wall Anchors in Masonry Construction: 0.177-inch- diameter, steel wire complying with ASTM A 510 may be used in place of steel sheet. G. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where zinc-coated items are to be built into exterior walls, comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C or D as applicable. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 081 10 - 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE , A. Steel Door and Frame Standard: Comply with ANSI A 250.8, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 1. Test Pressure: Test at atmospheric pressure. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished doors and frames. B. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage, and notify shipper and supplier if damage is found. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items match new work and are acceptable to Architect. Remove and replace damaged items that cannot be repaired as directed. C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. If door packaging becomes wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4-inch spaces between stacked doors to permit air circulation. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: I. Steel Doors and Frames: a. Amweld Building Products, Inc. b. Benchmark Commercial Doors;a division of General Products Co., Inc. C. Ceco Door Products; a United Dominion Company. d. Copco Door Co. e. Curries Company. f. Deansteel Manufacturing, Inc. g. Kewanee Corporation (The). h. Mesker Door, Inc. i. Pioneer Industries Inc. j. Republic Builders Products. k. Steelcraft; a division of Ingersoll-Rand. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 569/A 569M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B;free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 081 10 - 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 08110- STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel doors. 2. Steel door frames. 3. Fire-rated door and frame assemblies. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 8 Section "Wood Doors"for wood doors installed in steel frames. 2. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware"for door hardware and weather stripping. 3. Division 8 Section "Glazing"for glass in glazed openings in doors. 4. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for spot-grouting frames installed in steel-framed gypsum board partitions. 5. Division 9 Section "Painting"for field painting factory-primed doors and frames. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Steel Sheet Thicknesses: Thickness dimensions, including those referenced in ANSI A250.8, are minimums as defined in referenced ASTM standards for both uncoated steel sheet and the uncoated base metal of metallic-coated steel sheets. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door and frame indicated, include door designation, type, level and model, material description, core description, construction details, label compliance, sound and fire- resistance ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: I. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors including vertical and horizontal edge details. 3. Frame details for each frame type including dimensioned profiles. 4. Details and locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, accessories,joints, and connections. C. Door Schedule: Use same reference designations indicated on Drawings in preparing schedule for doors and frames. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110- 1 E. \ \ S } \ bio w4J E - LL 0 2 ! E \ # LLo , \ § K ] ] LL o I \ \ E / LL } j 2 • I § k k LL } k § o L < m m } 5 } k O � \ k o 2 w ¥ w o � / 2 \ \ k w % } % L.o I 5 5 5 } m 0 / § § � } � \ \ \ § \ & \ \ < � § $ K 1 L. 2 § $ § m = t j / / \ 2 \ � � / k LL 0 = § / c "o N N � cc O E O `r v hp a0 t C VI C (n y 4J Z 0 fti y J O � N lt} L to v LL D: v .a 0 0 E v m v = v y LL O Vf n i o ao ld dc d � o , W W LL 0 = W v c 0 Gl '� cd > L � o LL W U M h v ld � � y LL f L 0 > l► O d O W Q Q Q Q Q O W U W Q O 4 O �d N VI Gl C 0 u a v v v v O S Cl) C 1 C? C? M Cl) Cl) C7 M M r I 4+ L s pao 'y oo CP ao co 00 0 o ao 0 00 D 2 io iD zo co io r r� io r io s L � 0 M O O O O O O O O O O C 3 M M M M M M M (O d0 M vi G O � � L _ _ 4 _ a O M O Q O M p o } o6 N 0 Z M r 4J EL w fr 0 y W z Z Z W U U %)i OJ m m m q Li Z o a 0 L Cl) V' LO (O 1- O L p D: Q x O O O O O Q m C� Q W U a Z � �' Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and temperature extremes,and that comply with the following: I. Products: Provide one of the following a. 786 Mildew Resistant; Dow Corning. b. Sanitary 1700; GE Silicones. C. NuFlex 302; NUCO Industries, Inc. d. 898 Silicone Sanitary Sealant; Pecora Corporation. e. PSI-61 I; Polymeric Systems, Inc. f. Tremsil 600 White;Tremco. 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Applications:Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls,floors,and counters. 3.8 LATEX JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. INTERIOR SEALANT: Latex Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are required, provide products complying with the following: I. Products: Provide one of the following a. Chem-Calk 600; Bostik Inc. b. NuFlex 330; NUCO Industries, Inc. C. LC 160 All Purpose Acrylic Caulk; Ohio Sealants, Inc. d. AC-20; Pecora Corporation. e. PSI-701; Polymeric Systems, Inc. f. Sonolac; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc. g. Tremflex 834;Tremco. 2. Applications: Painting joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, win- dows, heating fin tube enclosures, elevator entrances, access panels and other equipment and fit- tings. END OF SECTION ew JOINT SEALANTS 07920- 9 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work. 3.7 ELASTOMERIC JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. EXTERIOR SEALANT: Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are required, provide products complying with the following: I. Products: Provide one of the following: a. Chem-Calk 900; Bostik Inc. b. Chem-Calk 915; Bostik Inc. C. Chem-Calk 945; Bostik Inc. d. Vulkem 921; Mameco International. e. PR-255; Ohio Sealants, Inc. f. Dynatrol I; Pecora Corporation. g. Flexiprene 1000; Polymeric Systems, Inc. h. PSI-901; Polymeric Systems, Inc. i. SM7100 Permathane; Schnee-Morehead, Inc. j. DyMonic;Tremco. 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Use Related to Exposure: NT(nontraffic). 4. Applications: Exterior vertical joints surrounding windows and doors. B. EXTERIOR SEALANT: Single-Component Pourable Urethane Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are required, provide products complying with the following: I. Products: Provide one of the following: a. Chem-Calk 950; Bostik Inc. b. Vulkem 45; Mameco International. C. Vulkem Nova 300 SSL; Mameco International. d. NR-201; Pecora Corporation. e. Flexiprene PSI-951; Polymeric Systems, Inc. f. SL 1; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex Inc.. 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and P(pourable). 3. Class: 25. 4. Applications: Exterior horizontal traffic joints at walks and paving. C. INTERIOR SEALANT: Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are required, provide products formulated with fungicide that are intended for sealing interior ceramic tile JOINT SEALANTS 07920- 8 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Perform field-tests of joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: I. Extent of Testing: Test completed elastomeric sealant joints as follows: a. Perform one test for each 1000 feetof joint length thereafter or one test per each floor per elevation. 2. Test Method: Test joint sealants by hand-pull method described below: a. Make knife cuts from one side of joint to the other,followed by two cuts approximately 2 incheslong at sides of joint and meeting cross cut at one end. Place a mark I inch from cross-cut end of 2-inch piece. b. Use fingers to grasp 2-inch piece of sealant between cross-cut end and I-inch mark; pull firmly at a 90-degree angle or more in direction of side cuts while holding a ruler along side of sealant. Pull sealant out of joint to the distance recommended by sealant manufacturer for testing adhesive capability, but not less than that equaling specified maximum movement capability in extension; hold this position for 10 seconds. C. For joints with dissimilar substrates, check adhesion to each substrate separately. Do this by extending cut along one side, checking adhesion to opposite side, and then repeating this procedure for opposite side. !OPP'' 3. Inspect joints for complete fill, for absence of voids, and for joint configuration complying with specified requirements. Record results in a field adhesion test log. 4. Inspect tested joints and report on the following: a. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's field- adhesion hand-pull test criteria. b. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free from voids. C. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements. 5. Record test results in a field adhesion test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions. 6. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used to originally seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and new sealant contacts original sealant. B. Evaluation of Field-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements. 3.5 CLEANING JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 7 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. b. Masonry. C. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates,or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. a. Metal. b. Glass. C. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1 193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. I. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch,twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and back of joints. E. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: I. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated;to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. I. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 6 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 4. Type: Any material indicated above as approved by sealant manufacturer. C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F. Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal,to control sealant depth,and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance. D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: I. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing,water repellents,water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint surfaces include the following: a. Concrete. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 5 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals,tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated for each type in the sealant schedules at the end of Part 3. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for this characteristic. 1. Selected manufacturer must be capable of producing sealant that matches grout colors chosen for ceramic tile work. 2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant in the Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type,grade, class,and uses. B. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600. 2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Latex Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 834 for each product of this description indicated in the Latex Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3. 2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of type indicated below and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: I. Type C: Closed-cell material with a surface skin. 2. Type O: Open-cell material. 3. Type B: Bicellular material with a surface skin. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 -4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. I. Joints in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive elastomeric joint sealants,which are specified by reference to this Section. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: I. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F 2. When joint substrates are wet. B. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. C. Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates. 1.8 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Installer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by Installer agreeing to repair or replace exterior elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. I. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by elastomeric sealant manufacturer agreeing to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. I. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. D. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint sealants from the following: I. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's 00W written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of joint sealants certifying that products furnished comply with requirements and are suitable for the use indicated. D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. E. Field Test Report Log: For each elastomeric sealant application. Include information specified in "Field Quality Control" Article. F. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer indicating the following: I. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint sealants similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in joint- sealant installations with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. I. Use manufacturers standard test methods to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. a. Perform tests under environmental conditions replicating those that will exist during installation. 2. Submit not fewer than nine pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. 3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures, including the use of specially formulated primers. S. Testing will not be required if joint sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data that are based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted. D. Mockups: Before installing joint sealants, apply elastomeric sealants as follows to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution: JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 07920-JOINT SEALANTS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes sealants for the following applications, including those specified by reference to this Section: B. This Section includes sealants for the following applications: I. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces: a. Perimeter joints between frames of doors and windows. 2. Exterior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces: a. Joints between different materials at walks and paving. b. Sealant joints as indicated within surfaces of walks and paving. 3. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces: a. Perimeter joints of exterior openings. b. Perimeter painting joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows, heating fin tube enclosures,access panels and other equipment and fittings. C. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls,floors, and counters. C. Related Sections include the following: I. Division S Section "Glazing"for glazing sealants. 2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for sealing perimeter joints of gypsum board partitions to reduce sound transmission. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-resistant continuous joint seals and create paintable transition surfaces between materials, without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. Imo* 1.4 SUBMITTALS JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 1 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent fill materials of fire-resistive joint system from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from fire-resistive joint system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing fire-resistive joint system's seal with substrates or damaging adjoining surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with Part I "Performance Requirements" Article and fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming/packing/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. C. Install fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: I. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings and forming/packing/backing materials as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, 10"k uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to joints as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure fire-resistive joint systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated fire- resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fire-resistive joint systems complying with specified requirements. 3.5 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEM SCHEDULE A. Floor-to-Wall and Wall-to-Wall Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: I. Assembly Rating: I hour or 2 hours, as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Nominal Joint Width: As indicated. 3. Product: W. R. Grace Construction Products, FlameSafe FS 900+ Sealant. OOW END OF SECTION 07842 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07842 -4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS A. Compatibility: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that are compatible with joint substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming materials,that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part I "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for systems indicated. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturers, subject to requirements herein, include the following: I. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc., Scarborough, ON, Canada 2. W.R. Grace&Co.—Conn, Cambridge, MA 3. Hilti, Inc.,Tulsa, OK 4. Johns Manville, Denver, CO 5. Nelson Firestop Products,Tulsa, OK 6. NUCO Inc., Guelph, ON, CANADA 7. RectorSeal Corporation (The), Houston,TX 8. Specified Technologies Inc., Somerville, NJ 9. 3M Fire Protection Products Division,St. Paul, MN 10. Tremco, Sealant/Weatherproofing Division, Beachwood, OH 11. USG Corporation, Chicago, IL PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of work. I. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean joints immediately before installing fire-resistive joint systems to comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: I. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of fill materials. 2. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07842 - 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FMG according to FMG 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors." B. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through-penetration firestop systems and fire-resistive joint systems in Project to a single qualified installer. C. Source Limitations: Obtain fire-resistive joint systems, for each kind of joint and construction condition indicated,through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in Part I "Performance Requirements"Article: I. Fire-resistance tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for fire-resistive joint systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Fire-resistive joint systems are identical to those tested per methods indicated in Part I "Performance Requirements"Article and comply with the following: a. Fire-resistive joint system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. Fire-resistive joint systems correspond to those indicated by referencing system designations of the qualified testing and inspecting agency. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver fire-resistive joint system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project and with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials for fire-resistive joint systems to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture,temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install fire-resistive joint systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain,frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Ventilate fire-resistive joint systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or, if this is inadequate,forced-air circulation. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire-resistive joint systems are installed according to specified requirements. ek B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate fire-resistive joint systems. FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07842- 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Awk SECTION 07842- FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fire-resistive joint systems for the following: I. Floor-to-wall joints. 2. Wall-to-wall joints. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants"for non-fire-resistive joint sealants. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire- resistance rating of assembly in which fire-resistive joint systems are installed. B. Joint Systems in and between Fire-Resistance-Rated Constructions: Provide systems with assembly ratings equaling or exceeding the fire-resistance ratings of construction that they join, and L-ratings indicated as determined by UL 2079. C. For fire-resistive systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively,as determined per ASTM E 84. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each fire-resistive joint system, show each kind of construction condition in which joints are installed; also show relationships to adjoining construction. Include fire-resistive joint system design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that demonstrates compliance with requirements for each condition indicated. I. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each fire-resistive joint system configuration for construction and penetrating items. C. Product Certificates: For each type of fire-resistive joint system, signed by product manufacturer. D. Qualification Data: For Installer. FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07842 - 1 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. . Use joint adhesive for nonmoving joints specified not to be soldered. , E. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams,and solder. F. Separations: Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces, at locations of contact,with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. I. Bed flanges of Work in a thick coat of roofing cement where required for waterproof performance. G. Counterflashings: Coordinate installation of counterflashings with installation of assemblies to be protected by counterflashing. Install counterflashings in reglets or receivers. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant, lead wedges and sealant, interlocking folded seam, or blind rivets and sealant. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 2 inches and bed with sealant. H. Roof-Drainage System: Install drainage items fabricated from sheet metal, with straps, adhesives, and anchors recommended by SMACNA's Manual or the item manufacturer, to drain roof in the most efficient manner. Coordinate roof-drain flashing installation with roof-drainage system installation. Coordinate flashing and sheet metal items for steep-sloped roofs with roofing installation. I. Install continuous gutter screens on gutters with noncorrosive fasteners, arranged as hinged units to swing open for cleaning gutters. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION OOW A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure sheet metal flashing and trim Work during construction is without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 5 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2. Downspouts: Rectangular, 3 inch by 4 inch minimum. Downspouts shall terminate into cast iron pipe with watertight rubber sleeve seal, located at approximately 3 feet above finish grade. Cast iron pipe shall extend into subgrade PVC drain pipe system. C. Exposed Trim: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Manufacturer's standard system consisting of 0.050-inch thick aluminum with standard baked acrylic shop finish, to match shapes of existing materials. Provide clips, fasteners, and snap on trim as required. Provide lapped seams as detailed in the SMACNA guidelines. D. Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: I. Aluminum: 0.040-inch thick. E. Drip Edges: Fabricate from the following material: I. Aluminum: 0.040-inch thick. F. Roof-penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: I. Aluminum: 0.040-inch thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION Apok 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions under which sheet metal flashing and trim are to be installed and verify that Work may properly commence. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Anchor units of Work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install Work with laps,joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof. B. Install exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal Work. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than I inch deep,filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). D. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to Pow comply with SMACNA standards. Fill joint with sealant and form metal to completely conceal sealant. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620- 4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. H. Gutter Screen: 114-inch hardware cloth installed in sheet metal frames. Fabricate screen and frame of same basic material as gutters and downspouts. I. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586,Type I, asbestos free, asphalt based. 2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Sheet Metal Fabrication Standard: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations of SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item indicated. B. Comply with details shown to fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that fit substrates and result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance once installed. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. C. Form exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated,with exposed edges folded back to form hems. D. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. E. Expansion Provisions: Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than I inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). F. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. G. Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. H. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of sheet metal exposed to public view. I. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as sheet metal component being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. I. Size: As recommended by SMACNA manual or sheet metal manufacturer for application but never less than thickness of metal being secured. 2.4 SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. General: Fabricate sheet metal items in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than that listed below for each application and metal. B. Gutters and downspouts: Manufacturer's standard, 0.050-inch minimum thickness pre-finished aluminum, with baked on acrylic shop finish, minimum 1.0-mil dry thickness, color as selected by Architect. I. Gutters: Ogee shaped, 6 inch gutter width. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experience Installer who has completed sheet metal flashing and trim work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate Work of this Section with interfacing and adjoining Work for proper sequencing of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance, durability of Work, and protection of materials and finishes. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated and with not less than the strength and durability of alloy and temper designated below: I. Factory-Painted Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, 3003-H 14, with a minimum thickness of 0.040 inch, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T52, with a minimum thickness of 0.080 inch for primary legs of extrusions that are anodized, unless otherwise indicated. B. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792, Class AZ-50 coating, Grade 40 or to suit project conditions, with 55 percent aluminum, not less than 0.0396 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Same metal as sheet metal flashing or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened. B. Asphalt Mastic: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type asphalt mastic, nominally free of sulfur and containing no asbestos fibers, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. C. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant. D. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by sheet metal manufacturer and fabricator of components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." E. Epoxy Seam Sealer: 2-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior and interior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints. F. Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet metal manufacturer for waterproof and weather- resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet metal. A",- G. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units as required for installation of Work, matching or compatible with material being installed; noncorrosive; size and thickness required for performance. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 07620- SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes sheet metal flashing and trim in the following categories: I. Gutters and downspouts. 2. Metal flashing trim. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: I. Division 7 Section "Vinyl Siding"for aluminum brake metal formed trim covering. 2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants"for elastomeric sealants. 3. Division 7 Section "Asphalt Shingles"for shingle roofing. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division I Specification Sections. B. Product Data including manufacturer's material and finish data, installation instructions, and general recommendations for each specified flashing material and fabricated product. C. Shop Drawings of each item specified showing layout, profiles, methods of joining,and anchorage details. D. Samples of sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessory items, in the specified finish. Where finish involves normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets composed of 2 or more units showing the full range of variations expected. I. 8-inch- square Samples of specified sheet materials to be exposed as finished surfaces. 2. 12-inch- long Samples of factory-fabricated products exposed as finished Work. Provide complete with specified factory finish. E. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance Article to demonstrate eA their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 1 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. General: Comply with siding manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply. Center nails in elongated nailing slots without binding siding to allow for thermal movement. Overlap joints to shed water away from direction of prevailing wind. B. Install vinyl siding soffit and accessories according to ASTM D 4756. I. Install siding in continuous lengths without seams. C. Install vinyl door and window trim using methods that will ensure tight, hairline joints that will not open up over time. D. Install vinyl siding using methods that will ensure against panels unlocking at floor plates and band joists. E. Install backerboard insulation to minimize telegraphing of existing wall finishes to surface. F. Install coil stock cladding to exterior trim in locations noted. I. Use professional-grade brakes to create bends in aluminum wherever possible. a. Where not possible, use hand seamers intended for the purpose. b. Do not bend coil stock with site-fabricated brakes. 2. Ensure that trim material is straight, square, level and plumb before installing coil stock. 3. Correct trim prior to coil stock installation,as necessary. 4. Avoid face nailing coil stock in areas exposed to view,wherever possible. 5. Provide coil stock in one piece along length of trim. 6. If required due to length of trim, install multiple pieces of coil stock from the bottom up, to shed water. 7. Install coil stock without oil canning or buckling. 8. Scribe coil stock in locations where edges meet other materials. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective siding materials and replace with new materials complying with specified requirements. B. Clean finished surfaces according to siding manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean condition during construction. END OF SECTION 07460 VINYL SIDING 07460- 5 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. D. Mounting Blocks: Provide manufacturer's mounting blocks for all exterior outlets, lights, vent penetrations, etc. E. Elastomeric Joint Sealant: Single-component neutral-curing silicone joint sealant complying with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for Use NT (nontraffic) and for Uses M, G,A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O joint substrates. F. Fasteners: I. For fastening to wood, use ribbed bugle-head screws of sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of I inch into substrate. 2. For fastening vinyl, use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners. Where fasteners will be exposed to view where nailing is unavoidable, use prefinished aluminum fasteners in color to match item being fastened. G. Backerboard Insulation: Provide 3/8 in.thick backerboard insulation. 2.5 COLORS AND TEXTURES A. Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated, provide siding and accessories complying with the following requirements: I. Retain one requirement below. If retaining second requirement, indicate colors and textures on a separate schedule. 2. Provide Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors and textures for siding and accessories of type indicated. Accessories may be required to match siding or to be of a 00*1 different color or texture as selected by Architect. 3. Siding manufacturer chosen shall have a minimum color range of 12 colors of each siding type specified and a minimum of 12 colors of window, door and lineal trim specified. B. Provide aluminum coil stock in colors to match vinyl trim or siding colors, as chosen by Architect. C. A different color scheme may be provided at the exterior of each unit to be selected by the Architect from a total of ten schemes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of siding. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. 3.3 INSTALLATION VINYL SIDING 07460 -4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. d. Bird Vinyl Products. e. CertainTeed Corp.;Vinyl Building Products Group. f. Georgia-Pacific Corp. g. Reynolds Metals Co. In. Royal Building Products. i. Wolverine Technologies, Inc. 2.2 SIDING A. Vinyl Siding: Integrally colored,vinyl siding complying with ASTM D 3679. I. Horizontal Pattern: to match existing sidings, in beaded-edge, single board style. 2. Texture: Smooth 3. Minimum Nominal Thickness: 0.044 inch. 4. Minimum Profile Depth (Butt Thickness): 5/8 inch. 5. Nailing Hem: Double thickness. 6. Colors for Vinyl Siding: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Provide ABTCo Fairway Double 4, in matte finish or architect-approved equal. An equal product must meet stiffness, wind resistance, color choices, trim choices and other characteristics of the product specified in order to be considered an equal to that product. Each building will have a minimum of two siding colors and there shall be two color schemes for the overall project. 2.3 SOFFIT A"* A. Vinyl Soffit: Integrally colored,vinyl soffit complying with ASTM D 4477. I. Pattern: 12-inch exposure in V-grooved, double 6-inch board style. 2. Texture: Smooth . 3. Ventilation: Provide perforated soffit, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Minimum Nominal Thickness: 0.040 inch . 5. Minimum Profile Height: 5/8 inch . 6. Colors for Vinyl Soffit: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of available colors. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Siding Accessories: Provide starter strips, edge trim, corner cap, and other items as recommended by siding manufacturer for building configuration. I. Provide accessories made from same material as adjacent siding, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide accessories matching color and texture of adjacent siding, unless otherwise indicated. B. Flashing: Provide aluminum flashing complying with Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" at window and door heads and where indicated. I. Finish for Aluminum Flashing: Siliconized polyester coating, same color as siding . C. Metal Trim: Provide 0.019" baked enamel finish coil stock cladding, rabbeted for stiffness, as detailed, on other exterior trim, unless noted otherwise. A", 07460 - 3 VINYL SIDING Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. C. Mockup: Build mockup to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic " effects. 1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store materials in a dry,well-ventilated,weathertight place. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with siding installation only if substrate is completely dry and if existing and forecasted weather conditions permit siding to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1.7 SEQUENCING A. Coordinate installation with flashings and other adjoining construction to ensure proper sequencing. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace siding that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, cracking, deforming,fading, or otherwise deteriorating beyond normal weathering. I. Fading is defined as loss of color, after cleaning with product recommended by manufacturer, of more than 5 Hunter color-difference units as measured according to ASTM D 2244. 2. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. I. Furnish full lengths of siding and trim in a quantity equal to 2 percent of amount installed. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: I. Vinyl Siding: a. ABTCo. b. Alcoa Building Products. C. Alside, Inc. VINYL SIDING 07460 - 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 07460-VINYL SIDING PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I. Vinyl siding. 2. Vinyl soffit. 3. Aluminum coil stock trim covering. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 6 Section "Building Insulation"for building paper and building wrap. 2. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry"for wood and wood-based sidings and for exterior trim. 3. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing, gutters, and other sheet metal work. 4. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For siding, soffit and metal trim. C. Samples for Verification: For each type, color,texture, and pattern required. I. 12-inch- long-by-actual-width Sample of siding. 2. 24-inch-wide-by-36-inch- high Sample panel of siding assembled on plywood backing. 3. 12-inch- long-by-actual-width Sample of soffit. 4. 12-inch- long-by-actual-width Sample of trim. D. Product Certificates: For each type of siding and soffit, signed by product manufacturer. E. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each type of siding required. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Siding and Soffit: Obtain each type, color, texture, and pattern of siding and soffit, including related accessories, through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Vinyl Siding Certification Program: Provide vinyl siding products that are listed in VSI's list of certified products. VINYL SIDING 07460 - 1 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Flashing: Provide aluminum flashing complying with Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" 0"k at window and door heads,top of siding at adjoining material, and where otherwise indicated. I. Finish for Aluminum Flashing: Siliconized polyester coating, color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's available color selection B. Fasteners: I. For fastening to wood, use siding nails of sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of I inch into substrate. 2. For fastening fiber-cement siding, use stainless-steel fasteners. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of siding. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with siding manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective siding materials and replace with new materials complying with specified requirements. B. Clean finished surfaces according to siding manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean condition during construction. END OF SECTION CEMENT BOARD SIDING 07450 - 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store materials in a dry,well-ventilated, weathertight place. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with siding installation only if substrate is completely dry and if existing and forecasted weather conditions permit siding to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1.7 SEQUENCING A. Coordinate installation with flashings and other adjoining construction to ensure proper sequencing. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace siding that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, cracking, deforming, or otherwise deteriorating beyond normal weathering. I. Warranty Period: 50 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. I. Furnish full lengths of siding and trim in a quantity equal to 2 percent of amount installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SIDING A. Fiber-Cement Siding: Siding made from fiber-cement board that does not contain asbestos fibers; complies with ASTM C 1186,Type A, Grade II; is classified as noncombustible when tested according to ASTM E 136; and has a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84. I. Horizontal Pattern: Boards, size indicated, in plain style. a. Texture: Smooth. 2. Panel Pattern: Boards or 48-inch-wide sheets with smooth stucco wood-grain texture. 3. Factory Priming: Manufacturer's standard acrylic primer. 2.2 ACCESSORIES CEMENT BOARD SIDING 07450- 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. look SECTION 07450 - CEMENT BOARD SIDING PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I. Fiber-cement siding. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 6 Section "Insulation"for building paper and building wrap. 2. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry"for wood and wood-based sidings and for exterior trim. 3. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing, gutters, and other sheet metal work. 4. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For siding. C. Samples for Verification: For each type, color,texture,and pattern required. I. 12-inch- long-by-actual-width Sample of siding. 2. 12-inch- long-by-actual-width Sample of soffit. 3. 12-inch- long-by-actual-width Sample of trim. D. Product Certificates: For each type of siding, signed by product manufacturer. E. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each type of siding required. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Siding: Obtain each type, color, texture, and pattern of siding, including related accessories, through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Mockup: Build mockup to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. CEMENT BOARD SIDING 07450 - 1 Country Lane Estates December 16,2004 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. shingles with tabs removed. Fasten asphalt shingles in the desired weather exposure pattern; use number of fasteners per shingle as recommended by manufacturer. Use vertical and horizontal chalk lines to ensure straight coursing. I. Cut and fit asphalt shingles at valleys, ridges, and edges to provide maximum weather protection. Provide same weather exposure at ridges as specified for roof. Lap asphalt shingles at ridges to shed water away from direction of prevailing wind. 2. Use fasteners at ridges of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing as specified. 3. Pattern: 1/3 shingle spacing offset at succeeding courses. F. Ridge Vents: Install ridge vents according to manufacturer's instructions. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Replace any damaged materials installed under this Section with new materials that meet specified requirements. END OF SECTION 07311 OOMK ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 -5 Country Lane Estates December 16,2004 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. ventilation per running foot and to accept roofing shingles. D. Asphalt Plastic Cement: Nonasbestos fibrated asphalt cement, complying with ASTM D 4586. E. Nails: Aluminum or hot-dip galvanized steel, 0.120-inch- diameter barbed shank, sharp-pointed, conventional roofing nails with a minimum 3/8-inch- diameter head and of sufficient length to penetrate 3/4 inch into solid decking or at least 1/8 inch through plywood sheathing. I. Where nails are in contact with flashing, prevent galvanic action by providing nails made from the same metal as that of the flashing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrate for compliance with requirements for substrates, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of asphalt shingles. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. Cover knotholes or other minor voids in substrate with sheet metal flashing secured with noncorrosive roofing nails. B. Coordinate installation with flashings and other adjoining work to ensure proper sequencing. Do not install roofing materials until all vent stacks and other penetrations through roof sheathing have been installed and are securely fastened against movement. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations but not less than those recommended by ARMA's"Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual"or"The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual." I. Fasten asphalt shingles to roof sheathing with nails. B. Felt Underlayment: Apply I layer of felt underlayment horizontally over entire surface to receive asphalt shingles, lapping succeeding courses a minimum of 2 inches, end laps a minimum of 4 inches, and hips and valleys a minimum of 6 inches. Fasten felt with sufficient number of roofing nails or noncorrosive staples to hold underlayment in place until asphalt shingle installation. I. Apply an additional layer of felt underlayment on roof decks with a slope of 2 to 4 inches per foot. 2. Omit felt underlayment at areas of waterproof underlayment. Lap felt underlayment over waterproof underlayment as recommended by manufacturer but not less than 2 inches. C. Waterproof Underlayment: Apply waterproof underlayment at eaves. Cover deck from eaves to at least 36 inches inside exterior wall line. I. In addition to eaves,apply waterproof underlayment in place of felt underlayment at valleys. D. Flashing: Install metal flashing and trim as indicated and according to details and recommendations of the "Asphalt Roofing" section of "The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual" and ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual." E. Install asphalt shingles, beginning at roofs lower edge, with a starter strip of roll roofing or inverted asphalt ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 -4 Country Lane Estates December 16,2004 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. b. Bituthene Ice and Water Shield;Grace: W.R. Grace&Co. k c. Nordshield Ice and WaterGard; Nord Bitumi US, Inc. d. F210; Northern Elastomeric, Inc. e. Polyguard Deck Guard; Polyguard Products, Inc. f. Polyken 640 Underlayment Membrane; Polyken Technologies; Kendall Co. Division. g. QSC-707;Quaker Construction Products, Inc. h. Moisture Guard;Tamko Asphalt Products, Inc. i. Weather Watch;GAF Building Materials Corporation. j. Jiffy Seal Ice and Water Guard; Protecto Wrap Co. k. Ice Guard Membrane No. 108-AG;Royston Laboratories, Inc. 2.2 ASPHALT SHINGLES A. Colors,Blends,and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated, provide asphalt shingles with the following requirements: I. Provide Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors, textures, and patterns for asphalt shingles of type indicated. No manufacturer shall be submitted who does not comply with this specification or does not have a minimum of 12 colors in their available color range. B. Square-Tab, Fiberglass Strip Shingles: Mineral-surfaced, self-sealing, 3-tab, fiberglass-based, strip asphalt shingles, complying with both ASTM D 3018,Type I,and ASTM D 3462. Provide shingles with a Class A fire- test-response classification that pass the wind-resistance-test requirements of ASTM D 3 16 1,Type 1. C. Hip and Ridge Shingles: Job-fabricated units cut from actual asphalt shingles used. 2.3 METAL TRIM AND FLASHING A. Sheet Metal Materials: Furnish the following sheet metal materials: I. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209, alloy 3003 H 14 with baked enamel finish, minimum 0.024 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal Drip Edge: Brake-formed sheet metal with at least a 2-inch roof deck flange and a 1-1/2-inch fascia flange with a 3/8-inch drip at lower edge. Furnish the following material in lengths of 8 or 10 feet. I. Material: Baked enamel finish aluminum sheets. C. Metal Flashing: Job-cut to sizes and configurations required. I. Material: Baked enamel finish aluminum sheets. D. Vent Pipe Flashing: Prefabricated vinyl boot,sized for pipe size. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Felt Underlayment: Type I, 36-inch- wide, asphalt-saturated organic felt, complying with ASTM D 226 (No. 15)or ASTM D 4869. B. Waterproof Underlayment: Minimum 40-mil- thick, self-adhering, polymer-modified, bituminous sheet membrane, complying with ASTM D 1970. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. C. Ridge Vent: Prefabricated copolymer ridge vent with snow filter, designed to provide 18 square inches of ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 - 3 Country Lane Estates December 16,2004 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. protection. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installing asphalt shingles only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be performed according to manufacturers' recommendations and warranty requirements,and when substrate is completely dry. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with,other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace asphalt shingles that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, deformation or deterioration of asphalt shingles beyond normal weathering. I. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard transferable warranty, but not less than 25 years after date of Substantial Completion. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage,and are identified with labels clearly describing contents. . Furnish I square coverage of asphalt shingles, in each color utilized, identical to those to be installed, in unbroken bundles. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: I. Asphalt Shingles: a. CertainTeed Corporation,Seal King 25. b. GAF Building Materials Corporation, Royal Sovereign. c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.,Supreme. d. Tamko Asphalt Products, Inc., Elite Glass Seal 2. Ridge Vents: a. Ridge Filter Shinglevent;Air Vent, Inc. b. Ridge Filtervent;Air Vent, Inc. (for Class A). c. Cobra Ridge Vent; GAF Building Materials Corporation. d. Ridgemaster Plus—Shingle-over; Midamerica, Inc. e. Roll Vent; Obdyke: Benjamin Obdyke, Inc. f. Trimline;Trimline Roof Ventilation Systems. 3. Waterproof Underlayment: a. WinterGuard; CertainTeed Corporation. ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 -2 Country Lane Estates December 16,2004 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. SECTION 07311 -ASPHALT SHINGLES PART I -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes asphalt shingles for steep roofs. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: I. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry"for wood sheathing and framing. 2. Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal"for gutters and downspouts. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division I Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of product specified, including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components,profiles,textures,and colors. C. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's sample finishes showing the full range of colors and profiles available for each type of asphalt shingle indicated. D. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's actual finishes on aluminum for baked enamel finish aluminum products showing full range of colors and profiles available. Printed cards indicating finishes will not be acceptable. E. Samples for verification in the form of 2 full-size units of each type of asphalt shingle indicated showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Classification: Where products with a fire-test-response classification are specified, provide asphalt shingles identical to those tested according to ASTM E 108 or UL 790 and listed by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify each bundle of asphalt shingles with appropriate markings indicating fire-test-response classification of applicable testing and inspecting agency. B. Wind-Resistance-Test Characteristics: Where wind-resistant asphalt shingles are indicated, provide products identical to those tested according to ASTM D 3161 or UL 997 and passed. Identify each bundle of asphalt shingles with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's unopened bundles or containers with labels intact. B. Handle and store materials at Project site to prevent water damage, staining, or other physical damage. Store roll goods on end. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for job-site storage, handling, and ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 - I Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch overlap, unless otherwise indicated. B. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. I. Seal seams, edges,fasteners, and penetrations with tape. 2. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape. C. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturers written instructions. I. Prime substrates as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches, except that at flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width. 3. Lap flashing over weather-resistant building paper at bottom and sides of openings. 4. Lap weather-resistant building paper over flashing at heads of openings. 5. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller to ensure that flashing is completely adhered to substrates. 3.9 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse,and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. '" END OF SECTION 07210 AOW BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 6 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. B. Seal joints between closed-cell (nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer. C. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping. I. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation. D. Install mineral-fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: I. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. E. For wood-framed construction, install mineral-fiber blankets according to ASTM C 1320 and as follows: I. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of adjacent blanket to produce airtight installation after concealing finish material is in place. F. Stuff glass-fiber, loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where abutting an exterior wall. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu.ft.. 3.7 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS A. General: Wherever framing is exposed or new framing or furring added, provide vapor retarder. Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation. B. Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer. C. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder. D. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder. 3.8 INSTALLATION OF AIR BARRIERS A. General: Cover sheathing with air barrier as follows: I. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion- or control-joint locations. BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 5 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice and snow. C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located on inside of insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping. E. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF BLOWN IN INSULATION A. Provide blown in insulation,of thickness required,to achieve the following:. I. R value: R-30 or better. (final insulation level—including existing material.) B. Provide eave ventilation troughs of preformed rigid fiberboard or plastic sheet, fastened between existing rafters to maintain eave vent spaces. C. Provide continuous layer of insulation over existing insulation and framing,to remain in place: I. Entire attic areas, over apartments. 2. Close off openings to prevent escape of insulation into unintended areas. 3. At attic hatch,walkways,ventilating equipment and similar areas, arrange insulation so that access to attic is unimpeded. 4. Provide push up insulated cover for attic hatch. D. Comply with the Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association "Special Report—Standard Practice for Installing Cellulose Insulation." 3.5 INSTALLATION OF FIRE-CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS A. Install fire-containment systems to fill gaps to comply with fire-containment system manufacturer's written instructions to produce installations with ratings matching those established during fire-test- response testing. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION BUILDING INSULATION 07210- 4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 2.3 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils minimum thick,with maximum permeance rating of 0.06 perm. B. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. 2.4 AIR BARRIERS A. Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air retarder; with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84; UV stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. I. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Pactiv, Inc.; GreenGuard RainDrop, or approved equal. B. Building-Wrap Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by building-wrap manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap. C. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.030 inch (0.8 mm). I. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Carlisle Coatings &Waterproofing; CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing,at masonry. b. Protecto Wrap Company; BT-20 XLor PS-45 at windows. D. Primer for Flexible Flashing: Product recommended by manufacturer of flexible flashing for substrate. 2.5 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. B. Protection Board: Premolded, semirigid asphalt/fiber composition board, 1/4 inch thick, formed under heat and pressure, of standard sizes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. B. Protect plastic insulation as follows: I. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATING MATERIALS A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards. I. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses,widths, and lengths. B. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and density indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 75 and 450, respectively: 1. Type IV, 1.60 lb/cu. ft., unless otherwise indicated. C. Unfaced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from glass ;with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. D. Faced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (blankets with reflective membrane facing), Class A (membrane-faced surface with a flame spread of 25 or less); Category I (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil-scrim-kraft, foil-scrim, or foil-scrim-polyethylene vapor-retarder membrane on one face; consisting of fibers manufactured from glass. E. Blown in insulation: cellulosic fiber loose fill insulation: Recycled cellulosic fiber insulation complying with State Building Code Requirements, 16 CFR Part 1209, and ASTM C 739, chemically treated for flame resistance,and processing and handling characteristics. 2.2 FIRE-CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS A. Where indicated for gaps in fire-resistance-rated floor and wall, provide a fire-containment system with the fire-test-response characteristics required, as determined by testing identical systems per UBC Standard 26-9 and UL 2079 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. I. Safing Insulation, U.S. Gypsum. BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Perimeter slab insulation. 2. Cavity wall insulation. 3. Concealed building insulation. 4. Vapor retarders (vapor barrier). 5. Air barriers. 6. Flexible flashings at openings in sheathing. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 2. Division 9 Sections "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for installation of insulation specified by reference to this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency,for insulation products. C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. I. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 1 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 3. Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. 4. Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Apply flat grain lumber with bark side exposed to weather. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Replace finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 - 5 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. C. Ease edges of lumber less than I inch in nominal thickness to I/16-inch radius and edges of lumber I inch or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch radius. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. B. Before installing finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours, unless longer conditioning is recommended by manufacturer. C. Prime lumber for exterior applications to be painted, including both faces and edges. Cut to required lengths and prime ends. Comply with requirements in Division 9 Section "Painting." 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials that are unsound,warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, or too small.to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements. I. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns. B. Install finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. I. Scribe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Countersink fasteners,fill surface flush, and sand where face fastening is unavoidable. 3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining finish carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch maximum offset for reveal installation. 4. Coordinate finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate finish carpentry. 3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches long, except where necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints, where necessary for alignment. I. Match color and grain pattern across joints. 2. Install trim after gypsum board joint finishing operations are completed. FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 - 4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2.4 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM A. Lumber Trim for Opaque Finish (Painted): Finished lumber (S4S), either finger-jointed or solid lumber, of the following species and grades: I. Grade Finish or I Common eastern white pine; NELMA or NLGA. 2.5 SHELVING AND CLOTHES RODS A. Shelving: Vinyl coated wire shelving system, Kraftmaid or equal. I. Provide adjustable brackets in new handicapped accessible units. 2. Provide, entire width of closet,five 12" deep shelves in linen closets. 3. Provide, entire width of closet, one 12" deep shelf and rod combination in all other closets. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails or screws of the following materials, in sufficient length to penetrate minimum of 1-1/2 inches into substrate, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer: I. Stainless steel. 2. Hot-dip galvanized steel. 3. Aluminum. 4. Prefinished aluminum in color to match stain, where face fastening of material to receive stain is unavoidable. B. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible. I. Where finish carpentry materials are exposed in areas of high humidity, provide fasteners and anchorages with hot-dip galvanized coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. C. Glue: Aliphatic- or phenolic-resin wood glue recommended by manufacturer for general carpentry use. I. Use wood glues that have a VOC content of 30 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). D. Flashing: Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing materials installed in finish carpentry. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of specified inspection agencies and with manufacturer's written recommendations for moisture content of finish carpentry at relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas. B. Back out or kerf backs of the following members, except members with ends exposed in finished work: I. Exterior standing and running trim wider than 5 inches. 2. Interior standing and running trim, except shoe and crown molds. FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 - 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. B. Deliver interior finish carpentry only when environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. If finish carpentry must be stored in other than installation areas, store only where environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit work to be performed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements and at least one coat of specified finish to be applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards' Committee Board of Review. I. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing,and mill. 2. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece. B. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS I. C. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD-Exterior Glue. 2.2 EXTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM A. Lumber Trim for Painted Applications: Kiln-dried, finger-jointed or solid lumber with surfaced (smooth) face and of the following species and grade: I. Grade Finish or I Common (Colonial) eastern white pine, eastern hemlock-balsam fir-tamarack, eastern spruce, or white woods; NELMA, NLGA,WCLIB, or WWPA. 2.3 EXTERIOR SOFFITS A. Plywood Soffits: Exterior-type, Grade A-C APA-Rated siding. I. Thickness: 3/8 inch or As indicated. 000k 2. Face Species: Southern pine . 3. Pattern: Plain. 4. Surface: Smooth . FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 - 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior standing and running trim. 2. Exterior plywood soffits. 3. Interior standing and running trim for field-painted finish. 4. Shelving and clothes rods. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not exposed to view and for structural wood decking and framing exposed to view. 2. Division 7 Section "Vinyl Siding" and Division 7 Section "Fiber Cement Siding'for siding. 3. Division 9 Section "Painting"for priming and backpriming of finish carpentry. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Inspection agencies,and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: I. NELMA- Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association. 2. NLGA- National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. SCMA- Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association. 4. WCLIB-West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 5. WWPA-Western Wood Products Association. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles,textures,and colors. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING FINISH CARPENTRY 06200- 1 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. H. Provide solid blocking between joists under jamb studs for openings. I. Under non-load-bearing partitions, provide double joists separated by solid blocking equal to depth of studs above. I. Provide triple joists separated as above, under partitions receiving ceramic tile and similar heavy finishes or fixtures. J. Provide bridging of type indicated below,at intervals of 96 inches o.c., between joists. I. Diagonal wood bridging formed from bevel-cut, I-by-3-inch nominal- size lumber,double-crossed and nailed at both ends to joists. 2. Steel bridging installed to comply with bridging manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 CEILING JOIST AND RAFTER FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Ceiling Joists: Install ceiling joists with crown edge up and complying with requirements specified above for floor joists. Face nail to ends of parallel rafters. . Where ceiling joists are at right angles to rafters, provide additional short joists parallel to rafters from wall plate to first joist; nail to ends of rafters and to top plate and nail to first joist or anchor with framing anchors or metal straps. Provide I-by-8-inch nominal- size or 2-by-4-inch nominal- size stringers spaced 48 inches o.c. crosswise over main ceiling joists. B. Rafters: Notch to fit exterior wall plates and toe nail or use metal framing anchors. Double rafters to form headers and trimmers at openings in roof framing, if any, and support with metal hangers. Where rafters abut at ridge, place directly opposite each other and nail to ridge member or use metal ridge hangers. I. At valleys, provide double-valley rafters of size indicated or, if not indicated, of same thickness as regular rafters and 2 inches deeper. Bevel ends of jack rafters for full bearing against valley rafters. 2. At hips, provide hip rafter of size indicated or, if not indicated, of same thickness as regular rafters and 2 inches deeper. Bevel ends of jack rafters for full bearing against hip rafter. C. Provide collar beams (ties) as indicated or, if not indicated, provide I-by-6-inch nominal- size boards between every third pair of rafters, but not more than 48 inches o.c. Locate below ridge member, at third point of rafter span. Cut ends to fit roof slope and nail to rafters. D. Provide special framing as indicated for eaves, overhangs, dormers,and similar conditions, if any. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. END OF SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 8 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. General: Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2-inch nominal thickness whose widths equal that of studs, except single top plate may be used for non-load-bearing partitions and for load-bearing partitions where framing members bearing on partition are located directly over studs. Fasten plates to supporting construction, unless otherwise indicated. I. For exterior walls, provide 2-by-6-inch nominal- size wood studs spaced 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2. For interior partitions and walls, provide 2-by-4-inch nominal- size wood studs spaced 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide continuous horizontal blocking at midheight of partitions more than 96 inches high, using members of 2-inch nominal thickness and of same width as wall or partitions. B. Construct corners and intersections with three or more studs, except that two studs may be used for interior non-load-bearing partitions. C. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness equal to width of studs. Support headers on jamb studs. I. For non-load-bearing partitions, provide double-jamb studs and headers not less than 4-inch nominal depth for openings 48 inches and less in width, 6-inch nominal depth for openings 48 to 72 inches in width, 8-inch nominal depth for openings 72 to 120 inches in width, and not less than 10-inch nominal depth for openings 10 to 12 feet in width. 2. For load-bearing walls, provide double-jamb studs for openings 60 inches and less in width, and triple-jamb studs for wider openings. Provide headers of depth indicated or, if not indicated, according to Table R502.5(1) or Table R502.5(2), as applicable, in ICC's International Residential Code for One-and Two-Family Dwellings. 3.4 FLOOR JOIST FRAMING INSTALLATION A. General: Install floor joists with crown edge up and support ends of each member with not less than I- 1/2 inches of bearing on wood or metal, or 3 inches on masonry. Attach floor joists as follows: I. Where supported on wood members, by toe nailing or by using metal framing anchors. 2. Where framed into wood supporting members, by using wood ledgers as indicated or, if not indicated, by using metal joist hangers. B. Fire Cuts: At joists built into masonry, bevel cut ends 3 inches and do not embed more than 4 inches. C. Frame openings with headers and trimmers supported by metal joist hangers; double headers and trimmers where span of header exceeds 48 inches. D. Do not notch in middle third of joists; limit notches to one-sixth depth of joist, one-third at ends. Do not bore holes larger than 1/3 depth of joist; do not locate closer than 2 inches from top or bottom. E. Provide solid blocking of 2-inch nominal thickness by depth of joist at ends of joists unless nailed to header or band. F. Lap members framing from opposite sides of beams, girders, or partitions not less than 4 inches or securely tie opposing members together. Provide solid blocking of 2-inch nominal thickness by depth of joist over supports. G. Anchor members paralleling masonry with 1/4-by-I-I/4-inch metal strap anchors spaced not more than 96 inches o.c., extending over and fastening to 3 joists. Embed anchors at least 4 inches into grouted masonry with ends bent at right angles and extending 4 inches beyond bend. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100- 7 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. G. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as Awk follows: I. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces. 2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2- inch nominal-thickness. 3. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more than 20 feet o.c. H. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. I. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. I. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. J. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: I. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 2. Table 23-II-B-I, "Nailing Schedule," and Table 23-II-B-2, "Wood Structural Panel Roof Sheathing Nailing Schedule," in ICBO's Uniform Building Code. 3. Table 2305.2, "Fastening Schedule," in BOCA's BOCA National Building Code. 4. Table R602.3(I), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One-and Two-Family Dwellings. 5. Table 602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table 602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International One- and Two-Family Dwelling Code. K. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated. 3.2 WOOD BLOCKING,AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. 3.3 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 6 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. B. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated and with minimum safety factor of 4. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation. I. Use for interior locations where stainless steel is not indicated. D. Joist Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers with 2-inch- long seat and I-1/4-inch- wide nailing flanges at least 85 percent of joist depth. I. Thickness: 0.050 inch min. E. Post Bases: Adjustable-socket type for bolting in place with standoff plate to raise post I inch above base and with 2-inch- minimum side cover, socket 0.062 inch thick, and standoff and adjustment plates 0.108 inch thick. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Glass-fiber-resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a sill sealer; I-inch nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch; selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds,and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. C. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. D. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. E. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated. F. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items,and trim. I. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 5 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content of any species. C. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. D. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. E. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling. 2.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS I, Exposure I, C-D Plugged,in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch nominal thickness. 2.7 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. I. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with oopk ASTM A 153/A 153M or Type 304 stainless steel. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E. Lag Bolts: ASME B 18.2.1. F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated,flat washers. G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. I. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group I or 2. 2.8 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide adequate load rated 00W products by the following: I. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 -4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material ! that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings,and the following: I. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing,flashing,vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in crawlspaces or unexcavated areas. 4. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade. 2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING A. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, 19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal thickness. B. Species: Provide any of the following species I. Northern species; NLGA. 2. Hem-fir (north); NLGA. 00W 3. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. C. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade D. Exterior and Load-Bearing Walls: No. 2 or better grade E. Joists, Rafters,and Other Framing Not Listed Above: No. 2 or better grade 2.4 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS A. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood veneers with grain primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559 and containing no urea formaldehyde. I. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2600 psi for 12-inch nominal- depth members. 2. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 1,800,000 psi 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: I. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Cants. 4. Furring. 5. Grounds. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 2. Engineered wood products. 3. Power-driven fasteners. 4. Expansion anchors. 5. Metal framing anchors. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of engineered wood product through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. I. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece . 3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project. I. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer,that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2, except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX). I. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 06100- ROUGH CARPENTRY PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Framing with engineered wood products. 3. Wood blocking and nailers. 4. Plywood backing panels. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry"for wood trim. 2. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation"for thermal insulation,air barriers and vapor retarders. ow 3. Division 7 Sections "Vinyl Siding"for exterior siding. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension. B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: I. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. I. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 3. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in effect for Project: I. Wood-preservative-treated wood. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 1 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Leave anchorage joint exposed; wipe off surplus anchoring material; and leave 1/8-inch build-up, sloped away from post. 3.3 ATTACHING HANDRAILS TO WALLS A. Attach handrails to wall or posts with wall brackets. Provide bracket with 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. B. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. C. Secure wall brackets to building construction as follows: I. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. 2. For gypsum board assemblies, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA I for touching up shop-painted surfaces. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. C. Protect finishes of metal fabrications from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by metal fabricator. Remove protective covering at the time of Substantial Completion. D. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units. END OF SECTION METAL FABRICATIONS 05500- 6 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. I. ASTM A 123,for galvanizing steel and iron products. 2. ASTM A 153/A 153M,for galvanizing steel and iron hardware. B. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA I, "Paint Application Specification No. I,"for shop painting. C. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. D. For galvanized handrails and railings, provide galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal fabrications to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts,through-bolts, lag bolts,wood screws, and other connectors. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install handrails and railings. Set handrails and railings accurately in location,alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free from rack. D. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: I. Minimize field welding. 2. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 3. At exposed connections,finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. E. Adjust handrails and railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at interval indicated, but not less than that required by structural loads. F. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing handrails and railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. 3.2 ANCHORING POSTS A. Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with the following anchoring material, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions: I. Nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 5 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces. J. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous. K. Form metal fabrications to required shapes and sizes, with true curves, lines, and angles. Provide components in sizes and profiles indicated, but not less than that needed to comply with requirements indicated for structural performance. L. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in shop welding and brazing. Provide welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed joints of all flux,and dress all exposed and contact surfaces. 2.6 FABRICATION OF RAILINGS A. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of handrail and railing components. B. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect handrail and railing members to other work, unless otherwise indicated. C. Close exposed ends of handrail and railing members with prefabricated end fittings. D. Provide wall returns at ends of wall or post mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns, unless clearance between end of railing and wall is 1/4 inch or less. E. Fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush-resistant material,where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses and to produce adequate bearing area to prevent bracket rotation and overstressing of substrate. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports as necessary to complete the Work. B. Fabricate units from structural-steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. 2.8 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 2.9 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed below: METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 -4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. E. Lag Bolts: ASME B 18.2.1. : F. Wood Screws: Flat head, carbon steel,ASME B 18.6.1. G. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel,ASME B 18.22.1. H. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel,ASME B 18.21.1. I. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. J. Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588, tumble-wing type, class and style as needed. 2.4 GROUT A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1 107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs. C. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Form bent- metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: I. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections,finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. E. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. G. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. B. Existing railings and handrails: Where extension and re-use of existing railings are indicated, at Contractor's option, either: I. Provide additional railings, brackets and connectors for complete handrail installation in configuration indicated, 2. Or remove existing railings and provide completely new railing systems in configuration indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FERROUS METALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. I. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53;finish,type, and weight class as follows: 2. Structural steel tubing: ASTM A500 Grade 40,42 ksi. B. Gray-Iron Castings: ASTM A 48, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads. C. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials capable of sustaining, without failure, the load imposed within a safety factor of 6, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. D. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. 2.2 PAINT A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Organic zinc-rich primer, complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with topcoat. B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20. C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, except containing no asbestos fibers, or cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Provide Type 304 or 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type,grade, and class required. B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated,flat washers. C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. D. Machine Screws: ASME B 18.6.3. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. "' SECTION 05500- METAL FABRICATIONS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I. Metal pipe railings and handrail extensions 2. Brackets for handrails. 3. Metal support brackets and steel framing for countertops 4. Miscellaneous structural steel framing and supports. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry"for metal framing anchors and other rough hardware. 2. Division 9 Section "Painting"for field painting of exposed metal fabrications. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railings: Provide handrails and railings complying with requirements of ASTM E 985 for structural performance, based on testing performed according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935. B. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product used, including finishing materials and methods. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation. Include plans, elevations, component details, and attachments to other Work. Indicate materials and profiles of each member, fittings, joinery, finishes, fasteners, anchorages, and accessory items. C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Where metal fabrications are indicated to fit walls and other construction, verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500- 1 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. D. Tolerance: Plus 1/8" in 10' for grade,alignment, and straightness. E. Construction Joints: Use keyways, continue reinforcement through joint. F. Control joints: Provide sawn or tooled joints or removeable insert strips; depth equal to 1/4 slab thickness. Spacing as required and approved. G. Slab Finishes: Obtain sample approval before beginning work. I. Trowel: Hard, smooth, uniform surface for areas to receive resilient flooring, carpet, or other thin finish material. 2. Hardener Finish: For exposed interior concrete floors. Follow manufacturer's directions. H. Cure and protect work. Report defective work in writing. END OF SECTION aft"K CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete Design Mixes,ASTM C 94, 28 Day Compressive Strength: I. Interior Slabs on Grade: a. Compressive Strength: 3000 psi. 2. Exterior Site Concretes Exposed to Weather: a. Compressive Strength: 3500 psi,air entrained. B. Formwork: Plywood or metal panel formwork sufficient for structural and visual requirements. I. Special forms for textured finish concrete. 2. Metal, plastic or paper tubes for cylindrical columns and supports. C. Reinforcing Materials: I. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed. 2. Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A 497,welded, deformed. D. Concrete Materials: ASTM C 150,Type I, Portland cement; potable water. I. Normal weight aggregates,ASTM C 33. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618,Type F. E. Concrete Admixtures: Containing less than 0.1 percent chloride ions. I. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260,for exterior concrete exposed to freeze-thaw. 2. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type A,for placement and workability. 3. Water-Reducing,Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type E for placement and workability. 4. Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type D for placement and workability. F. Auxiliary Materials: I. Reglets: Galvanized sheet steel reglets, minimum 26 gauge (.018 inch). 2. Waterstops: Rubber or PVC waterstops. 3. Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 154 polyethylene sheet, 10 mils. 4. Vapor Barrier: Premolded membrane,ASTM E 96, Method B, 0 vapor transmission rate. S. Water-Based Acrylic Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C 309,Type I, Class B. 6. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component material. G. Concrete Finishes for Monolithic Slabs: I. Trowel finish for surfaces to be exposed to view or covered with resilient flooring, carpet, tile, or other thin finish system. 2. Nonslip broom finish for exterior concrete pads. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C 94. Do not change mix design without approval. Calcium chloride admixtures are not permitted. B. Level and compact top 12 inches of existing subgrade: ASTM D 698, to 95% of maximum dry unit weight. C. Provide continuous vapor retarder covered with granular fill, compacted to 95% with mechanical equipment. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART I - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Provide cast-in-place concrete for general building construction, including,without limitation: 1. Slabs on grade. 2. Exterior slabs. B. Requirements (materials, mixes,finishes) apply to concrete work specified in other sections. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating material characteristics, details of construction, connections, and relationship with adjacent construction. #0" I. Shop drawings shall be prepared and stamped by a qualified engineer licensed in the jurisdiction of the project. C. Mix Design: Submit for approval mix design proposed for use. D. Ready Mix Delivery: Submit for record delivery tickets indicating date, time, quantity, type of concrete, water added. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Testing: Employ an independent testing agency acceptable to Owner to design concrete mixes and to perform material evaluation tests. Provide 7 and 28 day cylinder tests. Comply with ASTM C 143, C 173, C 31 and C 39. C. Standards: I. ACI 301, Specifications for structural Concrete for Buildings. 2. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete, and CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. D. Mock-Ups: Provide mock-up if required to demonstrate quality of workmanship. 0 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-1 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group,Inc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General The work related to each of the site improvement items shall be fabricated, constructed and finished in every respect in a good, workmanlike and substantial manner, to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. All parts necessary for the proper and complete execution of the work, whether the same may have been specifically mentioned or not, or indicated on the drawings, shall be done or furnished in a manner corresponding with the rest of the work as if the same were specifically herein described. B. The workmanship shall be first-class in every respect and neat in appearance. All work shall meet the requirements of applicable federal, state and local codes,and other authorities having jurisdiction over the work. C. All excavation and backfill operations shall conform to the details shown on the drawings and the applicable provisions specified under Excavating, Filling and Grading, Section 02200. D. Special Conditions Work shall be properly coordinated with the work of other trades. Other trades shall be consulted in advance so that proper provisions may be made for installation of their work and so that the work of this Section may be properly finished and connected to the work of other trades. �► E. Clean-up-Site shall be left free of all debris and in a clean, orderly manner. END OF SECTION SITE MOVEMENTS 02950-4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group,Inc. A. Bollards shall be 8 inch O.D. steel pipe, ASTM A-53 Grade B, Schedule 40,filled with cement concrete and mounted in a concrete foundation,as shown on the plans. Bollards shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A-123 and retain a coating of zinc weighing not less than 2 ounces per square foot of steel. B. Concrete for filling bollards shall and for bollard foundation shall be 3000 PSI cement concrete in conformance with Section 03300. C. Paint bollard Saddle Brown as follows: clean entire exposed surface of bollard with solvent or detergent wash to remove all foreign material that would impair placement of paint.Allow surfaces to dry completely. I. Paint system shall be: Pretreatment: Galvanized Metal Conditioning Primer 0.3 mil Prime Coat: Rapid Dry Alkyd Universal Primer 2.0 mil Phenolic-Fortified Intermediate Coat: Silicone—Alkyd Enamel 2.0 mil Final Coat: Silicone—Alkyd Enamel 2.0 mil 2. Paint under the work of this section shall conform to the requirements of Section 09900. 2.6 LARGE PLAY STRUCTURE A. Large Play Structure shall be Playbooster Structure#2301 as manufactured by Landscape Structures, Inc.; local representative: M.E. O'Brien&Sons, Inc. P.O. Box 650 93 West Street, Medfield, MA 02052, 508-359-4200, or approved equal. Final colors for post,deck, roof, rail, slide, tunnel,and climber components shall be chosen from standard manufacturer color palette by the Owner and Landscape Architect. 2.7 SMALL PLAY STRUCTURES A. Small Play Structure Style A shall be Playshaper Structure#2409 as manufactured by Landscape Structures, Inc., local representative: M.E. O'Brien &Sons, Inc. P.O. Box 650 93 West Street, Medfield, MA 02052, 508-359-4200, or approved equal. Final colors for post, deck, roof, slide, seat, and climber components shall be chosen from standard manufacturer color palette by the Owner and Landscape Architect B. Small Play Structure Style B shall be Playsense Design 304 as manufactured by Basics, Inc.; local representative: M.E. O'Brien &Sons, Inc. P.O. Box 650 93 West Street, Medfield, MA 02052, 508- 359-4200, or approved equal. Final colors for post, deck, roof, slide, rail and climber components shall be chosen from standard manufacturer color palette by the Owner and Landscape Architect 2.8 SWINGSET A. Swingset shall be 5000 Series Swings as manufactured by Landscape Structures, Inc.; local representative:M.E. O'Brien &Sons, Inc. P.O. Box 650 93 West Street, Medfield, MA 02052, 508- 359-4200, or approved equal. B. Swingset to include 2 bays with 2 swings per bay. Overhead beam and tripod legs shall be 2-3/8" O.D.galvanized pipe with powdercoat blue finish.Slash-proof belt seats shall be supported by 3/16" oo* straight-link galvanized chain. SITE IMROVEMENTS 02950- 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group,Inc. All architectural coatings shall comply with the National Volatile Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings, (EPA 40 CFR Part 59, as published in the Friday, September 11, 1998 Federal Register). Architectural coatings are defined as: "a coating recommended for field application to stationary structures and their appurtenances, to portable buildings,to pavements, or to curbs." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BENCHES A. Benches shall be 73 Series, 6' length, as manufactured by DuMor, Inc.; local representative: M.E. O'Brien &Sons, Inc. P.O. Box 650 93 West Street, Medfield, MA 02052, 508-359-4200, or approved equal. Bench shall include: I. Two 2-1/2"sq.x1/4"steel tube legs finished with polyester powder coat, color to be Hunter Green. Legs to be anchored in concrete foundation as shown on the plans;concrete to be 3000 PSI cement concrete. 2. 2"x3" nom. clear all heart redwood slats, treated with clear preservative. 3. Two 4-1/2"x3/8"contoured steel bar slat supports with bolts provided,and one 2"x1/4" contoured steel center strap. Steel supports and center strap shall be finished with polyester powder coat, color to be Hunter Green. 2.2 WOOD PLAY SURFACE A. Play area surfacing shall be the Woodcarpet System, as manufactured by Zaeger Brothers, Inc., 4000 East Harrisburg Pike, Middletown, PA, 1-800-346-8524, or approved equal. B. The system shall include 12"depth of Woodcarpet, terra-bond filter fabric,and 4"depth of 1/4" washed stone base. 2.3 WOOD FENCE A. Wood fence shall be constructed of first grade cedar as shown in the detail. 6"x 6"posts to be in contact with ground shall be pressure preservative treated with a minimum retention of 0.40 pcf. Wood rails shall be pressure preservative treated with a minimum retention of 0.025 pcf.All hardware to be galvanized. B. All preservatives shall conform to current Massachusetts Dept. of Environmental Protection and EPA regulations. 2.4 WOOD RAILING A. Wood railing shall be as detailed on the plans. All wood shall be pressure preservative treated with a minimum retention of 0.025 pcf. Wood to be in contact with ground shall be pressure preservative treated with a minimum retention of 0.40 pcf.All hardware to be galvanized. B. All preservatives shall conform to current Massachusetts Dept. of Environmental Protection and EPA regulations. 2.5 STEEL BOLLARD SITE IMROVEMENTS 02950 -2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group, Inc. SECTION 02950—SITE IMPROVEMENTS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and perform all operations necessary for completion of the work of this section as shown on the Drawings, as herein specified and as evidently required to properly complete the following items: I. Benches 2. Wood Play Surface 3. Wood Fence 4. Wood Railing 5. Steel Bollard 6. Large Play Structure 7. Small Play Structures 8. Swingset 1.3 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE A. Cast-in-place Concrete..................................................................................Section 03300 B. Bituminous Concrete.....................................................................................Section 02600 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Forty-five days prior to installation and before any site furnishings are delivered to the job site, submit samples, specification cuts or shop and erection drawings for all items in Section 02950 indicating materials size and weight of steel, number, location and type of connection, welding sequence and hardware. B. Product literature/specifications cuts required: I. All items listed in 1.2.A. above 1.5 REFERENCES A. ASTM Standards I. A307- Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners 2. A424-Steel Sheet for Porcelain Enameling 3. A500-Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Round and Shapes 4. 8209-Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE OF MATERIALS 00" A. Architectural Coatings SITE IMROVEMENTS 02950- 1 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group, Inc. B. Maintenance of seed areas shall consist of watering,weeding, mowing/raking, repair of all erosion, and reseeding as necessary to establish a uniform stand of grass. Lawns shall be watered daily to maintain adequate surface soil moiture for proper seed germination. Continue daily watering for not less than 30 days. Thereafter apply 1/2"of water twice per week until acceptance. All areas which fail to show a uniform stand of grass for any reason shall be reseeded repeatedly until a uniform stand is attained. Scattered bare spots, evenly distributed and not exceeding 8"square of any lawn area, will be allowed at the discretion of the Architect. At the time of the first cutting,there shall be a uniform stand between 3 and 3-1/2"high, and mower blades shall be set between 2-1/2"and 3" high. Catch shall be representative of seed specified. 3.8 ACCEPTANCE The Architect shall inspect all work for Acceptance upon written request of the Contractor. The request shall be received at least 10 calendar days before the anticipated date of inspection. Upon completion and reinspection of all repairs or renewals necessary in the judgement of the Architect, he shall certify in writing to the Contractor as to the Acceptance of the work. 3.9 ACCEPTANCE IN PART The work may be accepted in parts when it is deemed to be in the Owner's best interest to do so and when approval is given to the Contractor in writing to complete the work in parts. Acceptance and use of such areas by the Owner shall not waive any other provisions of this Contract. 3.10 CLEANUP A. When any of this work is done while buildings are occupied, pavements shall be kept clear at all times, broom cleaned to prevent tracking dirt into buildings. B. After completion of all planting operations, dispose of all debris and excess material to the satisfaction of the Architect. All pavements shall be broomed and hosed clean. 3.11 FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE At the end of the guarantee period, the Architect will inspect all guaranteed work for the Final Acceptance upon written request of the Contractor. The request shall be received at least 10 calendar days before the anticipated date for final inspection. Upon completion and reinspection of all repairs or renewals necessary in the judgement of the Architect at that time, he shall certify in writing to the Contractor as to the Final Acceptance of the project. END OF SECTION SEEDING 02850 - 7 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group, Inc. A. After the areas to be seeded have been brought to the grades specified, spread limestone at a rate specified by the testing agancy. B. Apply the recommended fertilizer at the rate recommended by the testing agency. Thoroughly and evenly incorporate fertilizer and lime with the soil to a depth of 3" by discing or other approved method. In areas inaccessible to power equipment, use hand tools. Adjacent to trees and shrubs, use hand tools to avoid disturbances of the roots. C. The Seeding Contractor shall reconstitute the soil,as recommended by a soil testing agency, prior to use as planting soil. Any deficiencies in the topsoil shall be corrected by the Contractor, as recommended,at no expense to the Owner. D. After incorporation of fertilizer and lime into the soil,the seed bed shall be fine graded to remove all ridges and depressions and the surface cleared of all debris and of all stones one inch or more in diameter. 3.5 SEEDING A. Immediately before seeding, the ground shall be restored, as necessary, to a loose friable condition by dicing or other approved method to a depth of not less than 2". The surface shall be cleared of all debris and of all stones I"or more in diameter. B. Seed all areas to be seeded with specified grass seed, sowing evenly with an approved mechanical seeder at the rate of 6 ballast roller. Extreme care shall be taken during seeding and raking to insure that no change shall pounds per 1,000 square feet. Spread seed when soil is moist. Cultipacker,or approved similar equipment, may be used to cover the seed and to firm the seed bed in one operation. In areas inaccessible to cultipacker, the seeded ground shall be lightly raked and rolled in two directions with a water occur in the finished grades and that the seed is not raked from one spot to another. C. Promptly after seeding,wet the seed bed thoroughly, keeping all areas moist throughout the germination period. D. Mulch shall be placed immediately after seeding. Hay that has been thoroughly fluffed shall be spread evenly and uniformly at the rate of two to three tons per acre or(2) 50 lbs. bales per 1,000 sq.ft. of area. Lumps and thick mulch materials shall be thinned. All mulch anchor stakes, strings and matting shall be removed before final acceptance of lawns. E. Take whatever measures are necessary to protect the seeded area while it is germinating. These measures shall include furnishing warnings signs, barriers,and other needed measures of protection. 3.7 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance shall begin immediately after seeding operations and shall continue until Acceptance or for a minimum of 60 days,whichever is longer. SEEDING 02850- 6 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group, Inc. #0W A. Inspection I. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades, and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Verify that seeding may be completed in accordance with the original design and the referenced standards. B. Discrepancies I. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3.2 SUBGRADE PREPARATION A. The Contractor shall do whatever grading is necessary to bring the subgrade to a true, smooth slope, parallel and 6" below finished grade, for all seed bed areas. Remove all existing lawns and grasses, including roots. B. There must be sufficient grade staked, as determined by the Architect,to insure correct line and grade of subgrade and of finished grade. C. Immediately prior to being covered with topsoil, the top 3"of the subgrade shall be raked or otherwise loosened and shall be free of stones, rock, and other foreign material 2"or greater in dimensions. 3.3 FINISH GRADE PREPARATION A. Topsoil shall not be delivered or worked in a frozen or muddy condition. B. Topsoil shall be placed and spread over approved areas to a depth sufficiently greater than 6"in "loam and seed"lawn areas and I S" in plant bed areas so that after natural settlement and light rolling, the completed work will conform to the lines,grades,and elevations indicated. D. After topsoil has been spread in approved areas, it shall be carefully prepared by scarifying or harrowing, and stones over one inch in diameter shall be removed from the topsoil. It shall be free of smaller stones in excessive quantities, as determined by the Architect. E. The whole surface shall then be rolled with a roller which weighs not more than 100 pounds per foot of width. During the rolling, all depressions caused by settlement of rolling shall be filled with additional topsoil, and the surface shall be regraded and rolled until presenting a smooth and even finish to the required grade. 3.4 SEED BED PREPARATION SEEDING 02850 - 5 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group, Inc. oowk 2.3 SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Peat Peat shall be moist. It shall be finely shredded, consist of 90 percent organic moss peat, be brown in color, and suitable for horticultural purposes. Shredded particles shall not exceed one (1) inch in diameter. Peat shall be measured in air dry condition, containing not more than 35 percent moisture by weight. Ash content shall not exceed 10 percent. B. Limestone Ground dolomitic limestone shall be an approved agricultural limestone and shall contain not less than 85 percent of total carbonates. Limestone shall be ground to such fineness that 50 percent will pass a 100 mesh sieve, and 90 percent will pass a 20 mesh sieve. 2.4 GRASS SEED A. General -All grass seed shall be: I. Free from noxious weed seeds and recleaned. 2. Grade A recent crop seed. OPW 3. Treated with appropriate fungicide at time of mixing. 4. Delivered to the site in sealed containers with dealer's guaranteed analysis. B. Seed Mix Proportions by Weight % by Weight Seed % Purity %Germination 10% Baron Bluegrass 90% 75% 10% Flyking Bluegrass 85% 75% 40% Illahee Red Fescue* 98% 90% 5% Annual Ryegrass 98% 90% 35% Manhattan II Per Rye* 98% 90% *denotes seed mixture containing active endophytes Weed seed content shall not exceed 0.25%. Wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged seed will be rejected. C. Seed Mix within the wetland buffer shall consist of native non invasive species comparable in type to existing vegetation. SECTION 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS SEEDING 02850 -4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group,Inc. ,. variance. Permission for the variance will be given if warranted in the opinion of the Architect. Regardless of the time of seeding, the Contractor shall be responsible for a full growth of grass. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 TOPSOIL A. General Topsoil, except that existing on the site,will not be made available by the Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for supplying any additional topsoil needed and hauling it to the site. It shall be obtained from naturally well-drained areas. It shall not be excessively acid or alkaline nor contain toxic substances which may be harmful to plant growth. Topsoil shall be without admixture of subsoil and shall be cleaned and free from clay lumps, stones, stumps, roots, or similar substances one inch or more in diameter, debris, or other objects which might be a hindrance to planting operations. Furnish all topsoil required to complete the work. Materials removed shall be disposed of by the Contractor. B. Testing The Contractor shall take representative samples of topsoil from the site and from topsoil to be hauled in and shall submit samples to a Soil Testing Laboratory for chemical analysis,and physical analysis. The Contractor shall indicate to the testing agencies that turf is to be planted and who the Owner is. The Contractor shall forward to the Architect two copies of analysis and recommendations of the testing agencies. 2.2 FERTILIZER A. General All fertilizer shall be a commercial balanced, 10-6-4 fertilizer delivered to the site in bags labeled with the manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. B. Commercial Fertilizer Commercial fertilizer shall be a complete fertilizer in which 50-70 percent of the nitrogenous elements shall be derived from organic sources; phosphate shall be derived from superphosphate containing 16-20 percent phosphoric acid or bonemeal containing 25-30 percent phosphoric acid and 2-3 percent nitrogen;and potash shall be derived from muriate of potash containing 55-60 percent potash. 12-4-8 50%organic may be substituted. Fertilizer shall be mixed, as specified,and delivered to the site in standard, unopened containers showing weight,guaranteed analysis,and name of manufacturer. C. Special Protection If stored at the site, protect fertilizer from the elements at all times. SEEDING 02850- 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group, Inc. 1. 7 SUBMITTALS A. Materials List Within 35 days after award of Contract and before any seeding materials are delivered to the job site, submit to the Architect a complete list of all seeding and sodding materials and other items proposed to be installed. I. Include complete data on source, size, and quality. 2. Demonstrate complete conformance with the requirements of this Section. 3. This shall in no way be construed as permitting substitution for specific items described in the Drawings or these Specifications unless the substitution has been approved in advance by the Architect. B. Certificates I. All certificates required by law shall accompany shipments. 2. Prior to installation, deliver all certificates to the Architect. 1.8 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Delivery and Storage 1. Deliver all items to the site in their original containers with all labels intact and legible at time of Architect's inspection. 2. Immediately remove from the site all seeding materials which are not true to name and all materials which do not comply with the provisions of this Section of these Specifications. 3. Use all means necessary to protect seeding materials before, during,and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. B. Replacements- In the event of damage or rejection, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect, at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.9 PLANTING SEASON A. Seeding/sodding shall be done between August 15th to September 30 and/or April I st to June I st. B. Variance - If special conditions exist which may warrant a variance in the above planting dates, a written request shall be submitted to the Architect stating the special conditions for the proposed SEEDING 02850- 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group, Inc. SECTION 02850-SEEDING PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED A. If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section, provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation. 1.3 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT A. In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document not clarified by addendum,the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation. 1.4 SECTION INCLUDES '* A. Planting required for this Work is indicated on the Drawings and, in general, includes seedingisodding and ground cover throughout the Work. 1.5 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE A. Excavating, Filling, and Grading.........................................................................................Section 02200 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Workmen Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of this portion of the Work, be thoroughly familiar with the type of materials being installed and the best methods for their installation, and direct all work performed under this Section. B. Standards I. All planting material shall meet or exceed the specifications of Federal and State laws requiring inspection for plant disease and insect control. 2. Quality shall conform with the current edition of"Horticultural Standards"for number one grade nursery stock, as adopted by the American Association of Nurserymen. ANSI 2260.1 - Nursery Stock. SEEDING 02850 - 1 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group, Inc. D. The Contractor shall replace,without cost to the Owner and as soon as possible as weather conditions permit and within a specified planting period, all dead plants and all plants not in a vigorous thriving condition,as determined by the Architect during and at the end of the guarantee period. Plants shall be free of dead or dying branches and branch tips and shall bear foliage of a normal density, size, and color. Replacements shall closely match adjacent specimens of the same species. Replacements shall be subject to all requirements stated in this Specification. E. The guarantee of all replacement plants shall extend for an additional period of one year from the date of their acceptance after replacement. In the event that a replacement plant is not acceptable during or at the end of the said extended guarantee period,the Owner may elect subsequent replacement or credit for each item. F. The Contractor shall make periodic inspection at no extra cost to the Owner during the guarantee period to determine what changes, if any, should be made to the Owner's maintenance program. Submit in writing to the Architect any recommended changes. 3.8 CARE OF EXISTING TREES A. Upon completion of the work under this Section,all existing trees shall be pruned and any injuries repaired. The amount of pruning shall be limited to the minimum necessary to remove dead or injured twigs and branches and to compensate for the loss of roots as a result of construction operations. Roots greater than 2"shall be hand-cut to provide clean, concise, cutting and removal. Pruning shall be done in such a manner as not to change the natural habit or shape of the plant. All cuts shall be made at the branch collar, leaving no stubs. On all cuts over 3/4"diameter and bruises or scars on the bark,the injured cambium shall be traced back to living tissue and removed;wounds shall be smoothed and shaped so as not to retain water. 3.9 CLEANUP A. When any of this work is done while buildings are occupied, pavements shall be kept clear at all times, broom cleaned to prevent tracking dirt into buildings. B. After completion of all planting operations, dispose of all debris and excess material to the satisfaction of the Architect. All pavements shall be broomed and hosed clean. 3.10 FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE A. At the end of the guarantee period, the Architect will inspect all guaranteed work for final acceptance upon written request of the Contractor. The request shall be received at least 10 calendar days before the anticipated date for final inspection. B. Upon completion and reinspection of all repairs or renewals necessary in the judgement of the Architect at that time, he shall certify in writing to the Contractor as to the final acceptance of the Project. END OF SECTION PLANTING 02800-9 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group, Inc. such sprays or other items as are necessary to keep the planting free of insects and disease and in thriving condition. C. Planting areas and plants shall be protected at all times against trespassing and damage of all kinds for the duration of the maintenance period. If any plants become damaged or injured,they shall be treated or replaced as directed by the Architect at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Provide all equipment and means for proper application of water to those planted areas not equipped with an irrigation system. 3.5 INSPECTION In addition to normal progress inspection, schedule and conduct the following formal inspections, giving the Architect at least 24 hours prior notice of readiness for inspection: A. Inspection of plants in containers prior to planting. B. Inspection of plant locations to verify compliance with the Drawings. C. Schedule the final inspection sufficiently in advance and in cooperation with the Architect so that the final inspection may be conducted within 24 hours after completion of planting. D. Final inspection will be at the end of the maintenance period, provided that all previous deficiencies have been corrected. 3.6 ACCEPTANCE A. The Architect shall inspect all work for acceptance upon written request of the Contractor. The request shall be received at least 10 calendar days before the anticipated date of inspection. 1. Acceptance of plant material by the Architect shall be for general conformance to specified size, character,and quality and shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for full conformance to the contract documents, including correct species. 2. Upon completion and reinspection of all repairs or renewals necessary in the judgement of the Architect, he shall certify in writing to the Contractor as to the acceptance of the work. B. Acceptance in Part I. The work may be accepted in parts when it is deemed to be in the Owner's best interest to do so and when approval is given to the Contractor in writing to complete work in parts. Acceptance and use of such areas by the Owner shall not waive any other provisions of this Contract. 3.7 GUARANTEE PERIOD AND REPLACEMENTS A. The guarantee period for trees and shrubs shall begin at the date of acceptance. B. All plant material shall be guaranteed by the Contractor for a period of one year from the date of Acceptance to be in good, healthy and flourishing condition. * C. When work is accepted in parts,the guarantee periods extend from each of the partial acceptances to the terminal date of the last guarantee period. Thus, all guarantee periods terminate at one time. PLANTING 02800-8 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group,Inc. other acceptable materials and shall be kept well watered. Plants shall not remain unplanted for longer than three days after delivery. 4. Plants shall not be bound with wire or rope at any time so as to damage the bark or break branches. Plants shall be lifted and handled from the bottom of the ball only. B. Planting Trees and Shrubs I. Protect plants at all times from sun or drying winds. Plants that cannot be planted immediately on delivery shall be kept in the shade, well protected with soil,wet moss, or other acceptable material and shall be kept well watered. Plants shall not remain unplanted for longer than three days after delivery. Plants shall not be bound with wire or rope at any time so as to damage the bark or break branches. Plants shall be lifted and handled from the bottom of the ball only. 2. Set plants at same relationship to finished grade as they bore to the ground from which they were dug. Set plant plumb and brace rigidly in position until prepared topsoil has been tamped solidly around ball and roots. 3. Cut and remove ropes, strings and wrappings from top 1/3 of ball after plant has been set Leave balance of wrappings intact around ball. If wrapping is plastic, remove top 2/3. 4. Backfill plant pits with prepared planting soil. When plant pits have been backfilled approximately 2/3 full, water thoroughly, eliminating all air pockets. After watering, install planting soil to top of pit and repeat watering. 5. Form saucer around tree as indicated on the Drawings. 6. Finish grade planting areas to conform to grades on Drawings. 7. Mulch all pits and beds with a 4"layer of shredded bark mulch immediately after planting. 8. Immediately after planting,water all plants thoroughly. C. Pruning I Prune plants only at time of planting and according to standard horticultural practice to preserve the natural character of the plant Pruning to be done under supervision of the Project Architect. Pruning and trimming shall include the following. a) Remove all dead wood, suckers,and broken or badly bruised branches, unless otherwise directed by the Architect Contractor shall not cut main leader of tree. b) Use only clean sharp tools. 3.4 MAINTENANCE OF TREES AND SHRUBS A. Maintenance shall begin immediately after each plant is planted and shall continue until acceptance of the project by the Owner after final inspection or 60 days, whichever is longer. B. Maintenance shall consist of pruning,watering, cultivating, weeding, mulching, resetting plants to proper grades or upright position, restoration of the planting saucer, and furnishing and applying PLANTING 02800-7 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group, Inc. 2. Verify that planting may be completed in accordance with the original design and the referenced standards. B. Discrepancies I. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3.2 EXCAVATION OF PLANTING AREAS A. Stake out the ground locations for plants and outlines of areas to be planted and obtain approval of the Architect before excavation is begun. A minimum of 30 percent of total planting must be staked before inspection will be made. B. Excavate tree and shrub pits as shown on the Drawings. C. Separate subgrade soils from the upper topsoil portions and remove immediately wherever encountered during planting operations. D. Notify the Architect in writing of all soil condition which the Contractor considers detrimental to growth of plant material. State condition and submit proposal in writing to the Architect for correcting condition. #011"° Notify the Architect in writing of all soil or drainage conditions which the Contractor considers detrimental growth of plant material. E. Test drainage of suspect plant beds and pits by filling with water twice in succession. Conditions permitting the retention of water in planting beds for more than 12 hours shall be brought to the attention of the Architect. F. If rock, underground construction work, tree roots, or obstructions are encountered in the excavation of plant pits,alternate locations may be considered by the Architect. Where location cannot be changed,as determined by the Architect, submit cost required to remove the obstructions to a depth of not less than 6"below the required pit depth. Proceed with work after approval of the Architect. 3.3 PLANTING OPERATIONS A. Digging and Handling of Plant Materials to be Relocated 1. Immediately before digging, spray all evergreen or deciduous plant material in full leaf with anti-desiccant, applying an adequate film over trunks, branches,twigs, and/or foliage. 2. Dig, ball and burlap ("B&B") plants with firm, natural balls of earth with diameter not less than that recommended by American standard for Nursery Stock and of sufficient depth to include the fibrous and feeding roots. Plants moved with a ball will not be accepted if the ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation. Avok 3. Protect plants at all times from sun or drying winds. Plants that cannot be planted immediately on delivery shall be kept in the shade,well protected with soil, wet moss, or PLANTING 02800- 6 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group, Inc. 00%, feeding root system necessary for full recovery of the plant. Balls shall be firmly wrapped with burlap or similar material and bound with twine, cord, or wire mesh. Where necessary to prevent breaking or cracking of the ball during the process of planting,the ball may be secured to a platform. 2. Protection After Delivery The balls of"B&B"plants and container grown plants which cannot be planted immediately on delivery shall be covered with moist soil or mulch,or other protection from drying winds and sun. All plants shall be watered as necessary until planted. 2.9 INSPECTIONS A. Certificates of inspection shall accompany invoices for each shipment of plants as may be required by law for transportation. File certificates with the Architect prior to acceptance of the material. Inspection by Federal or State Governments at place of growth does not preclude rejection of plants at the work site. 2.10 SELECTION AND TAGGING A. Plants shall be subject to inspection and approval by the Architect at their place of growth and upon delivery for conformity to specification requirements. Such approval shall not impair the right of inspection and rejection during the progress of the work. A Contractor's representative shall be present at all inspections. B. Written requests for inspection of plant material at their place of growth shall be submitted to the sue"* Architect at least 10 calendar days prior to digging. Written requests shall state the place of growth and quantity of plants to be inspected. The Architect may refuse inspection at this time if, in his judgement,a sufficient quantity of plants are not available for inspection. C. Plants identified as "selection specimen"shall be approved and tagged at their place of growth. For distant material, submit photographs for pre-inspection review. 2.11 PLANT LABELS A. Plant labels shall be durable, legible stating the correct plant name and size in weather-resistant ink or embossed process lettering. 2.12 ANTI-DESICCANT A. Anti-desiccant shall be an emulsion which provides a protective film over plant surfaces, permeable enough to permit transpiration. It shall be delivered in containers of the manufacturer and mixed according to the manufacturer's directions('Wiltpruf'manufactured by Nursery Specialty Products Inc., Stubbings Road, Groton Falls, New York, or approved equal). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Inspection ., I. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. PLANTING 02800-5 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group, Inc. Awl� B. Planting soil mix shall consist of seven parts loam and one part peat moss by volume. It shall have pH value between pH 5.0 to pH 6.0. C. Mix all materials at the proportions or amounts specified herein. Mixing shall be done by an approved method. Under no conditions shall mixing be done if materials are wet or in otherwise unsatisfactory condition, as determined by the Architect. 2.8 PLANT MATERIALS A. Plant materials shall be true to species and variety specified and shall be nursery grown in accordance with good horticultural practice under climatic conditions similar to those in the locality of the project for at least two years. They shall have been root-pruned within the last two years. All plants B+B or container grown. No heeled-in plants or plants from cold storage will be accepted. B. Unless specifically noted otherwise,all plants shall be of specimen quality;exceptionally heavy;and symmetrical, so trained or favored in development and appearance as to be unquestionable and outstandingly superior in form, compactness and symmetry. They shall be sound; healthy;vigorous; well-branched and densely foliated when in leaf;free of disease; insects;eggs or larvae;and shall be free from physical damage or conditions that would prevent thriving growth. C. Plants shall not be pruned before delivery. Trees with multiple leaders, unless specified, will be rejected. Trees with a damaged or crooked leader, abrasion of bark, sunscalds, disfiguring knots, insect damage,or cuts of limbs over 3/4"in diameter, not completely calloused,will be rejected. D. Plants shall conform to measurements specified in the Plant Lists, except that plants larger than specified may be used if approved by the Architect Use of such plants shall not increase the Contract price. If larger plants are approved, the root ball shall be increased in proportion to the size of the plant E. Caliper measurement shall be taken on the trunk 6"above natural ground line for trees up to 4"in caliper and 12"above the natural ground line for trees over 4"in caliper. Height and spread dimensions specified refer to the main body of the plant and not from branch tip to tip. Plants shall be measured when branches are in their normal position. If a range of size is given, no plant shall be less than the minimum size, and not less than 50 percent of the plants shall be as large as the maximum size specified. Measurements specified are minimum size, acceptable after pruning where pruning is required. Plants that meet measurements but do not possess a normal balance between height and spread shall be rejected. F. All plants shall be labeled with correct plant name and size. Labels shall be attached securely to all plants, bundles,and containers of plant materials delivered with care that those attached directly to plants will not restrict growth. G. Substitutions of plant materials will not be permitted, unless authorized in writing by the Architect If proof is submitted and substantiated in writing that any plant specified is not obtainable,a proposal will be considered for use of the nearest available size or similar variety with a corresponding adjustment of Contract price. H. Type of Protection to Roots I. Balled and Burlapped Plants Plants designated "B&B" in the Plant List shall be balled and burlapped. They shall be dug with firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to encompass the fibrous and PLANTING 02800-4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group, Inc. AOW I. Planting shall be done within the following dates: Deciduous material: March I - May 15 October 25 - December I Evergreen Material: March I -June I August 15-October 15 2. If special conditions exist which may warrant a variance in the above planting dates, a written request shall be submitted to the Project Architect stating the special conditions and the proposed variance. Permission for the variance will be given if warranted in the opinion of the Architect. Variances permitted will not relieve the Contractor from liability for damages caused by planting out of season. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 FERTILIZER A. Plant fertlizer packets shall be installed as per the drawings. 2.2 SOIL AMENDMENT A. All soil amendments shall be peat;a domestic product consisting of partially decomposed vegetable matter of natural occurrence. It shall be brown, clean, low in content of mineral and woody material, mildly acid and granulated or shredded,and fortified with organic nitrogen cr an equal commercial soil amendment approved in advance by the Architect. 2.3 BARK MULCH A. Shredded cedar bark mulch shall consist of a standard size, free of chunks and pieces of wood thicker than 1/4"and approved by the Architect. The mulch must be partially decomposed and dark brown in color.. 2.4 PEAT MOSS A. Brown;acid reaction about 4 to 5 pH;low in content of wood material and free of mineral matter harmful to plant life;water absorbing capacity, 1 100 to 2000 percent; moisture content 30 percent natural, shredded or granulated. 2.5 WATER A. Contractor shall make, at his expense,whatever arrangements may be necessary to ensure an adequate supply of water to meet the needs of this contract. He shall also furnish all necessary hose, equipment,attachments, and accessories for the adequate irrigation of lawns and planted areas as may be required to complete the work as specified. 2.7 PLANTING SOIL A. The Contractor shall supply loam which shall be prepared by the Contractor so as to be free from subsoil, stumps, roots, stones over one(1) inch diameter and other extraneous materials. Materials removed shall be disposed of by the Contractor. Soil shall not be used for planting while in a frozen or muddy condition. PLANTING 02800- 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group,Inc. Aoft` I. All plants and planting material shall meet or exceed the specifications of Federal and State laws requiring inspection for plant disease and insect control. 2. Quality and size shall conform with the current edition of"Horticultural Standards"for number one grade nursery stock, as adopted by the American Association of Nurserymen. 3. All plants shall be true to name and one of each bundle or lot shall be tagged with the name and size of the plants, in accordance with the standards of practice of the American Association of Nurserymen. In all cases, botanical names shall take precedence over common names. 4. All Plants to be grown from stock hardy in USDA Plant Hardiness Zones 2 through 5. 1.9 SUBMITTALS A. Materials List Thirty days before any planting materials are delivered to the job site, submit to the Architect a complete list of all plants and other items proposed to be installed: I. Include a complete data on source, size, and quality. 2. Demonstrate complete conformance with the requirements of this section. 3. This shall in no way be construed as permitting substitution for specific items described in the Drawings or these Specifications unless the substitution has been approved in advance by the Rob., Architect. B. Certificates I. All certificates required by law shall accompany shipments. 2. Upon completion of the installation, deliver all certificates to the Architect. 1.10 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Delivery and Storage I. Deliver all items to the site in their original containers with all labels intact and legible at time of Architect's inspection. 2. Immediately remove from the site all plants which are not true to name and all materials which do not comply with the provisions of this Section of these Specifications. 3. Use all means necessary to protect plant materials before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all trades. B. Replacements In the event of damage or rejection, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect,at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Planting Season PLANTING 02800- 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group, Inc. SECTION 02800- PLANTING PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED A. If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section, provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation. 1.3 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT A. In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document not clarified by addendum,the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation. (See Article I of the General and Supplementary General Conditions.) 1.4 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.5 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED A. If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section, provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation. 1.6 SECTION INCLUDES A. Planting required for the Work is indicated on the Drawings and, in general, includes planting of trees and/or shrubs throughout the Work including furnishing all materials, equipment,and labor necessary for root protection,and tree guards where applicable. 1.7 RELATED WORK A. Excavating, Filling&Grading.............................................................................................Section 02200 B. Seeding and Sodding............................................................................................................Section 02850 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Workmen Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of this portion of the Work, thoroughly familiar with the type of materials being installed and the best methods of their installation, and direct all work performed under this Section. B. Standards PLANTING 02800- 1 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group, Inc. low I 1. Contact surfaces of previously constructed pavement(if greater than or equal seven days since binder placed), parking lot overlay areas, manholes, concrete collars and similar structures shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted with a thin uniform coating of bitumen immediately before fresh mixture is placed. Tack coat shall be applied at rate which will leave asphaltic residue of 5-7 galJ 100 s.y.after evaporation of vehicle. Base surface shall be dry and clean when tack coat is applied. Asphaltic paving material shall not be placed until vehicle has completely evaporated from tack coat. Adjoining new paving shall be placed before tack coat has dried or dusted over. 12. Earth or other approved material shall be placed along pavement edges in such quantity as will compact to thickness of course being constructed, allowing at least I ft.of shoulder width to be rolled and compacted simultaneously with rolling and compacting surface. Pavement edge shall be trimmed neatly to line before placing earth or other approved material along edge. 13. Variations in smoothness of finished surface shall be less than or equal to I/4 in.when tested with a 10 ft.straight edge,applied both parallel to and at right angles to centerline of paved area. At joints with existing pavement,and at other locations where an essentially flush transition is required, pavement elevation tolerance shall not exceed 0.01 feet. At other areas pavement elevation tolerance shall not exceed +0.05 ft. Irregularities exceeding these amounts or which retain water on surface shall be corrected by removing defective work and replacing with new material conforming to this section. 3.6 TRAFFIC STRIPING A. Traffic paint materials, equipment, methods of placement, and precautions to be observed as to weather, condition of surface, etc., shall conform to MHD Specifications for traffic striping first class road work. Striping shall not begin until all asphalt surfaces have cured for a minimum of 14 days. B. Striping patterns shall conform to the layout shown on the Drawings. C. Striping width shall be as detailed in the 1978 Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices. 3.7 REMEDIAL MEASURES Upon direction of the Engineer, cut out, and/or rework all surfaces and subgrade areas which do not meet the requirements of this Section;perform all remedial measures at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.8 SPECIAL CONDITIONS Work shall be properly coordinated with the work of other trades. Other trades shall be consulted in advance so that proper provisions may be made for installation of their work and so that the work of this Section may be properly finished and connected to the work of other trades. END OF SECTION BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING &CURBING 02600-8 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group, Inc. 4. Construction methods shall conform to the Massachusetts Department of Public Works Specifications, Section 460, Class I, Bituminous Concrete Pavement,Type-I. 5. Submission of the job-mix formula for the bituminous concrete surface course shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, and it shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval 10 days prior to the pavement construction. Deliveries shall be timed to permit spreading and rolling all material during daylight hours, unless artificial light, satisfactory to the Engineer, is provided. Loads which have been wet by rain or otherwise will not be accepted. Hauling over freshly laid or rolled material will not be permitted. 6. Establishment of grades,grade control, and conformance to finished pavement surface grade tolerances required shall be the responsibility of the Contractor in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications. 7. Placing and rolling of mixture shall be as nearly continuous as possible. Breakdown rolling shall begin as soon after placing as mixture will bear the operation without undue displacement. Delays in rolling shall be completed while the mix temperature exceeds 150 degrees F. Rolling shall proceed longitudinally, starting at edge of newly placed material and proceeding toward previously rolled areas. Rolling overlap on successive strips shall be greater than or equal to width of roller rear wheel. Alternate trips of roller shall be of slightly different lengths. Corrections required in surface shall be made by removing or adding materials before rolling is completed. Skin patching of areas where rolling has been completed will not be permitted. Course shall be subjected to diagonal rolling, crossing lines of the first rolling while mixture is hot and in compatible condition. Displacement of mixture or other fault shall be corrected at once by use of rakes and application of fresh mixture or removal or mixture, as required. Rolling of each course shall be continued until roller marks are eliminated. Roller shall pass over unprotected edge of course only when paving is to be discontinued for sufficient time to permit mixture to become cold. 8. In places not accessible to roller, mixture shall be compacted with hand tampers. Hand tampers shall weight at least 50 lb.and shall have a tamping face less than or equal to 100 sq. in. Mechanical tampers capable of equal compaction will be acceptable in areas in which they can be employed effectively. 9. Portions of pavement courses which become mixed with foreign material or are in any way defective shall be removed, replaced with fresh mixture and compacted to density of surrounding areas. Asphaltic material spilled outside lines of finished pavement shall be immediately and completely removed. Such material shall not be employed in the work. 10. joints shall present same texture, density,and smoothness as other sections of the course. Continuous bond shall be obtained between portions of existing and new pavements and between successive placements of new pavement. Any longitudinal or transverse joint which has cooled below 150 degrees F prior to placement of adjacent mix, shall be treated with a coat of tack coat prior to new mix placement. New material at joints shall be thick enough to allow for compaction when rolling. Compaction of pavement, base,and subgrade at joints shall be such that there is no yielding of new pavement relative to existing pavement when subjected to traffic. BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING &CURBING 02600- 7 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group, Inc. D. Width of Base I. Material shall be placed adjacent to wall, manhole, catch basin, and other structures only after they have been set to required grade and level. 2. Rolling shall begin at sides and progress to center of crowned areas, and shall begin on low side and progress toward high side of sloped areas. Rolling shall continue until material does not creep or wave ahead of roller wheels. 3. Surface irregularities which exceed 1/2 in. measured by means of a 10 ft. long straightedge shall be replaced and properly compacted. E. Subgrade and base course shall be kept clean and uncontaminated. Less select materials shall not be permitted to become mixed with gravel. Materials spilled outside pavement lines shall be removed and area repaired. F. Portions of subgrade or of construction above which become contaminated,softened, or dislodged by passing of traffic, or otherwise damaged, shall be cleaned, replaced,and otherwise repaired to conform to the requirements of this specification before proceeding with next operation. 3.5 PLACEMENT OF BITUMINOUS CONCRETE SURFACING A. Preparation Bituminous concrete mixtures shall be laid only when surface is free of foreign matter and when the weather is not foggy or rainy,and further these operations shall be carried on only when the atmospheric temperature is not less than 40 degrees F in the shade. Actual mix delivery temperature shall adhere to Section 460.61. Under no circumstances shall mix temperature exceed 325 degrees F upon arrival at the site. Temperature exceeding 325 degrees F will result in rejection of the entire load. B. Placement Bituminous concrete pavements shall be furnished, handled and laid in accordance with Section 460 and Section 701 of the State Specifications, except as herein modified. I. Binder and wearing surface courses for sidewalks may each be applied individually, in single lifts of full thickness indicated on the Drawings. 2. All joints at old pavement shall be sawed vertical butt joints which shall receive a light coating of asphalt emulsion a short time before paving commences,as directed by the Engineer. 3. Adjacent concrete work, curb, etc., shall be protected from stain and damage during entire operation. Damage and stained areas shall be replaced or repaired to equal their original condition. BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING & CURBING 02600- 6 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group, Inc. B. Existing subgrade materials which will not readily compact as required shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory materials. Additional materials needed to bring subgrade to required line and grade and to replace unsuitable material removed shall be material conforming to this Section. C. Subgrade of areas to be paved shall be recompacted as required to bring top 8 in.of material immediately below gravel base course to a compaction of at least 90%of maximum density, as determined by ASTM D 1557, Method D. Subgrade compaction shall extend for a distance of at least I ft. beyond pavement edge. D. Excavation required in pavement subgrade shall be completed before fine grading and final compaction of subgrade are performed. Where excavation must be performed in completed subgrade or subbase, subsequent backfill and compaction shall be performed as directed by the Engineer as specified in Section 02200, EARTHWORK. Completed subgrade after filling such areas shall be uniformly and properly graded. E. Areas being graded or compacted shall be kept shaped and drained during construction. Ruts greater than or equal to 2 in.deep in subgrade, shall be graded out, reshaped as required, and recompacted before placing pavement. F. Materials shall not be stored or stockpiled on subgrade. G. Disposal of debris and other material excavated and/or stripped under this section,and material unsuitable for or in excess of requirements for completing work of this section shall be disposed of off-site. H. Prepared subgrade will be inspected by the Engineer. Subgrade shall be approved by the Engineer before installation of paving base course. Disturbance to subgrade caused by inspection procedures shall be repaired under this section of the specification. 3.4 PLACEMENT OF GRAVEL BASE COURSE A. The gravel shall be furnished, hauled, deposited and spread in layers as specified in applicable provisions of Section 40,and 405 of the State Specifications and compacted as specified for the formation of embankments,for sub-base, shoulders etc.,and as specified herein. B. The gravel shall be spread in layers from self-spreading vehicles, or with power graders of approved types, or by hand upon the prepared subgrade. Gravel shall be spread in layers no more than six (6") inches thick, compacted measure. Compaction requirements shall be to 95%maximum density as determined by ASTM D 1557, Method D. Stone greater than 2 in. shall be excluded from course. .The method of compaction proposed by the Contractor shall be approved by the Engineer and the approved method and procedure, once established and providing the required results, shall be used throughout the entire operation. Each lift shall be separately compacted to specified density. Trucks shall not be used for compaction purposes. C. Width of base course shall be greater than or equal to the width of pavement surface, if continuous lateral support is provided during rolling,and shall extend at least 2 x base thickness beyond edge of the course above, if not so supported. BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING& CURBING 02600 - 5 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group,Inc. OOW Pavement striping and reflective glass beads shall conform to Section M7.01.10 and M7.01.07 of the MHD Specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Inspection I. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Verify that bituminous concrete pavement be installed in strict accordance with the original design,all pertinent codes and regulations,and all pertinent portions of the referenced standards. B. Discrepancies I. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Engineer. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3.2 EQUIPMENT A. Compacting Equipment All equipment for compacting shall be steel-tired power rollers having a minimum weight of 10 tons, except that hand held vibrator compactors may be used in areas not accessible to rollers where specifically approved in advance by the Engineer. B. Paving Equipment All equipment for paving shall be spreading, self-propelled asphalt paving machine capable of maintaining line,grade and minimum surface course thickness specified,with laser grading sensors for tolerance accuracy. 3.3 GRADING A. Areas to be paved will be compacted and brought approximately to subgrade elevation under Section 02200, EARTHWORK, before work of this section is performed. Final fine grading, filling, and compaction of subgrade to receive paving, as required to form a firm, uniform,accurate, and unyielding subgrade at required elevations and to required lines, shall be done under this Section. BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING &CURBING 02600-4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group,Inc. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GRAVEL BASE COURSE Gravel base and/or sub-base courses for areas beneath new pavement as hereinbefore defined and indicated on the drawings, shall consist of gravel borrow composed of hard durable stone,and coarse sand, free of loam, clay or silt, uniformly graded and containing no stone having any dimension greater than the gradation shown on the plans. When spread and rolled on the prepared surface, it shall form a stable surface. The gradation shall conform to State Specifications,Section M 1, sub-section M 1.03.0,Type"b", and attention is directed to the selected gravel size limitation. Samples of gravel and results of gradation tests performed by an approved testing laboratory shall be submitted for approval of the Engineer. No stone greater than 4"in any dimension. 2.2 DENSE GRADED CRUSHED STONE Dense graded crushed stone material shall consist of crusher-runu coarse aggregates of crushed stone or gravel and fine aggregates of natural sand or stone screenings informly pre-mixed and placed on the gravel base and conforming to Section 402,Subsection M2.01.7, of the State Specification. 2.3 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT A. All courses of the bituminous concrete paving shall consist of Class I,Type 1-I, conforming to the requirements of Section 460, Subsection M3.1 1.00 of MHD Specifications. I. Binder or bottom course paving shall have a maximum aggregate size passing I in. sieve, and bitumen content= 5 1/2% + 1/2%by weight. 2. Top or wearing course paving shall have maximum aggregate size passing 1/2 in.sieve,and bitumen content=6 1/2%+ 1/2% by weight. Complete job mix formula, listing quantities and pertinent ingredient properties, shall be submitted to and approved by the Engineer at least two weeks before work is scheduled to begin. B. Bituminous tack coat shall be applied as required. Bituminous material for tack coat on the existing surface,where required or specified, shall be emulsified asphalt,grade RS-I conforming to Subsection M3.03.0 of MDPW Specifications. 2.4 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE CURB A. Bituminous concrete shall be Class I, conforming to applicable requirements of MDPW Specifications M3.11.03 Table"A"for"Dense Mix" B. Curb shall be Type 2, MHD Standard as detailed on the plans. 2.5 TRAFFIC PAINT BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING &CURBING 02600- 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group, Inc. A. Unless otherwise specified,work and materials for construction of the asphaltic concrete paving shall conform to the applicable portions of the following: I. MHD specifications Section 460 for pavement and Section 405 for gravel base course and Section 500 for"curb and edging". 2. MHD specifications Section 860 for fast drying traffic paint. B. Paving work, base course etc., shall be done only after excavation and construction work which might injure them has been completed. Damage caused during construction shall be repaired before acceptance. All trenches for utility installation shall be completed and backfilled for a period of 30 days prior to paving over these trenches unless approved by the Engineer. C. Repair and replace existing paving areas damaged and removed during this Project Workmanship and materials for such repair and replacement shall match those employed in existing work, except as otherwise noted. D. Pavement subbase shall not be placed on a muddy or frozen subgrade. E. Existing pavement under state or local jurisdiction shall, if damaged or removed during the course of this project, be repaired or replaced under this section of the specification in conformance with applicable codes, standards, and practices. 1.8 SUBMITTALS Submission of the job-mix formula for the bituminous concrete surface course shall be the responsibility of the Contractor,and it shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval 10 days prior to the pavement construction. 1.9 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection Use all means necessary to protect bituminous concrete pavement materials before,during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. B. Replacements In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Dust Control I. Use all means necessary to prevent the spread of dust during performance of the work of this Section. "* 2. Thoroughly moisten all surfaces as required to prevent dust being a nuisance to the public, neighbors and concurrent performance of other work on the job site. BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING &CURBING 02600-2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group,Inc. SECTION 02600- BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT AND CURBING PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED A. If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section, provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Engineer's interpretation. 1.3 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT A. In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document not clarified by addendum,the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided, in accordance with the Engineer's interpretation. 1.4 SECTION INCLUDES A. Bituminous concrete pavement required for this work is indicated on the drawings and includes, but is not necessarily limited to: I. Roadway and walkway pavement 2. Bituminous concrete curbing 3. Patching 4. Line painting and striping 1.5 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): C. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Highway Department(MHD or MDPW): Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges D. Comply with standards specified in accordance with City of Northampton Department of Public Works. 1.6 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE Excavating, Filling&Grading........................................................................................................Section 02200 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING & CURBING 02600- 1 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group, Inc. B. Leakage The sewers and appurtenant structures shall be made as nearly watertight as practicable and leakage measurements shall be made as directed by the Engineer. The leakage into the sewers, including manholes, constructed under this contract shall not exceed an average of five hundred (500)gallons per inch diameter in twenty-four(24) hours per mile of sewer. Where practicable, the leakage tests shall be made at a time when a head of water can be maintained at least one (1) foot above the top of the pipe of the highest section of work being tested. The Contractor shall construct such weirs of other means of measurement as may be required and shall do all necessary pumping to enable the tests to be properly made. Portions of sewers which fail to meet tests shall be repaired and retested as necessary until test requirements are complied with. END OF SECTION STORM DRAINAGE 02300- 12 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group, Inc. Bricks shall be clean when laid. For best results, bricks should have a section rate,when laid, not in excess of 40 gpm, in accordance with the NBS test procedure. Except in cold weather, all brick shall be set as directed by the Engineerto approximate this condition. Each brick shall be laid in a full bed and joint of mortar without requiring subsequent grouting, slushing or filling and shall be thoroughly bonded as directed. Brick work shall be protected against weather and frost as approved or required by the Engineer. D. Plastering Outside faces of brick masonry shall be plastered with mortar 3/4 inch thick. The masonry shall be properly wetted as above specified before the plaster is applied. The plaster shall be carefully spread and troweled so that all cracks are thoroughly worked out. After hardening,the plaster shall be carefully checked, by being tapped, for bond and soundness. Waterproofing shall be added to the mortar for underground masonry in accordance with the waterproofing manufacturer's directions. Other additives will not be permitted in the mortar. Two coats of bituminous waterproofing material shall then be applied to the hardened plaster. The material shall be 1.miniwax Fibrous Brush Coat"made by the Miniwax Company, New York, N.Y. 'Tremco 121 Foundation Coating"made by the Tremco Manufacturing Company, Cleveland Ohio; "Intertol No. 7"made by Intertol Company, Newark, NJ; or approved equal. The material shall be applied by brush or spray(using a primer if necessary) in accordance with the direction of the manufacturer. The Engineer at his discretion may require that two coats of the above described bituminous waterproofing material be applied to the outside of precast manholes installed in wet areas. E. Stubs in Manholes The stubs shall be short pieces cut from the bell end of the pipe,and sealed as specified. The stubs shall be set to the required line and elevation and encased in the manhole masonry as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Architect F. Where required, new piping shall be connected to existing manholes and catch basins by cutting or breaking into existing structures. Completed work shall be adequately patched and finished with nonshrink grout to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 3.7 CERTIFICATES Affidavits shall be furnished from the manufacturer of pipe and appurtenances furnished and installed under this Section,certifying that such materials delivered to the project conform to the requirements of these Specifications. 3.8 TESTING A. Tests for outside stormwater drainage piping shall be paid for by this Contractor as requested by the Engineer and approved before acceptance. All tests shall be performed after installation is completed including all backfilling, compaction and cleaning. STORM DRAINAGE 02300- 11 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group, Inc. C. Nonshrink grout joint Joints shall be as specified for Portland cement mortar above, except using nonshrink grout D. Asphalt mastic joint: Asphalt mastic joint shall be caulked with jute or oakum, and remainder of joint depth filled with asphalt mastic. Jute or oakum may be omitted if joint space is completely filled with mastic,and a continuous mastic bead is left around full circumference on both inside and outside surfaces of pipe. Surfaces of pipe to be in contact with asphalt mastic shall be thoroughly clean and dry when mastic is placed in the joint Inside of pipe joints shall be left smooth an flush with pipe wall, completely free from obstruction to flow. I. Placing of mastic joints shall lag at least five pipe sections behind pipe installation. Final four joints shall be made up after last pipe section is in final position. 2. Mortar in bell and spigot pipe joints shall be bevelled off on outside of pipe at a 45 degree angle to barrel. Mastic shall extend from barrel of one pipe to outer-most edge of bell of next pipe. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF CATCH BASINS& MANHOLE A. General All drainage structures to be constructed within this contract shall be as indicated on the drawings and location shall be in strict accordance with the plans. Manholes and catch basins shall be plumb and vertical,with each section in true alignment. Materials shall be as listed herein and exceptions shall not be taken without prior approval. I. Lifting holes in precast sections shall be thoroughly plugged with mortar and finished smooth and flush with adjoining surfaces. 2. Drain pipe shall extend,around its entire circumference,to inside surface of wall of structure into which it is inserted. Pipe shall be joined to manhole wall using either a flexible manhole sleeve or nonshrink grout For grouted joints, surface between pipe and wall shall be filled with nonshrink grout B. Castings Casting frames shall be set on a full bed of mortar,true to grade and concentric with the masonry. All voids beneath the bottom flange shall be completely filled to make a watertight fit A ring of mortar at least I inch thick shall be placed around the outside of the bottom flange extending to the outer edge of the masonry all around the frame. Mortar surface shall be smooth and shall be sloped to shed water away from the frame. C. Laying Brick STORM DRAINAGE 02300 - 10 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group,Inc. 3. Each pipe shall be so laid as form a close joint with the next adjoining pipe and bring the inverts continuously to required grade. Each pipe shall be supported with compacted crushed stone,graded in size from 1/4 inch to 3/4 inch, to obtain a substantially unyielding bed. 4. Unless recommended by the ASTM standards and by the manufacturers of the various kinds and types of pipe,the Contractor shall not joint pairs of pipe before laying them. 5. No pipe or fitting shall be permanently supported on saddles, blocking, or stones. 5. Where a concrete cradle is used,the pipe shall be laid on concrete saddles so constructed as to provide lateral support for the pipe while the cradle is being placed. 7. Pipe shall not be backfilled until joints have been fully inspected,and approved. 8. Entire length of pipe shall be thoroughly flushed clean following completion of backfill. 9. Lifting holes in concrete pipe shall be at top of pipe as installed. Holes shall be sealed with precast concrete plugs. Before plugs are installed, entire contact surface between plug and pipe shall be coated with asphalt mastic. Plug shall be driven home before mastic has set up. 3.5 PIPING Pipe joints shall be made with rubber gaskets, Portland cement mortar, nonshrink grout,or asphalt mastic compound. A. Rubber gasketed joint: Pipe gasket shall be installed using lubricants,cements,adhesives,and other accessories and methods recommended by the gasket manufacturer. Pipe and gasket surfaces shall be kept clean until pipe has been properly drawn up and the joint closed. Gaskets and other jointing material shall be placed on the pipe immediately before joint is made up. jointing materials shall be inspected and defects repaired before joint is completed. B. Portland cement mortared joint: Mortar joint shall be caulked with jute or oakum, and remainder of joint depth filled with cement mortar. jute or oakum may be omitted if joint space is completely filled with mortar, and a continuous bead is left around full circumference on both inside and outside surfaces of pipe. Pipe surfaces to be in contact with mortar shall be thoroughly cleaned and well wetted before joint is made. On inside of pipe,joint shall be left smooth and flush with pipe wall, completely free from obstructions to flow. joints shall be protected from sun and wind for a minimum of three days. I. Placing of mortar in joints shall lag at least five pipe sections behind pipe installation.Final four joints shall be made up after last pipe section is its final position. 2. Mortar in bell and spigot pipe shall be bevelled off on outside of pipe at a 45 degree angle to barrel. Mortar shall be extended from barrel of one pipe to outer-most edge of bell of next pipe. STORM DRAINAGE 02300-9 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group, Inc. Make all necessary measurements in the field to ensure precise fit of items in accordance with the original design. 3.3 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING Perform all trenching and backfilling necessary for this portion of the work, strictly conforming to the requirements for trenching described in Section 02200 of these Specifications. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF PIPING A. General Piping shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the local and state DPW Standards. Concrete pipe installation shall conform to Class B, Bedding Condition as specified in the ACPA Manual. VC pipe installation shall conform to NCPA Manual for Figure 8, Class C Bedding Condition. B. Approvals No pipe shall be laid without prior notification of the Architect. Each pipe shall be subject to inspection by the Architect immediately before it is laid, and defective pipe will be rejected. Pipe lines shall be laid to the grades and alignment indicated on the drawings. Proper facilities shall be provided for lowering sections of pipe into trenches. C. Controls The grade and alignment of all pipe laid in trenches shall be controlled by batterboards, laser equipment, or parallel offset lines with accurate horizontal and vertical control checkout points spaced not greater than 25 feet. Grades and lines between points shall be set and checked with grade and alignment squares. Layout of controls shall be established by a Registered Professional Engineer or Land Surveyor. Alignment tolerances shall be I in 1,000 vertical and I in 500 horizontal. Pipe shall be inspected for alignment,and approval shall be obtained from the Architect before backfilling work commences. D. Procedure I. Before being laid, each pipe length shall be inspected and tested to verify that it is not cracked, permanently dented or deformed. Pipe of the required size shall be laid to conform to the lines and grades indicated on the drawings or given by the Contracting Officer. 2. Pipe shall be laid with the groove or bell end upstream. Bell shall rest over a shallow excavation in pipe bedding to prevent pipe weight from bearing on bell. STORM DRAINAGE 02300-8 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group,Inc. Oft, A. The mortar shall be composed of Portland Cement, hydrated lime,and sand, in which the volume of sand shall not exceed three times the sum of the volumes of cement and lime. The proportions of cement and lime shall be 1 1/4. B. Cement shall be Type II as previously specified. C. Lime shall be Type S conforming to ASTM Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes, Designation C 207. "Mortaseal" made by U.S. Gypsum or"4 Hydrate"made by the New England Lime Company shall normally meet this specification. D. The sand shall conform to the ASTM Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar, Designation C 144. 2.16 ADJUSTING AND REMODELING OF DRAINAGE STRUCTURES Existing manhole and catch basin structures to be adjusted or remodeled shall be adjusted and remodeled in conformance to MHD Specifications. 2.17 HDPE DRAINAGE PIPE This pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with the most recent AASHTO M294 Type S or SP specification. It shall be constructed of high density polyethylene, and shall be seamless with a smooth interior waterway. It shall not be used where the pipe will be exposed to sunlight. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Inspection I. Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Verify that storm drainage system may be installed in strict accordance with all pertinent codes and regulations, the original design,the referenced standards, and the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Discrepancies I. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. ate' 3.2 FIELD MEASUREMENTS STORM DRAINAGE 02300- 7 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group, Inc. 2.8 PORTLAND CEMENT A. Cement shall be single brand of approved American made Portland Cement conforming to current specifications of ASTM Standard Specification for Portland Cement, Designation C 150, Type II or, where required. Type III high early-strength cement. B. When used in the work,cement shall be free from lumps and partially or wholly set cement. 2.9 ADMIXTURES The use of admixtures to improve workability,facilitate hardening of waterproofing, will not be permitted. 2.10 WATER Clean,fresh water shall be used for mixing concrete. 2.11 FINE AGGREGATE Concrete sand shall be clean, sound, sharp,screened,and well graded with no grain larger than will pass a 3/8 inch sieve. Not more than 30 percent by weight shall pass a No.50 sieve. 2.12 COARSE AGGREGATE Coarse aggregate shall be washed screened gravel or crushed stone, hard, tough,durable,and having not more than 5 percent by weight of deleterious substances and soft fragments. Aggregate shall be well graded from the largest which shall pass a 1 1/2 inch mesh to the smallest which shall pass a 3/8 inch mesh and not over 5 percent passing a 1/4 inch mesh. 2.13 SAMPLES OF AGGREGATE If required,the Contractor shall submit clearly labeled samples of sand and coarse aggregate to the Contracting Officer as directed.. No aggregates shall be delivered or used before the samples have been approved and aggregates as delivered shall in all respects be equal to the approved samples. 2.14 BRICK The brick shall be good, sound, hard, and uniformly burned brick, regular and uniform in shape and size, of compact texture and satisfactory to the Contracting Officer. Brick shall be Grade SA conforming to the ASTM Standard Specification for Sewer Brick(made from Clay or Shale), Designation C 32. In case the Contracting Officer rejects any brick, the same shall be immediately removed from the worksite and brick satisfactory to the Contracting Officer substituted. Brick shall be culled and completely piled as soon as delivered. 2.15 MORTAR FOR BRICKWORK STORM DRAINAGE 02300-6 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group, Inc. 2.6 CATCH BASINS A. Catch basins shall be constructed of the materials, size,form thickness and in the manner showing detail on a plan titled'Typical Details" B. Precast concrete basins shall consist of pre-cast reinforced riser sections, haunched concentric cone top section, and a base section conforming to the typical catch basin details. Where required by shallow installations or directed by the Engineer, provide a flat slab top constructed to support HS-20 wheel loading. C. Pre-cast catch basins shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM Designation C 478. The minimum compressive strength of the concrete for all sections shall be 4,000 psi of a 28 day test. The circumferential steel reinforcement for riser sections and base walls shall be 0.17 square inch per linear foot. Reinforcing in the bottoms of bases shall be of the same design. D. Each section of the pre-cast manhole shall have two holes for the purpose of handling and laying. These holes shall be tapered and shall be plugged with mortar after installation. E. Type II cement to be used. Sections shall be set so as to be vertical and in true alignment. joints shall be completely mortared by buttering the groove and immediately prior to setting a section assuring a water tight sump. F. Catch basin connections to the manhole shall enter immediately above the shelf. G. Red Sewer Brick shall be used in the catch basins. Limits of Class B Rock excavation will be six(6) inches below and twelve(12) inches outside the base. H. 3/4"crushed stone foundation six(6) inches in depth is required under the pre-cast base at no additional cost I. Traps, frames,grate and inlets shall be furnished and installed as specified under their respective items. A minimum of 12 inches red sewer brick shall be used under the frames. The grates shall fit so as to prevent rocking or unnecessary space at the joints. 2.7 CLASS OF CONCRETE A. Class A Concrete shall be used for all reinforced and plain concrete not otherwise specified or noted on the drawings. B. Class A concrete shall develop a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi,at 28 days with aggregates proportioned to produce a dense and watertight concrete. C. Class B concrete may be used wherever low-strength concrete can be allowed,including concrete fill under foundations and elsewhere as specified or indicated on the drawings. D. Class B concrete shall develop a minimum compressive strength of 2,500 psi,at 28 days. STORM DRAINAGE 02300- 5 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group, Inc. D. Pipe may be applied with or without lifting holes, at the Contractor's option. Lifting holes shall be conical,arranged to lie at top of pipe as installed. Precast concrete plugs, shaped to fit lifting holes, shall be supplied with pipe. 2.4 Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe and Perforated Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe PVC pipe and fittings for drainage and subdrainage applications shall meet ASTM D 1785 Standard Specifications for PVC plastic pipe,Type I Schedule 80. Joints shall be made in acordance with ASTM D 2855 Recommended Practice for Making Solvent-cemented joints with PVC Pipe and Fittings. 2.5 MANHOLES A. Precast reinforced concrete manholes shall consist of precast reinforced riser sections, a concentric or eccentric to and a base section conforming with the typical manhole details. Precast manhole section shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections, designation C 478. The minimum compressive strength of the concrete for 4-foot diameter and for 5-foot diameter manholes for all sections shall be 4,OOOpsi. The circumferential steel reinforcement for riser pipe, cone sections and base walls for the various sized manholes shall be as required by ASTM Standard Specification for welded Steel Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement, Designation A 185 and shall be as follows: Alow For 5-foot diameter manholes: An area of 0.12 square inch per vertical foot reinforcement for the 4-foot diameter portion and an area of 0.17 square inch per vertical foot reinforcement for the 5-foot diameter portion of the manhole in both ell and spigot. B. Reinforcing in the bottom bases shall be of the same design as that required for the various sized manholes. Reinforcing shall extend into the tongue and groove of each manhole section. C. Manhole steps shall be aluminum drop-front type as manufactured by Alcoa Aluminum Company (or approved equal). All steps shall be cast into walls of the precast sections so as to form a continuous ladder with a distance of twelve(12") inches between steps. D. Each section of the precast manhole shall have two holes for the purpose of handling and laying. These holes shall be tapered and shall be plugged with mortar after installation. E. Monolithically pressure cast base sections shall be as shown on the drawings or as ordered by the Owner's Representative. Holes for pipes shall be case in the base section so that there is a clear distance of four(4) inches minimum between the inside bottom of the base section and the pipe invert. F. The joint for the pipe at the base section shall consist of a cast iron compression flange together with cast iron inserts (imbedded in the wall of the base section) and an "O"Ring(or approved equal) to provide a water tight seal and to allow a flexible joint capable of deflecting a maximum of 9 degrees from center line of pipe. STORM DRAINAGE 02300-4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group,Inc. ' Protect existing utilities as specified in these Specifications. Use all means necessary to protect storm drain system materials before,during and after installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades. B. Replacements In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect,at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Delivery and Storage Deliver all materials to the job site in their original containers,with all labels legible at time of use. Store in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations,as approved by the Architect. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 General -Construct drainage structures in accordance with Northampton DPW standards. 2.2 CASTINGS A. Catalog listings on the plans indicated are from the Neenah Foundry Company catalogs. Subsections may be submitted for the approval of the Project Engineer, provided they are equivalent to those indicated and conform to State Specification s.The catch basin frame and grate shall be Model R-3570 Heavy Duty or approved equal (approximate weight= 300 pounds). B. The manhole frames and covers shall conform to MHD Specifications C. Traps shall conform to MHD requirements. 2.3 CONCRETE PIPE A. Reinforced concrete pipe (RCP) shall conform to MHD Specifications Section M5.02.2, Reinforced Concrete Pipe. B. Concrete pipe shall be joined by one of the following methods: I. Rubber gaskets conforming to ASTM C443; 2. Portland cement mortar; 3. Nonshrink grout; or 4. Asphalt mastic cement. ►± C. Precast reinforced concrete pipe manholes and tees shall be manufactured by Field Concrete Pipe Company,Wauregan, CT 06387, or approved equal. STORM DRAINAGE 02300- 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group,Inc. I. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials(AASHTO): Standard r Specifications for Highway Bridges 2. American Concrete Institute(ACI): Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete- 318 3. American Concrete Pipe Association (ACPA): Concrete Pipe Design Manual 4. Massachussetts Highway Department Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges C. Codes The work shall be completed in accordance with standards and approval of the The City of Northampton Department of Public Works. D. Permits The Contractor shall pay for all permits and licenses as required. E. Inspection All drainage system installations shall be inspected and approved by Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for making all arrangements with inspectors from the local municipality and paying all fees associated with the drainage system installation. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Materials List After award of Contract and before any storm drainage system materials are delivered to the job site, manufacturer's product data shall be submitted. I. Show manufacturer's name and catalog number for each item,furnish complete catalog cuts and technical data, and furnish the manufacturer's recommendations as to method of installation. 2. Do not permit any storm drainage or sewerage component to be brought onto the job until it has been approved by the Architect. B. Record Drawings I. During the course of installation, carefully show, in red line, on a print of the grading plan, all changes made to the storm drainage system during installation. 2. Upon completion of the storm drainage system installation, these marked plans shall be supplied to the Architect. 1.7 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection STORM DRAINAGE 02300 -2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group,Inc. SECTION 02300-STORM DRAINAGE PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section, provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation. 1.3 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation. 1.4 DESCRIPTION A. The storm drainage system required for this work is indicated on the drawings and includes, but is not necessarily limited to: - storm drainage pipe and field subdrains - catch basins, manholes, storm drains and interconnecting lateral lines - testing B. Related Work Described Elsewhere Site Demolition, Clearing and Grubbing....................................................Section 02100 Excavating, Filling&Grading.........................................................................Section 02200 Bituminous Concrete Pavement..................................................................Section 02600 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Installers Use adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work in this Section. B. Standards STORM DRAINAGE 02300- 1 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group, Inc. E. In the event of sudden downpours or other inclement weather, exposed subgrades and fills which, in the opinion of the Engineer become inundated or excessively moistened, shall have excess water removed and soil dried as specified above. F. Backfill stock piles shall be protected from adverse weather conditions. 3.11 CLEANING UP Upon completion of the work of this Section, immediately remove all debris and excess earth materials from the site. END OF SECTION EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 02200- 12 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group, Inc. Compaction Method Maximum Loose Lift Thickness Minimum#passes Below Below Less Maximum Structures Less Critical Structures Critical Stone Size* and Pavement Areas & Pavement Areas GRANULAR FI LL-SAN D-GRAVEL FILL Hand-operated vibratory plate or light roller in confined areas 4" 6" 8" 4 4 Hand-operated vibratory drum rollers weighing at least 1,000# in confined areas 6" 10" 12" 4 4 Light vibratory drum roller minimum minimum 8" 12" 18" 4 4 weight dynamic at drum force 5000# 10,000# Medium vibratory drum roller minimum minimum 8" 18" 24" 6 6 weight dynamic low at drum force 10,000# 20,000# *And no more than two-thirds (2/3) loose lift thickness. 3.10 MOISTURE CONTROL A. Variation of moisture content in fill and backfill material shall be limited to Optimum Moisture(-I to+3%). Moisture content shall be as uniformly distributed as practicable within each lift,and shall be adjusted as necessary to obtain the specified compaction. B. Material which does not contain sufficient moisture to be compacted to the specified densities shall be moisture conditioned by sprinkling, disking,windrowing, or other method approved by the Engineer. I. Material conditioned by sprinkling shall have water added before compaction. Uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade or layer of soil material to obtain sufficient moisture content The Contractor shall maintain sufficient hoses and/or water distributing equipment at the site for this purpose. C. Material containing excess moisture shall be dried to required Optimum Moisture Content before it is placed and compacted. Excessively moist soils shall be removed and replaced or shall be scarified by use of plow, discs,or other approved methods, and air-dried to meet the above requirements. D. Materials which are within the moisture requirements specified above, but which display pronounced elasticity or deformation under the action of earthmoving and compaction equipment, shall be reduced to Optimum Moisture Content,or below,to secure stability. EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 02200- 11 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group,Inc. I. Tolerance for backfill beneath concrete foundation shall be plus 1/2 inch and minus 2 inches. 2. Tolerance for backfill beneath concrete slab on grade shall be plus 1/2 inch and minus I inch. 3.8 COMPACTION A. Degree of compaction shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557, Method C. B. Except as otherwise noted,fill and backfill materials shall be placed in successive horizontal lifts which do not exceed specified thickness. C. Subgrade and backfill of indicated areas or structures shall be compacted as specified in the following table: Fill Area %of Maximum Dry Density Pavement base course 95 Beneath pavement base course 92 Beneath landscape areas 90 D. Compaction requirements shall apply to material directly below the indicated support item (base course,footing, or structure), and to all material above the undisturbed earth beneath fill,and enclosed by the following planes: I. Horizontal plane at the elevation of the bottom of the supported item (base course, footing, or structure),within a perimeter line located 2 feet beyond the exterior face or edge of item. 2. Flat planes extending from the perimeter line downward and outward at a 45 degree angle with the horizontal, to where the planes intersect undisturbed earth. Where zones of higher and lower percentages of compaction overlap, that of the higher percentage shall apply. E. Compaction of backfill in excavation shall be to a density not less than that required of the surrounding area fill. F. Equipment and methods employed to achieve specified compaction shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and equipment shall be replaced and methods revised as directed until specified compaction is obtained. G. Compaction of each lift shall be completed before placing of the next lift is started. H. Grading tolerance Rough Grade Pavement areas plus/minus 0.05 ft. Grass areas plus/minus 0.10 ft. Finish Grade Pavement areas plus/minus 0.005 ft. Grass areas plus/minus 0.05 ft. 3.9 COMPACTION METHODS The Compaction alternative given below are stated to provide minimum compaction standards only and in no way relieves the Contractor of his/her obligation to achieve the specified degree of compaction by whatever additional effort that is necessary. EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 02200- 10 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group,Inc. C. Where test pit excavations extended below the future proposed footing subgrade level,they should be re-excavated and backfilled with properly compacted Granular Fill or Sand-Gravel Fill prior to foundation construction or fill placement. 3.5 PLACING EMBANKMENTS A. Filling shall be done any area only after the Engineer or Geotechnical Consultant has reviewed subgrade. B. Benching: Fills placed on existing slopes which exceed 6 feet horizontal to I foot vertical shall be keyed or benched into the existing slope not less than 5 feet to prevent the formation of slippage planes. C. Compaction at End of Day: Areas undergoing filling shall be smooth-rolled before the end of the work day to seal and protect these areas from rainfall infiltration during the night. D. Except as otherwise noted, tolerance of top surface of completed fill areas shall be+ 2 inches from true grade indicated. Variations from indicated tolerance shall approximately compensate within each 100-foot area. 8" lift maximum. 3.6 BEDDING A. Minimum width of bedding material shall be at least as wide as the item to be installed on it. Where width of bed is less than full width of trench, Sand-Gravel shall be placed adjacent to bedding material to fill full width of the trench,and shall be compacted with bedding material. I. Width of bedding for sewer pipe shall extend full width of trench excavation. B. Where bed is damaged during excavation or while placing pipe, or otherwise, it shall be repaired to specified grade,contour,and compaction before weight of pipe is placed on it. C. Bedding material and embedment material for utilities will be furnished, placed,and compacted under the appropriate utility specification section. Bedding material to be Crushed Stone. 3.7 BACKFILL A. Excavation below finished grades shall be backfilled. Temporary planking,timbering,forms, debris, and refuse shall be removed before backfill is placed. B. Backfilling shall be done in any area only after the Owner or Engineer or Geotechnical Consultant have inspected and approved subgrade,foundations,or other work in excavations. Notice that the work is ready for inspection shall be given promptly,and sufficient time shall be allowed for making necessary examinations. C. In order to prevent lateral movement,care shall be exercised in placing backfill adjacent to utility lines,foundation walls and other structures. Backfill on opposite sides of such items shall be kept at approximately the same elevation as backfilling progresses to prevent unbalanced earth pressure. During backfilling,the difference in elevation of backfill on opposite sides of the structure shall not exceed 12 inches. I. Shoring shall be employed as necessary to protect such items. 2. Foundation walls and footings have been designed to act with other portions of the structure to withstand the loads they will bear in completed project;they have not been designed to withstand construction loads or unbalanced earth or equipment loadings. D. Except as otherwise noted, tolerance of top surface of completed backfill shall be+ 2 inches from true grade indicated,and variations from indicated tolerance shall approximately compensate within each 100-foot area. EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 02200-9 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group, Inc. J. If bearing surface of subgrade which is to receive fill, concrete footing, structure,or other construction becomes softened, disturbed, or unstable, unsuitable material shall be removed down to a firm bearing surface and replaced with suitable material at no additional cost to the Owner. Subgrade shall then be protected from further disturbance until construction item is placed. K. Excavations shall not be wider than required to set, place, and remove forms for concrete, install piping, or perform other necessary work. Width of trench at 12 inches above top of pipe or conduit shall be less than the outside diameter of the pipe or the conduit plus 3 feet. Sides of trench shall be sloped in accordance with OSHA standards. In materials where sloping walls are not stable, or tree damage may occur,trench walls shall be supported by sheeting or trench box. I. Should it be necessary to lower the utilities below the grade indicated on the Drawings because of existing pipes or structures, the excavation below normal grade shall be made to such widths and depths as the Engineer may direct. L. Some rock excavationis not expected on this project. If rock is encountered, rock cuts shall be excavated in accordance with MHD Specifications Section 120.63, Presplitting Rock. Use of explosives shall conform to MHD Specifications Section 7.12 and as specified herein,and shall be in strict accordance with applicable laws and ordinances. Explosives shall be stored on-site only when blasting is in progress. When the need for explosives has passed,they shall be removed from the site. . Surfaces of rock foundation shall be sufficiently rough to bond well with the masonry and embankments to be built and, if required, shall be cut to rough benches or steps. 2. Before masonry is built upon rock the rock shall be freed from all vegetation, dirt, clay, shale,excessively cracked rock, water, ice, snow and other objectionable substances. Picking,wedging,streams of water under high pressure, stream jets, ad other effective means shall be used to clean exposed rock. 3. Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings, rock shall be excavated to a depth 6 inches or more below bottom of structures. M. Below-ground Demolition I. Underground construction, pipe, and similar items indicated on the Drawings as to be demolished or removed, shall be demolished and/or removed. Other items, not indicated on the Drawings,which impede construction of new work indicated, shall be abandoned, demolished and/or removed only with the approval of the Engineer. 2. Pipe which is to be abandoned in place shall be suitably and permanently plugged at end. Plug shall be stiff concrete,with a thickness, measured parallel to pipe axis of I pipe diameter,for pipe less than 18 inches in diameter. Both inner and outer faces of plug for pipe equal to or greater than 18 inches in diameter shall be formed. Pipe less than 4 inches in diameter need not be plugged.Abandoned pipes within proposed building(if exist) shall be removed or if left in place,they shall be properly grouted. 3.4 SUBGRADE PREPARATION A. Subgrade preparation for spread and continuous wall footings shall be conducted in such a way as to minimize disturbance of the silty/clayey subgrade. Dewater as necessary to provide stable subgrade. B. After scarification of subsoil as noted above,and prior to any fill placement, proofroll/compact the exposed subgrade with a minimum of 4 passes of a vibratory drum roller having a minimum weight of 5,000 pounds (static weight). If soft and unstable material is observed, it should be overexcavated and replaced with Granular Fill, compacted as specified herein at no additional cost to the Owner. EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 02200 - 8 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group,Inc. 2. Should any of the work be so enclosed or covered up before it has been approved, uncover all such work at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. After the uncovered work has been completely tested,inspected and approved, make all repairs and replacements necessary to restore the work to the condition in which it was found at the time of uncovering, all at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Stripping of Topsoil Any topsoil within "Limits of Work"and where excavation or filling will occur shall be stripped, cleaned of all rocks and debris and stockpiled on site for use in finish grading. 3.2 FINISH ELEVATIONS AND LINES Contractor shall be responsible for setting and establishing finish elevations and lines, to the required tolerances. Carefully preserve all data and all monuments set and, if displaced or lost, immediately replace to the approval of the Engineer, at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.3 EXCAVATING A. All suitable material must be stored on site and utilized as backfill or in embankments. Surplus or unsuitable material shall be removed and disposed of off the site. B. Depressions Resulting from Removal of Obstructions Where depressions result from, or have resulted from,the removal of surface or subsurface obstructions,open the depression to equipment working width and remove all debris and soft 0w„ material as directed by the Engineer. C. Sheeting, shoring, bracing, pumping, bailing, and other incidental work necessary to make and maintain excavations and keep them free from water at all times during placing of concrete, utility lines,and fill/backfill materials, shall be performed or supplied as required. Fill and backfill shall be placed in dry or dewatered areas only. D. Sheeting shall be installed,where required,to maintain safe and workable conditions in excavations and where adjacent tree protection zones prohibit sloped trench walls without damaging of the tree. Sheeting,including necessary wales and struts, shall be selected and designed by the Contractor. Use of sheeting shall equal or exceed minimum required for safety and/or conformance to law and/or OSHA Standards. E. Structures, pipes, pavement, earth,and other property liable to damage from excavation operations shall be braced, underpinned, and supported as required to prevent damage and movement. F. As excavation approaches underground utilities and structures, excavation shall be done by hand tools.Such manual excavation is incidental to normal excavation and no special payment will be made. G. As excavation shall include satisfactory disposal of excavated material not employed as backfill or fill material. H. Excavation for pipe and other items shall be carried far enough below underside of item to accommodate bedding material. 1. Excavations which extend below indicated or specified levels (over-excavation), shall be filled to those levels with compacted Granular Fill. EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 02200- 7 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group, Inc. 'low No.40 10-70 No. 200 *0- 15 (*0 -8 where used behind walls) 2.4 SAND-GRAVEL Sand-Gravel shall consist of durable sand and gravel and shall be free from ice and snow, roots, sod, rubbish and other deleterious or organic matter. Sand-Gravel shall conform to the following gradation requirements: Sieve Size Percent Finer by Weight 3 inch 100 1/2 inch 50-85 No.4 40-75 No.40 10- 35 No. 200 0-8 2.5 CRUSHED STONE Crushed Stone shall consist of durable crushed rock or durable crushed gravel stone and shall be free from ice and snow, clay, loam and other deleterious or organic matter. Crushed Stone shall conform to the following gradation requirements: Sieve Size Percent Finer by Weight l inch 100 3/4 inch 90- 100 1/2 inch 10- 50 3/8 0-20 #4 0-5 2.06 GRAVEL BASE COURSE Gravel base course for roadway and sidewalk construction shall comply with the relevant sections of Section 02600 Bituminous Pavement and MHD requirements,Section M I, sub-section M 1.03.0,Type"b". PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Prior Familiarization Prior to all work of this Section, become thoroughly familiar with the site, the site conditions, and all portions of the work falling within this Section. B. The Contractor shall establish the baseline shown on the drawings and accurately lay out all improvements related thereto. All work and control points shall be preserved by a system of offsets and/or ties in order to prevent destruction. Elevations shall be established from the project benchmark shown on the Contract Plans. C. Backfilling Prior to Approvals I. Do not allow or cause any of the work performed or installed to be covered up or enclosed by work of Section prior to all required inspections, tests and approvals. EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 02200-6 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group, Inc. B. As construction proceeds,the Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Engineer prior to start of earthwork operations requiring inspection and/or testing. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining test samples of soil materials proposed to be used and transporting them to the site sufficiently in advance of time planned for use of these materials for testing of materials to be completed. Use of these proposed materials by the Contractor prior to testing and approval or rejection, shall be at the Contractor's risk. 1.16 DISTURBANCE OF EXCAVATED OR FILLED AREAS DURING CONSTRUCTION A. The contractor shall take all necessary steps to avoid disturbance of subgrade, underlying natural soils and compacted fill during excavation and filling operations. Methods of construction shall be revised as necessary to avoid disturbance described above, including restricting construction access and types of vehicles or equipment, dewatering, or other acceptable control measures. Disturbance shall be construed to include detereoration of soils due to the contractor's operations, such as moving equipment, hauling, etc. The contractor shall cooperate with the engineer to modify operations as necessary to minimize disturbance and protect bearing soils. B. All excavated or filled areas that are disturbed during construction, including all loose or saturated soils, fill that cannot be compacted within 48 hours due to saturation and other areas that will not meet compaction requirements as specified herein shall be removed and replaced with compacted Granular Fill Sand-Gravel, or Crushed Stone at the Contractor's expense. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 FILL MATERIAL, GENERAL A. Approval Required -all fill material shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. 2.2 COMMON FILL MATERIAL, ORDINARY BORROW A. Common fill/ordinary borrow material shall be well graded, natural inorganic soil,approved by the Engineer and meeting the following requirements: I. It shall be free of organic or other weak or compressible materials, of frozen materials,and of stones larger than six inches maximum dimensions. 2. It shall be of such nature and character that it can be compacted to the specified densities. 3. It shall be free from highly plastic clays,from all materials subject to decay,decomposition, or dissolution and from cinders or other material which will corrode piping or other metal. 4. It shall have a maximum dry density of not less than 100 lbs. per cubic foot. B. Re-use of excavated on site common fill is dependent upon meeting compaction criteria. 2.3 GRANULAR FILL Granular Fill shall be free from ice and snow, roots, sod, rubbish and other deleterious or organic matter. Granular Fill shall conform to the following gradation requirements: Sieve Size Percent Finer by Weight 2/3 of the loose lift thickness 100 No. 10 30-95 EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 02200- 5 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group,Inc. E. The in-place dry density shall be determined in accordance with ASTM Standard Method of Test for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand Cone Method, Designation D 1556-82 or ASTM Standard Method of Test for Density of Soil in Place by Nuclear Methods, Designation D2922-81. 1.12 FROST PROTECTION Frozen,excessively moist or material containing snow shall not be placed as fill or backfill. Special care should be taken when placing fill material when the temperature is below 320F. 1.13 SHORING AND SHEETING A. Provide shoring, sheeting and/or bracing at excavations, as required,to prevent collapse of earth at site of excavations. B. Comply with federal, state and local regulations and provisions of the Occupational Safety and Heath Act(OSHA). C. Remove sheeting and shoring and the like,as backfilling operations progress,taking all necessary precautions to prevent collapse of excavation sides. 1.14 DEFINITIONS A. Subgrade-shall be that portion of the soil or rock which remains after stripping of topsoil, excavation,and prior to filling, or placement of roadway subbase. In proposed building area, subgrade shall be soil or rock which remains after stripping of top soil and subsoil. B. Embankment-shall be defined as any area on the site filled to raise grades to proposed subgrade ., elevations. Embankments are placed in layers to a predetermined elevation and cross-section. C. Utility Trench Backfill-is the area bounded by the proposed finished subgrade and the cover material over the respective pipe or conduit. This material shall conform with applicable requirements for embankment, structural backfill or utility company requirements depending on the area or zone into which the utility is installed. D. Unsuitable Material -material which is classified as"unsuitable"shall be material having at least one of the following properties: I. Material with a maximum unit dry weight per cubic foot less than 90 lb.as determined by ASTM D 1557. 2. Material containing visible organic matter,topsoil,organic silt, peat,construction debris, roots and stumps. 3. Material which has a Liquid Limit greater than 50. 4. Material designated in the field by the Geotechnical Consultant. E. Topsoil -The upper layer of the soil profile which is supporting the growth of vegetation as evidenced by the existence therein of numerous roots and other organic matter. F. Subsoil -loose silt and fine dand layer located directly below the topsoil. 1.15 COORDINATION A. Prior to start of earthwork,the Contractor shall arrange an on-site meeting with the Engineer for the purpose of establishing Contractor's schedule of operations and scheduling inspection procedures and requirements. EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 02200-4 10�1111111 =11 IN Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group,Inc. clearly visible to operators of trucks and other construction equipment,and shall be maintained at all times until completion of project. 1.10 DRAINAGE AND DEWATERING A. The Contractor shall provide, at his own expense,adequate pumping and drainage facilities to keep excavated areas sufficiently dry from groundwater and/or surface runoff so as not to adversely affect construction procedures or cause excessive disturbance of underlying natural ground or footing and slab subgrades. B. The Contractor shall grade and pitch the site as necessary to direct surface runoff away from open excavations and subgrade surfaces. Positive drainage(minimum 1.0%slope) shall be maintained at all times. C. Water from trenches and excavations shall be routed through the temporary sediment basins in such a manner as will not cause injury to public health nor to public or private property, not to the surface of roads,walks, and streets, not cause any interference with the use of the same by the public. Methods of disposal of pumped effluent shall not cause erosion or siltation. D. Under no circumstances shall the Contractor place fills, pour concrete, or install piping and appurtenances in excavations containing free water. E. There shall be sufficient pumping equipment, in good working order, available at all times to remove water. F. Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, pumping of excavations is not effective in maintaining a dry, firm subgrade,other acceptable dewatering methods shall be employed. 1.11 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Owner reserves the right to retain an independent testing laboratory to perform on-site observation and testing during the following phases of the construction operations. The services of the testing laboratory may include, but not be limited to,the following. I. Observation during excavation and replacement of existing fill under paved or slab areas. 2. Observation of compaction of paved and slab area subgrades. 3. Observation during placement and compaction of fills. 4. Laboratory testing and analysis of fill and bedding materials specified,as required. S. Observation of subgrade preparation for paved or slab areas. 6. Observe construction and perform water content,gradation,and compaction tests at a frequency and at locations determined by the testing agency. The results of these tests will be submitted to the Engineer, copy to the Contractor,on a timely basis so that the Contractor can take such action as is required to remedy indicated deficiencies. 7. Observation of fills following interruptions by rains or other inclement weather. B. The testing agency's presence does not include supervision or direction of the actual work by the Contractor, his employees or agents. Neither the presence of the testing agency, nor any observations and testing performed by him shall excuse the Contractor from defects discovered in his work. C. Compaction Control Wherever a percentage of compaction for backfill is indicated or specified, it shall be the in-place dry density divided by the maximum dry density and multiplied by 100. D. The maximum dry density shall be the density at optimum moisture as determined by ASTM Standard Methods of Test for Moisture- Density Relations of Soil Using 10-lb. Rammer and 18- inch Drop, Designation D 1557-78. (Method C). EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 02200- 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group, Inc. S. General exterior rough grading, cutting and filling required. 6. Filling and backfilling as required for walls, including furnishing of any extra material required. 7. Base and subbase course materials under structures, pavements, slabs and footings, including compaction. 8. Excavation and disposal of excess or unsuitable material. Excavation shall include removal and satisfactory disposal of all unclassified material encountered throughout the site. 9. Removal, hauling and stockpiling of suitable excavated materials for subsequent use in the work. 10. All rehandling, hauling and placing of stockpiled materials for use in refilling,filling, backfilling,grading and other such operations. 11. Pumping and dewatering of excavation as may be required. 12. Rock excavation and disposal 1.7 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE A. Site Demolition, Clearing and Grubbing.....................................................................Section 02100 B. Bituminous Concrete Pavement...................................................................................Section 02600 C. Topsoil for Seeding..........................................................................................................Section 02850 1.8 SUBMITTALS Submit a 50 lb. sample of each type of fill (off-site and on-site) to testing laboratory in an air tight container at least seven (7) days prior to use. Submit the name of each material supplier and specific type and source of each material. Any change in source throughout the project requires written approval by the Engineer or engineer. 1.9 JOB CONDITIONS A. Dust Control I. Use all means necessary to control dust on and near the work and on and near all off-site borrow areas, if such dust is caused by the Contractor's operations during performance of the work or if resulting from the condition in which the Contractor leaves the site. 2. Thoroughly moisten all surfaces as required to prevent dust being a nuisance to the public, neighbors and concurrent performance or other work on the site. B. Protection of Existing Structure and Utilities I. The work shall be executed in such manner as to prevent any damage to adjacent property and any other property and existing improvements such as, but not limited to:streets, curbs, paving, trees, utility lines and structures, monuments, bench marks and other public and private property,and to protect existing structures and foundations from damage caused by settlement, lateral earth movement, undermining,washout,and other hazards created by earthwork operations. 2. In case of any damage or injury caused in the performance of the work,the Contractor shall,at his own expense, make good such damage or injury to the satisfaction of,and without cost to the Owner. Existing roads, sidewalks,and curbs damaged during the project work shall be repaired or replaced to their original condition at the completion of operations. The Contractor shall replace,at his cost,existing bench marks, monuments, and other reference points which are disturbed or destroyed. 3. Buried structures, utility lines,etc., including those which project less than 18 inches above grade,which are subject to damage from construction equipment shall be clearly marked to indicate the hazard. Markers shall indicate limits of danger areas, by means which will be EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 02200-2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group, Inc. SECTION 02200 - EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 1. PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED A. If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section, provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Engineer's interpretation. 1.3 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT A. In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided, in accordance with the Engineer's interpretation 1.4 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. The Contractor shall become thoroughly familiar with the site,consult records and drawings of adjacent structures and of existing utilities and their connections, and note all conditions which may influence the work of this Section. B. By submitting a bid,the Contractor affirms that he has carefully examined the site and all conditions affecting work under this Section. No claim for additional costs will be allowed because of lack of full knowledge of existing conditions. C. The Contractor may, at his own expense, conduct additional subsurface testing as required for his own information. 1.5 INFORMATION NOT GUARANTEED A. Information on the Drawings and in the Specifications relating to subsurface conditions, natural phenomena,and existing utilities and structures is from the best sources presently available. Such information is furnished only for the information and convenience of the Contractor, and the accuracy or completeness of this information is not guaranteed. B. Plans,surveys, measurements, and dimensions under which the work is to be performed are believed to be correct, but the Contractor shall have examined them for himself during the bidding period,as no additional compensation will be made for errors and inaccuracies may be found therein. 1.6 SECTION INCLUDES A. Excavating,filling and grading required for this work includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Clearing and preparation of site. 2. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 3. Protection of embankments,environmental controls. 4. Excavation: a. General excavation to lines and grades indicated. b. Excavation and backfill of utilities. EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 02200 - 1 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group, Inc. 3. The Contractor shall be prepared to implement interim drainage controls and erosion control measures as may be necessary during the course of construction, and as directed by the Engineer. 4. The Contractor shall make available on-site, equipment, materials and labor necessary to effect emergency erosion control and drainage improvements within four hours of any impending emergency situation. S. The Contractor shall comply with recommendations of the Engineer to make repairs or supplement erosion control procedures during the course of construction. 6. If, in the opinion of the Engineer,the sequencing of operations, condition of erosion control devices,and turbidity level of runoff are unsatisfactory,the Engineer will direct the Owner to order the Contractor to cease work and order the Contractor to make corrections within 24 hours, at no expense to the Owner. 7. The Contractor shall make a final inspection, clean all cross culverts and sweep off roadways as approved by the Engineer before Contract closeout. 8. Condition of erosion control device shall be checked twice each month or more frequently as required. Damaged and/or deteriorated items shall be replaced. Erosion control devices shall be maintained in place and in effective condition. 9. Hay bales shall be inspected frequently and maintained or replaced as required to maintain both their effectiveness and essentially their original condition. Underside of bales shall be in close contact with the earth below at all times,as required to prevent water from washing beneath bales. 10. Sediment deposits shall be disposed of off-site, in a location and manner which will not cause sediment nuisance elsewhere. E. Removal of Erosion Control Devices I. Erosion control devices shall be maintained until all disturbed earth has been paved or vegetated,at which time they shall be removed. After removal,areas disturbed by these devices shall be regraded and seeded. 2. Erosion protection material shall be kept securely anchored until acceptance of completed slope or entire Project,whichever is later. END OF SECTION EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 02150 - 6 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group, Inc. 2. After the grass has appeared, all areas and parts of areas which fail to show a uniform stand of grass,for any reason whatsoever, shall be reseeded and such areas and parts of areas seeded repeatedly until all areas are covered with a satisfactory growth of grass. 3.2 SILT FENCE A. Silt fencing shall be placed around existing drainage channels and at the no-cut and no fill lines before commencement of any earthwork. Silt fencing shall be installed prior to all upgradient earthwork. B. Silt fence shall be installed around the stockpiled topsoil and other aggregate material. 3.3 HAY BALE DAM Bales shall be placed in a row with ends tightly abutting the adjacent bales. Each bale shall be embedded in the soil a minimum of 4 inches. Bales shall be securely anchored in place by stakes or re-bars driven through the bales. The first stake in each bale shall be angled toward the previously laid bale to force the bales together. 3.4 CATCH BASIN FILTER DAM Catch basin filter dam shall be constructed,as shown in the detail section, at locations indicated on the Drawings. 3.5 MAINTENANCE AND REMOVAL OF EROSION CONTROL DEVICES A. The Contractor shall inspect the effectiveness and condition of the erosion control devices during storm events,after each rainfall of one-inch magnitude or greater, prior to weekends,and prior to any forecasted storm events. B. Wetland areas,water courses,and drainage swales adjacent to construction activities shall be monitored twice each month for evidence of silt intrusion and other adverse environmental impacts,which shall be corrected immediately upon discovery. C. Culverts and drainage ditches shall be kept clean and clear of obstructions during construction period. I. Cleaning. Sediment build-up at silt fencing and hay bale structures shall be removed when the sediment accumulation is 1/2 the design height. Sediment basin shall be cleaned when the sediment accumulates to one foot of depth. 2. The Contractor shall repair or replace damaged erosion control devices immediately,and, in no case, more than four hours after observing such deficiencies,and as directed by the Engineer. EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 02150- 5 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group, Inc. Filter fabric for catch basin filter dam shall be Mirafi 140N drainage fabric, manufactured by Mirafi, Inc., Charlotte, NC, or approved equal. 2.5 TEMPORARY SEED COVER A. Seed mixture for temporary cover by hydroseeding application shall conform to the following: Quantity per 1000 sq.ft coverage Material 27-1/2 lb. Wood fiber mulch 4 lb. Seed 1/2 lb. Annual Ryegrass 22 lb. 10-6-4 Fertilizer 69 gal. Water I. Wood fiber mulch shall conform to MADOT Specifications M.13.05-1 "Mulch Materials, Wood Mulch". 2. Seed shall conform to MADOT Specifications Section 9.50"Turf Establishment"and M.13.04"Seed Mixtures". PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEMPORARY SEED COVER A. Grass seed shall be spread by mechanical spreader at a rate of 4.0 IbJ 1000 sq.ft. B. Following seeding,area shall be tightly raked to mingle seed with the top 1/8 to 1/4 inch of soil. Areas shall then be smoothed and rolled. C. Following rolling, entire shall be watered until equivalent of a 2-inch depth of water shall have been applied to entire seeded surface, at a rate which will not dislodge seed. Water shall be repeated thereafter as frequently as required to prevent drying of surface, until grass attains an average height of 1 1/2 inches. D. At the Contractor's option, seed may be spread by the hydroseeding methods, utilizing power equipment commonly used for that purpose. Seed and mulch shall be mixed and applied to achieve application quantities specified herein for the conventional seeding method,with mulch applied at the rate of 2700 lb.dry weight of mulch per acre.A mulching machine,acceptable to the Engineer, shall be equipped to eject the thoroughly wet mulch material at a uniform rate to provide the mulch coverage specified. Other provisions specified above for conventional seeding shall apply to hydro seeding. I. If the results of hydroseeding application are unsatisfactory, the mixture and/or application rate and methods shall be modified to achieve the required results. EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 02150-4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group, Inc. I. Permanent erosion protection shall be accomplished by seeding with grass and covering A"k with an erosion protection material,as appropriate for prevailing conditions. 2. Temporary erosion protection shall be accomplished by covering with an erosion protection material,as appropriate for prevailing conditions. 3. Except where specified slope is indicated on Drawings,fill slopes shall be limited to a grade of 2:1 (horizontal: vertical), cut slopes shall be limited to a grade of 2:1. 1.8 EMERGENCY OPERATION PROCEDURES A. The Contractor shall have on-call at all times capable, responsible representatives who,when authorized,will mobilize the necessary personnel,materials, and equipment, and otherwise provide the required action when notified of any impending emergency situation. B. The Contractor shall supply a telephone number to the Owner with which the Contractor may be contacted in the evenings and on weekends. The Contractor shall prepare a 24-hour"duty roster"for this purpose and submit it in writing to the Engineer. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SILT FENCE * A. Silt fence shall be"Envirofence" preassembled silt fence structure, manufactured by Mirafl, Inc., Charlotte, NC,or approved equal. I. Each package shall include oak post, industrial polypropylene netting, Mirafi 100 sediment control fabric, metal coupler and instructions. 2. Overall length of each fence section shall be minimum 100 ft.;fabric width minimum of 3 ft., post length minimum of 4 ft. - 6 in.;and post spacing minimum of 8 ft. 3. Posts shall be tapered for ease of installation,and beveled at top to resist splitting. 2.2 HAY BALES Bales for construction of hay bale check dam and catch basin filter dam shall be new,firm wire or nylon- bound livestock feed-grade. Straw Bales shall be used with silt fence within the wetland buffer area. 2.3 CRUSHED STONE Crushed stone for hay bale check dam, catch basin filter dam and sediment pond riser pipe filters shall conform to MHD Specifications Section M2.01.3 2.4 FILTER FABRIC EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 02150-3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group, Inc. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Proposed methods, materials to be employed,and schedule for effecting erosion and siltation control and preventing erosion damage shall be submitted for approval. Submittals shall include: I. List of proposed material including manufacturer's product data. 2. Schedule of erosion control program indicating specific dates for implementing programs in each major area of work. B. The following samples shall be submitted: Sample Size Silt fence fabric 12 x 12 in. C. Seed mixture for temporary seed cover shall be submitted for approval of the Engineer. 1.7 EROSION CONTROL PRINCIPLES A. The following erosion control principles shall apply to the land grading and construction phases: I. Stripping of vegetation,grading,or other soil disturbance shall be done in a manner which will minimize soil erosion. 2. Whenever feasible, natural vegetation shall be retained and protected. 3. Extent of area which is exposed and free of vegetation and duration of its exposure shall be kept within practical limits. 4. Temporary seeding, mulching, or other suitable stabilization measures shall be used to protect exposed critical areas during prolonged construction or other land disturbances. 5. Drainage provisions shall accommodate increased runoff resulting from modifications of soil and surface conditions during and after development or disturbance. Such provisions shall be in addition to existing requirements. 6. Sediment shall be retained on-site. 7. Erosion control devices shall be installed as early as possible in the construction sequence prior to start of clearing and grubbing operations and excavation work. B. Cut and fill slopes and stockpiled materials shall be protected to prevent erosion. Slopes shall be protected with permanent erosion protection when erosion exposure period is expected to be greater than or equal to six months,and temporary erosion protection when erosion exposure period is expected to be less than six months. EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 02150 -2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group, Inc. SECTION 02150- EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PART I -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section, provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work specified,in accordance with the Engineer's interpretation. 1.3 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document not clarified by addendum,the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided, in accordance with the Engineer's interpretation. 1.4 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide all equipment and materials,and do all work necessary to construct a complete erosion and sediment control program for minimizing erosion and sediment control provisions detailed on the Drawings and specified herein are the minimum requirements for an erosion control program. The Contractor shall provide additional erosion sediment control materials and methods as required to effect the erosion and siltation control principles specified herein. B. Erosion control and maintenance program, shall include, but not be limited to, installation and maintenance of silt fences, hay bale check dams, and installation schedules of erosion control structures. C. Related work specified elsewhere Clearing and Grubbing....................................................................................................Section 02100 Excavation and Backfill....................................................................................................Section 02200 1.5 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): Specifications and Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges B. Commonwealth of Massachussetts Highway Department Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 02150- 1 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group,Inc. Corporations having jurisdiction over the work. Obtain and pay for all necessary permits, licenses and certificates and give all notices as required during the performance of the demolition work. 3.2 DEMOLITION All items designated to be salvaged shall be carefully removed from the site so as not to damage them. Damaged items shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at no extra charge to the Owner.The contractor shall take possession of all demolished materials not scheduled for reuse and completely remove from site and legally dispose of same. 3.3 CLEARING AND GRUBBING - GENERAL A. Cut down all trees and brush,as designated on the plans. Remove all stumps and debris, and remove from the property. No burning of materials will be permitted on the site. B. The felling of trees shall be carefully carried out so as to avoid any damage to trees that are to remain, or to any wetlands areas. C. Remove from the site all brush, rubbish, pavement,concrete or masonry foundations designated to be removed. D. The limits of clearing shall be confirmed and approved in the field by the Architect prior to clearing operations. 3.4 REMOVAL OF DEBRIS Remove all debris from the site and leave the site in a neat and orderly condition to the approval of the Engineer. 3.5 SALVAGE OF ITEMS FOR RE-USE Any items that are designated for salvage and delivery to Owner or for salvage and re-use shall be carefully removed as to not damage, scratch or otherwise mar the object in any way, and then shall then be stored by the Contractor until such time as the Contractor is ready for installation of the item. Installation of salvaged items shall include footings or any other necessary installation procedures required for the complete, safe use of the item installed. END OF SECTION SITE DEMOLITION, CLEARING & GRUBBING 02100 - 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group,Inc. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 OTHER MATERIALS All materials, not specifically described, but required for proper completion of the work of this Section, shall be as selected by the Contractor, subject to approval of the Engineer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Notification Notify the Owner at least two full working days prior to commencing the work of this Section. B. Site Inspection Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the entire site and all objects designated to be removed and to be preserved. C. Clarification I. The drawings do not purport to show all objects existing on the site. 2. Before commencing the work of this Section,verify with the Engineer all objects to be removed and all objects to be preserved. D. Scheduling I. Schedule all work in a careful manner with all necessary consideration for the Owner. Before commencing any work,submit a schedule for review to the Engineer showing the commencement,the order and the completion dates for the various parts of this work. 2. Avoid interference with use of,and passage to and from, adjacent buildings and facilities. 3. Prior to any work performed on the site,the Contractor shall notify Dig Safe at the following number, 1-800-322-4844. E. Disconnection of Utilities Before starting site operations, disconnect or arrange for disconnection of all utility services designated to be removed or that require temporary discontinuance for the duration of the work, as shown in the drawings, performing all such work in accordance with the requirements of the utility company or agency involved. F. Protection of Utilities Preserve, in operating condition, all active utilities traversing the site and not designated to be disconnected. G. Perform demolition work in accordance with applicable rules, regulations, codes and ordinances of local, State and Federal Authorities, and in accordance with the requirements of Public Utility SITE DEMOLITION, CLEARING & GRUBBING 02100- 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group,inc. SECTION 02100-SITE DEMOLITION, CLEARING &GRUBBING PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Work by General Contractor Demolition, clearing and grubbing required for this work includes, but is not necessarily limited to removal and disposal, removal and delivery to the Owner, or removal and reuse of the following: I. Bituminous pavement 2. Signs 3. Trees, shrubs,vegetation 4. Debris and rubble within project 5. Other items as noted on the drawings B. Related Work Described Elsewhere Excavating, Filling and Grading......................................................................................Section 02200 C. Definitions The term "demolition,clearing and grubbing,"as used herein,includes the removal of all existing objects (except for those objects designated to remain) down to the existing ground level, including their underground root systems, plus such other work as is described in this Section of these Specifications. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during demolition operations and who shall be thoroughly familiar with the procedures involved and who shall direct and coordinate the operation and ensure coordination with the applicable utility agencies. B. Codes and Standards In addition to complying with all pertinent code and regulations,comply with the requirements of those insurance carriers providing coverage for this work. 1.4 JOB CONDITIONS A. Dust and Mud Control Use all means necessary to prevent the spread of dust and mud during performance of the work of the Section;thoroughly moisten all surfaces as required to prevent mud and dust from being a nuisance to the site residents and the neighbors. SITE DEMOLITION, CLEARING &GRUBBING 02100- 1 Country Lane Estatess Northampton,Massachusetts TEM clearance air samples if the job site outside the contained work area is visibly dusty. The contained worksite must not be wet and a fan or leaf blower will be blown against walls, ceilings, floors, ledges, and other surfaces to circulate air and simulate real conditions for at least 5 minutes per 1,000 square feet. Stationary fans shall be directed towards the ceiling and operated on slow speed. One fan shall be used for each 10,000 cubic feet or work area. A minimum of five final clearance air samples will be collected inside the contained removal worksites or regulated area and after the clearance or visual inspection criteria. Additionally, five clearance air samples will be collected at the same time outside of contained removal worksite or regulated areas. These outside containment samples shall be representative of the make-up air entering the containment or regulated area. Work in the contained removal worksite or regulated area shall be considered complete when the average concentration of asbestos of the five inside containment air samples is not statistically different, as determined by the Z-test calculation found in Appendix A of 40 CFR 763 Subpart E, from the average asbestos concentration of the five outside containment air samples and average asbestos concentration of the three field blanks is below the filter background level of 70 structures per square millimeter (70 s/mm). Not meeting the above TEM air clearance criteria shall require the Abatement Contractor to reclean the designated worksite followed by a repeat of the final clearance testing. Cleaning and testing will be repeated until the TEM air clearance criteria is complied with. All TEM final clearance samples shall require minimum volume of 1,200 liters,but should not exceed 1,800 liters. E. Methods of Measurement: All determination of airborne concentration of asbestos fibers during the project will be made by the membrane filter method using phase contrast illumination and 400-45OX magnification, with sample mounted in high viscosity solution of membrane filter material in accordance with NIOSH P & CAM 239 and 7400 Methods, USEPA document 600-4- 85-049 (Nov. 1995) and USEPA publication 560/5-85-024 (June 1984). Final air clearance testing to be performed by TEM analytical methods shall be analyzed in accordance with Appendix A of USEPA 40 CFR 763 Subpart E. F. Posting of Air Sample Results: Air sampling results will be posted no more than 24 hours after the completion of a sampling cycle. The document shall list each sample's results, sampling time and date, exact location of where it was taken, flow rate, microscope field area, fields counted and cassette size. Air sample analysis will be reported in fibers per cubic centimeter. Samples shall have a chain of custody record. END OF SECTION Asbestos Abatement 02080-25 Country Lane Estatess Northampton,Massachusetts calibrated against standards of higher accuracy before and after sampling for each asbestos project. The calibrations will be recorded. 4. Sampling for analysis by phase contrast microscopy shall employee cellulose ester collection filters with 0.8 micron pore size. 5. Sampling for analysis by transmission electron microscopy shall employ 25 mm diameter polycarbonate collection filters, preferably with 0.4 micron pore size. Cellulose ester filters, preferably with 0.45 micron pore size can be used if significant levels of contaminated organic material are present in the air. Organic contaminants will be identified and reported. C. Air Sampling Requirements: The following minimum schedule of samples will be required by the Project Monitor, during the abatement process. 1. Background Samples: Air and the appropriate dust samples (as necessary) will be taken to represent conditions before the Abatement Contractor starts masking and sealing operations. At the discretion of the Project Monitor samples will be taken inside each proposed regulated area and outside each major opening. These area samples shall require enough volume of air to assure a lowest detectable limit of no greater than 0.005 fibers/cc. 2. Area Samples During Removal: During removal area samples will be collected outside major openings, at the discharge of negative air filtration units, in the clean room, at other critical points outside the work areas. Furthermore the Project Monitor will take samples as necessary to monitor and document air quality outside of the asbestos worksites and/or upwind and downwind during asbestos related work with at lease one location between the work area occupied portions of the site. Outside containment samples shall require sufficient volume of air to assure a lowest detectable limit of 0.005 fiber/cc by the NIOSH 7400 Method. 3. Post-abatement Clearance Air Monitoring: Post Abatement clearance air samples will be taken from containments twenty-four (24) hours after cleaning of surfaces is completed, a visual inspection by the Project Monitor detects no visible debris and surfaces are encapsulated (if warranted) and dry. All final air clearance samples will be collected in accordance with Massachusetts DLWD/DOS final air testing/clearance requirements. The worksite must have containment barriers, HEPA filtration system and the decontamination unit remaining in place and functional. a. Phase Contrast Microscopy (PCM) Clearance Testing: PCM testing will be performed for background, area, and final air sampling. All samples should not exceed a concentration of 0.010 fibers/cc or the background levels previously detected. All final clearance samples shall require sufficient volume of air to assure a lower detectable limit of 0.005 fibers/cc by NIOSH 7400 Method. b. Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) Clearance Testing: TEM clearance testing may be performed to confirm the completion of removal, encapsulation or enclosure. Areas in which TEM clearance air sampling is performed, the area shall be required to pass PCM clearance air sampling prior to the collection of Asbestos Abatement 02080-24 Country Lane Estatess Northampton,Massachusetts OW 1. Wear a NIOSH/MSHA approved respirator as required by these specifications. Fit test and medical surveillance records shall be provided to the Owner prior to entering containment. 2. Wear disposable full body protective clothing as required by these specifications. 4. Full shower and decontamination procedures will be followed, along with the proper decontamination of any tools or equipment brought into the work area. 5. Respiratory protection and protective clothing to be provided by the Abatement Contractor, unless otherwise agreed upon. 6. Personnel entering the regulated, contained work areas must have the required training and possess a valid workers license as required by Commonwealth of Massachusetts DOS/DLWD regulations. 3.08 -QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING A. Review of Work Practices: The Project Monitor will review the Contractor's work practices prior to the start of removal in each work area and will report any Specification violations to the Owner. Removal of ACMs may begin with the approval of the Project Monitor once the deficiencies are corrected. If the Contractor fails to correct deficiencies in a timely manner, the Owner will be notified in writing. OW The Project Monitor will review containment structures, negative air conditions, and glovebag methods before work begins and after the Abatement Contractor Site Supervisor has give approval. If at any time the results of the area air sampling from the interior of the building work area perimeter or negative air filtration unit exhaust exceed 0.03 f/cc work will be stopped until the source of the elevated fiber counts can be determined. At no time during the course of this work should the airborne concentration of asbestos fibers exceed 0.2 fibers per cubic centimeter (<0.2 f/cc), 8 hour TWA, inside a containment structure as measured by daily personnel monitoring. If fiber levels exceed this level, stop operations and contact the Project Designer to determine additional procedures to minimize fiber release. B. Air Sampling Equipment: 1. Cassettes will be loaded with the filters under clean laboratory conditions. A 5.0 micron pore-size cellulose ester backing filter will be placed behind the collecting filter, followed by the cellulose support pad and the cassette base. A metal cowl or an electrically conductive cowl will be used in conjunction with the sampling train. 2. The filter assembly will be upstream of components in the sampling train except for an optional size selective inlet or wind and rain shield. The air flow measuring device will be downstream of the filter and the pump assembly, or integral with the pump assembly. 3. The air flow measuring/metering device will be a high quality rotometer, mass flow, dry gas meter or critical orifice. Measuring devices shall have a range of at least 1.5 times the desired flow rate and be readable to at least 0.1 of the desired flow rate. It will be Asbestos Abatement 02080-23 Country Lane Estatess Northampton,Massachusetts D. Temporary Storage of Waste: An area for temporary storage of asbestos waste must be approved by the Owner. Asbestos waste may only be stored in a restricted area or enclosed container which is posted and secured whenever not in use. Asbestos waste material shall be loaded into a waste transportation vehicle/dumpster and hauled away as soon as there is a sufficient quantity available for direct transportation to the approved disposal site. Vehicles hauling asbestos waste materials will be covered to prevent emission of asbestos in route to the disposal site. E. Labeling of Disposal Containers: Warning labels having waterproof print and permanent, waterproof adhesive will be affixed to bags, drums (lid and sides), and other containers used for asbestos waste. Labels will be conspicuous and legible and legible and shall contain the following warning: DANGER CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS AVOID CREATING DUST CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD A DOT "class 9" shipping label and DOT mark shall be applied to or be printed on each packaging of asbestos containing materials. The AAC is directed to property label waste bag in accordance with the latest NESHAP standard Section 61.150, with the following information: Asbestos Abatement Contractor's Name SITE OWNER'S NAME SITE NAME F. Contractor's Responsibilities: The Contractor shall fulfill waste generator responsibilities as specified by 40 CFR 61, Subpart M, Federal Emission Standards for Asbestos,revised November 20, 1990, and other applicable state,regional and local government standards. The Contractor shall maintain Waste Shipment Records and shall provide a copy of the Waste Shipment Records and shall provide a copy of the Waste Shipment Record, designating the number of bags or cubic yard (s) of asbestos waste. This record will be provided to the Owner or Project Monitor and signed by all transporters and the designated disposal site owner/operator. If the completed Waste Shipment Records is not received by the Contractor from the disposal site owner/operator within 45 days of the date of waste was accepted by the initial transporter, the Contractor shall immediately provide the Owner with a copy of the report sent to the EPA regarding the status of the Waste Shipment Record. G. Manifests: A qualified person must sign all hazardous waste manifests. 3.07 -OTHER TRADES A. When other trades personnel (electrician, plumber, etc.) are required to enter the contained asbestos removal areas to perform emergency work the following procedures will be followed: L. Sign in and out of the bound log book and enter the date and time. Asbestos Abatement 02080-22 Country Lane Estatess Northampton,Massachusetts A. Amended Water: A fine spray of amended water will be used to keep top layers of asbestos in the waste bags and containers damp to minimize potential asbestos dust release. Wetting of asbestos is to be done with low pressure spray equipment, using water amended with a wetting agent/surfactant containing fifty percent (50%) polyoxyethylene ether and fifty percent (50%) polyoxethylene ester, or the equivalent mixed one once to five gallons of water. B. Removal of Waste: Containerized waste will be removed from the work area through the decontamination chamber or waste load out. All tools and equipment will be removed from the work area and decontaminated in the decontamination chamber. Cloth, mops, and other cleaning aids will be disposed of as asbestos-containing waste material. No final inspection or testing can be performed with contaminated materials of bags of asbestos waste on site. C. Encapsulation: Prior to dismantling primary and secondary containment barriers, a bridging encapsulation/lock-down sealant will be applied to polyethylene surfaces. The chosen encapsulant must be compatible with the replacement materials and must conform to the proper edition of applicable fire and electrical standards. These does include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. National Fire Prevention Association -Codes 90a 2-1.3.1 through 3-3.8.1 2. National Electrical Code -Code 300-21. After removal and disposal of secondary polyethylene sheeting and clearance of the visual inspection, a bridging encapsulant/lockdown sealant will be applied to remaining surfaces in direct contact with removal operations, polyethylene sheeting and on any porous surfaces within the work site. Final air clearance samples will be taken after the containment is dry. D. Removal of Containment Barriers: After successful clearance air monitoring, the isolation barriers will be removed in conjunction with the use of a HEPA vacuum. E. Spills: The Contractor will be responsible for necessary precautions to prevent pollution by spillage during the performance of services and shall assume full responsibility for caused spills, which will be cleaned up at the Contractor's expense. 3.06 -DISPOSAL A. General: The Contractor will be responsible for asbestos disposal, which will be done as soon as possible. Procedures for hauling and disposal shall comply with 40 CFR 61 Subpart M, Federal Emission Standards and other applicable state,regional and local government standards. B. Waste Disposal Sites: Waste disposal sites for asbestos materials will be in accordance with 40 CFR 61.25, Waste Disposal Sites. The Contractor shall provide and submit to the Agent or Owner and Project Monitor written evidence that the site is approved for asbestos disposal by the EPA, State and local regulatory agencies. C. Daily Disposal: At the end of each work day the Contractor shall remove the debris accumulated during that days work activities using procedures outlined in the Specifications. The Abatement Contractor shall provide a daily tally of all quantities removed. Asbestos Abatement 02080-21 Country Lane Estatess Northampton,Massachusetts 3.04 -HEPA FILTRATION REQUIREMENTS A. General: After masking and sealing is completed and the asbestos worksite is contained and before work begins, the Abatement Contractor and Project Monitor shall smoke test to confirm negative pressure inside the contained worksite. The volume of air within the contained worksite should be changed at least four (4) times per hour or once every fifteen (15) minutes. If the Project Monitor determined that the requirements compromise containment integrity, the capacity of the NAFU system may be reduced. B. Testing Requirements: The Contractor shall be responsible for the use of negative air pressure with continuous recording charts to confirm a negative air pressure of at least 0.02 inches of water column per full containment. Equipment used for producing a negative pressure shall have a filtering device in conformance with ANSI A9.2, and shall operate 24 hours a day. All pressure measurement and recording is subject to confirmation by the Project Monitor. All HEPA filtration units utilized will be DOP tested within the last six (6) months. Certificates of testing for each identified unit will be provided to the Project Monitor upon operation of the units. C. 2000 CFM HEPA units inside the work area during abatement. The additional unit will be utilized upon failure of any operation units. D. NAFU Equipment Requirements: The HEPA filtration units will be equipped with the following: 1. Magnehelic gauge to monitor the units' air pressure difference across the filters and be able to interpret magnehelic reading to cubic feet per minute (CFM). 2. An affixed label, clearly marked and conspicuous, showing the most recent installation date and hour reading of the primary internal HEPA filter. Hourmeter, to record unit operation time. 3. Automatic shut off for filter failure or filter absence, an audible alarm with or without flashing red light for unit shutdown, an amber flashing warning light for filter loading. The NAFU must have safety system that prevents unit from being operated with the HEPA filter backwards. All flexible ducting, vent tubing, adapter plates and other equipment used for the passable of filtered air will be undamaged and free of air leaks at all points. E. Prefilters: Prefilters will be changed frequently during removal (at least once per hour under heavy removal conditions). They will be changed before air-flow is altered to drop worksite air exchange below four air changes per hour. F. NAFU Exhaust: HEPA air filtration units will be exhausted outdoors and at least fifteen (15)feet above the ground whenever possible. At no time shall the negative pressure ventilation unit exhaust within 40 feet of a receptor or adversely affect the air intake ports, louvers, or entranced of the building or adjacent buildings. NAFUs which are exhausted to the building's interior shall be monitored during abatement work by the Project Monitor. 3.05 -CLEANING AND ENCAPSULATION Asbestos Abatement 02080-20 Country Lane Estatess Northampton,Massachusetts F. Change Rooms: Mini-Containments require the installation of a single stage change room constructed on one layer of six-mill polyethylene sheeting. The change room shall be sealed and attached to the mini-containment to provide an intermediate area of lesser asbestos pollution for decontamination or personnel. Workers leaving the work areas shall remove and dispose of their protective suits in this room and either proceed to the remove decontamination unit of conduct a thorough washing of the hands and face. G. Waste Load Out Enclosure: The waste decontamination enclosure system when under full containment shall consist of two totally enclosed chambers and shall also comply with the following requirements: 1. The washroom will be constructed with an airlock to the work area and an airlock to the holding area. 2. The holding area will be constructed with an airlock doorway to the washroom and a lockable door to the outside. 3. The water shall pass through shower filtering system and will be filtered down to five (5) micron particle size. 4. These chambers will be constructed with impermeable barriers at exterior walls and doors will be secured at the end of each shift. 3.03 -GLOVEBAG REMOVAL REQUIREMENTS A. General: Glovebag removals shall be performed in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101. All persons expect those directly involved in the glovebag operation shall be excluded form the work areas. Physical barriers shall be used, where necessary, to limit access to the work area for the duration of the glovebag operation. All moveable objects shall be removed from the work area. Non-movable objects remaining in the work area shall be covered completely with six (6) mil polyethylene sheeting securely taped so as to prevent their contamination. Objects which have already been contaminated shall be thoroughly cleaned with a HEPA filtered vacuum or be wet wiped before they are moved from the work areas or covered in place. B. Installation: Glovebags must be installed to completely cover the pipe or other structure where asbestos abatement is to be done. OSHA required that a HEPA filtered vacuum be attached to one side of the bag(s) while also having a port for make-up air on the other side of it. The vacuum shall be left running during the removal process. C. Removal: The removed asbestos material from the pipe that has fallen into the enclosed bag must be thoroughly wetted with a wetting agent. The wetting agent is applied with an airless sprayer through the pre-cut port provided in most glovebags or applied through a small hole in the bag. After removal of the layer of ACM, the pipe from which asbestos has been remove must be thoroughly cleaned with a wire brush and wet-wiped with a wetting agent until no traces of the ACM are observed. D. Protective Equipment: Workers using glove bags shall use disposable full body protective clothing and a minimum of a half-face air purifying respirator with HEPA cartridges as outlined in these specifications. A central shower and clean-up facility on site must be designated. At the end of the work by glovebag, the protective suit must be removed inside-out and the worker shall proceed directly to the shower and clean-up facility. Asbestos Abatement 02080-19 Country Lane Estatess Northampton,Massachusetts E. Decontamination Chambers: 1. It is the Abatement Contractor's responsibility to provide Decontamination Chambers consisting of an equipment room, shower and clean room for personnel involved in asbestos removal under full containment. The Chamber shall be masked and sealed with layers of six-mil polyethylene sheeting with flaps between each room. 2. Each of the three rooms will be of a sufficient size to accommodate contaminated personnel and related equipment. The rooms will be framed, masked, sealed and attached and sealed to the entry/exist ways of asbestos worksite. The three rooms together will be referred to as the Decontamination Chamber. A Decontamination Chamber will be required for each separate contained removal worksite. Equipment rooms, Clean Rooms, and Showers may be part of the existing space with the approval of the Owner. Adequate heat and light will be safely provided. 3. Decontamination Chambers that are constructed on the exterior of the building shall be free standing and framed with 2" x 4" studs with plywood walls. Exterior Decontamination Chambers shall be weather resistant and secured with locks when not in use. Masking and sealing requirements remain the same as those stated above. 4. Equipment Room: The Equipment Room shall provide an intermediate area of lesser asbestos pollution for decontamination of personnel and removed asbestos-contaminated materials. This room will be periodically vacuumed and washed in order to prevent asbestos dust and debris accumulation. It also serves as access areas to the shower for personnel leaving the work area. Workers leaving containment shall remove and dispose of disposable protective suits and wear only respirators into the shower. 5. Shower Room: The Shower Room shall have a continuous supply of cold and hot water, and be suitably arranged for complete showering during decontamination. The Shower Room with curtained doorways will comprise an airlock between contaminated and clean areas. All showers shall have a two stage filtering system for wastewater connected immediately off the drain pipe or sump pump outlet. The first stage shall efficiently filter fibers down to twenty (20) microns in length, and the second efficiently down to five (5) microns in length. 6. Clean Room: The Clean Room shall store asbestos worker's street clothing, clean protective clothing and clean respirator equipment. It shall have lockers or shelves, and clean sealable plastic bags for storage of street clothes. Contaminated clothing, respirators, tools, equipment, or other materials shall not be allowed to be introduced into the Clean Room or into unmasked areas. The Clean Room will serve as an access for personnel entering the work area, and for the donning or respiratory protection and protective clothing. It will be equipped with a lockable door to secure the work place during off-shift hours. 7. The Abatement Contractor shall provide a minimum of one water heater per work area decontamination chamber. Wastewater will be filter by 20 micron and 5 micron filters in a series prior to discharge. Asbestos Abatement 02080-18 Country Lane Estatess Northampton,Massachusetts 0"K 1. Prior to masking and sealing operations which will designate the asbestos removal work area, windows, doors, openings, ducts, drains, and vents will be masked and sealed with a minimum of one layer of six mil polyethylene sheeting. Voids in the walls,ceilings, or roof systems will be sealed with fire retardant spray foam. 2. Windows and doors along the exterior of the building will remain closed for the duration of the asbestos abatement project. 3. Large accessible openings will be sealed with permanent, solid construction materials and made air tight in accordance with DLWD regulations 453 CMR 6.00. B. Full Containments: 1. Full enclosure procedures as defined by 453 CMR 6.14 will be implemented when full containments are warranted by the abatement method required for the work site. 2. Prior to the asbestos removal, all windows,doors, openings, ducts, drains and vents will be separately masked and sealed with a minimum of one 6-mil layer of polyethylene completely edge sealed around the opening. Shut down any local ventilation into or out of the work space, other than the HEPA filtered system. Large openings to be occupied areas, such as open doorways or passageways, shall be sealed with plastic. 3. Post the work area entrances outside the actual enclosed with Asbestos Hazard warning labels and barricade tape with imprinted labels notifying public of asbestos hazard. 4. If containments are warranted, completely isolate the work areas from other parts of the building so as to prevent asbestos-containing dust or debris from passing beyond the isolated area. Clean all surfaces in enclosure with HEPA vacuum or by wet wiping prior to the installation of plastic sheets. Provide mechanically supported plastic sheet barrier between work area and all other sections of the building. Floors shall be masked and sealed with two layers or six mill plastic sheeting with a minimum overlap of two feet at seams and up walls. Walls shall be covered with two layers of six mil polyethylene sheeting, arranged so each layer overlaps on the outside of the respective layer of floor polyethylene sheeting that has been run up the wall. 5. Should the area beyond the work areas become contaminated with asbestos-containing dust or debris as a consequence of the work, all work will stop, and cleaning those areas will continue after a decontamination plan is presented by the Contractor and approved by the Agent or Owner and Project Monitor. Perform all such required cleaning or decontamination at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Alternate Methods: Alternative masking and sealing methods, procedures, and design will be considered if any elements of proper and safe procedures to prevent contamination and exposure can be demonstrated. Any alternative methods must be reviewed and approved by the Project Designer and appropriate regulatory agency using variance procedures. D. Emergency Exits: Whenever possible there will be emergency exists from containment which are sealed but labeled and can be easily opened to allow workers to exit directly out of containment in case of a life threatening emergency. Asbestos Abatement 02080-17 Country Lane Estatess Northampton,Massachusetts PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01-ABATEMENT PROCEDURES A. The abatement of regulated ACM includes the removal of friable ACM or Category I nonfriable ACM that has become friable when removed by cutting, sanding, grinding or abrading. Details for ACM, and ACM quantities estimated for abatement are depicted on Sheets (Sheet A-121, and others). Asbestos abatement is scheduled for the ceilings of three new Barrier Free units shown on Sheet A-121 (E1 and E5) and in the area of the Community Building where a new Barrier Free lift is being installed. Asbestos abatement of linoleum flooring will also be occurring wherever the proposed renovations of a kitchen or bath are scheduled 1. The removal of regulated ACM in the form of spray applied finish on gypsum ceilings and upper walls (includes any residual/splatter on contact surfaces, ie.. walls, cabinets, etc..), and linoleum flooring shall conform to the requirements of this section and must be abated under full containment utilizing wet methods (i.e misting) prior to and during removal, and ACM shall be placed in adequately wet leak-tight containers. 2. Encapsulant materials scheduled to be used shall meet compatibility requirements as detailed by the Architect. 3. Limited demolition by the Abatement Contractor will be required to access ACMs. 4. If removal of more than one ACM occurs within an area,then the more conservative containment measures shall be required. 5. ACM debris will be remedially cleaned prior to full containment techniques. 6. All Non-movable objects are to be covered per applicable regulations. 7. Floors and walls are to be covered per applicable regulations. Floors and walls are not to be damaged. Water is to be vacuumed off of any floor/wall coverings in a consistent and repeated manner as not to allow seepage on or within existing walls or flooring including carpeting. Measurable amounts of water are not allowed on the floor of containments at any time. 8. Contractor will be responsible for replacement and/or reinstallation of any damaged building materials as a result of abatement activities. 9. HEPA vacuuming shall be performed following containment removal following air clearance and visual inspections of containment. 10. Waste will be removed and placed into a lockable and approved on-site container for transport and disposal. 11. It should be anticipated that other Contractors will be working in proximal areas. 12. Other ACMs not scheduled for abatement are present in work areas defined in this Specification. If these materials are disturbed appropriate response, handling, and/or disposal actions may be required. 13. Any equipment, supplies or other items necessary to complete abatement is the responsibility of the abatement contractor. Any equipment, supplies or other items located on-site or owned by other should not be assumed to be available for use. 14. If an alternate approach is requested it must be first approved by the Architect, and the Hygienist prior to commencement. 3.02-PREPARATION A. Critical Barriers: Asbestos Abatement 02080-16 Country Lane Estatess Northampton,Massachusetts "* 2.08-RESPIRATOR SELECTION A. Choose from the following the appropriate respiratory protection: Respirator Fit/Protection Factor Half-face Air Purifying Negative Pressure Respirator with HEPA filter. 10 Full-face Air Purifying Negative Pressure Respirator with HEPA filter. 10-50 (protection factor dependent on manufacturers data and recommendations) Powered Air Purifying Positive Pressure Respirator(PAPR),with half face mask. 100 Type C Supplied Air Continuous Flow Half or Full Face Respirator. 1000 Type C Supplied Air Pressure Demand Regulated Full Face Respirator. 2000 B. Other types of respiratory protection only on prior approval of the Project Monitor. Conditions requiring the use of higher degrees of protection are not allowed under this contract. C. Operation: Maintain respirators in complete accordance with the manufactures recommendation and applicable standards. Maintain all respirators in original, unmodified condition. Maintain full inventory of repair parts and extra filter canisters for each brand of respirators used. Substitution of parts between Manufactures brands of respirators is strictly forbidden. Replace respirator filters at least once each 8 hour period, whenever resistance to normal breathing is encountered, or according to manufacturers specifications. Keep on hand at least one spare of the appropriate type of respirator beyond anticipated needs for the use of the Agent. D. Fit Testing: All workers using respirators shall be fit tested at least once every year procedures detailed on OSHA 29 CFR 1926 and 1910, Respiratory Protection; Final Rule (January 8, 1998). Certifications for each workers signed by the tester are to be maintained on site during the course of the work. Asbestos Abatement 02080-15 Country Lane Estatess Northampton,Massachusetts 2.04-DECONTAMINATION FACILITY A. Three Chamber decontamination Facility: Provide full decontamination unit consisting at a minimum of three separate chambers, the equipment room, the shower, and the clean room. Water for the showers shall be tempered. Filter wastewater through 0.5 micron filter before disposal. Provide an adequate supply of disposable bath towels at all times. Provide liquid soap from dispenser in the shower area. 2.05-DECONTAMINATION A. The removal or disturbance of any asbestos-containing material will be conducted only after a thorough soaking first with amended water or a penetrating encapsulant. Submit manufacturer's information on all fiber control compounds to the Agent before the start of the work as part of the Hazard Communication/Right To Know Program. 2.06-PROTECTIVE CLOTHING A. Coveralls: Provide and require that disposable full-body coveralls and disposable head covers be worn by all workers in the work area. Provide sufficient number for all required changes, for all workers and visitors to the work area. Coveralls to be securely taped to protective boots worn on job site. B. Goggles: Provide eye protection as required by OSHA for all workers involved in scraping, spraying or any other work which may potentially cause eye injury. C. Gloves: Provide work gloves to all workers and require that they be worn at all times in the work area. Do not remove work gloves from the work area and dispose as asbestos-contaminated waste at the end of the work. D. Boots: Provide appropriate sized work boots that are to remain within the containment structure during the course of the work. Do not allow street shoes to be used on the work site. Boots are to have steel toes. Thoroughly decontaminate work boots at the end of the work. 2.07-ELECTRICAL PROTECTION A. All electrical circuits used on the job site will be protected by a ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI). Each GFCI must be tested so as to confirm proper operation. Any existing circuits or outlets not so protected are to be locked out or sealed off as appropriate. B. Where modifications to existing electrical panels are required for operation of equipment by the Contractor, have all such modifications and the removal of such modifications conducted by a licensed electrician. Secure permits form the Electrical Inspector as required. Asbestos Abatement 02080-14 Country Lane Estatess Northampton,Massachusetts PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 -PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS A. The Contractor shall assume all responsibility for any patent payments due for equipment used on this project at the time of the project or as the result of any future court action. B. The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, the Owners Consultants and agents and employees of any of them, and the Project Monitor for any lawsuit resulting from the Contractors choice of variable air system or equipment. Nothing in this specification shall compel the Contractor to infringe on patents held by G.P.A.C. Corp. or any other patent holder. 2.02-VARIABLE PRESSURE A. All negative air pressure units must be in full operational condition. Damaged or bent units will not be acceptable. Maintain each unit complete with original filtration system,consisting of coarse and fine prefilters and HEPA filter. Maintain gaskets, gauges, and safety devices as per original design. A. Each unit will be equipped with a Magnehelic gauge or manometer and an audible alarm to indicate filter plugging or unit malfunctioning. B. Each unit shall be operated with a recording meter indicating differential pressure across critical barriers. Chart output shall be time and date stamped and saved as part of the project record. ' 2.03 -CONTAI%;MENTS A. Polyethylene Sheeting: Double polyethylene film in the largest sheet size possible shall be used as necessary to minimize seams, 4.0 or 6.0 mil thick as required, and clear in color. Material is to be fire resistant and so labeled. B. Duct Tape: Provide duct tape in 2" or 3" widths with an adhesive which is formulated to aggressively stick to polyethylene. Enhance adherence of duct tape to substrate with spray adhesives if necessary. C. Construction Fencing: Provide heavy grade orange plastic fencing properly installed with posts and stakes. The fence should stand at least 4' high. This may be required by the Owner or Owners Agents at any time for access and safety related issues for any areas deemed necessary. D. Scaffolding: if used, must be constructed in accordance with applicable OSHA regulations under 29 CMR 1926. E. Lumber: Must be adequate to provide containment durability and effectiveness throughout the duration of containment. Asbestos Abatement 02080-13 Country Lane Estatess Northampton,Massachusetts look T.E.M.: Transmission Electron Microscopy T.W.A.: Time Weighted Average Window/Window System: Single or double window system (includes transom, sidelights, and borrowed lights) (regardless of size) located on interior or exterior portions of building includes all building material layers (front, back, and interior) (glues, adhesives,mastics,caulkings,glazings,etc.)to rough opening. Asbestos Abatement 02080-12 Country Lane Estatess Northampton,Massachusetts 'k L. Security: 1. Exterior Door Locks: On-site personnel have keys to the building. The contractor will be responsible for securing the buildings to prevent unauthorized access both during and after working hours. The contractor's method of securing the buildings must,however, allow for any Emergency Response Team to gain access to the buildings in the event of an emergency. 1.14-STOP WORK A. If the Owner, Owner's representatives, Architect, any inspector from the offices of the Massachusetts DOS/DLWD, the DEP or the U.S. EPA, or the Project Monitor present written or verbal stop orders, immediately and automatically stop all work. Do not commence work until authorized in writing by the Owner and/or Architect. 1.15-ASBESTOS ABATEMENT DEFINITIONS A.C.B.M: Asbestos Containing Building Material A.C.M.: Asbestos Containing Material A.H.E.R.A.: Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Action(1986 for Schools) Air Sampling: Method of quantification of airborne asbestos at a particular time. Decontamination chamber: Area of clean room and showers through which one enters and exists the abatement area. D.E.P.(MA): Department of Environmental Protection Door/Door System: Single or double door system(including transom, sidelights, and borrowed lights) located on interior or exterior portions of building includes all building material layers (front, back, and interior)(glues, adhesives, mastics,caulkings,glazings,etc.)to masonry substrate. D.O.S. Department of Occupational Safety D.L.W.D.(MA): Department of Labor and Workforce Development D.O.T.(US): Department of Transportation Contractor MA Licensed Asbestos Abatement Contractor Encapsulation: Application of liquid sealant to asbestos materials. Enclosure: Isolation of asbestos by wrapping and sealing air-tight. E.P.A.(US): Environmental Protection Agency Fitting: Includes seams,joints, unions,couplings,elbows, and tees. Abatement of a fitting is defined as the removal of 1 linear and/or 1 square foot of ACM regardless of the number of fittings within that area. Fixtures: Includes but are not limited to lighting systems, grid work, various conduits such as electrical,computer,plumbing, and telephone. Friable: Easily pulverized,crumbled or crushed by hand pressure. H.E.P.A.: High Efficient Particulate Air Hygienist: Certified Project Monitor under MA DLI Regulation 453 CMR 6.00 I.H.: Industrial Hygienist N.I.O.S.H.: National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health O &M: Operation and Maintenance O.S.H.A.: Occupational Safety and Health Administration P.C.M.: Phase Contract Microscopy P.E.L.: Permissible Exposure Limit,0.2 fiber/cc air, 8 hour TWA S.T.E.L.: Short Term Exposure Limit Asbestos Abatement 02080-11 Country Lane Estatess Northampton,Massachusetts D. Any existing fire/smoke alarms must remain in service throughout abatement. The local fire department and on-site personnel shall be notified prior to any lines being covered or changed in any manner. E. Work is to be coordinated so that the Owner is inconvenienced as little as possible and the work area can be sufficiently isolated from any site occupants or un-announced visitors. 1.13 -CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES AND CONDITIONS AFFECTING THE WORK A. Confine operations at the site to the areas presented during the pre-construction conference. Portions of the site beyond areas on which is indicated are not to be disturbed. The buildings may be occupied and not available to the contractor in its entirety during the work. B. Keep existing driveways and entrances to the site clear and available to the Owner and the Owner's employees or representatives at all times. Access to the dumpsters serving the buildings must be maintained at all times, and as many parking spaces as possible must be maintained for use by authorized building staff. Sidewalks and public ways are to be kept clear and unencumbered. C. Selective Demolition Debris: 1. Selective demolition is to be done so as not to damage or degrade the structural or the watertight integrity of the building. 2. Debris from selective demolition which is not ACM or is not contaminated with ACM shall be removed from the building and disposed of properly off site. D. Store flammable or hazardous waste in metal containers and remove from the work site daily. E. Electricity and water will be available. Any existing smoke/fire alarm system must remain in service throughout abatement, if applicable. The local fire department and on-site personnel shall be notified prior to any lines being covered or changed in any manner. F. The Owner shall provide water for the use of the Contractor at designated locations. The Contractor is responsible for conducting that water through leak-tight conduits to the sites where it will be used. Excess water consumption may be cause of restriction by the Owner if it is being wasted in the opinion of the Owner. G. Hours of Work: Hours of work are weekdays from 7:00 a.m. until 5:00 p.m. Other times may be allowed but must be approved by the Owner. L Use of on-site dumpsters: The contractor may not place any debris into any on-site dumpsters. J. Condition of Buildings: Contractors should assume that any existing appliances, or equipment observed at the pre-bid walk-through will remain in place. The contractor will be responsible for moving this material as required to perform the work. K. Refuse Chute: A refuse chute for general construction debris may be used provided its construction and use complies with all applicable local, state and federal rules and regulations. Asbestos Abatement 02080-10 Country Lane Estatess Northampton,Massachusetts 2.) Daily Lo : Maintain within the Decontamination Unit area a daily log documenting the dates and times of all significant events during the course of the work, including, but not limited to the following: a) Meetings-including purpose,attendees and brief discussion summary. b) Visitations,names, authorization,purpose. c) Personnel entering and leaving work area. d) Special or unusual events. e) Air monitoring test and results f) Documentation of Contractor compliance with the following: Initial inspection Setup and removal of plastic barriers Each stage of the work as it proceeds Waste removal g) Equipment maintenance procedures. h) Final inspection,clearance air monitoring results. 1.11 -NOTIFICATIONS A. Notifications are to be submitted to the following agencies with waiver requests: 1.) Department of Environmental Protection, P.O. Box 4062, Boston, MA 02211. Use the transmittal from provided by the DEP for Permit Application and Payment. All fees are to be paid by the Contractor. 2). Regional DOS/DLWD at 399 Washington Street, 5"'Floor, in Boston,MA 02108. C. Notification Posting: In clean room of personnel Decontamination Unit,post a list at least 8" by 10" in size, consisting of emergency telephone numbers and locations of emergency services, not limited to fire,ambulance,doctor,hospital,police,power company and telephone company. C. The General Contractor and Owners Representative (Safety Solutions) are to be notified, not less than seven(7)days before commencement,of the start of each phase of the work. 1.12-PROJECT SCHEDULE A. The schedule for the abatement is detailed in Section 01010 Summary of Work. The contractor is expected to follow this schedule. B. Pre-Construction Conference: An initial progress meeting recognized as 'Pre-Construction Conference" shall be convened by ECS prior to the Start of the work. This is an organizational meeting, to review responsibilities and personnel assignments and to locate the containment and decontamination areas and temporary facilities including power, light, water,etc. At this time ECS will also review the HASP for the entire site with the Contractor. D. Work to commence by others prior to and/or during asbestos abatement work may include Ow demolition activities, electrical, and plumbing. Asbestos Abatement 02080-9 Country Lane Estatess Northampton,Massachusetts 2. fiber counts above regulated maximums inside or outside of containment 3. injury to one or more workers 4. worker collapse 5. fire or smoke in the containment area 6. any other situation that would disrupt the plant of work f). The design of the Variable Pressure System for review. Do not being work until a copy of the submittal approved by the Project Monitor. At a minimum, include in the submittal: 1. Number of negative air machines required and calculations used to determine such. Provide sufficient number of negative air pressure units to maintain at lease one air change each fifteen minutes throughout the work areas. 2. Locations of machines and exhausts. 3. Pressure differential across enclosures anticipated. 4. Description of projected air flows throughout the work areas. g.) Hazard Communication/Right To Know Program to include MSDSs for all chemicals and potentially hazardous materials used or stored on the site during this project. E. Submittals as Available: 1.) Unusual Event Reports: When an event of unusual or significant nature occurs at a site (examples: failure of variable pressure system,rupture of temporary enclosure),prepare and submit special report lists chain of events, persons participating, response of Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. When such events are known or predictable in advance advise Project Monitor and Owner in advance at earliest possible date. 2.) Accident Reports: Prepare and submit reports of significant accidents, at site and anywhere else work is in progress. Record and document data and actions, comply with industry standards. For this purpose, a significant accident is defined to include events where personal injury is sustained, or property loss of substance is sustained, or where the event poses a significant threat of loss or personal injury. 3.) Monitoring Reports: Personnel air monitoring reports are to be taken at least once a day in each containment area during the course of the actual abatement. Monitor at least one person per shift, and at least one third of all contractor's employees on the job who work within the containment structure. F. Submittals at the Conclusion of the Work: 1.) Asbestos Disposal Reports: Receipt from the ultimate disposer of each load of asbestos debris showing the location, number of bags,drums or cubic yards,data,name of recipient's representative, and certification of proper disposal method according to NIOSH. Submit copies of all manifests and landfill receipts to the Project Monitor on a weekly basis for on- going projects. If waste is accepted by local community landfill,include documentation of the amount paid for disposal at the local landfill. Asbestos Abatement 02080-8 Country Lane Estatess Northampton,Massachusetts 1.10—SUBMITTALS A. Except as otherwise indicated, submit special reports directly to the Project Monitor within one day of occurrence requiring special reports, and within seven (7) days of all other reports becoming available to the Contractor. Send a copy to any other persons affected by the occurrence. Pre- constructions submittals (under B, C, and D) should be made in a timely manner to allow ample time for review before the start of the work. B. A Copy of the contractor's and superintendent's certifications from the Massachusetts Department of Occupational Safety/Department of Labor and Workforce Development(DOS/DLWD). C. A copy of notification forms to Massachusetts DOS/DLWD, Massachusetts DEP, and Environmental Protection Agency (if warranted). A copy of the completed forms must be submitted to the Project Monitor before the start of work. D. A copy of medical examination certification of workers and worker's respiratory training certificates for each worker including the following: 1. Name, Social Security Number and photostatic copy of current Asbestos Abatement Worker Certification. 2. Physicians Written Opinion including at a minimum the following: �ow a). Whether the worker has any detected medical conditions that would place the worker at an increased risk of material health impairment from exposure to asbestos. b). Statement that the worker has been informed by the physician of the results of the medical examination and of any medical conditions that may result from asbestos exposure. c). Statement that the worker is able to wear and use the type of respiratory protection proposed for the project, and is able to work safely in an environment capable of producing heat stress in the worker. d). Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) forms as per the OSHA Hazard Communication Standard for all chemical compounds used at the work site. Maintain a copy of forms on site as required by OSHA. Provide a list of products proposed for use during the course of this work. At a minimum submit MSDS for the following products used on the work,including: 1. Surfactant 2. Bridging Encapsulant 3. Penetrating Encapsulant 4. Lock-down Encapsulant 5. Pigments mixed with any of the above 6. Cleaning Agents 7. Solvents e). Health and Safety Plan/Contingency Plan shall be written that described in the plan should be clearly defined. It is recommended that all worker practice carrying out their roles in simulated emergency situations. The contingency plan should include planned responses to the following possible situations: 1. loss of negative pressure atmosphere Asbestos Abatement 02080-7 Country Lane Estatess Northampton,Massachusetts 00*- B. Workers: Removal workers will have successfully completed an EPA approved asbestos training course within one year prior to the commencement of the work. Each removal worker shall be certified as required by Massachusetts Department and Labor and Workforce Development Regulations 453 CMR 6.00. C. Workforce: The Contractors shall maintain sufficient trained removal workers, through all phases of the project, as needed to meet the timetables as agreed upon with the Owner. If the Contractor falls behind on the timetable, and the Owner or the Agent determines additional manpower is required, the Contractor shall provide the additional trained and certified personnel as required to meet the contract completion date. D. Identification Cards: All persons engaged in asbestos abatement on the job site shall keep their certification identification card at the job site and shall be present it to the Agent, IH or representative of any state or federal regulatory agency upon request. No person is to enter the job site unless this card is present. E. All work shall be performed in strict accordance with the Specifications contained herein and with the regulations cited in the following paragraph. The following Federal, State and Local Standards and Regulations, by reference, shall be made part of this section and shall be complied with. Whenever regulations are conflicting,the more stringent shall be complied with. F. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the following regulations, and maintain a copy of each at the work site: 1. U.S.Department of Labor, OSHA Asbestos Regulations(29 CFR 1926.58) 2. U.S. Department of Labor, OSHA Respiratory Protection;Final Rule dated January 8, 1998 (29 CFR 1910 and 1926) 3. U.S.EPA National Emission Standard for Asbestos (CFR Title 40 Subpart M) 4. U.S.EPA AHERA Final Rule(40 CFR Part 763,Subpart G) 5. U.S. Department of Labor,OSHA Confined Space Standard(29 CFR 1910.146) 6. Massachusetts Department of Labor and Workforce Development(453 CMR 6.00) 7. Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection(3 10 CMR 6.00-8.00) 8 All local ordinances, regulations or rules pertaining to asbestos, including its storage, transportation and disposal. G. In addition,the Contractor shall be familiar with the following: 1. Northampton Municipal and Zoning Ordinances as they affect the work. 2. Massachusetts State Building Code(780 CMR). Asbestos Abatement 02080-6 Country Lane Estatess Northampton,Massachusetts 00W addition, provide an evaluation of the individuals ability to work environments capable of producing heat stress in the worker. B. Maintain on site a certification from a physician that each individual worker is physically able to work safely with a negative pressure respirator before issuing this type of equipment to workers. 1.08-RESPIRATORY PROTECTION A. The Contractor must assure that each worker involved in asbestos abatement or maintenance and repair is trained in proper respiratory use and require that each worker wear a respirator, properly fitted on the face in the work area from the start of any operation which may cause airborne asbestos fibers until the work area is completely decontaminated. Use respiratory protection appropriate for the fiber level encountered in the work place or as required for other toxic or oxygen-deficient situations encountered. B. Standards: Except to the extent that more stringent requirements are written directly into the Contract Documents, the following regulations and standards have the same force and effect (and are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference) as if copied directly into the Contract Documents, or as if published copies were bound herein. Where there is a conflict in requirements set forth in these regulations and standards,meet the more stringent requirements. 1. OSHA -U.S. Department of Labor Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Safety and Health Standards 29 CFR 1910 and 1926, Respiratory Protection; Final Rule (January opk 8, 1998). 2. CGA - Compressed Gas Association, Inc.,New York, Pamphlet G-7, "Compressed Air for Human Respiration",and Specification g-7.1, "Commodity Specification for Air". 3. ANSI-American National Standard Practices for Respiratory Protection,ANSIZ88.2-1980. 4. NIOSH-National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health 5. MSHA-Mine Safety and Health Administration 1.09-ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL A. General Superintendent: Provide a full-time General Superintendent who is experienced in administration and supervision of asbestos abatement projects including work practices, protective measures for building and personnel, disposal procedure, federal and state regulation, etc. This person is the Competent Person as required by OSHA 29 CFR 1926 for the Contractor and is the Contractor's representative responsible for compliance with all applicable federal, state and local regulation, particularly those relating to asbestos-containing materials. This person must have completed a course at a Massachusetts D.LW.D recognized training center as a job supervisor and hold a state certification as a supervisor/foreperson. This person must also have a minimum of two (2) years on-the-job training and meet any additional requirements set forth in 29 CFR 1926 for a Competent Person. The General Superintendent is to be accredited as an asbestos Abatement Supervisor in accordance with the AHERA regulations 40 CFR Part 763, Subpart E, Appendix C. The General Superintendent shall also be trained in 40 CFR Part 61,the NESHAP Revisions. Asbestos Abatement 02080-5 Country Lane Estatess Northampton,Massachusetts J. Visual Inspections: Work areas shall pass a visual inspection conducted by the Site Supervisor responsible for the project and Project Monitor. The criterion for this inspection will be the absence of visible debris in accordance with ASTM standard E1368-90. All post removal and contaminated surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and dry prior to the visual inspection. A certificate of visual inspection will be signed by the Project Monitor and the Site Supervisor after final inspection clearance. The certificate will be part of the Owner's documentation. The Abatement Contractor will be responsible for the costs of visual inspection and testing required for any work that fails clearance air quality criteria. If the Abatement Contractor and Project Monitor disagree on the asbestos content of debris found in the area, a licensed Inspector shall collect and analyze samples of such debris at the Contractor's expense. Once the work area has passed the visual inspection, the Contractor shall encapsulate the exposed surface areas with an EPA approved encapusulant and shall leave removal surfaces in a condition that is ready to receive replacement materials. K. Disposal: All waste will be disposed of in accordance with all applicable local, state, and federal regulations. 1.05 -WORKER PROTECTION A. This section does not include respiratory protection. B. The disturbance or dislocation of ACMs may cause asbestos fibers to be released into the building's atmosphere, thereby creating a potential health threat to workmen and building occupants. Apprise all workers, supervisory personnel, subcontractors and consultants who will be at the job site of the seriousness of the hazard and of proper work procedures to be followed. Full notification of all interested parties and isolation of the work area remains the responsibility of the Contractor. C. Where in the performance of the work, workers, supervisory personnel, subcontractors, or consultants may encounter,disturb,or otherwise function in the immediate vicinity of any identified asbestos-containing materials, take appropriate continuous measures as necessary to protect all building occupants from potential hazard of exposure to airborne asbestos. Such measures shall include the procedures and methods described herein, and compliance with regulations of applicable federal,state and local agencies. 1.06-WORKER TRAINING A. All workers must receive training in accordance with the 29 CFR 1926 and 453 CMR 6.00. Documentation of such training in the form of current and valid Massachusetts Department of Occupational Safety (formerly Department of Labor and Industries) certification with picture I.D. must be on site whenever a worker is conducting asbestos associated work. 1.07-MEDICAL EXAMINATIONS A. Provide annual medical examinations for all workers who may encounter an airborne fiber level of 0.1 f/cc or greater for an 8-hour time weighted average. In the absence of specific airborne fiber data provide medical examination for all workers who will enter the work area for any reason. Examination shall as a minimum meet OSHA requirements as set forth in 29 CFR 1926. In Asbestos Abatement 02080-4 Country Lane Estatess Northampton,Massachusetts 0-00* HEPA vacuums and wet methods. Determinations of additional remedial cleaning will be made on the basis of hazard potential to workers and the outside environment relating to setup and masking and sealing operations. Respiratory protection and protective clothing will be required for all remedial cleaning activities prior to full containment or other removal methodologies (i.e. glove bags). D. Critical Barriers: The windows, doors, opening, ducts, drains, vents, pipe and conduit penetrations and other major opening of the buildings shall be masked and sealed in accordance with Part 3.02 of this Section prior to covering the floor and walls. E. Containments: Unless otherwise specified in Part 3.01, the Contractor shall remove ACM within full containments, with attached three stage decontamination chambers. Work areas will be masked and sealed in accordance with Part 3.02 of this Section. F. Decontamination Chambers: For the removals conducted under full containment, a single means of decontamination for personnel and equipment is acceptable. A decontamination unit consists of an equipment room, a shower and a clean room for personnel involved in asbestos removal in accordance with Part 3.02 of this Section. Each of these three rooms shall be of sufficient size to accommodate all of their intended functions. A decontamination unit will be required for each separate site of asbestos removal unless these sites are connected internally. The decontamination unit shall be the sole means of egress from the work site unless an emergency is in progress. For all other work conducted, a two chamber Mini-Decontamination Facility ("mini-decon") shall be constructed in a location readily accessible to the work sites in accordance with Part 3.02 of this Section. G. Variable Pressure: The Abatement Contractor shall establish negative pressure air filtration within the containment work areas. Install, operate, and maintain a sufficient number of negative Air Filtration Units (NAFU's) to meet the requirements of Part 3.05 of this Section. The NAFUs will be positioned in the work area opposite the decontamination unit, where possible. The NAFU will be exhausted outside the building. NAFUs which are exhausted to the building's interior shall be continuously monitored at the exhaust with a direct reading instrument equipped with a chart recorder. H. Removals: Removal of asbestos containing materials, unless specified otherwise, will be performed using negative air filtration techniques, wet methods, the masking and sealing of openings, ducts and vents, and mini-contaminants for glovebag removals. Removals will be as indicated and as specified herein, and will be performed in a neat and workman like manner to the limits indicated or specified. Asbestos will be consistently and thoroughly wetted with a fine spray of amended water and will be carefully removed and immediately placed in approved and properly labeled six mil polyethylene disposal containers unless specified otherwise. After removal, surfaces will be free of visible debris and fibers and surfaces will be HEPA vacuumed clean. I. Decontamination: State of the art techniques for asbestos fiber control will be used throughout this abatement. The Project Monitor will inspect the work site to confirm proper erection of specified containment systems, operation of equipment, and confirmatory to standards, regulations and the specification. It shall remain the responsibility of the Contractor for compliance with applicable federal, state and local laws and the abatement to the standards required. Asbestos Abatement 02080-3 Country Lane Estatess Northampton,Massachusetts OW 1.03 -ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIALS A. Universal Environmental Consultants completed a survey for asbestos containing materials (ACM) in select units of the Meadowbrook Apartments in July 2004. Various building materials were analyzed using the required protocols at an accredited laboratory. A review of the laboratory results indicated that ACM was detected at these locations. An ACM is defined as a material containing 1 percent or greater asbestos. Suspect AGMs were listed by functional space in which asbestos was determined to exist. The location,characteristics and assessment were completed for each ACM.A material is defined as friable when it can be crushed,pulverized,or reduced to powder by hand pressure when dry. Those materials which tested positive or were presumed to be ACM unless otherwise tested in an individual apartment unit included: • Yellow linoleum floor covering • Spray applied finish on gypsum ceilings Select abatement of ACMs in various units is planned for the renovation project. Not all of the above identified ACMs located at the Meadowbrook Apartments are scheduled for abatement as part of the projected renovations. Actual quantities and locations are to be take from Sheets (Sheet A-121, and others)depicting proposed renovations, etc. B. The inspections were limited to accessible areas proposed to be renovated during the upgrade project of the building. Additional ACM may be present in inaccessible areas. If unknown suspect materials are encountered, materials should be considered positive until laboratory analysis proves otherwise. 1.04-ABATEMENT REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Removal Requirements: The Asbestos Abatement Contractor will keep a three-ring binder notebook on the job site at all times with records on each employee on this project to include respirator fit-test documentation, training certificates, latest medical surveillance records, a copy of the company respiratory protection program, employee qualifications, and their health and safety program. The notebook will include a section on asbestos waste and record of all asbestos waste removed from the work area. The entry will include date, time, quantity (number of bags or cubic yards) destination of waste, name of approved hauler and EPA approved landfill and final chain of custody forms. The notebook will include copies of all permits and EPA, State and other notifications. Personal sampling results will also be maintained herein. B. Personal Air Sampling: Daily personal and excursion limit sampling will be the responsibility of the Asbestos Abatement Contractor to check personal exposure levels versus respiratory protection and to check work practices. At least 25% of the workers in each shift, but not less than 2, shall be sampled. Personal sampling pumps should have a flow rate of two (2) liters per minute and sample duration will be as close to an eight-hour workday as possible. The Contractor is responsible for his own personal sampling as outlined in OSHA Regulation 1926.1101. The Contractor shall post the personal air sample results within 24 hours. The analytical laboratory shall be A.I.H.A. accredited for asbestos analytical work. C. Remedial Cleaning: Remedial cleaning of horizontal surfaces, ledges, and equipment will be required prior to masking and sealing operations of work areas. Cleaning will be done using Asbestos Abatement 02080-2 Country Lane Estatess Northampton,Massachusetts ASBESTOS ABATEMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION SECTION 02080 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 -RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Hazardous Materials Identification Study at Meadowbrook Apartments, Northampton, Massachusetts,prepared by Universal Environmental Consultants,July 2004. 1.02-PROJECT/WORK IDENTIFICATION A. Specifications presented in this section were prepared by Mr. Christopher L. Godfrey (Massachusetts Certified Asbestos Designer#AD 73171)of ECS and are dated December 2004. B. Approximate locations and quantities referenced in this specification and related documents (Sheet A-121,and others)are guidelines for the convenience of the Contractor and are not guaranteed to be accurate. The Contractor shall verify the scope of work and determine all quantities involved. The contractor shall provide all labor, equipment and material necessary for removing and disposing all asbestos containing materials. It is the expectation of the Owner that all asbestos containing materials (AGMs) will receive the specified treatment in an area when the Contractor agrees to undertake such work. No credit will be given for changes in the scope of work unless hidden conditions, other than those for which allowances exist, are revealed during the construction process. If any other materials are found which are suspected of containing asbestos, immediately notify ECS. C. The Contractor should expect and it is reasonable to expect that demolition activities will be warranted to access and remove ACMs. The Contractor will perform all of their own cutting, capping, dismantling, and/or demolition to gain access to concealed materials. By way of example, the following are to be included in, but not limited to, this selective demolition: where partitions, countertops, etc. have been built on top of existing linoleum and/or mastic, the contractor will be required to perform selective demolition as required to access and abate these materials. Plumbing cutting and capping required as a result of selective demolition required to access the work (e.g. removal of sinks and cabinets)will be the responsibility of the contractor. D. The Contractor shall provide the services of a qualified and licensed electrician and/or plumber , as necessary,to accomplish all of the work,as necessary. E. The cost of consultant or hygienist services (including a Project Monitor) shall be borne by the Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for all cost of further sampling, monitoring, and clearances of the post-abatement air sampling, if quantitative results do not produce final clearance. Asbestos Abatement 02080-1 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. END OF SECTION 01820 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01820 - 5 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 8. Repairs: Include the following: a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. C. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement;and reassembly instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a combined training manual. B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location. 3.2 INSTRUCTION A. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. I. Architect will furnish an instructor to describe basis of system design, operational requirements, criteria,and regulatory requirements. 2. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy. 3. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants. B. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. I. Schedule training with Owner,with notice to Architect of dates and times, with at least seven Insert number days' advance notice. C. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use. 3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEOTAPES A. General: Engage a qualified commercial photographer to record demonstration and training videotapes. Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student practice. I. At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective and lesson outline. B. Videotape Format: Provide high-quality VHS color videotape in full-size cassettes or CDs. C. Recording: Mount camera on tripod before starting recording, unless otherwise necessary to show area OW of demonstration and training. Display continuous running time. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01820 -4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. a. Emergency manuals. b. Operations manuals. C. Maintenance manuals. d. Project Record Documents. e. Identification systems. f. Warranties and bonds. g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments. 3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable: a. Instructions on meaning of warnings,trouble indications, and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. C. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures. 4. Operations: Include the following,as applicable: a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. C. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. 0"` i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. I. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. M. Special operating instructions and procedures. 5. Adjustments: Include the following: a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. C. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments. 6. Troubleshooting: Include the following: a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures. 7. Maintenance: Include the following: a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. C. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. ate' g. Instruction on use of special tools. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01820 - 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Division I Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training. B. Photographer Qualifications: A professional photographer who is experienced photographing construction projects. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations. B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content. C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM A#W A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections, and as follows: 1. Conveying systems, including elevators. 2. Heat generation, including boilers feedwater equipment pumps and water distribution piping. 3. HVAC instrumentation and controls. 4. Electrical service and distribution, including transformers switchboards panelboards uninterruptible power supplies and motor controls. S. Lighting equipment and controls. 6. Communication systems, including intercommunication voice and data and television equipment. B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following: I. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements,and Criteria: Include the following: a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. C. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves. 2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail: DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01820 - 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01820 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following: I. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 3. Demonstration and training videotapes. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for demonstration and training for products in those Sections. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Instruction Program: Submit two copies of outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a schedule of proposed dates,times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module. I. At completion of training, submit two complete training manual(s) for Owner's use. B. Qualification Data: For instructor and photographer. C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time. D. Demonstration and Training Videotapes: Submit two copies within seven days of end of each training module. I. Identification: On each copy, provide an applied label with the following information: a. Name of Project. b. Name and address of photographer. C. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Date videotape was recorded. f. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01820- 1 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. I. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. I. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division I Section "Project Record Documents." G. Comply with Division I Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. END OF SECTION 01782 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 - 7 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross- reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: I. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement,and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair,and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning,adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training videotape, if available. E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. I. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. 2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance. F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent. H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. I. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 - 6 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification. 2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources,and warranties and bonds, as described below. B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Product Information: Include the following,as applicable: I. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: I. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions. E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. I. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 - 5 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill. C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties. D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: I. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures. 2.4 OPERATION MANUALS A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. !op*' 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. B. Descriptions: Include the following: I. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. C. Operating Procedures: Include the following,as applicable: I. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 - 4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. 6. Name and address of Architect. 7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. I. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set. D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. I. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-I I-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system. b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. 2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to + " indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. 3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment. 4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-I I-inch white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations. 2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following: I. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures. B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment,and component: I. Fire. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 - 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. I. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit two Insert number copies of each corrected manual within 15 Insert number days of receipt of Architect's comments. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare manuals. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following: I. List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents. B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system. 00pok C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list. D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual. E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems." 2.2 MANUALS, GENERAL A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: I. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information: I. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 - 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01782- OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 4. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, finishes,systems and equipment. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division I Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Division I Section "Closeout Procedures"for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 3. Division I Section "Project Record Documents" for preparing Record Drawings for operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment,or subsystems united by regular interaction. B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Initial Submittal: Submit 2 Insert number draft copies of each manual at least 15 Insert number days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Architect will return one copy Insert number copies of draft and mark whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable. B. Final Submittal: Submit two copies of each manual in final form at least 15 Insert number days before final inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within 15 Insert number days after final inspection. AOW OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 - 1 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. I. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be ?! " readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where applicable. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION 01781 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781 - 4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on Record Prints. Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 3. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution. 4. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings for use in recording information, at a cost of $250 per drawing, subject to the conditions described elsewhere in this Project Manual. C. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing Record Drawings where Architect determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to show actual installation. I. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting an alternate, substitution,or other modification. 2. Consult Architect for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly prepared Record Drawings into Record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting. D. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. I. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Record CAD Drawings: Organize CAD information into separate electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each CAD file. 3. Identification: As follows: low a. Project name. b. Date. C. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor. 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. I. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. 4. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data. 5. Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data, and Record Drawings where applicable. 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781 - 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. I. Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in manual instead of submittal as Record Product Data. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. I. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity,to prepare the marked-up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. C. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. C. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. I. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. M. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 3. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross- reference on the Contract Drawings. 4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. S. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification,where applicable. B. Record CAD Drawings: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up Record Prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings, as follows: ' I. Format: Same CAD program,version, and operating system as the original Contract Drawings. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781 - 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01781 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the following: I. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division I Section "Closeout Procedures"for general closeout procedures. 2. Division I Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents of the Work in those Sections. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: I. Number of Copies: Submit two sets of marked-up Record Prints. 2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of Record Drawings as follows: a. Initial Submittal: Submit three sets of plots from corrected Record CAD Drawings and two sets of marked-up Record Prints. Architect will initial and date each plot and mark whether general scope of changes, additional information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable. Architect will return two plots and prints for organizing into sets, printing, binding, and final submittal. b. Final Submittal: Submit one set of marked-up Record Prints, one set of Record CAD Drawing files, and one set of Record CAD Drawing plots. Plot and print each Drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded. I) Electronic Media: CD-R. B. Record Specifications: Submit two copies of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. C. Record Product Data: Submit two copies of each Product Data submittal. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781 - I Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish,waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. C. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts,trenches,equipment vaults, manholes, attics,and similar spaces. h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. k. Remove labels that are not permanent. I. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. M. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. n. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. P. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. q. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. r. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. S. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report. D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. END OF SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 -4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 1.6 WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. All other work shall commence warranty period on the date of Substantial Completion. B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 Insert number days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor. C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. I. Bind warranties and bonds into two heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents,and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-I I-inch paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address,and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. '04w I. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools,and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion, including punch list described above. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect,that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. I. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. 3. Reinspections beyond initial reinspection will be performed at Contractor's expense at Architect's current hourly rates. These expenses will be deducted from the Application for Payment. 1.4 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: I. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division I Section "Payment Procedures." 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training videotapes. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. I. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Preparation: Submit three Insert number copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary,areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. I. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, " individual walls,floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01770- CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to,the following: I. Inspection procedures. 2. Warranties. 3. Final cleaning. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division I Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion. 2. Division I Section "Execution Requirements"for progress cleaning of Project site. 3. Division I Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications,and Record Product Data. 4. Division I Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. S. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. I. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications,and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates,and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 1 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. C. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete indicated for selective demolition. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated. B. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw,then remove masonry between saw cuts. C. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished,then break up and remove. D. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI-WP and its Addendum. I. Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by one of the methods recommended by RFCI. 3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. I. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 4. Comply with requirements specified in Division I Section "Construction Waste Management" B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION 01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 5 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. I. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction,to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 4. Cover and protect furniture,furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Division I Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. I. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: I. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. As required by the Northampton Fire Department, maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during and after flame-cutting operations. S. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls,floors, or framing. 9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. B. Removed and Salvaged Items (If any): I. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical,or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs. I. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements, materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction. F. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain, if any, and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. I. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Division I Section "Summary." B. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. I.. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing. a. Where entire wall is to be removed, existing services/systems may be removed with removal of the wall. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. I. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division I Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. B. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes. I. Comply with submittal requirements in Division I Section "Construction Waste Management." 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241. D. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division I Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to selective demolition including, but not limited to,the following: I. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment,and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. 5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. C. Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials are present in construction to be selectively demolished. A report on the presence of hazardous materials is on file for review and use. Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present. I. Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 2. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01732 -SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division I Section "Summary" for use of premises,and phasing, and Owner-occupancy requirements. 2. Division I Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary construction and environmental-protection measures for selective demolition operations. 3. Division I Section "Cutting and Patching"for cutting and patching procedures. 4. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade improvements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Historic items, relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, Insert description of other items, antiques, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be encountered during selective demolition remain Owner's property. Carefully remove and salvage each item or object in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to Owner. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Inventory: After selective demolition is complete, submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732- 1 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. I. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. S. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap,valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections. I. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition. D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials. END OF SECTION 01731 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. I. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. 2. Membranes and flashings. 3. Equipment supports. 4. Piping, ductwork,vessels, and equipment. S. Noise-and vibration-control elements and systems. D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. I. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. I. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. 3.3 PERFORMANCE OOW A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. " SECTION 01731 -CUTTING AND PATCHING PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division I Section "Selective Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the building. 2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operating elements include the following: I. Primary operational systems and equipment. 2. Air or smoke barriers. 3. Fire-suppression systems. 4. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. 5. Control systems. 6. Communication systems. 7. Conveying systems. B. Electrical wiring systems. C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Miscellaneous elements include the following: CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - I Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Cutting and Patching." I. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. END OF SECTION 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 7 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted. H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units,and retest. B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to inspect field- assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division I Section "Quality Requirements." 3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. 3.10 CORRECTION OF THE WORK EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700- 6 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. I. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. H. joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. 1. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.6 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction forces. B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction forces. I. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress. 2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction forces at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction forces if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction. 3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. I. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 5 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. I. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect before proceeding. 2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points. B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two Insert number permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 1. Record benchmark locations,with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. 2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work. 3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition. C. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles,and elevations of construction and sitework. D. Final Property Survey: Prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey an ALTA level certification, signed by land surveyor, that principal metes, bounds, lines,and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey. I. Show boundary lines, monuments,streets, site improvements and utilities, existing improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours, and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point. 2. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey." 3.5 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. I. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 8 feet Insert dimension in spaces without a suspended ceiling. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. " E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility and Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. Submit requests on CSI Form 13.2A, "Request for Interpretation." 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly. B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. I. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and °i'' elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. 3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 5. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. 6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations. D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect. 3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 3 ON IN Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in Massachusetts and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated. PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work. I. Before construction,verify the location and points of connection of utility services. B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work. I. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical services. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. I. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: a. Description of the Work. b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. C. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. d. Recommended corrections. 2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. ' SECTION 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to,the following: I. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. General installation of products. 4. Coordination of Owner-installed products. S. Progress cleaning. 6. Starting and adjusting. 7. Protection of installed construction. 8. Correction of the Work. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division I Section "Project Management and Coordination" for procedures for coordinating field engineering with other construction activities. 2. Division I Section "Submittal Procedures"for submitting surveys. 3. Division I Section "Cutting and Patching" for procedural requirements for cutting and patching necessary for the installation or performance of other components of the Work. 4. Division I Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For land surveyor. B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements. C. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials,for hazardous waste disposal. D. Certified Surveys: Submit three Insert number copies signed by land surveyor. E. Final Property Survey: Submit three Insert number copies showing the Work performed and record #Polk survey data. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 1 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 Insert number days after the Notice of Award. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: I. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. 2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. 4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. 7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. 2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: I. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results,and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance,weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 6 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated,that are new at time of installation. I. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected,"Architect will make selection. 5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Architect's. 6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient characteristics" of products. 7. Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal" or "or approved equal" or "or approved," comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. B. Product Selection Procedures: I. Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the named product that complies with requirements. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. 3. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. 4. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. S. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system. 6. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the other named manufacturers. 7. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for proposal of product. 8. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements. a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 5 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration,theft,and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: I. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground,with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms. 5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 8. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner. 1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. I. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution. I. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Closeout Procedures." PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project,from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery. j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. I. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 14 Insert time days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 21 Insert time days of receipt of request, or 7 Insert time days of receipt of additional information or documentation,whichever is later. a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order or Architect's Supplemental Instruction. b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. C. Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. I. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 Insert time days of receipt of request, or 7 Insert time days of receipt of additional information or documentation,whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division I Section "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. D. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include generic names of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each product. I. Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule. 2. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings: a. Specification Section number and title. b. Generic name used in the Contract Documents. C. Proprietary name, model number,and similar designations. d. Manufacturer's name and address. e. Supplier's name and address. f. Installer's name and address. g. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period. h. Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery date. 3. Initial Submittal: Within 30 Insert number days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 Insert number copies of initial product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements. a. At Contractor's option, initial submittal may be limited to product selections and designations that must be established early in Contract period. 4. Completed List: Within 60 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 Insert number copies of completed product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements. 5. Architect's Action: Architect will respond in writing to Contractor within 15 days of receipt of completed product list. Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable product selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. Architect's response, or lack of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement to comply with the Contract Documents. B. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. I. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.[A,facsimile of form provided at end of Section. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. C. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability,visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples,where applicable or requested. f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division I Section "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified. 2. Division I Section "Closeout Procedures"for submitting warranties for Contract closeout. 3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material;' "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. I. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility, except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600- 1 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, and fire-retardant plywood on construction operations side. 2. Insulate partitions to provide noise protection to occupied areas. 3. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks. 4. Protect air-handling equipment. S. Weather strip openings. 6. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition. K. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241. I. Prohibit smoking in all construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. 3.5 OPERATION,TERMINATION,AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. I. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. I. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division I Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 7 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. L. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Cover finished, permanent stairs with protective covering of plywood or similar material so finishes will be undamaged at time of acceptance. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. I. Comply with work restrictions specified in Division I Section "Summary." B. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with requirements specified in Division 2 Section "Site Clearing." C. Stormwater Control: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains. D. Tree and Plant Protection: Comply with requirements specified in Division 2 Section "Tree Protection and Trimming." E. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches,and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials. F. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. G. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. H. Covered Walkway: If required, erect structurally adequate, protective, covered walkway for passage of individuals along adjacent public street(s). Coordinate with entrance gates, other facilities, and obstructions. Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. I. Construct covered walkways using scaffold or shoring framing. 2. Provide wood-plank overhead decking, protective plywood enclosure walls, handrails, barricades, warning signs, lights, safe and well-drained walkways, and similar provisions for protection and safe passage. 3. Extend back wall beyond the structure to complete enclosure fence. 4. Paint and maintain in a manner approved by Owner and Architect. I. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. I. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate temporary enclosures. J. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner from fumes and noise. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 6 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241. 2. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas within construction limits indicated on Drawings. I. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as required to minimize dust. C. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. I. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. D. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel. E. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. I. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. `° F. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Provide Project identification and other signs as indicated on Drawings. Install signs where indicated to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. I. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 2. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. G. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with Division I Section "Execution Requirements"for progress cleaning requirements. H. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. I. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. I. Temporary Elevator Use: Refer to Division 14 Sections for temporary use of new elevators. J. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate. K. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, as long as stairs are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore stairs to condition existing before initial use. " I. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs and to maintain means of egress. If, despite such protection, stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 5 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. E. Heating: Provide temporary heating required by construction activities for curing or drying of a " completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. G. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity,and power characteristics required for construction operations. I. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner. H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. I. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. I. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office. 1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following: a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine and computer in each field office. b. Provide one separate telephone line(s)for Owner's use. 2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. C. Contractor's home office. d. Architect's office. e. Engineers' offices. f. Owner's office. g. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices. 3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office. ). Electronic Communication Service: Provide temporary electronic communication service, including electronic mail, in common-use facilities. I. Provide one DSL or T-I line in the Contractor's primary field office and in the Owner's office. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500- 4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3. Drinking water and private toilet. 4. Coffee machine and supplies. 5. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68 to 72 deg F. 6. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height. C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. I. Store combustible materials apart from building. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self- contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. I. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. I. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. I. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction. D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel. I.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Pavement: Comply with Division 2 pavement Sections. B. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch- thick, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line posts and 2-7/8- inch- OD corner and pull posts,with 1-5/8-inch- OD top rails. C. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry." D. Gypsum Board: Minimum 1/2 inch thick by 48 inches wide by maximum available lengths; regular-type panels with tapered edges. Comply with ASTM C 36/C 36M. E. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively. F. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting Sections. 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of construction personnel. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows: I. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases. 2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 Insert number individuals. Provide electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with not less than I receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot- square tack board. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 0 1 500 - 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01500 -TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division I Section "Summary" for limitations on utility interruptions and other work restrictions. 2. Division I Section "Submittal Procedures" for procedures for submitting copies of implementation and termination schedule and utility reports. 3. Division I Section "Execution Requirements"for progress cleaning requirements. 4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for products in those Sections. 5. Division 2 Section "Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving" for construction and maintenance of asphalt paving for temporary roads and paved areas. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures. 1.4 USE CHARGES A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces,Architect, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sewer Service: Sewer service use charges will be paid by the Owner. C. Water Service: Water service use charges for water used by all entities for construction operations will be paid by the Owner. D. Electric Power Service: Electric power service use charges for electricity used by all entities for construction operations will be paid by the Owner. 1.5 SUBMITTALS TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500- I Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. www.gsa.gov (202) 501-1888 40MK HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202) 708-1 1 12 www.hud.gov LBL Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory (510) 486-4000 www.lbl.gov NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB) NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478 www.nist.gov OSHA Occupational Safety& Health Administration (800) 321-6742 www.osha.gov (202) 693-1999 PBS Public Building Service (See GSA) PHS Office of Public Health and Science (202) 690-7694 //phs.os.dhhs.gov RUS Rural Utilities Service (202) 720-9540 (See USDA) SD State Department (202) 647-4000 www.state.gov TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334-2934 www.nas.edu/trb USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-2791 www.usda.gov USPS Postal Service (202) 268-2000 www.usps.com PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01420 01420 - 3 REFERENCES Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. I. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. 1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale Research's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S." B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. ICC International Code Council (703) 931-4533 (Formerly: CABO - Council of American Building Officials) www.iccsafe.org ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423-6587 www.icc-es.ofg (562) 699-0543 C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CE Army Corps of Engineers www.usace.army.mil CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772 www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-6816 DOC Department of Commerce (202)482-2000 www.commerce.gov DOE Department of Energy (202) 586-9220 www.eren.doe.gov EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 272-0167 www.epa.gov FAA Federal Aviation Administration (202) 366-4000 www.faa.gov FDA Food and Drug Administration (888) 463-6332 www.fda.gov GSA General Services Administration (800) 488-3 I I I 01420 - 2 REFERENCES Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01420 - REFERENCES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required,"and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including"shown," "noted," "scheduled," Aqu,, and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes,and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. 1. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise indicated. REFERENCES 01420 - 1 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours. 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. I. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. 2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division I Section "Cutting and Patching." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION 01400 K QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400- 7 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and - control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. I. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. H. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 30 Insert number days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. I. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Arch itect,testi ng agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required. 1.8 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency as required by authorities having tom' jurisdiction,as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and as follows: I. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work. PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: I. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 01400 - 6 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. I. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor,and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order. B. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. I. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services. a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 Insert number hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate,of each quality-control service. 4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division I Section "Submittal Procedures." D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting,for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architectand Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. I. Notify Architectand Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 5 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction,that is acceptable to authorities. I. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. G. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design,and extent to those indicated for this Project. H. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following: I. Contractor responsibilities include the following: a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. C. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements. d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same tasks for Project. e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work. look f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups; do not reuse products on Project. 2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. I. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: I. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architectseven Insert number days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Arch itect'sap p roval of mockups before starting work,fabrication, or construction. a. Allow seven Insert number days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup. S. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated. 1.7 QUALITY CONTROL QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 -4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. Specification Section number and title. 2. Description of test and inspection. 3. Identification of applicable standards. 4. Identification of test and inspection methods. 5. Number of tests and inspections required. 6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service. C. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following: I. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. S. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. D. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed at testing facility to verify performance characteristics. E. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. F. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards. G. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop. H. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. I. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. J. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application,and similar operations. I. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name. K. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five Insert number previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01400- QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. I. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner,or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. C. Related Sections include the following: I. Division I Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for developing a schedule of required tests and inspections. 2. Division I Section "Cutting and Patching" for repair and restoration of construction disturbed by testing and inspecting activities. 3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples. Approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 1 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST (Continued) The Undersigned certifies: • Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product. • Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product. • Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts,as applicable,is available. Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule. • Cost data as stated above is complete. Claims for additional costs related to accepted substitution which may subsequently become apparent are to be waived. • Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances. • Payment will be made for changes to building design,including A/E design,detailing,and construction costs caused by the substitution. • Coordination,installation,and changes in the Work as necessary for accepted substitution will be complete in all respects. Submitted by: Signed by: Firm: Address: Telephone: Attachments: A/E's REVIEW AND ACTION 0 Substitution approved-Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01330. ❑Substitution approved as noted-Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01330. ❑Substitution rejected-Use specified materials. ❑Substitution Request received too late-Use specified materials. Signed by: Date: Additional Comments: ❑Contractor ❑Subcontractor ❑Supplier ❑Manufacturer ❑A/E ❑ Copyright 1446,Construction Specification Institute, Page of September 1996 601 Madison Street,Alexandria,VA 22314-1791 CSC Form 13.1A Ao9vancement of T � SUBSTITUTION REQUEST After the Bidding Phase Project: Substitution Request Number: From: To: Date: ME Project Number: Re: Contract For: Specification Title: Description: Section: Page: Article/Paragraph: Proposed Substitution: Manufacturer. Address: Phone: Trade Name: Model No.: Installer: Address: Phone: History: ❑New product ❑ 2-5 years old ❑5-10 yrs old ❑More than 10 years old Differences between proposed substitution and specified product: ❑Point-by-point comparative data attached-REQUIRED BY A/E Reason for not providing specified item: Similar Installation: Project: Architect: Address: Owner: Date Installed: Proposed substitution affects other parts of Work: ❑No ❑Yes;explain Savings to Owner for accepting substitution: ($ }. Proposed substitution changes Contract Time: ❑No ❑Yes [Add] [Deduct] days. Supporting Data Attached: ❑Drawings ❑Product Data ❑Samples ❑Tests ❑Reports ❑ Copyright 1996,Construction Specification Institute, Page of September 1996 601 Madison Street,Alexandria,VA 22314-1791 CSI Form 13.1A Advancavneat Of Constructiat Tech»alogy SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL Project: Date: A/E Project Number: TRANSMITTAL To(Contractor): Date: Submittal No. AFrom(Subcontractor): By: ❑Resubmission Qty. Reference/ Title/Description! Spec.Section Title and Paragraph/ Number Manufacturer Drawler Detail Reference ❑Submitted for review and approval ❑Substitution involved-Substitution request attached ❑Resubmitted for review and approval ❑If substitution involved,submission includes point-by-point ❑Complies with contract requirements comparative data or preliminary details ❑Will be available to meet construction schedule ❑Items included in submission will be ordered A/E review time included in construction schedule immediately upon receipt of approval Other remarks on above submission: ❑One copy retained by sender TRANSMITTAL To(A/E): Attn: Date Rec'd by Contractor. B From Contractor { ) By: Date Trrtsmt'd by Contractor: ❑Approved ❑Revise/Resubmit ❑Approved as noted ❑Rejected/Resubmit Other remarks on above submission: ❑One copy retained by sender TRANSMITTAL To(Contractor): Attn: Date Recd by A/E: C From(A/E): ❑Other By: Date Tmsrnfd by A/E: Approved ❑Provide file copy with corrections identified Approved as noted ❑Sepia copies only returned E)Not subject to review No action required ❑Point-by-point comparative data required ❑Revise/Resubmit to complete approval process ❑Rejected/Resubmit ❑Approved as noted/Resubmit ❑Submission Incomplete/Resubmit Other remarks on above submission: ❑One copy retained by sender TRANSMITTAL To(Subcontractor): Attn: Date Rec'd by Contractor: DFrom(Contractor): By: Date Trnsmed by Contractor: Copies: ❑Owner ❑Consultants ❑_ ❑ ❑ ❑One copy retained by sender Copyright 19%,Construction Specifications Institute, Page of September 1996 106 Madison Street,Alexandria,VA 22314-1791 CSI Form 12,1A Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S/ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken. C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330- 9 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. Q. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. R. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable: I. Preparation of substrates. 2. Required substrate tolerances. 3. Sequence of installation or erection. 4. Required installation tolerances. S. Required adjustments. 6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection. S. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following,as applicable: I. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not,what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance 40W complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. T. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage. U. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information directly to Owner; do not submit to Architect, except as required in "Action Submittals"Article. I. Architect will not review submittals that include MSDSs and will return the entire submittal for resubmittal. 2.3 DELEGATED DESIGN A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. B. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit six Insert number copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 8 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division I Section "Construction Progress Documentation." D. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. H. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. I. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. J. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. K. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. L. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division I Section "Quality Requirements." M. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. N. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. O. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. P. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in Division I Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 7 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. I) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least two Insert number sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. E. Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: I. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product. 2. Number and name of room or space. 3. Location within room or space. 4. Number of Copies: Submit three Insert number copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two Insert number copies. a. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. F. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division I Section "Construction Progress Documentation." G. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division I Section "Payment Procedures." H. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division I Section "Payment Procedures." I. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: I. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. 4. Number of Copies: Submit six Insert number copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two Insert number copies. a. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. 2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. I. Number of Copies: Submit six Insert number copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. 2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division I Section "Quality Requirements." B. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division I Section "Project Management and Coordination." SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330- 6 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. M. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. n. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. o. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by I I inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches. 3. Number of Copies: Submit six Insert number opaque copies of each submittal, unless copies are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Submit six Insert number copies where copies are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain two Insert number copies; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain two returned copies as Project Record Drawings. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. I. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. C. Sample source. d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. 3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors,textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit one Insert number full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit two Insert number sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Insert number Sample sets; remainder will be returned. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 5 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. 1. Submit electronic submittals directly to extranet specifically established for Project. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. I. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information,as applicable: a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. C. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Standard color charts. e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. f. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. g. Printed performance curves. h. Operational range diagrams. i. Mill reports. j. Standard product operation and maintenance manuals. k. Compliance with specified referenced standards. I. Testing by recognized testing agency. M. Application of testing agency labels and seals. n. Notation of coordination requirements. 4. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. S. Number of Copies: Submit six Insert number copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return three Insert number copies. Mark up and retain two returned copies as Project Record Documents. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal of Architect's CAD Drawings are otherwise permitted. I. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information,as applicable: a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. C. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Design calculations. j. Compliance with specified standards. k. Notation of coordination requirements. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. F. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. G. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. I. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Architect. 2. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action taken and will be returned. H. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor. I. Transmittal Form: Use AIA Document G810. 2. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same label information as related submittal. I. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. I. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked "Approved" or"Approved As Noted." J. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. K. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating "Insert approval notation from Architect's action stamp" taken by Architect. 1.5 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF ARCHITECT'S CAD FILES A. General: At Contractor's written request, copies of Architect's CAD files will be provided to Contractor for Contractor's use in connection with Project, subject to the following conditions: I. In accepting or utilizing any form of electronic media generated and provided by the Architect or its consultants, the Contractor covenants and agrees that all such drawings and data are instruments of service of the Architect,who shall be deemed the author of the drawings and data and shall retail all common law, statutory law and other rights, including copyrights. The Contractor further agrees not to use these drawings and data, in whole or in part, for any purpose or project other than this Project. The Contractor agrees to waive all claims against the Architect resulting in any way from any unauthorized changes or reuse of the drawings and data for any other project by anyone other than the Architect. The Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by law, indemnify and hold the Architect harmless from any damage, liability or cost, including reasonable attorney's fees and costs of defense, arising from any changes made by anyone other than the Architect or from any reuse of the drawings or data without the prior written consent of the Architect. Software compatibility issues, if any, shall be solely the responsibility of the Contractor. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. I. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities. D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. I. Initial Review: Allow 15 Insert number days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 Insert number days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 15 Insert number days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor. E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. I. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches Insert size on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. I) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 06100.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point(e.g., 06100.01.A). i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references,as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. I. Other necessary identification. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01330- SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division I Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the Schedule of Values. 2. Division I Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes and for submitting Coordination Drawings. 3. Division I Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule. 4. Division I Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports and for mockup requirements. S. Division I Section "Closeout Procedures"for submitting warranties. 6. Division I Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 7. Division I Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 8. Division I Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting videotapes of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel. 9. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for submittals in those Sections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action. B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. 1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. CAD Files: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals, at the cost of$250 per drawing sheet. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 1 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. on CSI Form 13.2A. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 2.6 SPECIAL REPORTS A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one Insert number day(s) of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence. B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly Insert time intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week Insert time before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. I. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, low changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity. B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. I. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. C. Delivery of Construction Schedule: Failure to delivery an updated and accurate construction schedule on a monthly basis will be grounds for non-payment of Applications for Payment. END OF SECTION 01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320- 6 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit preliminary horizontal bar-chart-type construction schedule within seven Insert number days of date established for the Notice of Award. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 60 Insert number days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. 2.4 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART) A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt-chart-type, Contractor's Construction Schedule within 30 Insert number days of date established for the Notice of Award. Base schedule on the Preliminary Construction Schedule and whatever updating and feedback was received since the start of Project. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. I. For construction activities that require 3 months or longer to complete, indicate an estimated completion percentage in 10 Insert number percent increments within time bar. 2.5 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site: I. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events (refer to special reports). 10. Stoppages,delays, shortages, and losses. 11. Meter readings and similar recordings. 12. Emergency procedures. 13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 14. Change Orders received and implemented. 15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 16. Services connected and disconnected. 17. Equipment or system tests and startups. 18. Partial Completions and occupancies. 19. Substantial Completions authorized. B. Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site. C. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a request for interpretation CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 - 5 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 5. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Division 1 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 6. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. C. Use of premises restrictions. d. Provisions for future construction. e. Environmental control. 7. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Subcontract awards. b. Submittals. C. Purchases. d. Mockups. e. Fabrication. f. Sample testing. g. Deliveries. h. Installation. i. Tests and inspections. j. Adjusting. k. Curing. I. Startup and placement into final use and operation. low 8. Area Separations: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following: a. Structural completion. b. Permanent space enclosure. C. Completion of mechanical installation. d. Completion of electrical installation. e. Substantial Completion. E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to,the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion. F. Cost Correlation: At the head of schedule, provide a cost correlation line, indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show dollar volume of the Work performed as of dates used for preparation of payment requests. I. Refer to Division I Section "Payment Procedures"for cost reporting and payment procedures. G. Computer Software: Prepare schedules using a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules. I. Microsoft Project or Primavera,for Windows XP operating system. 2.3 PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 -4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. I. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with preliminary bar-chart schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. a. At Contractor's option, show submittals on the Preliminary Construction Schedule, instead of tabulating them separately. 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "Construction Planning& Scheduling." B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice of Award to date of Final Completion. I. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. C. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following: I. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 Insert number days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication,and delivery. 3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division I Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule. 4. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than fifteen days for startup and testing. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase. 2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract. 3. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner. 4. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Division I Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 - 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. D. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction element. E. Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals Schedule: Submit three Insert number copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a tabular format: I. Scheduled date for first submittal. 2. Specification Section number and title. 3. Submittal category (action or informational). 4. Name of subcontractor. 5. Description of the Work covered. 6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. B. Preliminary Construction Schedule: Submit three Insert number opaque copies. I. Approval of cost-loaded preliminary construction schedule will not constitute approval of Schedule of Values for cost-loaded activities. C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit three Insert number opaque copies of initial schedule, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period. I. Submit an electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, on CD-R, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (Initial or Updated) and date on label. D. Daily Construction Reports: Submit three Insert number copies at weekly intervals. E. Material Location Reports: Submit three Insert number copies at weekly intervals. F. Field Condition Reports: Submit three Insert number copies at time of discovery of differing conditions. G. Special Reports: Submit three Insert number copies at time of unusual event. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. I. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. PART 2- PRODUCTS ' 2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320- 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01320- CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: I. Preliminary Construction Schedule. 2. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3. Submittals Schedule. 4. Daily construction reports. 5. Material location reports. 6. Field condition reports. 7. Special reports. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division I Section "Payment Procedures"for submitting the Schedule of Values. 2. Division I Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes. 3. Division I Section "Submittal Procedures"for submitting schedules and reports. 4. Division I Section "Quality Requirements"for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. I. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 2. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. B. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity. C. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. I. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date. 2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity. 3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 - 1 Ej ow El La 46 Gary C6 14 El Gn is Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 7) Site utilization. -A"K 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. 1 1) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Status of correction of deficient items. 14) Field observations. 15) Requests for interpretations (RFls). 16) Status of proposal requests. 17) Pending changes. 18) Status of Change Orders. 19) Pending claims and disputes. 20) Documentation of information for payment requests. 3. Minutes: Architect will record and distribute to Contractor the meeting minutes. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 0 13 10 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310- 5 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. OOW i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility problems. k. Time schedules. I. Weather limitations. M. Manufacturer's written recommendations. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. S. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. U. Installation procedures. V. Coordination with other work. W. Required performance results. X. Protection of adjacent work. Y. Protection of construction and personnel. 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. 5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. I. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination,or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 -4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. I. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner,Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. C. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. f. Procedures for requests for interpretations (RFIs). g. Procedures for testing and inspecting. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. i. Distribution of the Contract Documents. j. Submittal procedures. k. Preparation of Record Documents. 1. Use of the premises and existing buildings. M. Work restrictions. n. Owner's occupancy requirements. o. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. p. Construction waste management and recycling. q. Parking availability. r. Office,work, and storage areas. S. Equipment deliveries and priorities. t. First aid. U. Security. V. Progress cleaning. W. Working hours. 3. Minutes: Architect will record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. I. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. The Contract Documents. b. Options. C. Related requests for interpretations (RFls). d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310- 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. I. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: I. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 9. Project closeout activities. D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy,water,and materials. I. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. I. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times. 1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL A. General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory personnel as required for proper performance of the Work. 1.6 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated. I. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01310- PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to,the following: I. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 2. Project meetings. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division I Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Division I Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 3. Division I Section "Closeout Procedures"for coordinating Contract closeout. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. I. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service,and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical. 5. Infrastructure work may be in process in the public right-of-way, streets or adjacent properties. Contractor shall coordinate access to roads and rights-of-way with Infrastructure Contractor, whose work is being performed under separate contract with another agency. B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 1 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 15. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. I. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. I. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: I. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes,fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. J. Delivery of Construction Schedule: Failure to delivery an updated and accurate construction schedule on a monthly basis will be grounds for non-payment of Applications for Payment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290-4 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: Draft Applications for Payment shall be submitted for review by the Project Team one week prior to the end of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month. The final Application for Payment shall be submitted on the last day of the month. C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets as form for Applications for Payment. D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. I. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. E. Transmittal: Submit 6 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. I. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. F. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. I. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner. G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: I. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Products list. 5. Schedule of unit prices. 6. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 7. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 8. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 9. Copies of building permits. 10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 11. Initial progress report. 12. Report of preconstruction conference. !! 13. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 14. Performance and payment bonds. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290- 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. C. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Submit draft of AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets. 3. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. C. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. d. Dollar value. I) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. Include separate line items under required principal subcontracts for operation and maintenance manuals, punch list activities, Project Record Documents, and demonstration and training in the amount of 5 percent of the Contract Sum. S. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 6. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If specified, include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing. 7. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 8. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in- place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense,at Contractor's option. 9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290- 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01290- PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division I Section "Contract Modification Procedures"for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 2. Division I Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. Cost-loaded CPM Schedule may serve to satisfy requirements for the Schedule of Values. I. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. Submittals Schedule. C. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. 3. Subschedules: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments, provide subschedules showing values correlated with each phase of payment. B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290- 1 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01250 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250 - 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs,with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested,furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6. Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. C. Contractor Change Order Proposal Form: Use CSI forms provided herein. Sample copies are included at end of this Section. 1.5 ALLOWANCES A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, base each Change Order proposal on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of work-in- place. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections,and similar margins. I. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the allowance. 2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of overhead OW costs and other margins claimed. B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the Purchase Order amount or Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit. Submit claims within 21 Insert number days of receipt of the Change Order or Construction Change Directive authorizing work to proceed. Owner will reject claims submitted later than 21 Insert number days after such authorization. 1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on form included at end of Part 3. 1.7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work,for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. I. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250- 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01250- CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division I Section "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after Contract award. 1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, Architect's Supplemental Instruction. 1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. I. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within 10 days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. C. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Architect. CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250- 1 Dec- 16-04 01 : 15P Berkshire Design 413 582 7005 uec i e Li i'f P P . 10 P • ru POST CONSTRUCTION SUBI%TTTT,II.S & VVORK IN BUFFER ZONE: 5_ Upon colrtpletion of the work covered by this Order, the applicant shall submit an as-built plan, sigmit and stamped by a rcgisWred professloltal engineer or land surveyor, together ,,vitli a w-ritterZ request fora Certificate of Compliance. The plan and written request shall specify anyNvays that the completed project differs front the plans referenced in the Order. The as-built plan shall include, a1 a. ininimuru. .ind as applicably to the project: elevations of all pipe inverts and outlets,}pipe sires, matenuls, kutd slopes; all other drainage structures; limits ofcic<kring, �t;rading, and till; all stnuctures, p:tve)itzrnt, and contours witl..in 1 p(! feet of wetland boundaries; all alteratinnti within the wet)aaid resource areas, all wetland replication areas; and ;ill elates of fieldwork. Dec- 16-04 01 : 14P Berkshire Design 413 582 7005 Lis� so u-f i ,"P P _ OIJ P. 9 "ATTACHMENT 11" Is. The owner of the property described in this ureter must advise anv potential buvor of the property that any construction or alteration to said property, including brush cutting or cicarwice, may require approval by the Northampton Conservation Commission. Any instrument conveying any or all of the owners' interest in said property or any portion thereof, shall contain languagL sirnilar to the following.- "This property is subject to the Northampton Wetlands Protection Ordinance and/or Wetlands Protection Act. Any construction or maintenance work performed on this property requires an Order of Conditions, aced/or a Determination of Applicability from the Northampton Conservation Commission. A copy of this Order and associated plans shall remain on site during all construction and?or building activities. The project rnanager and all equipment operators shall he familiar ,+with the approved plans, and shall be ilif'onned of their location on thus ite. This locarion Shall be accessible to all contractors whenever work is occurring on site. 20. All required perrnils must be obtained from the Array Corp of P,ngincers(Srxtion 404, Water Quality Certification), Planning Board,Zoning Board, Department of public Works, or Building, Inspector prior to the start of projeets involving fill within any +vetlarZd resource area; 21. No disposal of soils or other materials shall be allowed within: a I00-year floodplain: 40 feet of the: 100-year floodplain elevation; any wetland; or any area within 100-feet of a wetland, unless such areas are specifically approved by the Conunission, in accordance +ith 310 CTVIR 10.00,and City of Northampton Ordinances - Chnpter 24: 22. All revised plants, referenced within this Order of Conditions, shall be approved by the Conservation Corrimissiolt and itteorpot;rted into this Order by reference and shall Inc follo+vc;d during the course ofconstruction. 23, Onguma conditions that shall not expire Nvith the issuance of a Certificate o(Compliartce areas follows: N/A 24. Prior to the start of any site work, excavation or construction, a pre-construction conference shall he held on the site, bet-ween the contractor conducting the work, the site/project engiiteer, the applicant, and a meniber or agent of the Conservation Commission, in order to ensure that the requirements of this Order arc unde"tnnd by xl I Parties. Prior to the pre-construction meeting, all erosion control devices must be installed. Dec- 16-04 01 : 14P Berkshire Design 413 582 7005 P _ Ot? u�c 1 6 LK A<; Irip P . 8 Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection Bureau of Resource Protection - Wetlands DEP File Number WPA Form 5 - order of Conditions 246-552 Massachusetts Wetlands Protection Act M.G.L. c. 131, §40 And the Northampton Wetlands Protection Ordinance — Chap pter 24 G. Recording Information This Order of Conditions must be recorded in the Registry of Deeds or the Land Court for the district In which the land Is located, within the chain of title of the affected property. In the case of recorded land. the Final Order shall also be noted in the Registry's Grantor Index under the name of the owner of the Tana subject to the Order. In the case of registered land, this Order shall also be noted on the Land Court Certificate of Title of the owner of the land subject to the Order of Conditions. The recording information on Page 7 of this form shall be submitted to the Conservation Commission listed below Northampton Conservabon Commission Conservation Commrssron Detach on dotted line, have stamped by the Registry of Deeds and submit to the Conservation Commission To. Please be advised that the Order of Conditions for the Protect at: Project LOCation DEP file Number Has been recorded at the Registry of deeds of: County Book N3ge for Property Owner and has been noted in the chain of title of the affected property in, Book Page In accordance with the Order of Conditions issued on, nge . ._. — If recorded land, the instrument number identifying th+s transaction Is: Instrument Number -If registered Ind. the document number identifying this transaction is: Ducument Number SignafurC Oi Applicant --- ---- -- Luse- 16-04 01 : 14P Berkshire Design 413 582 7005 P _ O7 Dec 1b Ul 1 e: : /p p. 7 Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection Bureau of Resource Protection -Wetlands DEP File NuMbPi IL WPA Form 5 - Order of Conditions 246-552 Massachusetts Wetlands Protection Act M.G.L. c. 131, §40 And the Northampton Wetlands Protection Ordinance —Chapter 24 E. Issuance (coot.) Notary Acknowledgement Commonwealth of Massachusetts County of Hampshire On this Ninth Da L_ December 2004 Day o Whih Year Before me, the undersigned Notary Pub(ic, personally appeared John Body Name of Document Signer proved to me through satisfactory evidence of identification, which was/were Personal knowledge_ OeSCriwoon of evrdence or Identification to he the person whose name is signed on the preceding or attached document, and acknowledges to me that he/she signed it voluntarily for its stated purpose. As member of Northampton __ cityft-own Conservation Commission re of Notary Pubtic ria McPherson ------- - v b*n 1•. �.Z Printed Name of Notary PuD4c September 4, 2009 Place notary seal and/or any stamp above r-- ie__ stun Expires bale) This Order is issued to the applicant as follows: by hand delivery on Z by certified mail return receipt requested. cr _.. ._.. December 14. 2004 Date F. Appeals The applicant, the owner, any person aggrieved by this Order, any owner of land abutting the land subject to this Order, or any ten residents of the city or town in which such land is located, are hereby notified of their right to request the appropriate DEP Regional Office to issue a Superseding Order of Conditions The request must be made by cwtifiied mail or hand delivery to the Department,with the appropriate filing fee and a completed Appendix E: Request of Departmental Action Fee Transmittal Form, as provided in 310 CMR 10.03(7)within ten business days from the date of issuance of this Order. A copy of the request shall at the same time be sent by certified mail ar hand delivery to the Conservation Commission and to the applicant, if he/she is not the appellanL The request shall state clearly and concisely the objections to the Order which is being appealed and now the Order does not contribute to the protection of the interests identified in the Massachusetts Wetlands Protection Act, (M.G.L. c. 131, §40)and is inconsistent with the wetlands regulations (3 10 CMR 10 00) To the extent that the Order is based on a municipal ardinance or bylaw, and not on the Massachusetts Wetlands Protection Act or regulations, the Department has no appellate jurisdiction. Dec- 16-04 01 = 13P Berkshire Design 413 582 7005 P - Ot Dec 16 04 12: 37p r • - Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection DEP File Number - I Bureau of Resource: Protection -Wetlands f WPB► Form 5 — Order of Conditions 246-552 _ Massachusetts Wetlands Protection Act M.G.L, c. 131, §40 And the Northampton Wetlands Protection Ordinance Chapter 24 _ D. Findings Under Municipal Wetlands Bylaw or Ordinance i. Furthermore, the Northampton hereby finds (check one that applies) Conservation Commission 2 © that the proposed work cannot be conditioned to meet the standards set forth in a municipal ordinance or bylaw specifically: a. Municipal 5rdinance or Bylaw h citaron Wherefore. work on this project may not go forward unless and until a revised Notice of Intent is submitted which provides measures which are adequate to meet these standards, and a final Crder & Conditions is issued. that the following additional conditions are necessary to comply with a municipal ordinance or bylaw: Code of Ordinances N_ortnampion Wetlands Protection Ordinance _ - _Chapter 24 a.iA ,_cipal Ordinance or Bylav+ b Citation The Commission orders that all work shall be performed in accordance with the following conditions and with the Notice of Intent referenced above. To the extent that the following conditions modify or differ from the plans, specifications,or other proposals submitted with the Notice of intent, the conditions shall control. V you treed more The special conditions relating to municipal ordinance or bylaw areas follows. spacs for a4tl,tia>at See"Attachment A" ------ conditions, _— ---- se;ea twx to attach s ext E. issuance This Order is valid for three years, unless otherwise specified as a special condition pursuant to General Conditions#f4, from the date of issuance December 14, 2004 I [laic of issuanrin Please indicate the number of members who will sign this form: This Order must be signed by a majority of the Conservation Commission z.Nurncerot signers The Order must be mailed by certified mail(return receipt requested) or hand delivered to the applicant .4 copy also must be mailed or hand deliver at the same time to the appropriate Department of Environmental Protection Regional ,not filing electronically (see Appendix A), and the property owner, if different from applicant. Signa u s j ��>:ilnrriS r70c- icv. '.iii MilC Dec- 16-04 01 : 13P Berkshire Design 413 582 7005 P . 0'_� uec to uR Ie: abp P � Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection Bureau of Resource Protection - Wetlands DEP File Numner fow WPA Form 5 Order of Conditions 246.552 MassachuS0tt5 Wetlands Protection Act M.G.L. c. 131, §4Q -loom Massachusetts And the Northampton Wetlands Protection Ordinance—Chapter 24 _ C. General Conditions Under Massachusetts Wetlands Protection Act 10. Where the Department of Environmental Protection is requested to issue a Superseding Order, the Conservation Commission shall be a party to all agency proceedings and hearings before DEP 11 Upon completion of the work described herein, the applicant shall submit a Request for Certificate o` Compliance (WPA Form 8A) to the Conservation Commission. 12. The work shall conform to the plans and special conditions referenced in this order. 13. Any change to the plans identified in Condition*12 above shall require the applicant to inquire of the Conservation Commission in writing whether the change is significant enough to require the (ling of a new Notice of Intent. 14. The Agent or members of the Conservation Commission and the Department of Environmental Protection shall have tho right to enter and inspect the area subject to this Order at reasonable hours to evaluate compliance with the conditions stated in this Carder, and may require the submittal of any data deemed necessary by the Conservation Commission or Department for that evaluation 15. This Order of Conditions shall apply to any successor in interest or successor in control of the property subject to this Order and to any contractor or other person performing work conditioned by this Order, 16 Prior to the start of work, and if the project involves work adjacent to a Bordering Vegetated WetlanC the boundary of the wetland in the vicinity of the proposed work area shall be marked by wooden stakes or flagging. Once in place, the wetland boundary markers shall be maintained until a Certificate of Compliance has been issued by the Conservation Commission 17. Alt sedimentation barriers shall be maintained in good repair until all disturbed areas have been fully stabilized with vegetation or other means.At no time shall sediments be deposited in a wetland or water body During construction, the applicant or his/her designee shall inspect the erosion contros on a dally basis and shall remove accumulated sediments as needed. The applicant shall immediately control any erosion problems that occur at the site and shall also immediately notify the Conservation Commission,which reserves the right to require additional erosion and/or damage prevention controls it may deem necessary. Sedimentation barriers shall serve as the limit of work unless another limit of work line has been approved by this Order. Special Conditions: f you need more space for - additionai conditions, _... _..._ _ select box to attach a text document w:..(n•m5 NYC- .�. 1=.,�,� .-nx�., Dec- 16-04 01 : 13P Berkshire Design 413 582 7005 P _ 041 Dec 16 04 12: 36p Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection pEp File Number Bureau of Resource Protection -Wetlands WPA Farm 5 -- Order of Conditions 246-552 ` Massachusetts Wetlands Protection Act M.G.L. c. 131, §40 And the Northampton Wetlands Protection Ordinance •-- Chapter 24 C. General Conditions Under Massachusetts Wetlands Protection Act (only applicable to approved projects) 1 Failure to comply with all conditions stated herein, and with all related statutes and other regulatory measures, shall be deemed cause to revoke or modify this Order. 2 The Order does not grant any property rights or any exclusive privileges, it does not authorize any injury to private property or invasion of private rights. 3 This Order does not relieve the permitlee or any other person of the necessity of complying wrtn all other applicable federal, state, or local statutes, ordinances, bylaws, or regulations. 4 The work authorized hereunder shalt be completed within three years from the date of this Order unless either of the following apply: a. the work is a maintenance dredging project as provided for in the Act. or b. the time for completion has been extended to a specified date more than three years, but less than five years, from the dale of issuanr.P If this Order is intended to be valid for more than three years, the extension date and the special circumstances warranting the extended time period are set forth as a special condition in this Order. 5, This Order may be extended by the issuing authority for one or more periods of up to three years each upon application to the issuing authority sit least 30 days prior to the expiration date of the Order. olow'' 6. Any fill used in connection with this project shall be clean Gil. Any fill shall contain no trash, refuse, rubbish, or debris, including but not limited to lumber, bricks, plaster, wire, lath, paper, cardboard, pipe, tires, ashes, refrigerators, motor vehicles, or parts of any of the foregoing 7 This Order is not final until all administrative appeal periods from this Order have elapsed. or if such an appeal has been taken, until all proceedings before the Department have been completed. 8 No work shall be undertaken until the Order has become final and then has been recorded to the Registry of Deeds or the land Court for the district in which the land is located, within the chain of t tle of the affected property. In the case of recorded land, the Final Order shall also be noted in the Registry's Grantor Index under the name of the owner of the land upon which the proposed work s t� be done, In the case of the registered land, the Final Order shall also be noted on the Land Court Certificate of Title of the owner of the land upon which the proposed work Is done. The recording information shall be submitted to this Conservation Commission on the form at the end of this Order, which form must be stamped by the Registry of Deeds, prior to the commencement of work. 9. A sign shall be displayed at the site not less then two square feet or more than three square feet in size bearing the words, "Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection" [or, WA DEP" "File Number 246-552 al,ertnG ax ,r i 7ltaiC4 P�q� c _ Dec- 16-04 01 : 13P Berkshire Design 413 582 7005 P _ C) , UWC to u-t 14 : ..ibp :3 P• LAMassachusetts Department of Environmental Protection Bureau of Resource Protection - Wetlands DEP File Nurrlber WPA Form 5 - order of Conditions 246-.552 Massachusetts Wetlands Protection Act M_G.L. c. 131, §40 And the Northampton Wetlands Protection Ordinance — Chapter 24 B. Findings (coat.) Resource Area Proposed Permitted Proposed Permitted Alteration Alteration Replacement Replacement s ❑ Bordering Land Subject to Flooding a.square feet b square feet C.square fee; d square fee: Cubic Feet Flood Storage e.cubic feet t.cubic leet g cubicfeet A cub;u feet 7 [] Isolated Land Subject to Flooding a sauare feet u square feet Cubic Feet Flood Storage c cubic feet 8 cubic feet a cub:4 feet f.oub c`gel 1,550 1,sso 8. Q Riverfront area a total sq feet o total SQ.feat Sq ft within 100 it 180 - iso C'square feet d.square teet 1,370 1.370 5q ft between 100-200 ft a square feet f sauare feet Coastal Resource Area Impacts: Check all that apply below. (Fat Approvals Only) a ❑ Designated Port Indicate size under Land Under the Ocean, below Areas 10. ❑ 1 and tlnderthe Ocean a.square teat b square feet C cu.yd dredged d,cuya dradge4a- 11 l_7 Barrier Beaches indicate size under Coastal Beaches andlor Coastal Dunes below 12 Coastal Beaches a.square feat b.scuare feet c. rJy nounshml Cr dv novrisnrr' l3. ❑ Coastal Dunes a.square feet b square feet C.cly coul:snmt d c'y.nourrsnm; 14 [-i Coastal Banks a. linear feet b linear feet is ❑ Rocky Intertidal _ Shores a square feet b .square feet la. ❑ Salt Marshes --- ........ _ - . .. .. — _- a. kquar0 foot b.square feat C.square feet d square feet 17. ❑ Land Under Salt Ponds a.square feet b.Square fael c cu.yd dredged C. cu.yd dodged is. ❑ Land Containing Shellfish a.squafo Mat b.square feet c square feet d square feel. �q J Fish Runs Indicate size under Coastal Banks. inland Bank, Land Under the Ocean, andlor inland Land Under Waterbodles and Waterways, above a cu,yd dredged b cu yd dredged 20 [1 Land Subject to CoaSl81 Stotts Flowage a. square fret b square feef `vaiam5cx -ems •_'e,�e '+,; uec- it_)-04 01 : 12P Berkshire Design 413 582 7005 P _ O2 uec ib u-� is: aaFa P . Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection Bureau of Resource Protection -Wetlands DEP f:-+le Number WPA Form 5 - Order of Conditions 246_-5.52 j Massachusetts Wetlands Protection Act M.G.L. c. 131, §40 And the Northampton Wetlands Protection Ordinance_ — Chapter 24 B. Findings t. Findings pursuant to the Massachusetts Wetlands Protection Act rollowing the review of the above-referenced Notice of Intent and based on the information prcv cec in this application and presenied at the public hearing, this Commission finds that the areas in which work is proposed is significant to the following interests of the Wetlands Protection Act. Check all thar, apply' a Public Water Supply b Land Containing Shellfish c ❑ Prevention of Pollution (j. Private Water Supply I e. Fisheries IZ Protection of Wildlife ® Habitat g � Groundwater Supply h ® Storm Damage Prevention i. ® Flood Control 2 This Commission hereby finds the project, as proposed,is: (check one of the following boxes) Approved subject to: ® the following conditions which are necessary in accordance with the performance standards set forh in the wetlands regulations. This Commission orders that all work shall be performed in accordance with the Notice of Intent referenced above, the following General Conditions, and any other special conditions attached to this Order. To the extent that the following conditions modify or differ from the plans, specifications, or other proposals submitted with the Notice of Intent, these conditions shall control Denied because: n the proposed work cannot be conditioned to meet the performance standards sett fcfth in the•.vetlard regulations. Therefore. work on this project may not go forward unless and until a new Notice of intent is submitted which provides measures which are adequate to protect these interests, and a final Order cf Conditions is issued. A description of the performance standards which the proposed work cannot meet is attached to this Order. ❑ the information submitted by the applicant is not sufficient to describe the site, the work, or the effect of the work on the interests identified in the Wetlands Protection Act Therefore, work on this project mar not go forward unless and until a revised Notice of Intent is submitted which provides sufficient information and includes measures which are adequate to protect the Act's interests, and a final Order of Conditions is issued, A description of the specific Information which is lacking and why it is necessary is attached to this Order as per 310 CMR 10.05(6)(c). Inland Resource Area Impacts: Check all that appiy below. (f=or Approvals Only) Resource Area Proposed Permitted Proposed Permittec Alteration Alteration Replacement Replacement C dank a linear reet b,linear feet c wear fret U.linear feet a ❑ Bordering vegetated Wetland a square feet b.square feet c. square feet I souafe t.ei. 5 Land Under a. syudru!rat t, vyvara tae+^ C.square feet d square tea Waterbodies and Waiciways - --- e cu.yd dredged f,cu yd dredged Dec- 16-04 01 : 12P Berkshire Dcesign 413 582 7005 P . 01 ue_c: to u-t 1C : JZ3P P. 1 �} Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection r`-•-- I bEP File Number. Bureau of Resource Protection -Wetlands WPA Form 5 -- order of Conditions 246-552 Massachusetts Wetlands Protection Act M.G.L. c. 131, §40 And the Northampton Wetlands Protection Ordinance — Chapter 24 _ A. General Information Important: Northampton Conservation Commission rom. _... _....____.. ... Villen filling F t Conservation Commission ottt (oilns on the Computer, 2 This issuance is for(check one); Order of Conditions ❑ Arnendecl Order of Conditions uye only the tab key to 3 To Applicant: move your cursor- do not Patricia Belden Preservation of Affordable Housing, Inc - use the return a. First Name b.Last Name C.Company key 40 Court Street, Suite 650 - G.Mailing Address ti Boston _ MA — 02108 e CitylTown f.State g.Zip Code A. Property Owner(if different from applicant): Mass Northampton Ltd. Partnership a First Name b. Last Name c Compariy 380 Union Street#300 d Mailing Address West Springfield _-- MA ...__.. ....__._--_–� 41089 e CityfTown t State g. Zip Code s Project t_ocatiom 491 Bridge Road Northam inn a.Street Address b Cityfrown 17D _... 12_ .. .. _. _ c..Assessors Map/Pint Number d Parcci/Lot Number Latitude and Longitude, it known (note, t:lectronic filers will click for GIS locator); P. Latitude t. Longitude 6 property recorded at the Registry of Deeds for(attach additional information if more than one parcel; Ham Satire a.County b.Certificate(if registered land) 16.82; 1697 .174; 254 . .. ... c.Book d. Page... ._ - _..-- -------------- Dates November 18, 2004 December 9, 2604 December 14, 2004 a.Date Nome.of Intent Fi�ed b.Data Public Hewing CIosed c.Date of Issuance a. Final Approved Plans and Other Documents(attach additional plan or document references as needed) Country Lane Eslates; Bridge Road- Northampton, Massachusetts; Notice of Intent, sheets NOI i-5 a Plan Title The_Berkshire Design proupllnc b. TO—pared By c Signed and Stamped by December 9,_2004 __ various d h nal Revis an Date rs scale f Additional Pian or Docurnent Tine 9 Date 9 Total WPA Fee Raid: ll $915_00 _Y — $445.00 S470 00 + loyal fee a. Totat Fee Paid b.State Fee Paid c.Cityirown Fee Fa ?ayG i d n •w-1 m1 m5.d_t 12(14,04 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. ew SECTION 01 140—WORK RESTRICTIONS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I. Order of Conditions from Northampton Conservation Commission. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division I Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities. 2. Division I Section "Summary" for limitations on site access, working hours and Owner occupancy of site and buildings. 1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. All construction activities shall be in conformance with the Order of Conditions immediately following this page.. PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 140 - 1 F* tion 135 worked on as of 6/15/04 Unit .eplace lavatories with vanity/sink combo 153 locations Scattered Note 1. Paint bathroom where vanity/sink replaced 153 locations Scattered Repair existing ceramic file bathroom floors 153 locations Scattered Replace bathroom accessories 15riunnits Scattered Kitchen Pack Replace kitchen cabinets 10Scattered 40%of 252 total units Replace kitchen counters 10Scattered 40%of 252 total units Remove existing VAT and replace with new sheet 10Scattered 40%of 252 total units vinyl Replace disposal units 10Scattered 40%of 252 total units Repla ce range hood 100 units Scattered 40%of 252 total units Paint kitchens where cabinets re laced 100 units Scattered 40%of 252 total units MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING Description Qw Unit Replace toilets with low flush toilets 164 toilets 88 full bath and 36 half bath replaced during unit renovations Replace bathroom exhaust fans 0 locations Replace DHW heater 3 locations Scattered Replace existing boilers with sealed combustion 3 locations Scattered boilers Provide new fresh air venting at lower level units 76 locations rovide transfer grilles at existing laundry rooms 19 locations ,n apartment buildings ELECTRICAL Description QW Unit New fire alarm and smoke detector system at I location Community Building Replace intercom panels 126 locations Assumes 50%already completed Provide new GFCI outlets at kitchens being 100 locations renovated Provide new GFCI outlets at bathrooms being 152 locations renovated Provide new CO/ALR switches and receptacles at 3 units new BF units Provide arc fault protection at new BF units 3 units Provide carbon monoxide detectors tied into 19 locations Apartment buildings existing fire alarm system outside all apartment building boiler rooms UNIT ACCESSIBILITY Description Qty Unit Provide BF units 5 units 2311,2314,2911,6R 14 units 2311 and 2314 partially &one 3-bedroom unit completed,unit 2913 already TBD has a grade level door. -fearing and visually impaired accessibility 5 units 2% upgrades Page 3 of 3 IBUILDING EXTERIORS Description Quantity Unit Location Notes dd new gutters and downspouts 100% Bidgs. I,2, 12-16 and 10 Single Apartment Buildings,5 22-29 15 buildings Townhouses and the Community Building Remove bottom 12"of rotted siding at junction 100% Bidgs. I,2, 12-16 and 10 Single Apartment Buildings,5 with concrete foundation 22-28 15 buildings Townhouses and the Community Building Cover original siding with new vinyl siding. 100% Bidgs. 1,2, 12-16 and 10 Single Apartment Buildings,5 22-29 15 buildings Townhouses and the Community Building Remove bottom 12"of existing vinyl siding, 100% Bidgs,3-11 and 17-21 remove existing wood sheathing and replace with 14 buildings new pressure treated. Replace existing vinyl siding. New vinyl coated canvas awnings at front building 19 locations All apartment buildings entries Provide diverters at roofs above balconies 76 locations All apartment buildings Remove existing metal windows and replace with 252 units Throughout 252 dwelling units new vinyl windows. Remove and reinstall existing vertical blinds. Remove existing wood sills and replace with new 117 units Complete during window solid surface material. replacement Repair headers above wide windows 24 total units Review condition in field Replace sliding glass doors with new vinyl units 24 total units Replace with swinging door and fixed glazed panel Replace concrete pads at townhouse units 6 pads Scattered Assumes 25% I' exterior common entry doors and frames 38 doors All apartment buildings Replace storm doors at townhouse units 24 doors Scattered Assumes 50% Repair existing balconies at flats 25 baIconies Bidgs.23-28 Rot at balcony to unit 6823 Cut weepholes in base of balconies at already 39 locations Bidgs,3-11 and 17-21 sided buildings 14 buildings COMMON AREAS Description Unit Renovations to Community Room for BF access, I location Community building including lift,BF kitchenette,deck and stair repairs, mailbox demolition,miscellaneous sidewalk adjustments New mailbox kiosk 252 boxes Community building Add bulletin boards Renovations to existing restrooms for BF 4 locations Community building accessibility and pool Renovations to existing office area for BF I location Community building Replacement of one door only accessibility New carpeting at common hallways 13 single 3 double buildings 1-7,20,21,23-29 New painting at common hallways 13 single 3 double buildings 1-7,20,21,23-29 Include staining of stair rails and balusters,painting unit entry doors Page 2 of 3 SCOPE OF WORK SUMMARY COUNTRY LANE ESTATES Northampton,MA 6-Dec-04 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. SITE WORK Description Quantity Unit Location Notes Demolition and Site Preparation Remove bit conc.curb 12,000 LF Remove speed humps 8 EA Remove bit.conc.walks(1200x4) 533 SY Scarify 3"road pavement 11,862 SY Scarify 3"parking lot pavement 12,114 SY Sawcut pavement at tennis court 120 LF Remove bit.conc.tennis court paving&base 733 SY Remove tennis court fence 230 LF Remove playground equipment 7 EA Remove bench 3 EA Remove trash from woodlands I LS Erosion control barrier 2,800 LF Traffic control I LS Paving&Curbing New bit conc.curb 11,900 LF New bit conc.road finish course A320 TON New bit conc.parking finish course TON ,JLNew bit conc.walk replacement(1200x4) TON 'Jew bit conc.speed table EA New parking stall striping EA New handicap symbol markings 14 EA New crosswalk painting 18 EA New conc.steps,5'widex5 risers 6 EA New handrail at steps 40 LF Excavate&grade for new walks 1,200 CY New bit conc.walk w/gravel base(300x4) 133 SY Drainage structure at new bldg.entries 6 EA Drain piping-8"pvc 300 LF Catch basin at parking lot 2 EA Drain piping-12"cpp 40 LF Reseal basketball court(3 coats) 667 SY New conc.dumpster pad 7 total(16'x8') 100 SY New dumpster enclosure A I I EA New dumpster enclosure B 2 EA Playground&Site Improvements Excavate for new playground surfacing(12') 352 CY New woodcarpet surfacing(12"deep) 1,055 SY New large playground structure I New small playground structure 2 EA New swingset I EA Wood edging 500 LF New benches at bus stop 9 EA New benches at playgrounds 8 EA `"Jew wood rail bldg.29 walk 70 LF New sin e 2 EA Page 1 of 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01 1 12- MATRIX OF WORK ITEMS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 WORK MATRIX A. The intent of the work matrix is to provide an overall listing of the major elements of work and the intended quantities. The matrix does not list every item in detail that is included in the documents. B. Include in base bid price the quantities and items listed in the work matrix, as further described in the drawings and technical specifications. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) MATRIX OF WORK ITEMS 01 1 12- 1 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3. Hours for Utility Shutdowns: Between 10 am and 4 pm only. B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: I. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission. 1.9 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 16-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system. I. Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and titles to help cross- referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete because all available Section numbers are not used. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of Sections in the Contract Documents. 2. Division I: Sections in Division I govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: I. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted. a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 1.10 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION SUMMARY 01 100- 3 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1.5 WORK PHASES A. The Work shall be conducted in a rolling series of phases to be determined by the Owner. B. Before commencing Work of each phase, submit a schedule showing the sequence, commencement and completion dates,and move-out and -in dates of Owner's personnel for all phases of the Work. 1.6 USE OF PREMISES A. General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including use of Project site, during construction period. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. B. General: Contractor shall have limited use of premises for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits. C. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. I. Limits: Confine constructions operations to areas indicated. 2. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of Project site and use by the public. 3. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances. '" b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. D. Use of Existing Buildings: Maintain existing buildings in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect buildings and its occupants during construction period. 1.7 OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and existing buildings during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits, unless otherwise indicated. I. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations. 1.8 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. On-Site Work Hours: Work shall be generally performed inside the existing buildings during normal business working hours of 8 a.m. to 5 p.m., Monday through Friday, except otherwise indicated. I. Weekend Hours: None. 2. Early Morning Hours: None. SUMMARY 01100- 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01 100- SUMMARY PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Work covered by the Contract Documents. 2. Type of the Contract. 3. Work phases. 4. Use of premises. 5. Owner's occupancy requirements. 6. Work restrictions. 7. Specification formats and conventions. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division I Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities. 1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Project Identification: Renovations to Country Lane Estates. I. Project Location: Bridge Road, Northampton, MA B. Owner: Meadowbrook Preservation Associates, Limited Partnership I. Owner's Representative: Patricia Belden and Laura Majarrez. C. Architect: Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. D. Contractor: Keith Construction has been engaged as Contractor for this Project. E. The Work consists of the following: I. The Work includes items as described in Section 01 1 12 Matrix of Work Items. 1.4 TYPE OF CONTRACT A. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. SUMMARY 01100- 1 12/15/04 WED 11:36 FAX 6172616661 HOUSING INV. 012 efforts to obtain such consents and approvals from its Lender in due course and reasonably promptly to avoid any material delay or expense in the performance of any activity by the Contractor. if a Lender payment is not made because the Owner did not submit the paperwork in a timely manner, the Owner will be responsible for payment oPthe invoice_ O -12- 12/15/04 WED 11:35 FAX 6172616661 HOUSING INV. 2011 agreements and conditions, including, but not limited to,those concerning equal employment opportunities, minority and women's business utilization, local job preferences, OSHA and regulations thereunder,the Fair Labor Standards Act, the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act,the Massachusetts Right-to-Know Law, and any agreements made by the Owner with or for the benefit of, or conditions imposed by, governmental agencies_ The Contractor agrees that, in performing the Work, he shall comply with all of the obligations and requirements of all laws, ordinances,regulations,permits and agreements entered into by the Owner applicable to the Work. 15_2 Without limiting the generality of the foregoing,the Contractor shall comply and require its Subcontracts to enter and comply with the Minority Participation Requirement required by MHEF and stated below: In connection with the Work to be performed, the Contractor shall cause not less than 10%of the costs for such Work to be paid to MBEs and shall cause not less than l0'% of the worker hours utilized in connection with Stich to be funZished by minority workers. The term"MBE"means a minority business enterprise as defined by the Massachusetts State Office of Minority and Women's Business Assistance. The Contractor shall incorporate into all subcontracts any specific requirements of which Owner has made: Contractor aware. AR'T'ICLE 16--LENDER'S RICH.TS 16.1 The Contractor expressly acknowledges and agrees that the Owner shall execute an assignment of its rights under this Agreement to the Lender(the"Assignment', as required by the Lender, in connection with the Owner's financing of the Project, and the Contractor consents to such Assignment provided that, in the event the Lender exercises its rights in accordance with the terns of the Assignment,the Lender will assume those obligations of the Owner under this Agreement which accrue after the date of such exercise by the Lender. 16.2 The Contractor agrees that notwithstanding a default by the Owner under the provisions of the Contract Documents which would give the Contractor the right to terminate this Agreement,the Contractor will continue to perform his obligations hereunder(on the same terms and conditions as are set forth herein) for the benefit of the Lender,provided that the Lender make provisions to pay approved amount due to the Contract in accordance with the Lender's reasonable requisition timetable. Lender shall agree in writing to perform all obligations of the Owner hereunder accruing from and after the date that the Lender exercises its rights in accordance with the Assignment to the Owner's rights and obligations hereunder. 16.4 The Contractor understands that whenever the consent or approval of the Owner is required by any provision of the Contract Documents as a condition to performance of any activity by the Contractor, the Owner may consider it necessary or desirable first to obtain consent or approval from its Lender; accordingly, in all such instances the requirement for consent or approval of the Owner shall be deemed to mean consent or approval of the Owner and Lender. The Owner agrees to use its best -i 1- 12/15/04 WED 11:35 FAX 6172616661 HOUSING INV. 010 EXCLUSIONS: This insurance does not cover any tools owned by mechanics, any tools, equipment, scaffolding, staging,towers,and forms owned or rented by the Contractor, Subcontractors, or sub-subcontractors the capital value of which is not included in the cost of Work, or any cook shanties, bunk houses or other structures erected for housing the workmen. 11.4.2 The Owne r, the Contractor, and Subcontractors are to be named as insured as their interests may appear and loss, if any, is to be made adjustable with and payable to the Owner for all the insurers. Certificates of such insurance shall be Fled with the. Contractor if they so request. 11.4.3 The Owlze r and Contractor waive all rights against each other 1'or damages caused by :Fire or other perils to the extent covered and paid by insurance provided under this Paragraph 11.4, except such rights as each may have against the other as trustee of the proceeds of such insurance in case of loss. The Contractor shall require similar waivers by all subcontractors. The policies shall be endorsed to include such waivers of subrogation. 11.4.4 The Contractor shall c arry such insurance, as it may deem advisable to protect its own interests. 11.4.5 Nothing in this,hg reement shall be construed as calling for the name of the Contractor or any Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor as loss payee on Owner's insurance and no draft or other instrument in payment of any loss shall name the Contractor, subcontractor or sub-subcontractor as joint payees thereof. In the event the insurance proceeds are paid to the Owner's lender(,) on behalf of Owner and are not made available for reconstruction,the Owner shall promptly notify the Contractor of such fact, and such notification shall be treated as a termination in accordance with the provisions of Article 14. 11.4.6 The Contractor;;hall require each of its Subcontractors to procure and maintain during the life of its subcontract all the insurance reasonably required by the Owner or Owner's lender and shall not allow its Subcontractors to begin work until the insurance has been so obtained and certificates of insurance approved. The Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to provide a 30-day written notice to the Contractor of cancellation or material change to any of the insurance coverages. 11.4.7 The Contractor:ihal l be an additional insured on each policy of insurance purchased by tht.Owner pursuant to this paragraph 11.4. ARTICLE 15 EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY/NON-LIISCRIMINATION /AFFIRMATIVE ACTION 15.1. The Work to be performed by the Contractor under this Agreement is for a Project in which financial assistance is being provided, in part, by public authorities. Without limiting the Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents to comply with applicable laws, the Contractor specifically recognizes and agrees that the 00b. performance of the Work and the construction of the Project are or may be subject to, and that the Contractor is familiar with, certain legal restrictions,requirements, -10- 12/15/04 WED 11:04 FAX 6172616661 HOUSING INV. 10 009 .3 Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than $500,000.00 for any person and 51,000,000.00 for any one accident for bodily injury including death and$500,000.00 for property damage covering: (a) All owned and leased vehicles. (b) Hired cars and tricks. (c) All other non-owned vehicles. Delete subparagraph 11.1.2, and add the following: 11.1.2 All insurance r equired of the Contractor shall be in form and written writh companies acceptable to the Owner. All insurance shall be written on an occurrence basis unless the Owner approves in writing coverage on a claims- made basis. Coverage,whether written on an occurrence or claims-made basis, shall be maintained without interruption.from date of commencement of the Work until date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment. Certificates of Insurance shall be issued to Owner and delivered to the Owner c/o Preservation of Affordable housing, 40 Court Street, Suite 650,Boston, IMA 02108. Certificates shalt be delivered prior to commencement of Work by the Contractor under the Contract. Such certificates shall show any special coverage or provisions required by the above Subparagraph 11.1.1 and shall provide for 30 days prior written notice to the Owner of cancellation or material change to any of the insurance coverage. The Owner, _WMEF, Fleet Bank,BankNorth and the Massachusetts.Mousing Partnership shall be added as Additional, Insurers on all policies. Paragraph 11.3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE Delete Paragraph 11.3 Paragraph 11.4 PROPERTY INSURANCE Delete Paragraph 11.4(excluding paragraphs 11.4.1..1, 11.4.1-4, 11,43, 11.4.5, 11.4.6, 11.4.8, and insert the following: Paragraph 11.4 PROPERTY INSURANCE 11.4.1 The Owne r shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the entire Work-at the Site in the amount it deems reasonably necessary, but in no event less than Contract Sum,plus all subsequent modifications thereto. This insurance shall cover the Work as installed and materials intended for installation which have been delivered to, unloaded, and stored securely(and in accordance with the Owner's written instructions) on the Site. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance covering all materials not yet installed whether in transit and not stored securely on the Site. -9- 12/15/04 WED 11:34 FAX 6172616661 HOUSING INV. Zoos Paragraph 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE Delete Paragraph 11.1 and substitute the following: Paragraph 11.1 - CONTRACTOR'S LIABILI'T'Y INSURANCE 11,1A The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies acceptable to the Owner, O-kvner's lenders and Owner's equity investors and lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims which may arise out of or rlt:sult from the Contractor's operations under the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally liable,whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such insurance shall include, at a minimUun, the following: 1 Worker's Compensation Insurance with statutory li.knits in accordance with applicable state laws(including Employer's Liability Insurance with limits totaling not less than$100,000.00), .2 Comprehensive General Liability Insurance, alone or in combination with Umbrella Liability Insurance,with limits totaling not less than. $5,000,000.00. The foregoing limit is to be maintained continuously during the life of the Contract, except as provided below. The foregoing; limit applies to the activities of the Contractor and to the activities of all Subcontractors_ The Comprehensive General Liability Insurance shall include,but not necessarily be limited to,coverage for: (a) Products liability. (b) Products and completed operations liability (this coverage to bi.maintained for as long as such insurance is available). (c) Independent contractors, covering operations of any and all subcontractors. (d) Blanket contractual liability, including the Contractor's obligations to the Owner and the Architect and their agents and employees as provided in Paragraph 3.18 of the General Conditions of the Contract. (e) Property damage liability including X(excavation), C (collapse) and U (underground); and coverage for explosion, collapse,undermi_ning and damage to underground utilities and property when the Project involves such risk exposures. (f) Personal injury liability. (g) Elevator liability when elevators are involved in the Project. (h) Owner's and Contractor's protective coverage. -3- 12/15/04 WED 11:34 FAX 6172616661 HOUSING INV. 10007 OW .7 all practical orientation and operating instructions for all materials, systems, and equipment have been satisfactorily completed and that all required training of Owner's personnel have been completed. .8 a satis:Cactory report by the Contractor which is approved by the Architect that all mechanical systems have been and are property balanced. .9 a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner. .10 consent of surety, if required, to final payment. .11 delivery of all spare parts required to be submitted pursuant to the Contract Documents, If the final documentation submitted by the Contractor is not deemed complete by the Owner or Owner's lender, or if the Owner or Owner's lenders deems the Work incomplete in any respect, the Contractor shall promptly complete any such Work and shall promptly resubmit the final documentation. Add the.following new paragraph 9.10.2.12 Final payment shall not be delay due to the absence of Subcontractor's lien waivers if the M.O.L. e. 254 §12 bond furnished by the Contractor is on record in the Registry of Deeds. ARTICLE 10 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY Paragraph 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS Add Subparagraph 1.0.11: 10,1.2 The Contractor acknowledges that the Owner has delivered to the Contractor a copy of the report entitled"Phase I Environmental Site Assessment". In the event the Contractor encounters on the site material reasonably believed to be asbestos,polychlorinated biphenyl. (PCB),pollutants,hazardous materials, or contaminants other than as previously disclosed in the Phase.I Report,the Contractor shall immediately stop Work in the area affected and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing. If in fact the material is asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) and has not been rendered harmless,the Work in the affected area shall not thereafter be resumed except by written agreement of the Owner and Contractor. If the material is other than.asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), the Work in the affected area shall be resumed upon direction by the Architect. look ARTICLE 11 - INSURANCE AND BONDS _7. 12/15/04 'RED 11:33 FAX 6172616661 HOUSING INV. [a 006 OOW Add the following new Subpaa-agraphs 5.3.4 and 3.3.5: 8.3.4 No claim for delay shall be allowed on account of failure of the Architect to furnish Drawings, Specifications or instructions or to return Shop Drawings or Samples until 5 days after receipt by the Architect of for such instructions, Drawings, or Samples. 8.15 If the Owner is unable to secure access to any residential unit at the time required by the Schedule, or at such other time to which the Contractor agrees, such unit(s) shall be deleted from the Work hereunder. ARTICLE 9-PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION Paragraph 1).10 FINAT., COMPLETION AND FINAL.PAYMENT Add the following at the end of Subparagraph 9.10.1: The Architect shall not issue a final Certificate for Payment until the Owner has received all applicable Certificates of Use and Occupancy covering the Project;provided,however,that issuance of the Certificate for Payment shall not be affected where issuance of Certificates of Use and Occupancy have been delayed through no fault of the Contractor. Delete Subparagraph 9.10.2 and insert the following: 9.10.2 Prior to and as a conditio n precedent to Final Completion, all of the following matters shall have been resolved and documents and items shall have been received and approved in writing by the Owner: I all final permits, approvals (including, without limitation,the approval of the Owner's insurance company, if required), certificates, affidavits and authorizations as required by Subparagraph 13.5.4, unless those permits, approvals, certificates, affidavits and authorizations are not received by the Owner solely for reasons as to which the Contractor has no responsibility. .2 formally prepared"as built"drawings,records and related data including al field notes of all the Work(such drawings shall be xerox on vellum drawings)all in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. .3 all operating and maintenance manuals as required by the Contract Documents,parts lists, the final version of the Project Directory, and repair source lists. .4 all guarantees and warranties to which the Owner is entitled hereunder. .5 acknowledgement of prior payments and waivers of lien.(to the extent permitted by law) from all Subcontractors and the Contract. .6 the Archit:ect's certificate certifying that the Work is complete. -6- 12/15/04 WED 11:33 FAX 6172616661 HOUSING INV. [j005 steps which the Contractor proposes to take to remedy such situation, and provide the Owner, in a forni acceptable to the Owner,a detailed mini- schedule Setting, forth the actions to be taken by the Contractor. If the Contractor disputes such action by the Owner, it shall.have no right whatsoever to refuse to accelerate the Work,but his only recourse shall be to make a Claim as provided herein. 8.2.7 if two Applications fir Payment, as certified by the Architect, indicate that the actual Work completed is less than 90%of the values estimated in the Progress Schedule to be completed by the respective dates,the Owner may at the Owner's option,treat the Contractor's delinquency as a default justifying the action permitted under Paragraph 14.2. 8.2.10 Nothing he rein shall limit the Owner's right to liquidated or other damages for delays by the Contractor or to any other remedy which the Owner may possess under other provisions of the Contract Documents or by law. 8.2.11 Contractor ackno wtedges that Substantial Completion and full invoicing of the Work in order to comply with the applicable requirements of Section 42 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, is of critical importance to the Owner. In order to insure completion of the Work in a timely way, Contractor agrees to achieve Substantial Completion of the Work in full and in accordance with the Contract Documents by the applicable Substantial Completion Date specified in Subparagraph 9.8.4. below, and to submit all requisitions covering the Work performed to such date on or before December 31,2005. Paragraph 83 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME Delete Subparagraph 8.3.1 and insert the following: 8.3.1 Notwithstanding any other provision to the contrary herein.,no extension of time shall be granted because of weather conditions except in the event of hurricane, earthquake, or other similar, unanticipated catastrophic condition. Such conditions shall be wholly at the risk of the Contractor. Any additional cost of operations or conditions shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall use its best efforts to avoid all labor conflicts, especially those between union and nonunion employees. All direct and consequential losses due to labor disputes except those of a national, state, or city wide nature and not directed at Contractor or its Subcontractors shall be borne by the Contractor_ Delete Subparagraph 8.3.3 and insert the following: 8.13 Should the Contractor be delayed in the performance of its Work, it shall immediately notify the Owner and/or the Architect of the estimated extent of the delay and the cost, if any, which may be incurred as a result of the delay. If the Contractor fails to so notify the Owner and/or the Architect, it shall be barred from asserting any claim for compensation, expense or&-images with respect to such delay. -5- 12/15/04 SPED 11:32 FAI 6172616661 HOUSING INV. Z004 standards set forth in Article 4.1 of the Agr I01)." eement between Owner and Contractor(AIA Paragraph 7.7 PRIOR APPROVAL REQUIRED FOR EXTRA COMPENSATION 7.7.1 Any changes undertaken without the Architect's or the Owner's authorization will not be recognized as a basis for a clain1 for extra cost at a later date. If the Contractor claims that any instructions or orders, whether oral,written, by drawings, or otherwise, involve extra cost or time, and such instructions or orders are not accompanied by a written acknowledgment by the Owner or the Architect that extra payment will be made or time extended, they shall promptly so notify the Architect in writing and should not proceed with the Work until they have received a further written order to proceed, except in cases of emergency affecting life or property. No claim for extra cost or time on account of such instructions shall be valid unless the Contractor has so notified the Architect, before proceeding, that they claim extra cost and time and has received the further written order to proceed. ARTICLE 8—TIME Paragraph 8.1 DEFINITIONS In "Subparagraph 8.1.3 replace the words"certified by the Architect in accordance with" with "as established in" Paragraph I3.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION Add new Subparagraphs 8.2.4 through 8.2.11 as follows: 8.2.4 The Contractor shall submit monthly to the Owner and the Architect status reports comparing the planned and actual costs and schedules. 8.2.5 Within.2 weeks after execution of this Contract,the Contractor shall submit to the Architect and the Owner a Progress Schedule in accordance with.the requirements of Subparagraph 3.10.1: 8.2.6 The Contractor shall at all times provide adequate rates of progress for the various parts of the Work so as to properly advance the Work and so that the Project, in the opinion of the Architect and the Owner, at all times meets the requirements of the Progress Schedule. Whenever critical items of construction fall behind the planned schedule of construction as shown on the Progress Schedule, or when items which were not critical become critical, the Owner and the Architect shall be notified by the Contractor and advised of action being taken to return the Project to its original schedule and such action shall be indicated on the Progress Schedule which shall then be re- issued by the Contractor. In view of the critical nature of the time of completion of the Work, if the Owner determines that the Project Schedule has been delayed.or is in jeopardy of not being met,the Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to take whatever steps are necessary to accelerate the Work or otherwise remedy such situation. In such event,the Contractor shall, within three (3)days after the Owner's request to take such action,notify the Owner and the Architect in writing,and implement the -4- 12/15/04 WED 11:32 FAX 6172616661 HOUSING INV. [a 003 owk allowing adequate time for each operation(including adequate time for submission and review of submittals), and leading to a reasonable certainty of Substantial Completion by the date established in the Agreement. The Progress Schedule will be reviewed by the Architect for conzplimice with the requirements of the Contract Documents and wi I I be accepted by the Architect or returned to the Contractor for revisions and re-submittal. The Progress Schedule shall be related to the entire Project and shall contain the following: .1 The proposed date for the start and completion of each phase of the Work, specifying entry and exit dates for the interior work of each unit. .2 The proposed cash flow schedule based on anticipated monthly expenditures throughout the duration of construction. .3 The proposed date of award:for each sub-contracted item of Work. .4 The proposed dates for the start and completion of each sub-division of Work. _5 The delivery dates of major items of equipment and materials. .6 Any other items of importance to the overall completion of the Project. ARTICLE 7- CHANGES IN THE WORK Paragraph '7.1 CHANGES Adel the following at the end of Subparagraph 7.1.2: 1 Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the Contract Documents, there shall be no Change Orders except with written approval of the Lenders and Owner .2 Except upon the specific written consent of Owner, no Change Order covering the Work(as defined in the Owner-Contractor Agreement) shall be accepted by the Owner unless the Work it covers is substantially completed prior to December 31,2003. .3 Deduct change orders for deletion of elevator and site work from contract will rebate total cost of line item to owner, including the modification of overhead,profit and general conditions line items. In the :first sentence of Subparagraph 7.3.6 strike the words"a reasonable amount of overhead and profit"and substitute: "14%for overhead, general conditions and profits for work;performed by the Contractor;for work performed by the Subcontractor,the Subcontractor will receive 14%of the cost of work for overhead, general conditions, and profits, and the Contractor will receive 7% of the cost of work for overhead, general conditions and profits;provided,however, in no event will such amounts exceed the HUD 12/15/04 WED 11:32 FAX 6172616661 HOUSING INV. 2002 the scope of work or materials specified to meet building code requirements will be treated as a change order. 1.2.3 The Mechanical, EIectrical and Fire.Protection Drawings are diagrammatic only and are not intended to show the alignment physical locations or configurations of such Work. Such Work shall be installed without additional cost to the Owlier without affecting the architectural, engineering and structural integrity and limitations of the Work or the architectural, engineering and structural integrity and limitations of and the existing buildings (the"Buildings") Iocated on the Site, and so as to avoid conflicts, provide clear access to all control points, clear all obstructions, permit proper clearances for the Work of other trades,and present an orderly appearance where exposed. The Contractor is not responsible for work that could not be reasonably inferred from the contract documents. 1.2.9 Exact locations of fixtures and outlets shall be obtained from toe Architect before the Work is roughed in; Work installed without such information from the Architect shall be relocated at the Contractor's expense, unless otherwise agreed. The Ar,-.hiteet will provide such direction, if requested in writing by the Contractor,within five days of receipt of each request. ARTICLE 3- CONTRACTOR Paragraph 30 SUPERINTENDENT Delete the first sentence of Subparagraph 3.9.1, and insert the following: 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent who shall be approved by the Owner and Owner shall have the right to dismiss from the Project any superintendent for cause and to replace such superintendent with a superintendent satisfactory to Owner. The Contractor shall not replace the superintendent without the consent of the Owner except with another superintendent satisfactory to Owner in all respects. The superintendent shall be in attendance at the Project Site full time during the progress of the Work until the date of Substantial Completion. After Substantial Completion, the superintendent shall be present at the site at such times as may be necessary for the expeditious completion of the Work. Paragraph 3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES Delete Subparagraph 3.10.1 and insert the following: 3.10.1 The Contractor, immedia tely after being awarded the Contract, shall meet with the Owner and the Architect to discuss the required progress schedule and shall then prepare and submit within two weeks for the Architect's and Owner's approval, an estimated Progress Schedule for the Work. '['he Progress Schedule shall be based on an orderly progression of the Work, -2. 12/15/04 WED 11:31 FAX 6172616661 EOUSING INS'. �001 A ME,ADOWBROOK PRESERVATION ASSOCIATES LP SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS The following provisions supplement., amend,modify,delete and/or add to the GE:NERAT. CON.DITI:ONS of this Agreement Between Owner and Contractor("General Conditions of the Contract for Construction")ATA Document A201-1997, 1997 Edition, Electronic Format as set forth in the following provisions, which constitute the Supplementary General. Conditions of this Contract. All portions of the General Conditions not specifically amended, supplemented, modified, voided, deleted or superseded by any of the following previsions Shall remair1 in full effect. ARTICLE I -GENERAL PROVISIONS Paragraph 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS Paragraph 1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENT Add the following new Subparagraphs 1.2.4 through 1.2.11: 1.2.4 1 n the event of conflicts or discrepancies among the Contract Documents,the Documents shall be interpreted on the basis of the following priorities: First Amendment to the Contract—with later date having greater priority Second Owner-Contractor Agreement Third Supplementary General Conditions Fourth General Conditions Fifth Addenda to Specifications and Drawings,with later date having greater priority Sixth Specifications and Drawings Among Drawings large-scale details shall take precedence over small-scale details and figured dimension shall control over Drawings not dimensioned. Should the Drawings or the Specifications disagree in themselves or with each other, the Contractor shall provide the better quality or greater quantity of the Work unless otherwise directed by written addendwn to the Contract. 1.2.5 All indications or notations which apply to one of a number of similar situations,materiels or processes shall be deemed to apply to all such situations,materiels or processes wherever they appear in the Work,except where a contrary result is clearly indicated by the Contract Documents. 1.2.6 Where codes, standards,requirements and publications of public and private parties are referred to in the Contract DOCUrnents,references shall be understood to be to the latest revision prior to the date bids are received or negotiations are concluded, except where otherwise indicated. Changes to §14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE §14.4.1 The Owner may,at any time, terminate the Contract for the Owner's convenience and without cause. §14.4.2 Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner's convenience,the Contractor shall: .1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice; .2 take actions necessary,or that the Owner may direct,for the protection and preservation of the Work: and .3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the notice,terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts and purchase orders. §14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner's convenience,the Contractor shall be entitled to receive payment for Work executed,and costs incurred by reason of such termination, along with reasonable overhead and profit on the Work not executed. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918, 1925,1937,1951,1958.1961,1963,1966,1967,1970,1976.1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 39 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:14:56 on 12116/2004 under Order No.1 0001 26387_1 which expires on 6,29/05,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3980913360 by the Owner as described in Section 14.3 constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of days scheduled for completion,or 120 days in any 365-day period, whichever is less. §14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Section 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists, the Contractor may, upon seven days' written notice to the Owner and Architect,terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed and for proven loss with respect to materials,equipment,tools, and construction equipment and machinery. including reasonable overhead,profit and damages. §14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work under contract with the Contractor because the Owner has persistently failed to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work,the Contractor may, upon seven additional days'written notice to the Owner and the Architect,terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided in Section 14.1.3. §14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE §14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor: .1 persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials; .2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors; .3 persistently disregards laws,ordinances,or rules,regulations or orders of a public authority having jurisdiction;or .4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents. §14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist,the Owner,upon certification by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to justify such action,may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor's surety,if any, seven days'written notice, terminate employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety: .1 take possession of the site and of all materials,equipment, tools,and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor; .2 accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5.4;and .3 finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient.Upon request of the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work. §14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 14.2.1, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished. §14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby,and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived,such excess shall be paid to the Contractor.If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner.The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner,as the case may be,shall be certified by the Architect,upon application,and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract. §14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE §14.3.1 The Owner may, without cause,order the Contractor in writing to suspend,delay or interrupt the Work in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine. §14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by suspension,delay or interruption as described in Section 14.3.1. Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include profit.No adjustment shall be made to the extent: .1 that performance is,was or would have been so suspended,delayed or interrupted by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible;or .2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract. AIA Document A201TM—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925.1937,1951, 1958,1961,1963,1966.1967,1970.1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 38 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIAs Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:14:56 on 12/16/2004 under Order No.!000126387_1 which expires on 6/29/05,and is not for resale. User Notes: (39809133606 §13.5.3 If such procedures for testing, inspection or approval under Sections 13.5.1 and 135.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents,all costs made necessary by such failure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses shall be at the Contractor's expense. §13.5.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect. §13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections or approvals required by the Contract Documents, the Architect will do so promptly and,where practicable,at the normal place of testing . §13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work. §13.6 INTEREST §13.6.1 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at such rate as the parties may agree upon in writing or, in the absence thereof,at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. §13.7 COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY LIMITATION PERIOD §13.7.1 As between the Owner and Contractor: .1 Before Substantial Completion. As to acts or failures to act occurring prior to the relevant date of Substantial Completion,any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than such date of Substantial Completion; .2 Between Substantial Completion and Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring subsequent to the relevant date of Substantial Completion and prior to issuance of the final Certificate for Payment,any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment;and .3 After Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring after the relevant date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment,any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of any act or failure to act by the Contractor pursuant to any Warranty provided under Section 3.5,the date of any correction of the Work or failure to correct the Work by the Contractor under Section 12.2, or the date of actual commission of any other act or failure to perform any duty or obligation by the Contractor or Owner, whichever occurs last. ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT §14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR §14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor, for any of the following reasons: .1 issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction which requires all Work to be stopped; .2 an act of government,such as a declaration of national emergency which requires all Work to be stopped; .3 because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Section 9.4.1,or because the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents;or .4 the Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor promptly,upon the Contractor's request,reasonable evidence as required by Section 2.2.1. §14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if, through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor,repeated suspensions,delays or interruptions of the entire Work AIA Document A201 T'"—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915, 1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1967,1970.1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIAx Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 37 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:14:56 on 1216/2004 under Order No.1 0001 26387_1 which expires on 6/29/05,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3980913360) Documents may be sought to be enforced. nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to the Contractor's obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. §12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK §12.3.1 If the Owner prefers to accept Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents,the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable.Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made. ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS §13.1 GOVERNING LAW §13.1.1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located. §13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS §13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors,assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto and to partners, successors,assigns and legal representatives of such other party in respect to covenants,agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Except as provided in Section 13.2.2,neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other.If either party attempts to make such an assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract. §13.2.2 The Owner may,without consent of the Contractor, assign the Contract to an institutional lender providing construction financing for the Project.In such event,the lender shall assume the Owner's rights and obligations under the Contract Documents.The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate such assignment. §13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE §13.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or a member of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended,or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail to the last business address known to the party giving notice. §13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES §13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations,rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. §13.4.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner,Architect or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract,nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder,except as may be specifically agreed in writing. §13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS §13.5.1 Tests,inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents or by laws, ordinances,rules,regulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time. Unless otherwise provided,the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner,or with the appropriate public authority,and shall bear all related costs of tests,inspections and approvals.The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections or approvals which do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded. §13.5.2 If the Architect,Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional testing, inspection or approval not included under Section 13.5.1, the Architect will,upon written authorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing,inspection or approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner,and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. Such costs,except as provided in Section 13.5.3,shall be at the Owner's expense. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1967,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIAx Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 36 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA'' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:14:56 on 12/16/2004 under Order No.1000126387_1 which expires on 6/29.05,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3980913360) AM §11.5.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obli-ations arising under the Contract,the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall permit a copy to be made. ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK §12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK §12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect's request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if required in writing by the Architect,be uncovered for the Architects examination and be replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Time. §12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered which the Architect has not specifically requested to examine prior to its being covered,the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents,costs of uncovering and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order,be at the Owner's expense.If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, correction shall be at the Contractor's expense unless the condition was caused by the Owner or a separate contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for payment of such costs. §12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK §12.2.1 BEFORE OR AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION §12.2.1.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work,including additional testing and inspections and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the Contractor's expense. §12.2.2 AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION §12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.5, if, within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Section 9.9.1,or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously Qiven the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition.The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition.During the one-year period for correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction,the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty.If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or Architect,the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section 2.4. §12.2.2.2 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual performance of the Work. §12.2.2.3 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor pursuant to this Section 12.2. §12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work which are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner. §12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction,whether completed or partially completed,of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the Contractor's correction or removal of Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. §12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Section 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations which the Contractor might have under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the one-year period for correction of Work as described in Section 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work,and has no relationship to the time within which the oblieation to comply with the Contract AIA Document A201T'"—1997.Copyright (J 1911,1915.1918,1925,1937.1951,1958, 1961,1963,1966,1967,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA" Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 35 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA3 Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:14:56 on 12/16/2004 under Order No.1000126387_1 which expires on 6/29/05,and is not for resale. User Notes: x3980913360) '' §11.4.4 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described herein or other special causes of loss be included in the property insurance policy,the Owner shall, if possible,include such insurance, and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change Order. §11.4.5 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties,real or personal or both,at or adjacent to the site by property insurance under policies separate from-those insuring the Project,or if after final payment property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Project during the construction period,the Owner shall waive all rights in accordance with the terms of Section 11.4.7 for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate property insurance. All separate policies shall provide this waiver of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. §11.4.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur,the Owner shall file with the Contractor a copy of each policy that includes insurance coverages required by this Section 11.4. Each policy shall contain all generally applicable conditions,definitions,exclusions and endorsements related to this Project.Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire, and that its limits will not be reduced,until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Contractor. §11.4.7 Waivers of Subrogation. The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against(1)each other and any of their subcontractors,sub-subcontractors, agents and employees,each of the other,and (2)the Architect, Architect's consultants,separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and any of their subcontractors,sub-subcontractors, agents and employees,for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to this Section 11.4 or other property insurance applicable to the Work,except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary. The Owner or Contractor,as appropriate, shall require of the Architect,Architect's consultants,separate contractors described in Article 6,if any,and the subcontractors,sub-subcontractors,agents and employees of any of them,by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity,similar waivers each in favor of other parties enumerated herein.The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification,contractual or otherwise,did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged. §11.4.8 A loss insured under Owner's property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds,as their interests may appear,subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Section 11.4.10.The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Contractor,and by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity,shall require Subcontractors to make payments to their Sub-subcontractors in similar manner. §11.4.9 If required in writing by a party in interest,the Owner as fiduciary shall, upon occurrence of an insured loss, give bond for proper performance of the Owner's duties.The cost of required bonds shall be charged against proceeds received as fiduciary.The Owner shall deposit in a separate account proceeds so received,which the Owner shall distribute in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach,or in accordance with an arbitration award in which case the procedure shall be as provided in Section 4.6.If after such loss no other special agreement is made and unless the Owner terminates the Contract for convenience,replacement of damaged property shall be performed by the Contractor after notification of a Change in the Work in accordance with Article 7. §11.4.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss to the Owner's exercise of this power; if such objection is made,the dispute shall be resolved as provided in Sections 4.5 and 4.6.The Owner as fiduciary shall, in the case of arbitration,make settlement with insurers in accordance with directions of the arbitrators.If distribution of insurance proceeds by arbitration is required,the arbitrators will direct such distribution. §11.5 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND §11.5.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to furnish bonds covering faithful performance of the Contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as stipulated in bidding requirements or specifically required in the Contract Documents on the date of execution of the Contract. AIA Document A201 T"—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918, 1925,1937,1951,1958,1961..1963,1966,1967,1970,1976.1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIAp Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 34 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA` Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:14:56 on 12116/2004 under Order No.1 0001 26387_1 which expires on 6;29'05,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3980913360) §11.3.2 To the extent damages are covered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance, the Owner, Contractor and Architect waive all rights against each other for damages,except such rights as they may have to the proceeds of such insurance.The policy shall provide for such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. §11.3.3 The Owner shall not require the Contractor to include the Owner, Architect or other persons or entities as additional insureds on the Contractor's Liability Insurance coverage under Section 1 1.1. §11.4 PROPERTY INSURANCE §11.4.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located,property insurance written on a builder's risk "all-risk"or equivalent policy form in the amount of the initial Contract Sum,plus value 01'Subsequent Contract modifications and cost of materials supplied or installed by others,comprising total value for the entire Project at the site on a replacement cost basis without optional deductibles.Such property insurance shall be maintained, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance,until final payment has been made as provided in Section 9.10 or until no person or entity other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this Section 11.4 to be covered, whichever is later.This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor,Subcontractors and Sub- subcontractors in the Project. §11.4.1.1 Property insurance shall be on an "all-risk" or equivalent policy form and shall include, without limitation, insurance against the perils of fire(with extended coverage)and physical loss or damage including,without duplication of coverage,theft,vandalism,malicious mischief,collapse,earthquake,flood,windstorm, falsework, testing and startup,temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements,and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect's and Contractor's services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss. §11.4.1.2 If the Owner does not intend to purchase such property insurance required by the Contract and with all of the coverages in the amount described above,the Owner shall so inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work.The Contractor may then effect insurance which will protect the interests of the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work,and by appropriate Change Order the cost thereof shall be charged to the Owner.If the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or maintain insurance as described above,without so notifying the Conti-actor in writing,then the Owner shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto. §11.4.1.3 If the property insurance requires deductibles, the Owner shall pay costs not covered because of such deductibles. §11.4.1.4 This property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site,and also portions of the Work in transit. §11.4.1.5 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Section 9.9 shall not commence until the insurance company or companies providing property insurance have consented to such partial occupancy or use by endorsement or otherwise.The Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain consent of the insurance company or companies and shall, without mutual written consent, take no action with respect to partial occupancy or use that would cause cancellation,lapse or reduction of insurance. §11.4.2 Boiler and Machinery Insurance. The Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance required by the Contract Documents or by law, which shall specifically cover such insured objects during installation and until final acceptance by the Owner; this insurance shall include interests of the Owner,Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work,and the Owner and Contractor shall be named insureds. §11.4.3 Loss of Use Insurance.The Owner,at the Owner's option,may purchase and maintain such insurance as will insure the Owner against loss of use of the Owner's property due to fire or other hazards,however caused.The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor for loss of use of the Owner's property,including consequential losses due to fire or other hazards however caused. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918.1925,1937.1951,1958,1961,1963,1966.1967,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA'"' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 33 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:14:56 on 12/16/2004 under Order No.1000126387_1 which expires on 6/29/05,and is not for resale. User Notes: i39809133M lopik §10.5 If, without negligence on the part of the Contractor,the Contractor is held liable for the cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall indemnify the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred. §10.6 EMERGENCIES §10.6.1 In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property,the Contractor shall act,at the Contractor's discretion,to prevent threatened damage,injury or loss. Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Section 4.3 and Article 7. ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS §11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE §11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations under the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally liable, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them,or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: .1 claims under workers'compensa tion,disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts which are applicable to the Work to be performed; .2 claims for damages because of bodily injury,occupational sickness or disease,or death of the Contractor's employees; .3 claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease,or death of any person other than the Contractor's employees; .4 claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage; .5 claims for damages,other than to the Work itself,because of injury to or destruction of tangible property,including loss of use resulting therefrom; .6 claims for damages because of bodily injury,death of a person or property damage arising out of ownership,maintenance or use of a motor vehicle; .7 claims for bodily injury or property damage arising out of completed operations;and .8 claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.18. §11.1.2 The insurance required by Section 1 1.1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents or required by law,whichever coverage is greater. Coverages, whether written on an occurrence or claims-made basis,shall be maintained without interruption from date of commencement of the Work until date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment. §11.1.3 Certificates of insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work.These certificates and the insurance policies required by this Section 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days'prior written notice has been given to the Owner. If any of the foregoing insurance coverages are required to remain in force after final payment and are reasonably available,an additional certificate evidencing continuation of such coverage shall be submitted with the final Application for Payment as required by Section 9.10.2.Information concerning reduction of coverage on account of revised limits or claims paid under the General Aggregate,or both,shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness in accordance with the Contractor's information and belief. §11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE §11.2.1 The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner's usual liability insurance. §11.3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE §11.3.1 Optionally, the Owner may require the Contractor to purchase and maintain Project Management Protective Liability insurance from the Contractor's usual sources as primary coverage for the Owner's,Contractor's and Architect's vicarious liability for construction operations under the Contract. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents,the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor by increasing the Contract Sum to pay the cost of purchasing and maintaining such optional insurance coverage, and the Contractor shall not be responsible for purchasing any other liability insurance on behalf of the Owner.The minimum limits of liability purchased with such coverage shall be equal to the aggregate of the limits required for Contractor's Liability Insurance under Sections 11.1.1.2 through 11.1.1.5. AIA Document A201 TO—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1967,1970,1976.1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA'T Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 32 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA`` Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:14:56 on 12/16/2004 under Order No.1000126387_1 which expires on 6:29/05,and is not for resale. User Notes: 3980913360; §10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain,as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract, reasonable safeguards for safety and protection,including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities. §10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work,the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel. §10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss(other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10."2'.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor,a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor,or anyone directly or indirectly employed by anv of them,or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1_3,except damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them,or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor.The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.1 S. §10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor's organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents.This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect. §10.2.7 The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to endanger its safety. §10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS §10.3.1 If reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance, including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl(PCB), encountered on the site by the Contractor, the Contractor shall, upon recognizing the condition.immediately stop Work in the affected area and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing. §10.3.2 The Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and,in the event such material or substance is found to be present,to verify that it has been rendered harmless.Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents,the O,,vner shalt furnish in writing to the Contractor and Architect the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying the presence or absence of such material or substance or who are to perform the task of removal or safe containment of such material or substance.The Contractor and the Architect will promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner.If either the Contractor or Architect has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner,the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable objection.When the material or substance has been rendered harmless,Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Contractor.The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased in the amount of the Contractor's reasonable additional costs of shut-down,delay and start-up,which adjustments shall be accomplished as provided in Article 7. §10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law,the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Subcontractors,Architect,Architect's consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims,damages,losses and expenses,including but not limited to attorneys'fees,arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or death as described in Section 10.3.1 and has not been rendered harmless,provided that such claim,damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness,disease or death,or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself)and provided that such damage, loss or expense is not due to the sole negligence of a party seeking indemnity. §10.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under Section 10.3 for materials and substances brought to the site by the Contractor unless such materials or substances were required by the Contract Documents. AIA Document A201 TM-1997.Copyright ©1911,1915.1918. 1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1967,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIAa Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 31 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this Alk3 Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:14:56 on 12/16/2004 under Order No.1000126387_1 which expires on 6i29/05,and is not for resale. (3980913360) User Notes: the final Certificate is due and payable.The Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Section 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled. §9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contactor submits to the Architect(1)an affidavit that payrolls,bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts withheld by Owner)have been paid or otherwise satisfied,(2)a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after Final payment is currently in effect and will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days'prior written notice has been given to the Owner,(3) a written statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents,(4)consent of surety, if any,to final payment and(5),if required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations,such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens,claims,security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract,to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner.If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien.If such lien remains unsatisfied after payments are made,the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable attorneys'fees. §9.10.3 If,after Substantial Completion of the Work,final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion,and the Architect so confirms,the Owner shall,upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect,and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted.If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents,and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment.Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims. §9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from: .1 liens,Claims,security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled; .2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents:or .3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents. §9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment. ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY §10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS §10.1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating,maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract. §10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY §10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of,and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage,injury or loss to: .1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby; .2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site,under care,custody or control of the Contractor or the Contractor's Subcontractors or Sub- subcontractors; and .3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto,such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks,pavements, roadways,structures and utilities not designated for removal,relocation or replacement in the course of construction. §10.2.2 The Contractor shall give notices and comply with applicable laws,ordinances,rules,regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury or loss. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915, 1918.1925.1937.1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1967,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA" Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 30 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA" Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:14:56 on 12/16/2004 under Order No.1000126387_1 which expires on 6/29/05,and is not for resale. User Notes: (39809133601 00"k §9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION §9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. §9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work,or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment.Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. §9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor's list,the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Architect's inspection discloses any item, whether or not included on the Contractor's list, which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use, the Contractor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion,complete or correct such item upon notification by the Architect. In such case,the Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion. §9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete,the Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Substantial Completion,shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security,maintenance, heat, utilities,damage to the Work and insurance,and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate.Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. §9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate.Upon such acceptance and consent of surety,if 0"„ any,the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to such Work or designated portion thereof. Such payment shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. §9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE §9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor,provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer as required under Section 11.4.1.5 and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Work.Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete,provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, retainage, if any, security, maintenance,heat,utilities,damage to the Work and insurance,and have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents.When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete,the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under Section 9.8.2.Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld.The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement between the Owner and Contractor or,if no agreement is reached,by decision of the Architect. §9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use,the Owner,Contractor and Architect shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work. §9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon,partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. §9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT §9.10.1 Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and,when the Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed,the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief,and on the basis of the Architect's on-site visits and inspections,the Work has been completed in accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918.1925,1937,1951.1958.1961, 1963,1966,1967,1970,1976.1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 29 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:14:56 on 12/16/2004 under Order No.1000126387_1 which expires on 6/29/05,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3980913360) .2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable 111612 of such claims unless security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor; .3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor.materials or equipment: .4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; .5 damage to the Owner or another contractor; .6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time,and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; or .7 persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. §9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed,certification will be made for amounts previously withheld. §9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS §9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment,the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents,and shall so notify the Architect. §9.6.2 The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor,upon receipt of payment from the Owner,out of the amount paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work,the amount to which said Subcontractor is entitled,reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work.The Contractor shall,by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in a similar manner. §9.6.3 The Architect will,on request, furnish to a Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor. §9.6.4 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required by law. §9.6.5 Payment to material suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Sections 9.6.2,9.6.3 and 9.6.4. §9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment,a progress payment,or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. §9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of the Contract Sum, payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors and suppliers shall be held by the Contractor for those Subcontractors or suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials,or both,under contract with the Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner.Nothing contained herein shall require money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor,shall create any fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of trust or shall entitle any person or entity to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision. §9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT §9.7.1 If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment,through no fault of the Contractor.within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment,or if the Owner does not pay the Contactor within seven days after the date established in the Contract Documents the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by arbitration,then the Contractor may, upon seven additional days'written notice to the Owner and Architect,stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received.The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of shut-down,delay and start-up,plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915, 1918, 1925.1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1967,1970.1976.1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIAQ° Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 28 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA` Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AA software at 13:14:56 on 12'16/2004 under Order No.1000126387_1 which expires on 6;29105,and is not for resale. U 3980913360) ser Notes: payment as the Owner or Architect may require, such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers, and reflecting retainage if provided for in the Contract Documents. §9.3.1.1 As provided in Section 7.3.8,such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work which have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives,or by interim determinations of the Architect,but not yet included in Change Orders. §9.3.1.2 Such applications may not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the Contractor does not intend to pay to a Subcontractor or material supplier, unless such Work has been performed by others whom the Contractor intends to pay. §9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work.If approved in advance by the Owner,payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing.Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest,and shall include the costs of applicable insurance,storage and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site. §9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment.The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, information and belief,be free and clear of liens,claims, security interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor,Subcontractors, material suppliers,or other persons or entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor,materials and equipment relating to the Work. §9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT §9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment,either issue low to the Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor, for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due,or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect's reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in Section 9.5.1. §9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect's evaluation of the Work and the data comprising the Application for Payment,that the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that,to the best of the Architect's knowledge,information and belief,the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents.The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion,to results of subsequent tests and inspections,to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect.The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified.However,the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has(1)made exhaustive or continuous on- site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work, (2)reviewed construction means,methods,techniques, sequences or procedures,(3)reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment,or(4)made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. §9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION §9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner,if in the Architect's opinion the representations to the Owner required by Section 9.4.2 cannot be made.If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application,the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 9.4.1. If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner.The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or,because of subsequently discovered evidence,may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the Architects opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible, including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Section 3.3.2. because of: .1 defective Work not remedied; AIA Document A201 T"—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915, 1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963.1966.1967,1970.1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 27 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:14:56 on 12'16,2004 under Order No.1000126387_1 which expires on 6/29/05,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3980913360) ARTICLE 8 TIME §8.1 DEFINITIONS §8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time,including authorized adjustments,allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work. §8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement. §8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Section 9.8. §8.1.4 The term "day"as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined. §8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION §8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. §8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly,except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing,prematurely commence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance required by Article I 1 to be furnished by the Contractor and Owner.The date of commencement of the Work shall not be changed by the effective date of such insurance.Unless the date of commencement is established by the Contract Documents or a notice to proceed given by the Owner,the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing not less than five days or other agreed period before commencing the Work to permit the timely filing of mortgages, mechanic's liens and other security interests. §8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. how §8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME §8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect,or of an employee of either,or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner,or by changes ordered in the Work,or by labor disputes, fire,unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor's control,or by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and arbitration,or by other causes which the Architect determines may justify delay,then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine. §8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Section 4.3. §8.3.3 This Section 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party under other provisions of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION §9.1 CONTRACT SUM §9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the.Agreement and, including authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. §9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES §9.2.1 Before the first Application for Payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect a schedule of values allocated to various portions of the Work,prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require.This schedule,unless objected to by the Architect,shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. §9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT §9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment for operations completed in accordance with the schedule of values. Such application shall be notarized,if required,and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918.1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1967,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA4 Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 26 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA`` Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:14:56 on 1216/2004 under Order No.1000126387_1 which expires on 6/29/05,and is not for resale. (3980913360) User Notes: §7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum,the adjusuncnt shall be based on one of the following methods: .1 mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation; .2 unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon; .3 cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee;or .4 as provided in Section 7.3.6. §7.3.4 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive. the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor's agreement or disagreement with the method, if any. provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. §7.3.5 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the agreement of the Contractor therewith,including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order. §7.3.6 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the method and the adjustment shall be determined by the Architect on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change,including,in case of an increase in the Contract Sum,a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit.In such case, and also under Section 7.3.3.3,the Contractor shall keep and present,in such form as the Architect may prescribe,an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data.Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,costs for the purposes of this Section 7.3.6 shall be limited to the following: .1 costs of labor, including social security, old age and unemployment insurance,fringe benefits required by agreement or custom, and workers'compensation insurance; .2 costs of materials,supplies and equipment, including cost of transportation,whether incorporated or consumed; .3 rental costs of machinery and equipment,exclusive of hand tools,whether rented from the Contractor or others; .4 costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance,permit fees,and sales,use or similar taxes related to the Work;and .5 additional costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change. §7.3.7 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change which results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect.When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change,the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase,if any,with respect to that change. §7.3.8 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner,amounts not in dispute for such changes in the Work shall be included in Applications for Payment accompanied by a Change Order indicating the parties'agreement with part or all of such costs. For any portion of such cost that remains in dispute,the Architect will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those costs.That determination of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis as a Change Order,subject to the right of either party to disagree and assert a claim in accordance with Article 4. §7.3.9 When the Owner and Contractor agree with the determination made by the Architect concerning the adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time,or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments.such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded by preparation and execution of an appropriate Change Order. §7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK §7.4.1 The Architect will have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes shall be effected by written order and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor.The Contractor shall carry out such written orders promptly. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918.1925,1937.1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1967,1970.1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This Al Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 25 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA4 Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:14:56 on 12'16/2004 under Order No.1000126387_1 which expires on 6/29/05,and is not for resale. U 39809133661 User Notes: §6.2.2 If part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Owner or a separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work,promptly report to the Architect apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner's or separate contractor's completed or partially completed construction is flit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work,except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable. §6.2.3 The Owner shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for costs incurred by the Owner which are payable to a separate contractor because of delays, improperly timed activities or defective construction of the Contractor.The Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for costs incurred by the Contractor because of delays,improperly timed activities,damage to the Work or defective construction of a separate contractor. §6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage wrongfully caused by the Contractor to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in Section 10.2.5. §6.2.5 The Owner and each separate contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described for the Contractor in Section 3.14. §6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP §6.3.1 If a dispute arises among the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish, the Owner may clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible. ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK §7.1 GENERAL §7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without invalidating the Contract,by Change Order,Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work,subject to the limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. §7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner,Contractor and Architect;a Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor;an order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone. §7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents,and the Contractor shall proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work. §7.2 CHANGE ORDERS §7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner,Contractor and Architect,stating their agreement upon all of the following: .1 change in the Work; .2 the amount of the adjustment,if any,in the Contract Sum;and .3 the extent of the adjustment,if any, in the Contract Time. §7.2.2 Methods used in determining adjustments to the Contract Sum may include those listed in Section 7.3.3. §7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES §7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architect,directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment,if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time,or both.The Owner may by Construction Change Directive,without invalidating the Contract,order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions,deletions or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. §7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright C',1911,1915, 1918,1925.1937,1951,1958,1961,1963.1966,1967,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIAN Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 24 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:14:56 on 12/16/2004 under Order No.1000126387_1 which expires on 6/29/05,and is not for resale. U 3980913360) User Notes: No §5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS §5.3.1 By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity,the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor,to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor,to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents,and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor's Work,which the Contractor,by these Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor,unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement,the benefit of all rights,remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor,by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate,the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors.The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor,prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and,upon written request of the Subcontractor,identify to the Subcontractor terns and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors. §5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS §5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner provided that: .1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Section 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements which the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor and Contractor in writing;and .2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any,obligated under bond relating to the Contract. §5.4.2 Upon such assignment, if the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days. the Subcontractor's compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resulting from the suspension. ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS §6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS §6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces,and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially similar to these including those portions related to insurance and waiver of subrogation. If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner,the Contractor shall make such Claim as provided in Section 4.3. §6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site,the term"Contractor" in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement. §6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner's own forces and of each separate contractor with the Work of the Contractor,who shall cooperate with them.The Contractor shall participate with other separate contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules when directed to do so.The Contractor shall make any revisions to the construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement.The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor,separate contractors and the Owner until subsequently revised. §6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces,the Owner shall be deemed to be subject to the same obligations and to have the same rights which apply to the Contractor under the Conditions of the Contract, including, without excluding others,those stated in Article 3,this Article 6 and Articles 10, 11 and 12. §6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY §6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities, and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright J 1911,1915,191&1925.1937.1951. 1958,1961, 1963.1966,1967,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA" Document is protected by U.S.copyright Law and International Treaties. 23 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:14:56 on 12/16/2004 under Order No.1000126387_1 which expires on 6i29./05,and is not for resale. U 39809133661 User Notes: §4.6.4 Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder. No arbitration arising out of or relating to the Contract shall include, by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner, the Architect,the Architect's employees or consultants,except by written consent containing specific reference to the Agreement and signed by the Architect,Owner,Contractor and any other person or entity sought to be joined.No arbitration shall include,by consolidation or joinder or in any Other manner,parties other than the Owner,Contractor, a separate contractor as described in Article 6 and other persons substantially involved in a common question of fact or law whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration.No person or entity other than the Owner,Contractor or a separate contractor as described in Article 6 shall be included as an original third party or additional third party to an arbitration whose interest or responsibility is insubstantial.Consent to arbitration involving an additional person or entity shall not constitute consent to arbitration of a Claim not described therein or with a person or entity not named or described therein.The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly consented to by parties to the Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. §4.6.5 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims. The party filing a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbitration is permitted to be demanded. §4.6.6 Judgment on Final Award. The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final,and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS §5.1 DEFINITIONS §5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site.The term"Subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor.The term"Subcontractor" does not include a separate contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor. §5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site.The term"Sub-subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub- subcontractor. §5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK §5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements,the Contractor,as soon as practicable after award of the Contract,shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of persons or entities(including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each principal portion of the Work.The Architect will promptly reply to the Contractor in writing stating whether or not the Owner or the Architect,after due investigation,has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity.Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. §5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection.The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection. §5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor, the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection.If the proposed but rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work,the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be increased or decreased by the difference,if any,occasioned by such change,and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor's Work. However,no increase in the Contract Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required. §5.2.4 The Contractor shall not change a Subcontractor, person or entity previously selected if the Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitute. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918, 1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1967,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIAx Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 22 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA" Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:14:56 on 12'16/2004 under Order No.1 0001 26387_1 which expires on 6/29.!05,and is not for resale. U 39809133601 User Notes: §4.4.5 The Architect will approve or reject Claims by written decision, which shall state the reasons therefor and which shall notify the parties of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both.The approval or rejection of a Claim by the Architect shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to mediation and arbitration. §4.4.6 When a written decision of the Architect states that(1)the decision is final but subject to mediation and arbitration and(2)a demand for arbitration of a Claim covered by such decision must be made within 30 days after the date on which the party making the demand receives the final written decision,then failure to demand arbitration within said 30 days'period shall result in the Architect's decision becoming final and binding upon the Owner and Contractor.If the Architect renders a decision after arbitration proceedings have been initiated,such decision may be entered as evidence,but shall not supersede arbitration proceedings unless the decision is acceptable to all parties concerned. §4.4.7 Upon receipt of a Claim against the Contractor or at any time thereafter, the Architect or the Owner may,but is not obligated to,notify the surety,if any,of the nature and amount of the Claim.If the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor's default,the Architect or the Owner may,but is not obligated to,notify the surety and request the surety's assistance in resolving the controversy. §4.4.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic's lien,the party asserting such Claim may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines prior to resolution of the Claim by the Architect,by mediation or by arbitration. §4.5 MEDIATION §4.5.1 Any Claim arising out of or related to the Contract,except Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those waived as provided for in Sections 4.3.10,9.10.4 and 9.10.5 shall,after initial decision by the Architect or 30 days after submission of the Claim to the Architect, be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to arbitration or the institution of legal or equitable proceedings by either party. §4.5.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which,unless the parties mutually agree otherwise,shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect. Request for mediation shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract and with the American Arbitration Association.The request may be made concurrently with the filing of a demand for arbitration but,in such event, mediation shall proceed in advance of arbitration or legal or equitable proceedings, which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 60 days from the date of filing,unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order. §4.5.3 The parties shall share the mediator's fee and any filing fees equally.The mediation shall be held in the place where the Project is located,unless another location is mutually agreed upon.Agreements reached in mediation shall be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof. §4.6 ARBITRATION §4.6.1 Any Claim arising out of or related to the Contract,except Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those waived as provided for in Sections 4.3.10,9.10.4 and 9.10.5,shall,after decision by the Architect or 30 days after submission of the Claim to the Architect,be subject to arbitration.Prior to arbitration,the parties shall endeavor to resolve disputes by mediation in accordance with the provisions of Section 4.5. §4.6.2 Claims not resolved by mediation shall be decided by arbitration which,unless the parties mutually agree otherwise,shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect.The demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract and with the American Arbitration.Association, and a copy shall be filed with the Architect. §4.6.3 A demand for arbitration shall be made within the time limits specified in Sections 4.4.6 and 4.6.1 as applicable,and in other cases within a reasonable time after the Claim has arisen,and in no event shall it be made after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on such Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations as determined pursuant to Section 13.7. AIA Document A201TM-1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925, 1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1967,1970, 1976.1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA" Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 21 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA'' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:14:56 on 1216/2004 under Order No.1 0001 26387_1 which expires on 6i29i05,and is not for resale. U 39809133661 User Notes: i §4.3.7 Claims for Additional Time §4.3.7.1 If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, written notice as provided herein shall be given.The Contractor's Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work. In the case of a continuing delay only one Claim is necessary. §4.3.7.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time,such Claim shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time,could not have been reasonably anticipated and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction. §4.3.8 Injury or Damage to Person or Property. If either party to the Contract suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party,or of others for whose acts such party is legally responsible, written notice of such injury or damage, whether or not insured,shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after discovery.The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter. §4.3.9 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon,and if quantities originally contemplated are materially changed in a proposed Change Order or Construction Change Directive so that application of such unit prices to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor,the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. §4.3.10 Claims for Consequential Damages. The Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract.This mutual waiver includes: .1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses,for losses of use,income,profit,financing, business and reputation,and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons;and .2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of personnel stationed there, for losses of financing,business and reputation,and for loss of profit except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work. This mutual waiver is applicable, without limitation,to all consequential damages due to either party's termination in accordance with Article 14.Nothing contained in this Section 4.3.10 shall be deemed to preclude an award of liquidated direct damages,when applicable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. §4.4 RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS AND DISPUTES §4.4.1 Decision of Architect. Claims, including those alleging an error or omission by the Architect but excluding those arising under Sections 10.3 through 10.5,shall be referred initially to the Architect for decision. An initial decision by the Architect shall be required as a condition precedent to mediation,arbitration or litigation of all Claims between the Contractor and Owner arising prior to the date final payment is due,unless 30 days have passed after the Claim has been referred to the Architect with no decision having been rendered by the Architect.The Architect will not decide disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities other than the Owner. §4.4.2 The Architect will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of the Claim take one or more of the following actions: (1)request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting data from the other party,(2)reject the Claim in whole or in part,(3)approve the Claim,(4)suggest a compromise,or(5) advise the parties that the Architect is unable to resolve the Claim if the Architect lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Architect concludes that, in the Architect's sole discretion,it would be inappropriate for the Architect to resolve the Claim. §4.4.3 In evaluating Claims,the Architect may,but shall not be obligated to,consult with or seek information from either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Architect in rendering a decision.The Architect may request the Owner to authorize retention of such persons at the Owner's expense. §4.4.4 If the Architect requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional supporting data, such party shall respond, within ten days after receipt of such request,and shall either provide a response on the requested supporting data,advise the Architect when the response or supporting data will be furnished or advise the Architect that no supporting data will be furnished.Upon receipt of the response or supporting data,if any, the Architect will either reject or approve the Claim in whole or in part. AIA Document A201 T"—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925.1937,1951,. 1958. 1961, 1963,1966,1967,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA" Document is protected by U.S.copyright Law and International Treaties. 20 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA's Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:14:56 on 12/16%2004 under Order No.1000126387_1 which expires on 6/29/05,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3980913360) §4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under and requirements of, the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor.The Architect's response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. If no agreement is made concerning the time within which interpretations required of the Architect shall be furnished in compliance with this Section 4.2, then delay shall not be recognized on account of failure by the Architect to furnish such interpretations until 15 days after written request is made for them. §4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents and will be in writing,or in the form of drawings.When making such interpretations and initial decisions,the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor,will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions so rendered in good faith. §4.2.13 The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents. §4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES §4.3.1 Definition. A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking,as a matter of right,adjustment or interpretation of Contract terms,payment of money,extension of time or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract.The term"Claim" also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. Claims must be initiated by written notice.The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. §4.3.2 Time Limits on Claims. Claims by either party must be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later.Claims must be initiated by written notice to the Architect and the other party. §4.3.3 Continuing Contract Performance.Pending final resolution of a Claim except as otherwise agreed in writing ate` or as provided in Section 9.7.1 and Article 14, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. §4.3.4 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If conditions are encountered at the site which are(1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or(2)unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, which differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents,then notice by the observing party shall be given to the other party promptly before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 21 days after first observance of the conditions.The Architect will promptly investigate such conditions and,if they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost of,or time required for,performance of any part of the Work,will recommend an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time,or both.If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall so notify the Owner and Contractor in writing,stating the reasons.Claims by either party in opposition to such determination must be made within 21 days after the Architect has given notice of the decision. If the conditions encountered are materially different,the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be equitably adjusted, but if the Owner and Contractor cannot agree on an adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time,the adjustment shall be referred to the Architect for initial determination,subject to further proceedings pursuant to Section 4.4. §4.3.5 Claims for Additional Cost. If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, written notice as provided herein shall be given before proceeding to execute the Work.Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Section 10.6. §4.3.6 If the Contractor believes additional cost is involved for reasons including but not limited to(1)a written interpretation from the Architect,(2)an order by the Owner to stop the Work where the Contractor was not at fault, (3)a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect,(4) failure of payment by the Owner,(5) termination of the Contract by the Owner, (6)Owner's suspension or(7)other reasonable grounds.Claim shall be filed in accordance with this Section 4.3. ; AIA Document A201TM—1997.Copyright©1911.1915,1918.1925,1937,1951,1958, 1961,1963,1966, 1967,1970,1976.1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA` Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 19 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA,? Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:14:56 on 12,'16/2004 under Order No.1000126387_1 which expires on 6/29/05,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3980913360) deficiencies in the Work, and (3) to determine in general if the Work is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when fully completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However. the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Architect will neither have control over or charge of, nor be responsible for, the construction means. methods, techniques,sequences or procedures,or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work,since these are solely the Contractor's rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents,except as provided in Section 3.3.1. §4.2.3 The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors,or their agents or employees,or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. §4.2.4 Communications Facilitating Contract Administration. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or when direct communications have been specially authorized,the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to communicate with each other through the Architect about matters arising out of or relating to the Contract. Communications by and with the Architect's consultants shall be through the Architect. Communications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor.Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through the Owner. §4.2.5 Based on the Architect's evaluations of the Contractor's Applications for Payment,the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts. §4.2.6 The Architect will have authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable,the Architect will have authority to require inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Sections 13.5.2 and 13.5.3,whether or not such Work is fabricated.installed or completed.However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, Subcontractors,material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees,or other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. §4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon the Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples,but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.The Architect's action will be taken with such reasonable promptness as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner,Contractor or separate contractors,while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's professional judgment to permit adequate review.Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities,or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems,all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents.The Architect's review of the Contractor's submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under Sections 3.3,3.5 and 3.12.The Architect's review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or, unless otherwise specifically stated by the Architect,of any construction means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures.The Architect's approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. §4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and may authorize minor changes in the Work as provided in Section 7.4. §4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final completion,will receive and forward to the Owner, for the Owner's review and records,written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor,and will issue a final Certificate for Payment upon compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. §4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree,the Architect will provide one or more project representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect's responsibilities at the site.The duties,responsibilities and limitations of authority of such project representatives shall be as set forth in an exhibit to be incorporated in the Contract Documents. AIA Document A201 TIM—1997.Copyright ©1911.1915,1918. 1925.1937,1951,1958,1961,1963.1966,1967,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA" Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 18 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA` Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:14:56 on 12'16/2004 under Order No.1000126387_1 which expires on 6/29,05,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3980913360) §3.16 ACCESS TO WORK §3.16.1 The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located. §3.17 ROYALTIES,PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS §3.17.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees.The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof,but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design,process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings, Specifications or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect. However.if the Contractor has reason to believe that the required design,process or product is an infringement of a copyright or a patent, the Contactor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the Architect. §3.18 INDEMNIFICATION §3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law and to the extent claims,damages,losses or expenses are not covered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance purchased by the Contractor in accordance with Section 1 1.3, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner,Architect,Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims,damages,losses and expenses,including but not limited to attorneys'fees,arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim,damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury,sickness,disease or death,or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself),but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor,a Subcontractor,anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim,damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate,abridge,or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section 3.18. §3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor,anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Section 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers'compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT §4.1 ARCHITECT §4.1.1 The Architect is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully practicing architecture identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as iI'singular in number.The term"Architect" means the Architect or the Architect's authorized representative. §4.1.2 Duties,responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted,modified or extended without written consent of the Owner,Contractor and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. §4.1.3 If the employment of the Architect is terminated,the Owner shall employ a new Architect against whom the Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former Architect. §4.2 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT §4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents,and will be an Owner's representative(1)during construction, (2)until final payment is due and(3) with the Owner's concurrence,from time to time during the one-year period for correction of Work described in Section 12.2.The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise modified in writing in accordance with other provisions of the Contract. §4.2.2 The Architect,as a representative of the Owner, will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of the Contractor's operations(1)to become generally familiar with and to keep the Owner informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed,(2)to endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright rJ 1911.1915,1918.1925.1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1967,1970,1976.1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AW Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 17 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIAs Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:14:56 on 12/16;2004 under Order No.1000126387_1 which expires on 6/29/05,and is not for resale. User Notes: 13980913360) MW §3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and (1)the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation as a minor change in the Work,or(2) a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued authorizing the deviation.The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples or similar submittals by the Architect's approval thereof. §3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings,Product Data, Samples or similar submittals,to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals.In the absence of such written notice the Architect's approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions. §3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services which constitute the practice of architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor's responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques,sequences and procedures.The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law. If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials or equipment are specifically required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents, the Owner and the Architect will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy.The Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed design professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings,calculations, specifications,certifications,Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional.Shop Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others,shall bear such professional's written approval when submitted to the Architect.The Owner and the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy,accuracy and completeness of the services,certifications or approvals performed by such design professionals,provided the Owner and Architect have specified to the Contractor all performance and design ' criteria that such services must satisfy.Pursuant to this Section 3.12.10,the Architect will review,approve or take other appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.The Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria required by the Contract Documents. §3.13 USE OF SITE §3.13.1 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law,ordinances,permits and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. §3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING §3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly. §3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or separate contractors by cutting,patching or otherwise altering such construction,or by excavation.The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the Owner or a separate contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor;such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld.The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor's consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work. §3.15 CLEANING UP §3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work,the Contractor shall remove from and about the Project waste materials,rubbish,the Contractor's tools,construction equipment,machinery and surplus materials. §3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents,the Owner may do so and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor. AIA Document A201T1"—1997.Copyright rJ 1911,1915, 1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963.1966.1967,1970.1976. 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 1 6 unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA'" Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:14:56 on 12/16,2004 under Order No.1 0001 26387_1 which expires on 6.29/05,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3980913360) communications shall be confirmed in writing. Other Conlin Lill ications shall be similarly confirmed on written request in each case. §3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES §3.10.1 The Contractor,promptly after being awarded the Contract, shall prepare and submit for the Owner's and Architect's information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work.The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents,shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project,shall be related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Contract Documents,and shall provide for expeditious and practicable execution of the Work. §3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare and keep current, for the Architect's approval,a schedule of submittals which is coordinated with the Contractor's construction schedule and allows the Architect reasonable time to revie�y submittals. §3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to the Owner and Architect. §3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE §3.11.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of the Drawings,Specifications, Addenda,Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to record field changes and selections made during construction,and one record copy of approved Shop Drawings,Product Data, Samples and similar required submittals.These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work. §3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES §3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings,diagrams,schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor,Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer,supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. §3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations,standard schedules,performance charts, instructions,brochures.diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. §3.12.3 Samples are physical examples which illustrate materials,equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. §3.12.4 Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents.The purpose of their submittal is to demonstrate for those portions of the Work for which submittals are required by the Contract Documents the way by which the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Section 1.2.7. Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents.Submittals which are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action. §3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents,approve and submit to the Architect Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate contractors.Submittals which are not marked as reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents and approved by the Contractor may be returned by the Architect without action. §3.12.6 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples and similar submittals,the Contractor represents that the Contractor has determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto,or will do so,and has checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. §3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal and review of Shop Drawings,Product Data, Samples or similar submittals until the respective submittal has been approved by the Architect. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918. 1925,1937,1951.1958,1961,1963,1966,1967,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA" Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 15 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA`Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by ALA software at 13:14:56 on 12/16/2004 under Order No.1000126387_1 which expires on 6/29/05,and is not for resale. User Notes: 139809133601 §3.5 WARRANTY §3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless otherwise required or permitted by the Contract Documents, that the Work will be free from defects not inherent in the quality required or permitted,and that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract DOCUlnentS. Work not conforming to these requirements,including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective. The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse,modifications not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance,improper operation,or normal wear and tear and normal usage.If required by the Architect. the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. §3.6 TAXES §3.6.1 The Contractor shall pay sales,consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor which are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect. §3.7 PERMITS,FEES AND NOTICES §3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit and other permits and governmental fees, licenses and inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work which are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and which are legally required when bids are received or negotiations concluded. §3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by laws,ordinances,rules,regulations and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work. §3.7.3 It is not the Contractor's responsibility to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,building codes,and rules and regulations.However,if the Contractor observes that portions of the Contract Documents are at variance therewith,the Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect and Owner in writing,and necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate Modification. §3.7.4 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to laws,statutes,ordinances,building codes,and rules and regulations without such notice to the Architect and Owner, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction. §3.8 ALLOWANCES §3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents.Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct, but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable objection. §3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents: .1 allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and all required taxes, less applicable trade discounts; .2 Contractor's costs for unloading and handling at the site,labor,installation costs,overhead,profit and other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum but not in the allowances: .3 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order.The amount of the Change Order shall reflect(1)the difference between actual costs and the allowances under Section 3.8.2.1 and(2)changes in Contractor's costs under Section 3.8.2.2. §3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner in sufficient time to avoid delay in the Work. §3.9 SUPERINTENDENT §3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work.The superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. Important AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ©1911, 1915.1918,1925,1937,1951,1958.1961,1963.1966,1967,1970,1976.1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA'r Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 14 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:14:56 on 12/16;2004 under Order No.1000126387_1 which expires on 6 29105,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3980913360 Work, as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.2.3,shall Lake field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors,omissions,or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents: however,any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered by the Contactor shall be reported promptly to the Architect as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. §3.2.2 Any design errors or omissions noted by the Contractor during this review shall be reported promptly to the Architect,but it is recognized that the Contractor's review is made in the Contractor's capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional unless others ise specifically provided in the Contract Documents.The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws,statutes, ordinances,building codes,and rules and regulations,but any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor shall be reported promptly to the Architect. §3.2.3 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions issued by the Architect in response to the Contractor's notices or requests for information pursuant to Sections 3.2.1 and 3.2.2,the Contractor shall make Claims as provided in Sections 4.3.6 and 4.3.7.If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations of Sections 3.2.1 and 3.2.2,the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner as would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations.The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents or for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents unless the Contractor recognized such error,inconsistency,omission or difference and knowingly failed to report it to the Architect. §3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES §3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work. using the Contractor's best skill and attention.The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods,techniques,sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, unless the Contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters.If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means, methods,techniques,sequences or procedures,the Contractor shall evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and,except as stated below, shall be fully and solely responsible for the jobsite safety of such means, methods,techniques, sequences or procedures.If the Contractor determines that such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures may not be safe,the Contractor shall give timely written notice to the Owner and Architect and shall not proceed with that portion of the Work without further written instructions from the Architect.If the Contractor is then instructed to proceed with the required means, methods,techniques,sequences or procedures without acceptance of changes proposed by the Contractor,the Owner shall be solely responsible for any resulting loss or damage. §3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for or on behalf of the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors. §3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that such portions are in proper-condition to receive subsequent Work. §3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS §3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials,equipment,tools,construction equipment and machinery, water,heat,utilities, transportation,and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. §3.4.2 The Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner,after evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Change Order. §3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor's employees and other persons carrying out the Contract.The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ©1911.1915..1918.1925.1937,1951, 1958,1961,1963.1966.1967,1970, 1976.1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 13 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:14:56 on 12116/2004 under Order No.10001263871 which expires on 61129,05,and is not for resale. U 3980913360) User Notes: continuation of the Work.After such evidence has been furnished, the Owner shall not mnterially vary such financial arrangements without prior notice to the Contractor. §2.2.2 Except for permits and fees,including those required under Section 3.7.1, which are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents,the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals,easements, assessments and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. §2.2.3 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site of'the Project,and a legal description of the site.The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the Work. §2.2.4 Information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents shall be furnished by the Owner with reasonable promptness.Any other information or services relevant to the Contractor's performance of the Work under the Owner's control shall be furnished by the Owner after receipt from the Contractor of a written request for such information or services. §2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Contractor will be furnished, free of charge,such copies of Drawings and Project Manuals as are reasonably necessary for execution of the Work. §2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK §2.3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Section 12.2 or persistently fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents,the Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work,or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated;however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not live rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity, except to the extent required by Section 6.1.3. §2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK §2.4.1 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a seven-day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may after such seven-day period give the Contractor a second written notice to correct such deficiencies within a three-day period.If the Contractor within such three-day period after receipt of such second notice fails to commence and continue to correct any deficiencies, the Owner may,without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have,correct such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies, including Owner's expenses and compensation for the Architect's additional services made necessary by such default,neglect or failure. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Architect.If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts,the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR §3.1 GENERAL §3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number.The term "Contractor" means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized representative. §3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. §3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect's administration of the Contract,or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons other than the Contractor. §3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR §3.2.1 Since the Contract Documents are complementary, before starting each portion of the Work,the Contractor shall carefully study and compare the various Drawings and other Contract Documents relative to that portion of the AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918.1925. 1937,1951,1958,1961,1963.1966,1967,1970,1976.1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA" Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 2 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA'° Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:14:56 on 12116/2004 under Order No.1000126387_1 ,vhich expires on 6i29/05.and is not for resale. User Notes: ;39809133601 §1.3 CAPITALIZATION §1.3.1 Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those which are(1)specifically defined,(2)the titles of numbered articles or(3)the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects. §1.4 INTERPRETATION §1.4.1 In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as "all" and "an% and articles such as "the" and "an," but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. §1.5 EXECUTION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS §1.5.1 The Contract Documents shall be signed by the Owner and Contractor.If either the Owner or Contractor or both do not sign all the Contract Documents, the Architect shall identifv such unsigned Documents upon request. §1.5.2 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents. §1.6 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS,SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE §1.6.1 The Drawings.Specifications and other documents, including those in electronic form,prepared by the Architect and the Architects consultants are Instruments of Service through which the Work to be executed by the Contractor is described.The Contractor may retain one record set. Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor. Sub-subcontractor or material or equipment supplier shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect or the Architect's consultants, and unless otherwise indicated the Architect and the Architect's consultants shall be deemed the authors of them and will retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights,in addition to the copyrights. All copies of Instruments of Service,except the Contractor's record set,shall be returned or suitably accounted for to the Architect,on request,upon completion of the Work.The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants,and copies thereof furnished to the Contractor, are for use solely with respect to this Project.They are not to be used by the Contractor or any Subcontractor,Sub-subcontractor or material or equipment supplier on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner,Architect and the Architect's consultants.The Contractor,Subcontractors,Sub-subcontractors and material or equipment suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Drawings,Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work under the Contract Documents. All copies made under this authorization shall bear the statutory copyright notice,if any,shown on the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants.Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect's or Architect's consultants'copyrights or other reserved rights. ARTICLE 2 OWNER §2.1 GENERAL §2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number.The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner's approval or authorization. Except as otherwise provided in Section 4.2.1, the Architect does not have such authority.The term"Owner" means the Owner or the Owner's authorized representative. §2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor within fifteen days after receipt of a written request,information necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice of or enforce mechanic's lien rights.Such information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located, usually referred to as the site,and the Owner's interest therein. §2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER §2.2.1 The Owner shall, at the written request of the Contractor, prior to commencement of the Work and thereafter, furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract.Furnishing of such evidence shall be a condition precedent to commencement or AIA Document A201 T"—1997.Copyright rJ 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961.1963.1966,1967,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIAx Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 11 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA3 Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:14:56 on 12'16/2004 under Order No.1000126387_1 which expires o0 6/29105,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3980913360) ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS §1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS §1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor(hereinafter the Agreement), Conditions of the Contract(General,Supplementary and other Conditions),Drawings,Specifications.Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract,other documents listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modification is(1)a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2)a Change Order,(3)a Construction Change Directive or(-l)a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect.Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement,the Contract Documents do not include other documents such as bidding requirements(advertisement or invitation to bid. Instructions to Bidders,sample forms, the Contractor's bid or portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements). §1.1.2 THE CONTRACT The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction.The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations,representations or agreements.either written or oral.The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification.The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind (1)between the Architect and Contractor, (2)between the Owner and a Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor. (3)between the Owner and Architect or(-t)between any persons or entities other than the Owner and Contractor.The Architect shall,however,be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect's duties. §1.1.3 THE WORK The term"Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents.whether completed or partially completed,and includes all other labor,materials,equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations.The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. §1.1.4 THE PROJECT The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole oowk or a pats and which may include construction by the Owner or by separate contractors. §1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work,generally including plans, elevations,sections,details, schedules and diagrams. §1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment,systems,standards and workmanship for the Work,and performance of related services. §1.1.7 THE PROJECT MANUAL The Project Manual is a volume assembled for the Work which may include the bidding requirements,sample forms,Conditions of the Contract and Specifications. §1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS §1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor.The Contract Documents are complementary,and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all;performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results. §1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles,and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. §1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words which have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright O 1911.1915,1918. 1925.1937,1951,1958,1961,1963.1966,1967,1970.1976. 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA4 Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 10 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:14:56 on 12/16/2004 under Order No.1000126387_1 which expires on 6;29%05,and is not for resaie. User Notes: (3980913360) ommommannomow L6.3.4.21,3.12.8, 3.14.2,4.1.2,4.3.4,4.6.4,9.3.2, 2.3,2.4, 3.3.1,3.9,3.12.9,3.12.10,4.3,4.4.8,4.6.5. 9.8.5,9.9.1,9.10 1 9.10.3, 11.4.1, 13.2, 13.4.2 5.2.1, 8.2.2,9.7,9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 1 1.1.3, 1 1.4.6. Written Interpretations 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 14 4.2.11,4.2.12,4.3.6 Written Orders Written Notice 1.1.1,2.3, 3.9,4.3.6,7,8.2.2, 11.4.9, 12.1, 123, 13.5.2, 14.3.1 AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright 1911,1915,1918,1925.1937,1951, 1958,1961,1963,1966,1967.1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 9 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AW' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:14:56 on 12/16/2004 under Order No.1000126387_1 which expires on 6129/05,and is not for resale. (3980913360) User Notes: 5 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE Subcontractors,Work by CONTRACT 1.2.2,3.3.2,3.12.1,42.3,5.2.3,53, 5.4,9.3.12. 14 9.6.7 Tests and Inspections Subcontractual Relations 3.1.3,3.3.3,4.2.2,4.2.6,4.2.9,9.42,9.S.3,9.9 2. 5.3,5.4,9.3.1.2,9.6,9.10 10.2.1, 11.4.7,11.4.8, 14.1. 9.10.1, 10.3.2, 11.4.1.1, 122.1.13.5 14.2.1,14.3.2 TI1NIE Submittals 8 1.6.3.10,3.11, 3.12,4.2.7,5.2.1, 5.2.3.7.3.6,9 2, Time,Delays and Extensions of 9.3, 9.8,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3, 11.1.3 32.3,4.3.1,4.3.4,4.3.7,4.4.5,52.3,7.2.1,7.3.1, Subrogation,Waivers of 7.4.1,8.3,9.5.1,9.7.1, 10.3.2, 10.6.1, 14.3.2 6.1.1, 11.4.5,11.4.7 Time Limits Substantial Completion 2.1.2,22,2.4,321,3.7.3, 3.10.3.11,3.12.5,3.15.1. 4.2.9, 8.1.1,8.1.3,8.2.3,9.4.2,9.8,9.9.1,9.10.3, 4.2,4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6, 5.2,5.3,5.4, 6.2.4, 73, 7.4, 9.10.4.2, 12.2, 13.7 82,9.2,9.3.1,9.3.3,9.4.1,9.5.9.6,9.7,9.8,9.9. Substantial Completion,Definition of 9.10, 11.1.3, 11.4.1.5, 11.4.6, 11.4.10, 122, 13.5, 9.8.1 13.7, 14 Substitution of Subcontractors Time Limits on Claims 5.2.3,5.2.4 4.3.2,4.3.4,4.3.8,4.4,4.5,4.6 Substitution of Architect Title to Work 4.1.3 9.3.2,9.3.3 Substitutions of Materials UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF 3.4.2,3.5.1,7.3.7 WORK Sub-subcontractor,Definition of 12 5.1 2 Uncovering of Work Subsurface Conditions 12.1 4.3.4 Unforeseen Conditions Successors and Assigns 43.4, 8.3.1, 10.3 13.2 Unit Prices Superintendent 4.3.9,7.3.3.2 3.9, 10.2.6 Use of Documents Supervision and Construction Procedures 1.1.1, 1.6,2.2.5,3.12.6,5.3 1.2.2,3.3,3.4,3.12.10,422,4.2.7,4.3.3,6.13, Use of Site 6.2.4,7.1.3,7.3.6,8.2,8.3.1,9.4.2, 10, 12, 14 3.13,6.1.1,6.2.1 Surety Values,Schedule of 4.4.7,5.4.1.2,9.8.5,9.102,9.10.3, 14.2.2 9.2,9.3.1 Surety,Consent of Waiver of Claims by the Architect 9.10.2,9.10.3 13.4.2 Surveys Waiver of Claims by the Contractor 2.2.3 4.3.10,9.10.5, 11.4.7, 13.4.2 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience Waiver of Claims by the Owner 14.4 4.3.10,9.9.3,9.10.3,9.10.4, 11.=4.3, 11.4.5, 11.4.7. Suspension of the Work 12.2.2.1, 13.4.2, 14.2.4 5.4.2, 14.3 Waiver of Consequential Damages Suspension or Termination of the Contract 4.3.10, 14.2.4 4.3.6,5.4.1.1, 11.4.9, 14 Waiver of Liens Taxes 9.10.21,9.10.4 3.6,3.8.2.1,7.3.6.4 Waivers of Subrogation Termination by the Contractor 6.1.1, 11.4.5, 11.4.7 4.3.10, 14.1 Warranty Termination by the Owner for Cause 3.5,4.2.9,4.3.5.3,9.3.3,9.8.4,9.9.1,9.10.4, 12.2.2, 4.3.10,5.4.1.1, 14.2 13.7.1.3 Termination of the Architect Weather Delays 4.1.3 4.3.7.2 Termination of the Contractor Work,Definition of 14.2.2 1.1.3 Written Consent AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright O 1911.1915.1918,1925.1937,1951,1958,1961,1963.1966,1967,1970,1976.1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIAx Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 8 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA'` Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:14:56 on 12'16/2004 under Order No.1000126387_1 which expires on 6/29/05,and is not for resale. U 39809133601 User Notes low Performance Bond and Payment Bond Review of COnU-IlCCOr'S Submittals by Owner and 7.3.6.4.9.6.7,9.10.3, 11.4.9, 11.5 Architect Permits,Fees and Notices 3.10.1,3.10.2,3.1 1,3.12,42, 5.2,6.1.3, 9 2,9.S.2 2.2.2,3.7, 3.13,7.3.6.4, 10.2.2 Review of Shop Drawings,Product Data and PERSONS AND PROPERTY,PROTECTION Samples by Contractor OF 3.12 10 Rights and Remedies 1.1.2,2.3,2.4,3.5.1,3.15.2,4.2.6,4.3.4,4.5, 4.6,5.3, Polychlorinated Biphenyl 5.4,6.1,6.3,7.3.1, 8.3,9.5.1, 9.7, 10.2.5, 10.3, 10.3.1 12.2.2, 12.2.4,13.4, 14 Product Data,Definition of Royalties,Patents and Copyrights 3.12.2 3.17 Product Data and Samples,Shop Drawings Rules and Notices for Arbitration 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 4.62 Progress and Completion Safety of Persons and Property 4.12,4.3.3,8.2,9.8,9.9.1, 14.1.4 10.2,10.6 Progress Payments Safety Precautions and Programs 4.3.3,9.3,9.6,9.8.5,9.10.3, 116, 14.23 3.3.1,4.2.2,4.2.7,5.3.1, 10.1, 10.2, 10.6 Project,Definition of the Samples,Definition of 1.1.4 3.12.3 Project Management Protective Liability Samples,Shop Drawings,Product Data and Insurance 3.1 l,3.12, 4.2.7 11.3 Samples at the Site,Documents and Project Manual,Definition of the 3.11 1.1.7 Schedule of Values Project Manuals 9.2,9.3.1 2.2.5 Schedules, Project Representatives 1.4.1.2,3.10,3.Construction12.1, 3.12.2,4.3.7.2, 4.2.10 6.1.3 Property Insurance Separate Contracts and Contractors 102.5,11.4 1.1.4,3.12.5,3.14.2,4.2.4,4.2.7,4.6.4,6,8.3.1, PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 11.4.7, 12.1.2, 12.2.5 10 Shop Drawings,Definition of Regulations and Laws 3.12.1 1.6,3.2.2,3.6,3.7,3.12.10.3.13,4.1.1,4.4.8,4.6, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples 9.6.4,9.9.1, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 3.11,3.12,42.7 13.5.2, 13.6, 14 Site,Use of Rejection of Work 3.13,6.1.1,6.2.1 3.5.1,4.2.6, 12.2.1 Site Inspections Releases and Waivers of Liens 1.2.2,3.2.1,3.3.3,3.7.1,4.2,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.10,1, 13.5 9.10.2 Site Visits,Architect's Representations 4.2.2,4.2.9,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.5.1,9.9.2,9.10.1, 13.5 1.5.2,3.5.1,3.12.6,6.2.2, 8.2.1,9.3.3,9.4.2,9.5.1, Special Inspections and Testing 9.8.2,9.10.1 4.2.6. 12.2.1, 13.5 Representatives Specifications,Definition of the 2.1.1,3.1.1,3.97 4.1.1,4.2.1,4.2.10,5.1.1,5.1.2, 1.1.6 13.2.1 Specifications,The Resolution of Claims and Disputes 1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.1.7, 1.2.2, 1.6,3.11,3.12.10,3.17 4.4,4.59 4.6 Statute of Limitations Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 4.6.3, 12.2.6, 13.7 3.3.2,3.18,4.2.3,4.3.8,5.3.1,6.1.3,6.2,6.3,9.5.1, Stopping the Work 10 2.3,4.3.6,9.7, 10.3, 14.1 Retainage Stored Materials 9.3.1,9.6.2,9.8.5,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3 6.2.1,9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4, 11.4.1.4 Review of Contract Documents and Field Subcontractor,Definition of Conditions by Contractor 5.1.1 1.5.2,3.2,3.7.3,3.12.7,6.1. SUBCONTRACTORS AIA Document A201 T"—1997.Copyright tD 1911, 1915,1918.1925.193%.1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1967,1970.1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIAA Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:14:56 on 12116/2004 under Order No.1000126387_1 which expires on 6/29105.and is not for resale. User Notes: (3980913360) OPK Nlatei ials, Labor,Equipment and 1.6, 2.1.1,2.3, 2.4, 3.4.2, 3.8.1, 1.12.10,3.14.2,4.1 2. 1.1.-1, 1.1.6, 1.6.1, 3.4, 3.5.1,3.8.2,3.8.2 3,31-12, 3.13, 4.1.3,42.4,42.9,4.3.6,4.4.7, 5.2.1.5.2.4, 5.4.1. 3.15,1, 4.2,6,4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 73.6, 9.3.2, 93.3, 6.1, 6.3, 7.2.1,7.3.1, 8.2.2, 8.3.1,9.3.1. 9.3.2.9.5.1. 9.5.1.3,9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.2 9.9-1,9.10.2, 10.3.2, 11-1.3, 11.3.1. 11.4.3, 11.4.10, Means.Methods,Techniques,Sequences and 12.2.2, 12.3.1, 13.2.2, 14.3, 14.4 Procedures of Construction Owners Financial Capability 3.3.1.3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,9.4.2 2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.5 Mechanic's Lien Owner's Liabilitv Insurance 4.4.8 11.2 Mediation Owner's Loss of Use Insurance 4.4.1,4.4.5,4.4.6,4.4.8,4.5,4.6.1,4.6.2, 8.3.1, 10.5 11.4.3 Minor Changes in the Work Owner Relationship with Subcontractors 1.1.1,3.12.8,4.2.8,4.3.6,7.1,7.4 1.1.2,5.2,5.3,5.4, 9.6.4, 9.10.2, 14.2.-) MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work 13 2.4,12.2.4. 14.2.2.2 Modifications,Definition of Owner's Right to Clean Up 1.1.1 6.3 Modifications to the Contract Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to 1.1.1, 1.1.2,3.7.3,3.1 1,4.1.2,4.2.1, 5.2.3,7. 8.3.1, Award Separate Contracts 9.7, 10.3.2, 11.4.1 6.1 Mutual Responsibility Owner's Right to Stop the Work 6.2 2.3 Nonconforming Work,Acceptance of Owners Right to Suspend the Work 9.6.6,9.9.3, 12.3 14.3 Nonconforming Work,Rejection and Correction of Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract 2.3,2.4,3.5.1,4.2.6,6.2.5,9.5.1,9.8.2,9.9.3,9.10.4, 14.2 12.2.1, 13.7.1.3 Ownership and Use of Drawings,Specifications Notice and Other Instruments of Service 2.2.1,2.3,2.4, 3.2.3,3.3.1,3.7.2, 3.7.4,3.12.9,4.3, 1.1.1, 1.6,2.2.5,3.2.1,3.11.1,3.17.1,4.2.12,5.3 44.8,4.6.5,5.2.1, 8.2.2,9.7,9.10, 10.2.2, 11.1.3, Partial Occupancy or Use 11.4.6, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 13.5.1, 115.2, 14.1, 14.2 9.6.6,9.9, 11.4.1.5 Notice,Written Patching,Cutting and 2.3,2.4,3.3.1,3.9, 3.12.9,3.12.10,43,4.4.8,4.6.5, 3.14,6.2.5 5.2.1,8.2.2,9.7,9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 11.4.6, Patents 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 14 3.17 Notice of Testing and Inspections Payment,Applications for 13.5.1, 13.5.2 4.2.5,7.3.8,9.2,9.3,9.4,9.5.1,9.6.3,9.7.1,9.8.5, Notice to Proceed 9.10.1,9.10.3,9.10.5, 11.1.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 8.2.2 Pavment.Certificates for Notices,Permits,Fees and 4.2.5,4.2.9,9.3.3,9.4,9.5,9.6.1,9.6-6,9.7.1,9.10.1, 2.2.2,3.7,3.13,7.3.6.4, 10.2.2 9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 Observations,Contractor's Payment,Failure of 1.5.2,3.2, 3.7.3,4.3.4 43.6,9.5.1.3,9.7,9.10.2, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2, 13.6 Occupancy Payment,Final 2.2.2,9.6.6,9.8, 11.4.1.5 4.2.1,4.2.9,4.3.2,9.8.2,9.10, 11-1.2, 11.1.3, 11.4.1, Orders,Written 11.4.5, 12.3.1, 13.7, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 1.1.1,2.3,3.9,4.3.6,7,8.2.2, 11.4.9, 12.1, 12.2, Payment Bond,Performance Bond and 13.5.2, 14.3.1 7.3.6.4, 9.6.7,9.103, 11.4.9, 11.5 OWNER Payments,Progress 2 4.3.3,9.3,9.6,9.8.5,9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3 Owner,Definition of PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 2.1 9 Owner,Information and Services Required of the Payments to Subcontractors 2.1 2.2.2,3.2.1,3.12.4,3.12.10,4.2.7,4.3.3,6.1.3, 5.4.2,9.5.1.3,9.6.2,9.6.3,9.6.4,9.6.7, 11.4.8, 6.1.4,6.2.5,9.3.2,9.6.1,9.6.4,9.9.2,9.103, 10.3.3, 14.2.1.2 11.2, 11.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14,1.4 PCB Owner's Authority 10,3.1 AIA Document A201 Im-1997.Copyright (D 1911,1915,1918, 1925, 1937,1951,1958,1961,1963 1966,1967.1970.1976.1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA" Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and international Treaties. 6 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:14:56 on 12/16i2004 under Order No.10001263871 which expires on 6/29/05,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3980913360) 1.1.3, 1.2.1, 1.2.12.2.3, 2.2.5,3.1,33,3.4,3.5, 3.7, Insurance,Project Management Protective 3.10, 3.11 3.14,4.2.2,4.2.3,4.3.3,6.2.17.1.3. 7.3.4. Liability 8.2,9.5,9.9.1. 10 2, 10.3, 12.2, 14.2, 143 11.3 Extensions of Time Insurance,Property 323,4.3.1.4.3.4,4.3.7,4.4.5,5.2.3,7.2.1,7.3,7.4.1, 10.2.5, 11.4 9.5.1,9.7.1, 10.3.2, 10.6.1, 14.3.2 Insurance,Stored Materials Failure of v 9.3.2, 11.4.1.4 4.3.6,9.5.1.3, 9.7,9.10.2, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2, 13.6 INSURANCE AND BONDS Faulty Work 11 (See Defective or Nonconforming Work) Insurance Companies,Consent to Partial Occupancy Final Completion and Final Payment 9.9.1, 11.4.1.5 4.21.1,4.2.9,43.2,9.8.2,9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.4.1 Insurance Companies,Settlement with 11.4.5, t 2.1.1, 13.7, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 11.4.10 Financial An•angements,Owner's Intent of the Contract Documents 22.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.5 1.2.1,4.2.7,4.2.12,4.2.13,7.4 Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance Interest 11.4 13.6 GENERAL PROVISIONS Interpretation 1 1.2.3, 1.4,4.1.1,4.3.1,5.1,6.1.2, 8.1.4 Governing Law Interpretations,Written 13.1 4.2.11,4.2.12,4.3.6 Guarantees(See Warranty) Joinder and Consolidation of Claims Required Hazardous Materials 4.6.4 10.2.4, 10.3, 10.5 Judgment on Final Award Identification of Contract Documents 4.6.6 1.5.1 Labor and Materials,Equipment Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers 1.13, 1.1.6,3.4,3.5.1,3.8.2,3.8.3,3.12, -,.1 1,3.15.1, 5.2.1 42.6,4.2.7,5.2.1,6.2.1,7.3.6, 93.2,9.3.3,9.5.1.3, Indemnification 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.22 3.17,3.18,9.10.2, 10.3.3, 10.5, 11.4.1.2, 11.4.7 Labor Disputes Information and Services Required of the Owner 8.3.1 2.1.?1.22,2.2,3.2.1,3.12.4,3.12.10,4.2.7,4.3.3,6.1. Laws and Regulations 6.1.4,6.2.5,9.3.2,9.6.1,9.6.4,9.9.2,9.10.3, 10.3-31. 1.6,32.2,3.6.3.7,3.12.10,3.1;,4.1.1,4.4.8,4.6, 11.2, 11.4, 13.5,1, 13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4 9.6.4,9.9.1, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, Injury or Damage to Person or Property 13.52, 13.6, 14 4.3.8,.10.2, 10.6 Liens Inspections 2.1.2,4.4.8,8.2.2,9.3.3,9.10 3.1.3,3.3.3, 3.7.1,4.2.2,4.2.6,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.8.2, Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder 9.8.3,9.9.2,9.10.1, 12.2.1, 13.5 4.6.4 Instructions to Bidders Limitations,Statutes of 1.1.1 4.6.3, 12.2.6, 13.7 Instructions to the Contractor Limitations of Liability 3.2.3, 3.3.1,3.8.1,4.2.8,5.2.1,7, 12,8.2.2, 13.5.2 2.3,3.2.1, 3.5.1,3.7.3,3.12.8, 1.12.10,3.17, 3.18, Insurance 4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.12,6.2.2,9.4.2,9.6.4, 9.6.7,9.10.4, 3.18.1,6.1.1,7.3.6, 8.2.1,9.3.2,9.8.4,9.9-1,9.10.2, 10.3.3, 10.2.5, 11.1.2, 11.2.1, 11.4.7, 12.2.5. 13.4.2 9.10.5, 11 Limitations of Time Insurance,Boiler and Machinery 2.1.2,2.2,2.4,3.2.1,3.7.3,3.10,3.11,3.12.5,3.15.1, 11.4.2 4.2.7,4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6,5.2,5.3, 5.4.6.2.4,7.3,7.41 Insurance,Contractor's Liability 8.2,9.2,9.3.1,93.3,9.4.1,9.5,9.6,9.7,9.8,9.9, 11.1 9.10, 11.1.3, 11.4.1.5, 11.4.6, 11.4.10, 12.2. 13.5, Insurance,Effective Date of 13.7, 14 8.2.2, 11.1.2 Loss of Use Insurance Insurance,Loss of Use 11.4.3 11.4.3 Material Suppliers Insurance,Owner's Liability 1.6,3.12.1,4.2.4,4.2.6,52.1.9.3,9.4.2,9.6.9.10.5 11.2 Materials, Hazardous 10.2.4, 103, 10.5 AIA Document A201 TM-1997.Copyright (D 1911.1915,1918.1925.1937.1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1967,1970.1976,1987 and 1997 by The A" Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and Inter American institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This Al national Treaties. 5 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:14:56 on 1211 6;2004 under Orcer No.1000126387 1 which expires on 6/29,!05,and is not for resale. (3980913360) User Notes: 3.3.2.3.4.3,3.8.1,3.9. 3.18.2,4.2.3,42.6, 10.2, 10.3. 6.2.5,3.14 1 1.1.1, 11.4.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1, Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate Contractor's Liability Insurance Contractors 11.1 3.14.2,6.2.4,9.2.1.5, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.6, 11.1. Contractor's Relationship with Separate Contractors 1 1.4, 12 2.4 and Owner's Forces Damage to the Work 3.12.5,3.14.2,4.2.4.6, 11.4.7, 12.1.2, 12.2.4 3.14.2, 9.9.1, 10.2.1.2, 102.5, 10.6, 11.4, 12.2.4 Contractor's Relationship with Subcontractors Damages,Claims for 1.2.2,3.3.2,3.18.1,3.182,5,9.6.2,9.6.7,9.10.2, 3.23,3.18,4.3.10,6.1.1, 8.3.3,9.5.1,9.6.7. 10.3.3, 11.4.1.2, 11.4.7, 11.4.8 1 1.1.1, 11.4.5, 1 l.4.7, 14.13, 14.2.4 Contractor's Relationship with the Architect Damages for Delay 1.1.2, 1.6,3.1.3,32.1,3.2.2,3.2.3,3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5.1, 6.1.1, 8.3.3,9.5.1.6, 9.7, 10.32 3.7.3, 3.10,3.11,3.12,3.16,3.18, 4.1.2,4.1.3,4.2, Date of Commencement of the Work,Definition of 4.3.4,4.4.1,4.4.7,52,6.22,7,8.3.1,9.2,9.3,9.4, 8.12 9.5,9.7,9.8,9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 1 1.3, 11.4.7, 12, Date of Substantial Completion,Definition of 13.4.2, 13.5 8.1.3 Contractor's Representations Day.Definition of 1.5.2,3.5.1,3.12.6,6.2.2, 8.2.1,9.3.3,9.8.2 8.1.4 Contractor's Responsibility for Those Performing the Decisions of the Architect Work 42.6,4.2.7,4.2.11,4.2.12,4.113,4.3.4,4.4.1,4.4.5, 3.3.2, 3.18,4.2.3,4.3.8,5.3.1,6.1.3,6.2,6.3, 9.5.1, 4.4.6,4.5,6.3,7.3.6,7.3.8,8.1.3,8.3.1,9.2, 9.4, 10 9.5.1,9.8.4, 9.9.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4 Contractor's Review of Contract Documents Decisions to Withhold Certification 1.5.2,3.2,3.7.3 9.4.1,9.5,9.7, 14.1.1.3 Contractor's Right to Stop the Work Defective or Nonconforming Work,Acceptance, 9.7 Rejection and Correction of Contractor's Right to Tertninate the Contract 23.14,3.5.1,4 2.6,6.2.5,9.5.1,9.5.2,9.6.6,9.8.2, 4.3.10, 14.1 9.9.3,9.10.4, 12.2.1, 13.7.1.3 Contractor's Submittals Defective Work,Definition of 3.10,3.11,3.12,4.2.7,5.2.1,52.3,7.3.6,9.2,9.3, 3.5.1 9.8.2,9.8.3,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3, 11.1.3, 11.5.2 Definitions Contractor's Superintendent 1.1,2.1.1, 3.1,3.5.1.3.12.1,3.12.2,3.12.3,4.1.1, 3.9, 10.2.6 4.3.1,5.1, 6.1.2,7.2.1,7.3.1,7.3.6, 8.1, 9.1,9.8.1 Contractor's Supervision and Construction Delays and Extensions of Time Procedures 3.2.3,4.3.1,4.3.4,4.3.7,4.4.5,5.2.3. 7.21.1,7.3.1, 1.2.2, 3.3,3.4,3.12.10,42.2,4.2.7,4.3.3,6.1.3, 7.4.1,8.3, 9.5.11 9.7.1, 10.3.2, 10.6.1, 14.3.2 6.2.4,7.1.3,7.3.4,7.16,82, 10, 12, 14 Disputes Contractual Liability Insurance 4.1.4,=4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6,63,7.3.8 11.1.1.8, 11.2, 11.3 Documents and Samples at the Site Coordination and Correlation 3.11 1 2, 1.5.2,3.3.1,3.10,3.116,6.1.3,6.2.1 Drawings,Definition of Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications 1.1.5 1.6,2.2.5,3.11 Drawings and Specifications,Use and Ownership of Copyrights 1.1.1, 1.3,2.2.5,3.11,5.3 1.6,3.17 Effective Date of Insurance Correction of Work 8.22, 11.1.2 23,2.4,17.4,4.2.1,9.4.2,9.8.2,9.8.3,9.9.1, 12.1.2, Emergencies 12.2, 13.7.1.3 4.3.5, 10.6, 14.1.1.2 Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents Employees.Contractor's 1.2 3.3.2,3.4.3,3.8.1,3.9,3.182,4.2.3,4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3, Cost,Definition of 11.1.1, 11.4.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1 7.3.6 Equipment,Labor,Materials and Costs 1.1.3, 1.1.6,3.4,3.5.1,3.8.2,3.83,3.12,3.13,3.15.1, 2.4,3.2.3,3.7.4,3.8.2,3.15.2,43,5.4.2,6.1.1,6.2.3, 42.6,4.2.7.52.1,6.2.1,7.3.6, 9.32,9.3.3,9.5.1.3, 7.3.3.3,7.3.6,7.3.7,7.3.8,9.10.2, 10.3.2, 10.5, 11.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.I, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.2 1 1.4. 12.1, 12.2.1. 122.4, 13.5, 14 Execution and Progress of the Work Cutting and Patching AIA Document A201 T"—1997.Copyright G 1911,1915,1918, 1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1967,1970,1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA" Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 4 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA'' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:14:56 on 12'16.2004 under Order No.1000126387_1 which expires on 6/29/05,and is not for resale. User Notes: 13980913360; 9.8.3.9.8.4,9.8.5 1.6.1, 3.2.2,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,4.1.1,4.4.8,4.6.4, Certificates for Payment 4.6.6,9.6.4, 10.2.2, 1 1.1, 1 1.4, 13.1, 13.4. 13.5.1, 4.2.5,4.2.9,9.3.3,9.4,9.5,9.6.1, 9.6.6.9.7.1.9.10.1. 13.5.2, 13.6, 14.1.1, 142.1.3 9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions Certificates of Inspection,Testin;or Approval 4.3.4,8.3.1, 10.3 13,5.4 Conditions of the Contract Certificates of Insurance 1.1.1, 1.1.7,6.1.1,6.1.4 9.10.2, 11.1.3 Consent,Written Change Orders 1.6,3.4.2, 3.12.8,3.14.2,4.1.2,4.3.4,4.6.4,93.2, 1.1.1,2.4.1,3.4.2,3.8.2.3,3.11.1, 3.12.8.42.8,4.3.4, 9.8.5,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3. 11.4.1, 1-33.2, 13.4.2 4.3.9,5.2.3,7.1,7.2,73, 8.3.1,9.3.1.1,9.10.3, CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY 11.4.12, 11.4.4, 11.4.9, 12.1.2 SEPARATE CONTRACTORS Change Orders,Definition of 1.1.4,6 7,2,1 Construction Change Directive,Definition of CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.3.1 3.11,4.2.8,7, 8.3.1,9.3.1.1, 11.4.9 Construction Change Directives Claim,Definition of 1.1.1,3.12.8,4.2.8,4.3.9,7.1,7.3,9.3.1.1 4.3.1 Construction Schedules,Contractor's Claims and Disputes 1.4.1.2, 3.10,3.12.1,3.12.2 4.3.7.2,6.1.3 3.2.3,4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6,6.1.1,63,7.3.8.9.3.3,9.10.4, Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts 10.3.3 5.4,14.2 2.2 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims Continuing Contract Performance 4.6.5 4.3.3 Claims for Additional Cost Contract,Definition of 3.23,4.3.4,4.3.5,43.6,6.1.1,7.3.8, 10.3.2 1.1.2 Claims for Additional Time CONTRACT,TERMINATION OR 32.3,4.3.4,43.7,6.1.1, 8.3.2, 10.3.2 SUSPENSION OF THE Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions 5.4.1.1, 11.4.9. 14 4.3.4 Contract Administration Claims for Damages 3.1.3,4,9.4,9.5 3.2.3,3.18,4.3.10,6.1.1,8.3.3,9.5.1,9.6.7, 10.3.3, Contract Award and Execution,Conditions Relating 11.1.1, 11.4.5, 11.4.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4 to Claims Subject to Arbitration 3.7.1,3.10,5.16.1, 11.1.3, 11.4.6, 11.5.1 4.4.1.4.5.11 4.6.1 Contract Documents,The Cleaning Up 1.1,1.2 3.15,6.3 Contract Documents,Copies Furnished and Use of Commencement of Statutory Limitation Period 1.6,225,5.3 13.7 Contract Documents,Definition of Commencement of the Work,Conditions Relating to 1.1.1 2.2.1,3.2.1,3.4.1,3.7.1,3.10.1.3.12.6,4.3.5,5.2.1, Contract Sum 5.2.3,6.2.2,8.1.2,8.2.2,8.3.1, 11.1, 11.4.1, 11.4.6, 3.8,4.3.4,4.3.5,4.4.5,5.2.3,72,7.3,7.4,9.1,9.4.2, 1 1.5.1 9.5.1.4,9.6.7,9.7, 10.32, 11.4.1, 143.4, 14.3.2 Commencement of the Work,Definition of Contract Sum,Definition of 8.1.2 9.1 Communications Facilitating Contract Contract Time Administration 4.3.4,4.3.7,4.4.5,52.3,7.2.1.3,7.3,7.4,8.1.1,8.2, 3.9.1,4.2.4 8.3.1,9.5.1,9.7, 10.3.2, 12.1.1, 14.3.2 Completion,Conditions Relating to Contract Time,Definition of 1.6.1,3.4.1,3.11,3.15,4.2.2,4.2.9,8.2,9.4.2,9.8, 8.1.1 9.9.1,9.10, 12.2, 13.7, 14.1.2 CONTRACTOR COMPLETION,PAYMENTS AND 3 9 Contractor,Definition of Completion,Substantial 3.1,6.1.2 4.2.9,8.1.1,8.1.3, 8.2.3,9.42,9.8,9.9.1, 9.10.3, Contractor's Construction Schedules 9.10.4.2, 12.2, 13.7 1.4.1.2,3.10, 3.12.1,3.12.2,4.3.7.2,6.1.3 Compliance with Laws Contractor's Employees > AIA Document A20 1T"—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915.1918,1925.1937.1951,1958.1961,1963.1966.1967,1970.1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA` Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 3 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:14:56 on 12/16/2004 under Order No.1000126387_1 which expires on 6,29;05,and is not for resale. (3980913360) User Notes: INDEX 3.1.3,4.2,4.3.4,4.4,9.4,9.5 (Numbers and Topics in Bold are Section Headings) Architect's Approvals 2.4, 3.1.3,3.5.1,3.102,4.2.7 Acceptance of Nonconforming Work Architect's Authority to Reject Work 9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3 3.5.1,4.2.6, 12.1.2, 12 2.1 Acceptance of Work Architect's Copyright 9.6.6,9.8.2,9.9.3,9.10.1,9.10.3, 12.3 1.6 Access to Work Architect's Decisions 3.16,62.1,12.1 4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.11,4.2.12,4.2.13,4.3.4,4.4.1,4.4.5, Accident Prevention 4.4.6,4.5, 63,7.3.6,7.3.8,8.1.3, 8.3.1,9.2,9.4, 4.2.3, 10 9.5.1,9.8.4,9.9.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2. 142.4 Acts and Omissions Architect's Inspections 3.2,3.3.2,3.12.8,3.18,4.2.3,43.8,4.4.1,8.3.1, 4.2.2,4.2.9,4.3.4,9.42.9.83,9.9.2.9.10.1, 13.5 9.5.1. 10.2.5, 13.4.2, 13.7, 14.1 Architect's Instructions Addenda 3.2.3,3.3.1,4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.8,7.4.1, 12.1, 13.5.2 1.1.1,3.11 Architect's Interpretations Additional Costs,Claims for 4.2.11,4.2.12,4.3.6 4.3.4,4.3.5,4.3.6,6.1.1, 10.3 Architect's Project Representative Additional Inspections and Testing 4.2.10 9.8.3, 12.2.1, 13.5 Architect's Relationship with Contractor Additional Time.Claims for 1.1.2, 1.6,3.1.3,32.1,32.2,3.2.3,3.3.1,3.4.2,3.5.1, 4.3.4,4.3.7,8.3.2 3.7.3,3.10,3.11,3.12,3.16,3.18,4.12,4.1.3,4.2, ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.3.4,4.4.1,4.4.7,5 2,62.2, 7,8.3.1.9.19.3, 9.4, 3.1.3,4,9.4,9.5 9.5,9.7,9.8,9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 11.4.7, 12, Advertisement or Invitation to Bid 13.4.2, 13.5 1.1.1 Architect's Relationship with Subcontractors Aesthetic Effect 1.1. 4.2.3,4.2.4,4.2.6,9.6.3,9.6.4, 11.4.7 4.2.13,4.5.1 Architect's Representations Allowances 9.4.2,9.5.1,9.10.1 3,8 Architect's Site Visits All-risk Insurance 4.2.2,4.2.5,4.2.9,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.5.1,9.9.2,9.10.1, 11.4.1.1 13.5 Applications for Payment Asbestos 4.2.5,7.3.8,9.2,9.3,9.4,9.5.1,9.6.3,9.7.1,9.8.5, 10.3.1 9.10, 11.1.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Attorneys' Fees Approvals 3.18.1,9.10.2, 10.3.3 2.4,3.1.3,3.5,3.10.2,3.12,4.2.7,9.3.2, 13.4.2, 13.5 Award of Separate Contracts Arbitration 6.1.1,6.1.2 4.3.3,4.4,4.5.1,4.5.2,4.6,8.3.1,9.7.1, 11.4.9, Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for 11.4.10 Portions of the Work Architect 5.2 4.1 Basic Definitions Architect,Definition of 1.1 4.1.1 Bidding Requirements Architect,Extent of Authority 1.1.1, 1.1.7,5.2.1, 11.5.1 2.4,3.12.7,4.2,4.3.6,4.4,5.2,6.3,7.1.2,7.3.6,7.4, Boiler and Machinery Insurance 92,9.3.1,9.4,9.5,9.8.3,9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.1, 12.2.1, 11.4.2 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14 2.4 Bonds,Lien Architect,Limitations of Authority and 9.10.2 Responsibility Bonds,Performance,and Payment 2.1.1,3.3.3,3.12.4,3.12.8,3.12.10,4.1.2,4.2.1, 7.3.6.4,9.6.7,9.10.37 11.4.9, 11.5 42.2,42.3,4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.10,4.2.12,42.13,4.4, Building Permit 52.1, 7.4,9.4.2,9.6.4,9.6.6 3.7.1 Architect's Additional Services and Expenses Capitalization 2.4, 11.4.1.1, 12.2.1, 13.5.2, 13.5.3, 142.4 1.3 ate` Architect's Administration of the Contract Certificate of Substantial Completion AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright Oc 191 1,1915,1918.1925.1937.1951,1958,1961,1963.1966,1967.1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA" Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 2 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA'` Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:14:56 on 12/16.12004 under Order No.1 0001 26387_1 which expires on 6/29,05,and is not for resa e. User Notes: (3980913360) Oft- TM Document A201 - 1997 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction for the following PROJECT: (Nance and location or address): Country Lane Estates THE OWNER: ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: (Name and address): The author of this document has Meadowbrook Preservation Associates,Limited Partnership added information needed for its c/o Preservation of Affordable Housing,Inc. completion.The author may also 40 Court Street, Suite 650 have revised the text of the Boston,MA 02108 original AIA standard form.An Additions and Deletions Report THE ARCHITECT: that notes added information as (IVarne and address): well as revisions to the standard Dietz&Company Architects,Inc.,Close Corporation form text is available from the 17 Hampden Street author and should be reviewed. Springfield,MA 01103 A vertical line in the left margin of this document indicates where the author has added necessary TABLE OF ARTICLES information and where the author has added to or deleted from the 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS original AIA text. This document has important 2 OWNER legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney 3 CONTRACTOR is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification. 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT This document has been approved and endorsed by The 5 SUBCONTRACTORS Associated General Contractors of America 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 8 TIME 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918.1925.1937,1951,1958,1961.1963,1966,1967.1970.1976.1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA& Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 1 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA" Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:14:56 on 1 a,16/2004 under Order No.1000126387_1 which expires on 6/29/05,and is not for resale. (3980913360) User Notes: This Agreement is entered into as of the day and year first written above and is executed in at least three original copies, of which one is to be delivered to the Contractor, one to the Architect for use in the administration of the Contract, and the remainder to the Owner. OWNER (Signature) CONTRACTOR (Signature) (Printed name and title) (Printed name(11761 title) AIA Document A101- - 1997. Copyright It 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1959, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1976, 1977, 1980, 1987, 1991 and A11 rights reserved. 6 _ T.-S a:a: ..a5 ter .�-.a`, a_ -Y. -. >P. �. .0._ _4 _.._^.2r ,._�_- .:.. __ _ ...�_.. ..SO1'_ ._ � _,-� r 1C..'j _. ....: -.._ -a-__• ______ _ User Notes: Boston, MA, 02108 :.1 §7.4 The Contractor's representative is: (Name, address and other information) §7.5 Neither the Owner's nor the Contractor's representative shall be changed without ten days written notice to the other party. §7.6 Other provisions: ARTICLE 8 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS §8.1 The Contract Documents, except for Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement, are enumerated as follows: §8.1.1 The Agreement is this executed 1997 edition of the Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor, AIA Document A101-1997. §8.1.2 The General Conditions are the 1997 edition of the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201-1997. §8.1.3 The Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract are those contained in the Project Manual dated and are as follows Document Title Pages §8.1.4 The Specifications are those contained in the Project Manual dated as in Section 8.1.3, and are as follows: (Either list the Specifications here or refer to an exhibit attached to this Agreement.) Titl6of Spec ficattons rxhtb t §8.1.5 The Drawings are as follows, and are dated unless a different date is shown below.: (Either list the Drawings here or refer to an exhibit attached to this Agreement.) Title of DraFV�n�s exibit ' §8.1.6 The Addenda, if any,are as follows: Number Date Pages Yli Portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements are not part of the Contract Documents unless the bidding requirements are also enumerated in this Article 8. §8.1.7 Other documents, if any,forming part of the Contract Documents are as follows: (List here anv additional documents that are intended to form part of the Contract Documents. AIA Document'1201- 1997 provides that bidding requirements such cis advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms and the Contractor's bid are not part of the Contract Documents unless enumerated in this Agreement. They should be listed here only if intended to be part of the Contract Documents.) AIA Document A101' - 1997. Copyright D 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1980, 1987, 1991 and 1997 r All rights reserved. .. ___c' was nr_j-u ...-. ....__ _„ !..._. Notes: .2 Add, if final completion of the Work is thereafter materially delayed throu-h no fault of the Contractor. any additional amounts payable in accordance with Section 9.10.3 of AIA Document A201-1997. §5.1.8 Reduction or limitation of retainage, if any, shall be as follows: (If it is intended,prior to Substantial Completion of the entire 14'ork, to reduce or limit the retainage resrrltingfiorn the percentages inserted in,Sections.1.1.6.1 and 5.1.61 above, and this is not a plained else'irhere in the C0)711-aCf Documents, insert here provisions for such reduction or limitation.) §5.1.9 Except with the Owner's prior approval, the Contractor shall not make advance payments to suppliers for materials or equipment which have not been delivered and stored at the site. §5.2 FINAL PAYMENT §5.2.1 Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, shall be made by the Owner to the Contractor when: .1 the Contractor has fully performed the Contract except for the Contractor's responsibility to correct Work as provided in Section 12.2.2 of AIA Document A201-1997, and to satisfy other requirements, if any, which extend beyond final payment;and .2 a final Certificate for Payment has been issued by the Architect. §5.2.2 The Owner's final payment to the Contractor shall be made no later than 30 days after the issuance of the Architect's final Certificate for Payment, or as follows: ARTICLE 6 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION §6.1 The Contract may be terminated by the Owner or the Contractor as provided in Article 14 of AIA Document A201-1997. §6.2 The Work may be suspended by the Owner as provided in Article 14 of AIA Document A201-1997. ARTICLE 7 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS §7.1 Where reference is made in this Agreement to a provision of AIA Document A201-1997 or another,Contract Document,the reference refers to that provision as amended or supplemented by other provisions of the Contract Documents. §7.2 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the rate stated below,or in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. (Insert rate of interest agreed upon, if any.) << a e'1'annuzp ' (Usury laws and requirements under the Federal Truth in Lending Act, similar state and local consumer,credit laws and other regulations at the Owner's and Contractor's principal places of business, the locatiop-of the Project and elsewhere may affect the validity of this provision. Legal advice should be obtained with respect to deletions or• modifications, and also regarding requirements such as written disclosures or waivers.) §7.3 The Owner's representative is: (Name, address and other information) clo Preservation ofAffordabte Housing,Inc. 40 Court Street,Suite 650 AIA Document A101° - 1997. Copyright 3 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1980, 1967, 1991 and la7 All rights reserved. - User Notes: ---- §4.3 Unit prices, if any, are as follows: Description Units Price($0.00) ARTICLE 5 PAYMENTS §5.1 PROGRESS PAYMENTS §5.1.1 Based upon Applications for Payment submitted to the Architect by the Contractor and Certificates for Payment issued by the Architect,the Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Sum to the Contractor as provided below and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. §5.1.2 The period covered by each Application for Payment shall be one calendar month ending on-the last day of the month, or as follows: �. §5.1.3 Provided that an Application for Payment is received by the Architect not later than the day of a month, the Owner shall make payment to the Contractor not later than the day of the same month.If an Application for Payment is received by the Architect after the application date fixed above, payment shall be made by the Owner not later than ( k )days after the Architect receives the Application for Payment. §5.1.4 Each Application for Payment shall be based on the most recent schedule of values submitted by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. The schedule of values shall allocate the entire Contract Sum among the various portions of the Work.The schedule of values shall be prepared in such-form,andsupported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule,unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. §5.1.5 Applications for Pavment shall indicate the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment. §5.1.6 Subject to other provisions of the Contract Documents,the amount of each progress payraent.shall be computed as follows: .1 Take that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to completed Work as determined by multiplying the percentage completion of each portion of the Work by the share of the Contract Sum allocated to that portion of the Work in the schedule of values, less retainage of ( `=). Pending final determination of cost to the Owner of changes in the Work, amounts not in dispute shall be included as provided in Section 7.3.8 of AIA Document A201-1997; , .2 Add that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the completed construction(or, if approved in advance by the Owner, suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing), Tess retainage of .3 Subtract the aggregate of previous payments made by the Owner; and .4 Subtract amounts, if any,for which the Architect has withheld or nullified a Certificate for Payment as provided in Section 9.5 of AIA Document A201-1997. � §5.1.7 The progress payment amount determined in accordance with Section 5.1.6 shall be further modified under the following circumstances: .1 Add,upon Substantial Completion of the Work,a sum sufficient to increase the total payments to the full amount of the Contract Sum, less such amounts as the Architect shall determine for incomplete Work,retainage applicable to such work and unsettled claims; and (Section 9.8.5 of,41,4 Document,4201-1997 requires release of applicable retain age upon Substantial Completion of Work with consent of surety, if any.) AIA Document A101" - 1997. Copyright g) 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1980, 1987, 1991 and 1997 All rights reserved. 7n �rafl was prcduz�d F User Notes: ARTICLE 1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents consist of this Agreement, Conditions of the Contract(General. Supplementary and other PW Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of this Agreement, other documents listed in this Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement;these form the Contract, and are as fully a part of the Contract as if attached to this Agreement or repeated herein. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. An enumeration of the Contract Documents, other than Modifications, appears in Article 8. ARTICLE 2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT The Contractor shall fully execute the Work described in the Contract Documents, except to the extent specifically indicated in the Contract Documents to be the responsibility of others. � � ARTICLE 3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION §3.1 The date of commencement of the Work shall be the date of this Agreement unless a different date is stated below or provision is made for the date to be fixed in a notice to proceed issued by the Owner.' (Insert the date of commencement if it differs from the date of this Agreement or, if applicable,state that the date will beJixed in a notice to proceed.) If, prior to the commencement of the Work,the Owner requires time to file mortgages, mechanic's liens and other security interests,the Owner's time requirement shall be as follows:`° §3.2 The Contract Time shall be measured from the date of commencement. §3.3 The Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the entire Work not later than days s-from the—date of_ commencement,or as follows: (Insert number of calendar days. Alternatively, a calendar date may be used when coordinatedivitb the date of commencement. Unless stated elsewhere in the Contract Documents, insert any requirements for earlier Substantial Completion of certain portions of the Work) h Portion of Work Substantial Completion Date subject to adjustments of this Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents. (Insert provisions, if arty,for liquidated damages relating to failure to complete on time or for bonus payruents for early completion of the Work.) ARTICLE 4 CONTRACT SUM §4.1 The Owner shall pay the Contractor the Contract Sum in current funds for the Contractor's performance of the Contract. The Contract Sum shall be (S " ;), subject to additions and deductions as provided in the-Contract- Documents. §4.2 The Contract Sum is based upon the following alternates, if any, which are described in the Contract Documents and are hereby accepted by the Owner: (State the numbers or other identification of accepted alternates. If decisions on other alternates are to be made by the Owner subsequent to the execution of this Agreement, attach a schedule of such other alternates showing the amount for each and the date lrhen that amount expires) AIA Document A101p - 1997. Copyright 't 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1980, 1987, 1991 and 1957 t `-- _ -.ez All rights reserved. . as pr..d—ed __. _. Crt :/ 9 .S, 3 _� User votes: - - AIA Document A101 ' - 1997 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a STIPULATED SUM AGREEMENT made as of the day of in the%ear of (In~words, indicate dav, month and year) BETWEEN the Owner: (Name, address and other information) Meadowbrook Preservation Associates,,Limited Partnership c/o,,.Preservation of Affordable Housin ;Tnc ADDITIONS arm-.DELETZONS 40 Court Street;:Suifl 650 has u r as �oc_ _,._ The author of th Boston,MA,0210$ ` �. added nfo m t -' < neededdforrits completion. The author may also .._ , revised the text of the and the Contractor: 'o^ig nal°AIA standara< f^r (Name, address and other information) An Additions and De'etors Report that notes added Keith ConstrUCtion information as-well as 5')2 Page Street reviaionsY to the standar_' Stoughton', 02072 form text° is available the author and should reviewed. This document"has impc=-ant The Project is: legal consequences. (Name and location) Consultation with an -is attorney _encou-agea to Gauntry La►e Estates respect--to its completl_n or modification. The Architect is: AIA Document A2.0 -199 (,Vaine, address and other information) `General Conditions of the Contract for Constructlon, Dietz&`Company"Architects,Inc.,.Close"Corporation i5 adopted in this dcc , ,^ reference. Do apt 17,Hampden Streetf" Springfield,MA. '1©3• With other general -� conditions`un1ess *_his Telphone,Numb,&:Al -733 6798: documenta-s-modified. Fax Number X413 732 4385 �. ,. �_. m _ This document has been The Owner and Contractor a_ree as follows. approved and endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America. ELECTRONIC COPYING of an oortion of this AIA Docu:merc to another electronic fi=e prohibited and constitutes V4 olation of copyright la•fis as set forth in the fop'°__- this document. AIA Document A10— - 1997. Copyright 1915, 1919, 1925, 1537, 1951, 1959, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1980, 1987, 1991 and 1997 ;. All rights reser•.ed 1 prod by -._.. a2r Notes: Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12350.............KITCHEN AND BATHROOM CASEWORK................................................ ........................................ 3 DIVISION 13 —SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 14- CONVEYING SYSTEMS 14240.............PLATFORM LIFT.................................................................................................... ........................................ 3 DIVISION IS - MECHANICAL 15400.............PLUMBING.............................................................................................................. ........................................10 15600.............HVAC........................................................................................................................ ........................................10 DIVISION 16- ELECTRICAL 16100.............ELECTRICAL........................................................................................................... ........................................10 END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS......................... .........Page 3 ...................................................................................................................... Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. DIVISION 4- MASONRY NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 5 - METALS 05500.............METAL FABRICATIONS..................................................................................... ........................................20 DIVISION 6 -WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100.............ROUGH CARPENTRY........................................................................................ ........................................ 4 06402.............FINISH CARPENTRY............................................................................................ ........................................ 9 DIVISION 7 -THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07210.............BUILDING INSULATION................................................................................... ........................................ 5 07311.............ASPHALT SHINGLES............................................................................................ ........................................ 8 07450.............CEMENT BOARD SIDING................................................................................. ........................................ 8 07460.............VINYL SIDING....................................................................................................... ........................................ 8 07620.............SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM.......................................................... ........................................ 9 07842.............FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS...................................................................... ........................................ 7 07920.............JOINT SEALANTS................................................................................................. ........................................ 7 DIVISION 8- DOORS AND WINDOWS 08000.............DOOR SCHEDULE............................................................................................... ........................................ 2 08110.............STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES.......................................................................... ........................................ 5 08210.............FLUSH WOOD DOORS..................................................................................... ........................................ 4 "* 08260.............SLIDING VINYL FRAMED PATIO DOORS................................................... ........................................ 8 08390.............ALUMINUM SCREEN AND STORM DOORS............................................. ........................................ 5 08560.............VINYL WINDOWS............................................................................................... ........................................ 8 08600.............WINDOW SCHEDULE....................................................................................... ........................................ 2 08711.............DOOR HARDWARE........................................................................................... ........................................ 7 08800.............GLAZING................................................................................................................ ........................................ 7 DIVISION 9—FINISHES 09000.............FINISH SCHEDULE............................................................................................... ........................................TBD 09250.............GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES......................................................................... ........................................13 09310.............CERAMIC TILE....................................................................................................... ........................................ 9 09650.............RESILIENT FLOORING....................................................................................... ........................................ 6 09680.............CARPETING........................................................................................................... ........................................ 4 09911.............EXTERIOR PAINTING......................................................................................... ........................................10 09912.............INTERIOR PAINTING......................................................................................... ........................................10 DIVISION 10 -SPECIALTIES 10425.............SIGNS........................................................................................................................ ........................................ 3 10530.............AWNINGS.............................................................................................................. ........................................ 3 10550.............POSTAL SPECIALTIES.......................................................................................... ........................................ 3 10800.............TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES............................................................... ........................................ 4 DIVISION I I - EQUIPMENT 11451.............RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES.............................................................................. ........................................ 3 TABLEOF CONTENTS........................................................................................................................................................Page 2 Country Lane Estates December 16, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. TABLE OF CONTENTS Division.........Section Title......................................................................................................................................................Pa es SERIES 0 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND CONTRACT FORMS 00001.............Title Page.................................................................................................................. ........................................ 1 00002.............Table of Contents.................................................................................................. ........................................ 2 CON..............OWNER CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT (AIA DOCUMENT A101 — 1997 EDITION)............ 6 CON..............GENERAL CONDITIONS (AIA DOCUMENT A201 - 1997 EDITION)......................................... 39 CON..............SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS......................................................................................12 CON..............FEDERAL PREVAILING WAGE RATES SCHEDULE............................................................................ TBD DIVISION I - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 100.............SUMMARY............................................................................................................... ........................................ 3 01 1 12.............MATRIX OF WORK ITEMS............................................................................... ........................................ 1 01 140.............WORK RESTRICTIONS...................................................................................... ........................................11 01250.............CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES........................................... ........................................ 3 01290.............PAYMENT PROCEDURES.................................................................................. ........................................ 4 01310.............PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION................................ ........................................ 5 ........................CSI SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS LIST................................................................................ 1 01320.............CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION............................... ........................................ 6 01330.............SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES............................................................................... ........................................ 9 ........................CSI SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL FORM................................................................................................. I ........................CSI SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM.................................................................................................... 2 " 01400.............QUALITY REQUIREMENTS............................................................................... ........................................ 7 01420.............REFERENCES.......................................................................................................... ........................................ 3 01500.............TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS.............................................. ........................................ 7 01600.............PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS............................................................................ ........................................ 6 01700.............EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS........................................................................ ........................................ 7 01731.............CUTTING AND PATCHING............................................................................ ........................................ 3 01732.............SELECTIVE DEMOLITION.................................................................................. ........................................ 5 01770.............CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES............................................................................... ........................................ 4 01781.............PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS......................................................................................................... 4 01782.............OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA......................................................................................... 7 01820.............DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING.................................................................................................... 5 DIVISION 2 -SITE CONSTRUCTION 02080.............ASBESTOS ABATEMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION.................................................................25 02100.............SITE DEMOLITION, CLEARING & GRUBBING................................................................................... 3 02150.............EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL................................................................................................ 6 02200.............EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING............................................................................................12 02300.............STORM DRAINAGE............................................................................................. ........................................12 02600.............BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT AND CURBING...................... ........................................ 8 02800.............PLANTING.............................................................................................................. ........................................ 9 02860.............SEEDING.................................................................................................................. ........................................ 7 02950.............SITE IMPROVEMENTS.................................................................................................................................. 4 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03300.............MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE........................................................................ ........................................20 TABLEOF CONTENTS........................................................................................................................................................Page PROJECT MANUAL RENOVATIONS TO COUNTRY LANE ESTATES BRIDGE ROAD NORTHAMPTON, MA Owner Architect Meadowbrook Preservation Associates, LP Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 40 Court Street 17 Hampden Street Boston, MA 02108 Springfield, MA 01 103 Phone: 617-261-9898 Phone: 413-733-6798 Landscape Architect Mechanical/Electrical Engineer Berkshire Design Group Robert Hall Engineers 4 Allen Place 540 Meadow Street Northampton, MA 01060 Agawam, MA 0 100 1 Phone: 413-582-7000 Phone: 413-789-0960 December 16, 2004 I cv COUNTRY LANE E 'ATtS RENOVATI'Ok NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS PROJECT MANUAL Aoftl Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. 17 Hampden Street Springfield, MA 01 103 December 16, 2004 Architect's Project No. 20453 '"" / U COUNTRY LANE ESTATES RENOVATION NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS PROJECT MANUAL Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. 17 Hampden Street No. 5264 Springfield, MA 01 103 gpctnpfleld, December 16, 2004 Architect's Project No. 20453